Î

GE Fanuc Automation
Programmable Control Products

Logicmaster 90 Series 90 -30/20/Micro Programming Software

t

t

User’s Manual
GFK -0466L September 1998

GFL-002

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents, temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use. In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment. This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made. GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply.

The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc. Alarm Master CIMPLICITY CIMPLICITY90-ADS CIMPLICITY PowerTRA C VersaMax CIMSTAR GEnet Genius Genius PowerTRA C Helpmate Logicmaster Modelmaster ProLoop PROMACRO Series One Series Three Series Five Series Six Series 90 VuMaster Workmaster

Copyright 1989–1998 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Preface
This manual describes the features that are used to create ladder logic user programs for Series 90tĆ30 PLCs, Series 90tĆ20 PLCs, and Series 90t Micro PLCs. These features are available with Release 9.02 of the Logicmastert 90Ć30/20/Micro programming software.

Revisions to This Manual
Release 9.02 of Logicmaster and the Release 9 CPUs include several enhancements. Refer to the following sections for information about these new features. D There are new 350 and 360 series CPUs. One of the new features most of these new models offer is communications through embedded serial communications ports. Refer to page 10Ć18 for information about configuring the ports. The 364 model CPU includes builtĆin TCP/IP Ethernet communications capabilities. Refer to pages 10Ć21 and following for information about this feature. Also, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for Series 90t PLCs manual (GFKĆ1541) for detailed information about this new CPU. There is a new function added to the instruction set: the Sequential Event Recorder (SER). There is a brief discussion of this function on page 3Ć13 of this manual and a detailed discussion in Chapter 4 of the Series 90tĆ30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual (GFKĆ0467K or later).

D

D

In addition, in our effort to improve the quality of Logicmaster documentation, there are clarifications and corrections in several places within this manual.

Content of This Manual
The information in this book is arranged as chapters that correspond to the main features of the Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software. This manual contains the following chapters: Chapter 1. Introduction: provides an overview of the features available with the Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro programming software. After you read chapter 1, refer to the chapters that describe the functions you want to use. Chapter 2. Operation: explains what you need to know to install and start up the software. It also explains the format of the software screens. Chapter 3. Program Editing: describes program entry and edit features. Chapter 4. Reference Tables: describes how to display tables of reference values, change formats in reference tables, force references, and override bitĆoriented references. Chapter 5. PLC Control and Status: describes how to control and modify the operation of a connected PLC. These features include how to change the PLC operating state,
GFKĆ0466L iii

Preface
display and access PLC privilege levels, display and clear PLC and I/O faults, display PLC and program memory usage, display configured reference sizes, and modify sweep parameters. Chapter 6. Programmer Setup: explains how to set up the programmer for communication with the PLC, and how to select the programmer operating mode. Chapter 7. Program Folders: describes how to create, select, rename, modify, copy, or delete program folders. Chapter 8. Program Utilities: describes how to use program utility functions to transfer programs and tables between the programmer and the PLC, to compare programs and data in the programmer with programs and data in the PLC, and to clear PLC memory. This chapter also describes how to transfer a program, register table, and configuration between the PLC and EEPROM (or Flash), and to compare a program, register table, or configuration in the PLC with a program, register table, or configuration in EEPROM. Chapter 9. Print Functions: describes how to use the print functions to enter printer parameters, create files containing information to be printed, and print copies of programs, reference tables, and display screens. Chapter 10. I/O Configuration: describes how to use the configuration software to configure I/O modules. Chapter 11. CPU Configuration: describes how to use the configuration software to set the operating characteristics of the CPU.

iv

Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFKĆ0466L

Preface
This manual contains the following appendices: Appendix A. Programming Lesson: provides a sample programming lesson with simple instructions for creating a program folder, creating a program, entering a variable declaration, adding ladder logic to the program, printing the program, and exiting the programmer. Appendix B. Configuration Lesson: provides a sample configuration lesson with simple instructions for creating a program folder and configuring various modules. Appendix C. Programmer Environment Setup: describes how to modify the setup parameters. Appendix D. User Command Menu: describes how to maintain a file of DOSĆexecutable commands outside of the Logicmaster software packages. Appendix E. Instruction Mnemonics: lists mnemonics that can be typed to display program instructions while searching through or editing a program. Appendix F. Key Functions: lists the special keyboard assignments used for the Logicmaster 90 software. Appendix G. Files Created with Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Software: describes the files created by Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software that are associated with the program or folder. Appendix H. Common User Errors: describes common problems which may occur and the corrective action to take. Appendix I. Variable Declaration Table Import/Export Using Comma Separated Variable (CSV) Format: describes the format and requirements you need to consider when using the importing or exporting feature for Variable Declarations.

GFKĆ0466L

Preface

v

Preface Related Publications
Series 90™Ć30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual (GFKĆ0467). Logicmaster™ 90 Series 90Ć30 and 90Ć20 Important Product Information (GFKĆ0468). Series 90™Ć30 Programmable Controller Installation Manual (GFKĆ0356). Series 90™Ć20 Programmable Controller Installation Manual (GFKĆ0551). Series 90™-30 I/O Module Specifications Manual (GFKĆ0898). Series 90™ Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User's Manual (GFK-0255). Series 90™ PCM Development Software (PCOP) User's Manual (GFKĆ0487). CIMPLICITY™ 90ĆADS Alphanumeric Display System User's Manual (GFKĆ0499). CIMPLICITY™ 90ĆADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual (GFKĆ0641). Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module Data Sheet (GFKĆ0521). Series 90™Ć30 High Speed Counter User's Manual (GFKĆ0293). Series 90™Ć30 and 90Ć20 PLC HandĆHeld Programmer User's Manual (GFKĆ0402). Power Mate APM for Series 90™Ć30 PLCāĆ āStandard Mode User's Manual (GFKĆ0840). Power Mate APM for Series 90™Ć30 PLC Ć āFollower Mode User's Manual (GFKĆ0781). Series 90™Ć30 Genius® Communications Module User's Manual (GFKĆ0412). Series 90™Ć30 Enhanced Genius® Communications Module User's Manual (GFKĆ0695). Series 90™ PLC Serial Communications User's Manual (GFK-0582). Series 90™ Programmable Controller RSĆ422/RSĆ485 to RSĆ232 Converter Data Sheet (GFK-0550). Series 90™Ć30 Genius® Bus Controller User's Manual (GFKĆ1034). Series 90™Ć70 FIP Bus Controller User's Manual (GFKĆ1038). Series 90™Ć30 FIP Remote I/O Scanner User's Manual (GFKĆ1037). Field Control™ Distributed I/O and Control System Genius® Bus Interface Unit User's Manual (GFKĆ0825). Series 90™ Micro Programmable Logic Controller User's Manual (GFKĆ1065).

vi

Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFKĆ0466L

Preface We Welcome Your Comments and Suggestions
At GE Fanuc Automation, we strive to produce quality technical documentation. After you have used this manual, please take a few moments to complete and return the Reader's Comment Card located on the next page.

David Bruton Sr. Technical Writer

GFKĆ0466L

Preface

vii

Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 1: Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What You Will Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The MSĆDOS Version Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1Ć1 1Ć1
1Ć2 1Ć3 1Ć3 1Ć3 1Ć3

Section 2: Configuration Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Memory Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Display and Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Response to Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1Ć4
1Ć4 1Ć4 1Ć4 1Ć4 1Ć4 1Ć5

Section 3: Programming Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating or Editing a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Tables of Reference Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start/Stop PLC Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Display and Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Sweep Time Display and Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC and Program Memory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Programmer Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up PLC Communications Using a WSI Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up PLC Serial Communications for Standard Serial COM Ports Program Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferring Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Programs and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1Ć6
1Ć6 1Ć7 1Ć7 1Ć7 1Ć7 1Ć8 1Ć8 1Ć8 1Ć9 1Ć9 1Ć9 1Ć10 1Ć10

Chapter 2

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 1: Hardware Setup (WSI Version) ..................

2Ć1 2Ć2
2Ć2 2Ć2 2Ć2
ix

Installing the Work Station Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GFKĆ0466L Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

Contents
Section 2: Hardware Setup (Standard Serial Communications Version) Section 3: Software Installation .......... 2Ć3 2Ć4
2Ć4 2Ć6 2Ć6 2Ć7 2Ć8 2Ć12 2Ć13

...........................

AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Logicmaster Under Windowsr 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Logicmaster Under Windows NTt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running Other Software with the CONFIG.SYS File for Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 4: Startup/Exit

...................................

2Ć16
2Ć17 2Ć18 2Ć19 2Ć21

Starting the Programming or Configuration Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exiting (Quitting) the Programming or Configuration Software . . . . . . . Programming Software Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Software Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 5: Keyboard Functions

............................

2Ć24
2Ć24 2Ć24 2Ć24 2Ć25 2Ć25 2Ć25 2Ć26

Keyboards Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard Macros (Teach Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Teach Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing Back a Teach Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pausing the Playback of a Teach Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Teach File to Run Software from an MSĆDOS Batch File . . . . . . .

Section 6: Screen Format

.................................

2Ć27
2Ć27 2Ć28 2Ć28 2Ć28 2Ć29 2Ć30

Function Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC/Programmer Status: Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Programmer Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3

Program Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 1: Ladder Logic Program Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Data Zoom Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3Ć1 3Ć2
3Ć16 3Ć16

Section 2: Program Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating or Editing Program Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of a Ladder Logic Rung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ladder Logic Language Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GFKĆ0466L Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

3Ć18
3Ć19 3Ć19 3Ć20
x

Contents
Section 3: Program Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting Logic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exiting Rung Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Cursor to Select a Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3Ć23
3Ć23 3Ć24 3Ć27 3Ć29 3Ć29

Section 4: Program Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Nicknames and Reference Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3Ć30
3Ć31

Section 5: Variable Declaration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the Variable Declaration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Variable Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying a Variable Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Variable Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Variable Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching for Variable Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Goto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cut/Pasting Variable Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatically Inserting References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing the Identifier Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing to and Exporting from the Variable Declarations Table . . . . . Comma Separated Variable (CSV) Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing SNF Formatted Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting SNF (CSV) Formatted Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3Ć33
3Ć34 3Ć36 3Ć37 3Ć39 3Ć39 3Ć39 3Ć39 3Ć39 3Ć40 3Ć40 3Ć41 3Ć41 3Ć41 3Ć43

Section 6: Rung Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting a Rung Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UserĆDefined Footers in Listings Creating Borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting a New Page of Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing a Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Longer Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3Ć46
3Ć46 3Ć47 3Ć50 3Ć51 3Ć51 3Ć51

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć48

GFKĆ0466L

Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

xi

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 3Ć64 Displaying the Lock Status of the Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . Using Goto . . . . . . . . . . Section 8: Subroutine Blocks . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 3Ć64 Periodic Subroutines . . . . . Locking/Unlocking Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .September 1998 xii . . . . . . . . . Deleting Subroutine Block Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Subroutine Block Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching for Subroutine Block Declarations . .. Executing a Periodic Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . 3Ć61 Unlocking a Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . Restrictions on Use of the Periodic Subroutine . . . . . 3Ć63 Permanently Locking a Subroutine . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . 3Ć52 3Ć57 3Ć58 3Ć58 3Ć59 3Ć59 3Ć59 3Ć59 3Ć60 Locking a Subroutine . . . 3Ć65 3Ć65 3Ć66 GFKĆ0466L Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents Section 7: Changing the Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . .. Zooming into Subroutine Block Logic . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . Editing Subroutine Block Declarations .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatically Inserting References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć69 Entering Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search by Reference Type . . . . . . . .September 1998 3Ć98 3Ć101 3Ć103 3Ć103 3Ć103 xiii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć84 Delete Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć72 Entering Nicknames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć86 Delete Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Space Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć76 3Ć76 3Ć77 3Ć78 3Ć79 3Ć80 3Ć81 3Ć82 Move Logic Right . 3Ć72 Using Vertical and Horizontal Links . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć67 3Ć69 Entering Insert or Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć72 3Ć73 Deleting an Element . . . . . . . . . . . Pasting Previously Cut Rungs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć74 Using Open Space Functions . .Contents Section 9: Rung Edit . . . . . . . . . . Coil Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Rung . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Rung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć69 Entering/Modifying Data Types . . . . . . . 3Ć83 Move Logic Down . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć88 3Ć90 Incrementing/Decrementing within a Rung . . . . . . 3Ć75 Viewing Variable Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoĆNext Highest Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implicit Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć85 Delete Row . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć89 Section 10: Editor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Continuation Coils and Contacts . . . . . Selecting Rungs . . . 3Ć71 Moving the Cursor within a Rung . . . . . . GFKĆ0466L Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć71 Entering a Reference Address . . . . 3Ć87 Increment/Decrement Reference Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć92 3Ć92 3Ć96 Section 11: Search Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing Selected Rungs to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć75 Entering an Instruction Length . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Search for a Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć74 Completing (Accepting) Rung Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Search and Replace . . Including Rungs from a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting Selected Rungs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the Cursor .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . Moving the Cursor in a Reference Table . . . . . . 3Ć104 Substitutions . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . Changing the Format of a Table . . . .. 3Ć104 Inserting or Editing Rungs (Block Edit) . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ASCII String Entry . . . . . . . . . . . Returning to Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ... . . . . Editing the Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Register Reference Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forcing a Discrete Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .September 1998 4Ć20 4Ć21 4Ć22 4Ć23 4Ć24 4Ć24 xiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 4Ć9 4Ć10 4Ć10 Section 4: Changing Display Formats .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć111 Modifying a Reference Address or Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Reference Table . . . . . . .. . . . . . 3Ć111 Forcing and Overriding Discrete References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć1 4Ć2 4Ć3 4Ć3 4Ć3 Section 2: Changing Reference Table Values . . . . . 4Ć11 4Ć11 4Ć12 4Ć13 4Ć15 4Ć15 4Ć17 4Ć18 4Ć19 Section 5: Mixed Reference Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discrete Reference Tables . Changing the Values of a Word of Discrete References . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . Displaying a Reference Table . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Cursor to Select a Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a Register Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timer/Counter Format . . . . . . . . .61 or Later CPUs) . . . . . . . . . 3Ć110 Using the Modify Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 1: Displaying Reference Tables . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć104 Block Edit (Bumpless") Run Mode Store Function (6.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. GFKĆ0466L Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć4 4Ć4 4Ć5 4Ć7 4Ć8 4Ć8 Section 3: Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . Changing the Reference Display Mode (ALTĆN) . . . . . . . . . . . Display Formats . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 3Ć114 Chapter 4 Reference Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . Timer/Counter Format . . . . . . . . 3Ć105 Modifying Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .Contents Section 12: Online Editing/Monitoring . ... . . 3Ć113 Changing Register Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Mixed Table . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of Faults in the PLC Fault Table . . . . . . .. .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .September 1998 xv . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . Changing the Privilege Level . . Section 1: Programmer Operating Mode . . . Creating. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Table Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OEM Protection .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling/Disabling Passwords . .. .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . Zooming into the PLC Fault Table . . 5Ć1 5Ć2 5Ć3 5Ć4 5Ć5 5Ć6 5Ć7 5Ć8 5Ć9 5Ć10 5Ć11 5Ć11 5Ć12 5Ć13 5Ć13 5Ć14 5Ć15 5Ć16 5Ć17 5Ć18 5Ć19 Active Constant Sweep Mode Setting . . . . . . .. . . . . PLC CPU Sweep Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Memory Used . . . Number of Faults in the I/O Fault Table . . or Removing Passwords . . . . . . . Zooming into the I/O Fault Table . . . . 6Ć1 6Ć2 6Ć2 GFKĆ0466L Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Configured Reference Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearing the Fault Table . . . . . . . . . PLC Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Fault Table . . . . . . . . . . Block Memory Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Fault Table . . . . Clearing the Fault Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Table Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run/Stop the PLC . .. . .. . . . . . . .Contents Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5Ć20 Chapter 6 Programmer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Saving the Port Setup . . . . . . ... .. . . . .. . . . MSĆDOS Memory Areas Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Port Settings . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć21 Changing the View Mode .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents Section 2: Selecting SNP Connections . . . . . . .. Displaying File Settings . . . . . Tested Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. Memory Manager Specifications . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . ... . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . Setting Up the Port . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port Requirements . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . . . ... . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . Running Logicmaster 90 Software . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . Setting Up the Computer's Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Port . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . Displaying Port Settings .. . . . . . . . .. Displaying File Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Upper Memory Block on an 80386 (Workmaster II) Or Higher Computer . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Expanded Memory on an 80386 (Workmaster II) Or Higher Computer . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . Using Video RAM on an 80386 (Workmaster II) or Higher Computer . . . . . . . . . . Using Conventional Memory on an 80386 (Workmaster II) Or Higher Computer . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .September 1998 xvi . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć22 GFKĆ0466L Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 6Ć19 6Ć20 6Ć20 6Ć20 6Ć20 Section 5: View Modes Setup (ALTĆN) . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . Communications Driver Load Order . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . TCP/IP Communications . . Port Usage Conflicts . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . Configuring Memory for the Communications Driver . .. .. . . . . Section 3: PLC Communications Serial Port Setup Standard Serial COM Port 6Ć3 6Ć4 6Ć4 6Ć5 6Ć5 6Ć6 6Ć7 6Ć8 6Ć9 6Ć10 6Ć11 6Ć11 6Ć12 6Ć12 6Ć12 6Ć13 6Ć14 6Ć15 6Ć16 6Ć16 6Ć17 6Ć18 6Ć18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . . . . Section 4: WSI Serial Port Setup . . . . . . ... .. . Requirements . . . . Using High Memory Area on an 80386 (Workmaster II) Or Higher Computer . . . . . . . . .. Saving the Port Setup . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .

. . . . .September 1998 9Ć5 9Ć5 9Ć6 xvii . . . . . . . . . . . 9Ć3 9Ć3 9Ć4 Section 2: Selecting a Screen Print Device . . . . Verifying a Program with the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Ć1 8Ć3 8Ć5 8Ć5 8Ć8 8Ć9 8Ć11 8Ć12 8Ć12 8Ć13 Chapter 9 Print Functions . . . . . . Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run Mode Store Function . . . . . . Backing Up Program Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locking/Unlocking Program Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Program Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing to PLC from Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Screen Prints to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć23 7Ć1 7Ć1 7Ć2 7Ć2 7Ć2 7Ć4 7Ć4 7Ć5 7Ć6 7Ć7 7Ć8 7Ć9 7Ć11 7Ć12 7Ć13 7Ć14 7Ć14 7Ć15 Chapter 8 Program Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Program Folder Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents Section 6: Serial Printer Setup . . . . . . . Automatic Folder Selection . . . . . . . . . Restoring Program Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Ć1 9Ć2 Section 1: Printer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Program Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Reference Tables from the PLC to Save in the Computer Folder . . . Copying to a Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Setup Printer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Previously Created Folder with a New 351 or 352 (or Later) Configuration . . GFKĆ0466L Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . . . Special Considerations for Clearing Reference Overrides . . . . . . . . . . Printer Parameters . . . . . . . . Sending Screens to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear Reference Override Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoĆSelect Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting/Creating Program Folders . . . Clearing Program Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying to Another Folder on the Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program Folder Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read/Write/Verify EEPROM/Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearing PLC Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading from PLC to Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming Program Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TEMP Program Folder . . . . Chapter 7 Program Folders . . .

. . . . . . . . .. . . . . Section 1: Default Configuration .. . . . . and 363 CPUs Memory Protection Configuration for 350 and Higher CPUs . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . . . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . .. . . . ... . . . . . .. . . . . ... . . . . Saving the Configuration to Disk . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. Copying Configuration from Slot to Slot . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . Replacing the Module with Another of the Same Type .. .. .. . . . . . .. . .. . . . .. .. . . . . . 10Ć31 10Ć33 xviii I/O Base Selection for the CPU 211 . . . . . .. . .. . UserĆConfigurable Memory Limits for 351 and Higher CPUs . Ethernet Parameters for the 364 CPU . .. .. . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . ... . . . . . . .... . . . Section 2: Displaying the I/O Configuration Rack Screen Configuration Validation . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . ... . . . . . . . Section 3: Configuring the CPU . .. .. . . . .. Section 7: Print Function Examples . . .. . ..Contents Section 3: Print Program . Section 5: Print Coil References Section 6: Print Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . TCP/IP Ethernet Configuration on 364 CPUs . . .. . . Cross References .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. ... . . . . . . . . . . . 9Ć21 10Ć1 10Ć2 10Ć4 10Ć6 10Ć6 10Ć7 10Ć7 10Ć7 10Ć7 10Ć8 10Ć8 Chapter 10 I/O Configuration . . . .. .. . . . .. . . . ... . .. . . .. .... .. . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . . Selecting an Expansion Rack .. .September 1998 . . . . . . 9Ć7 9Ć8 9Ć9 9Ć10 Section 4: Print Reference Tables .. . .. . . .. ... . . .. . .. .. . . . . . . . . Print Program Parameters . .. . . . . . . . . . ... . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . .. . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . ... . . Run/Stop Switch Configuration (350 and higher CPUs) Port Configuration for 351. . . Shortcuts for Printing Program Logic . . . .. . . . . Replacing the Module with One of a Different Type . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... .. ... ..... . . . 352. . . 10Ć9 10Ć13 10Ć17 10Ć18 10Ć18 10Ć21 10Ć21 10Ć24 Selecting a Different CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . .. .. . .. .. Changing the Configuration of a Slot . .. .. . GFKĆ0466L Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . .. . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . ... . . .. . . . . . .... .. Moving a Module to Another Slot . . .. ... . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . ... ..... . . . . . . . Section 5: Configuring the Model 211 CPU . .. . . ... ... .. . . . .. . ... . ... ... . . . . Section 4: Selecting the Base Rack . .. . Pagination Guidelines . . ... . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. 9Ć14 9Ć16 9Ć18 9Ć19 9Ć20 Accessing the Print Configuration Screen . . . .. . . .. Deleting the Configuration of a Module . ... .... .. .. ... .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . .. . . . . .. ... .. . .. . . .. . . . . . . . 10Ć26 10Ć29 10Ć29 Base Rack Power Supply .. . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. ..

. . . . . . . . . . . . Section 12: Configuring a Motion Product (Formerly Configuring an APM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCM/RTU Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. Selecting the Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNP/CCM Mode .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . CCM/SNP Mode . . . Section 7: Configuring 90Ć30 I/O Modules . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . BAS/CCM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNP ONLY Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring an I/O Link Master Module . . . . .. . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . Section 8: Configuring an HSC or Embedded HSC Section 9: Configuring a PCM Module .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . CCM/PROG Mode . CCM ONLY Mode . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . RTU/CCM Mode . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . Configuration Rules and Miscellaneous Information . .September 1998 10Ć73 10Ć74 xix . . . . . . . . . . PROG/CCM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCM ONLY Mode . . . . . . . Configuring a Single Axis Motion Mate APM . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Ć45 10Ć47 10Ć48 10Ć49 Configuring Generic I/O Modules . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents Section 6: Configuring a Micro PLC . . . PCM CFG Mode .. . . . 10Ć36 10Ć42 10Ć43 10Ć44 Expansion Units for the Micro PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. PROG PRT Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring an I/O Link Interface Module . . .. . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . .. . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . GFKĆ0466L Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual .. . . . ... . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BASIC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . RTU/SNP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Micro PLC Memory Configuration Limits . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . RTU ONLY Mode .. . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Ć63 10Ć63 Configuring a TCP/IP Ethernet Module . . . .. . . . . . . . . . SNP/RTU Mode . . . . . . . .. 10Ć57 10Ć58 10Ć59 10Ć59 10Ć60 10Ć61 10Ć62 10Ć62 10Ć62 10Ć62 Configuring a PCM .. . . . . . . . . . 10Ć67 10Ć67 10Ć68 10Ć69 10Ć70 10Ć70 10Ć70 10Ć71 10Ć72 10Ć72 10Ć72 10Ć72 Configuring a CMM . . . . . . .. . Selecting the Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 10Ć50 10Ć56 Configuring the Embedded HSC for a CPU 211 . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . .. . . . . . . . Section 10: Configuring a TCP/IP Ethernet Module Section 11: Configuring a CMM Module . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . .

. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . Creating a Subroutine Block . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . Chapter 11 CPU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . .. .. . . . . . 11Ć1 11Ć1 11Ć2 11Ć3 11Ć4 11Ć4 11Ć5 11Ć5 Appendix A Programming Lesson . . Section 15: Configuring a Genius Bus Controller . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . .. . . Storing the CPU Configuration to the PLC .. . .. .. . . . PLC Date and Time . . Analog Combo Configuration Parameters . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . ... .. . . . . . . . . . Printing the Program . . . . . . . . Changing the PLC Date and Time . . . . . . .. . 10Ć82 10Ć83 10Ć85 Section 14: Configuring a GCM or Enhanced GCM . .. . . . ... . . . . . . . . Entering a Variable Declaration .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . ... . . . SNP ID . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 10Ć99 10Ć101 10Ć102 10Ć103 10Ć103 10Ć104 10Ć105 . . .. Creating a Program .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . Exiting the Programmer . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . Adding Ladder Logic to the Program . . .. . . 10Ć88 10Ć90 10Ć92 Section 16: Configuring a High Density Analog Output Module Other Configuration Considerations . . .. . ... . .. .. . . . . 10Ć94 10Ć95 10Ć96 Other Configuration Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .September 1998 AĆ1 AĆ1 AĆ1 AĆ1 AĆ2 AĆ4 AĆ5 AĆ7 AĆ16 AĆ23 AĆ24 xx . . Starting the Lesson . .. . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . GFKĆ0466L Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . .. Changing the SNP ID Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . Section 18: Configuring a ThirdĆParty Module Section 19: Configuration Reference View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . ... . .. .. .. Overlapping References . . . . . . . . .. Creating a Program Folder . . .. . . PLC Memory Limits . . .. . .. . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . Ending the Lesson . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced Genius Communications Module . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . . . . Configurable Memory .Contents Section 13: Configuring an ADC Module . .. .. .. . .. Help Screens . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 17: Configuring an Analog Combo Module . Displaying the Reference View Table . .. . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . Displaying the Rack Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . Displaying the Detail Screen . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a Genius Communications Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Serial COM Port Installed . . . . . . . . . . DĆ1 EĆ1 FĆ1 FĆ1 FĆ2 FĆ3 Appendix G Files Created with Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Files in the Program Folder . . . . Standard Serial COM Port and Driver Memory Area . . . Saving the Programmer Environment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix F User Command Menu . . . . PLC CommunicationsāĊ āWSI Version with NonĆConfigurable Interrupt Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the Rack Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross Reference Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a COMENU. . . . . . . Files in the Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Home Directory . . . . . . . . . Completing the Disk Drive Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GFKĆ0466L Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . . . . . Selecting Terminal and Printer Options . . . . . Creating a Program Folder . . Appendix E Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Palette Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents Appendix B Configuration Lesson for the Series 90Ć30 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DAT file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CĆ1 CĆ1 CĆ3 CĆ4 CĆ5 CĆ6 CĆ6 CĆ6 CĆ7 CĆ8 CĆ9 CĆ9 Appendix D Instruction Mnemonics . . . . . . Displaying the Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BĆ1 BĆ1 BĆ1 BĆ2 BĆ4 BĆ5 BĆ7 BĆ10 BĆ11 Appendix C Programmer Environment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ending the Lesson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a 90Ć30 I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .September 1998 GĆ1 GĆ2 GĆ4 GĆ4 xxi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC CommunicationsāĊ āWSI Version with Configurable Interrupt Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the Lesson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Communications Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing the User Command Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Communications OptionsĊā Both WSI and Serial COM Port Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example Comenu Definition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . Trouble Communicating with the Series 90Ć30 or Series 90Ć20 PLC Error Message: Error Detected in WSI Board Port" Error Message: Error Loading Code into WSI Board" . . . . . . . . Error Message: "Invalid CPU" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Software Error ID: 0000 EX: 0000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Busy Message Displayed After Load . . . . . Comma Separated Variable (CSV) Format and SNF Format . Header Section Rules . . Field Names Section Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Header Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents Appendix H Common User Errors . . . Error Message: Constant Out of Range" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Message: Port/File Access Denied" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Field Names Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General SNF Format Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Message: Error Detected in WSI Board" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Message: File System Error" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IĆ1 IĆ1 IĆ1 IĆ2 IĆ2 IĆ3 IĆ3 IĆ4 GFKĆ0466L Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . Error Message: "No Communications" . . . . . Error Message: Read/Write PLC Initialization Aborted" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Install the Software . . . . . . . . . . Data Section Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Message: Comm Driver Not Loaded" . . . HĆ1 HĆ1 HĆ1 HĆ1 HĆ1 HĆ2 HĆ2 HĆ2 HĆ2 HĆ3 HĆ3 HĆ3 HĆ3 HĆ4 Appendix I Variable Declaration Table Import/Export Using Comma Separated Variable (CSV) Format . . .September 1998 xxii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printer Output is Garbled . . . . . . .

Series 90-20 PLCs. letter level 1:A. roman level 1: I. reset table_big level 1. a:ebx. Chapter 1 Introduction 1 Section 1: Product Overview Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software is part of a family of products used to configure and program the full line of Series 90-30. 3. III. Configuration is the process of assigning logical addresses. 3. reset figure level 1. COM3. however.C. num level 1: 1. II. these restarts oddbox reset: 1evenbox reset: 1must be in the header frame of chapter 1. num_in level 1: 1. the WSI version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software refers to using a Work Station Interface Board in the programmer to provide serial communication between the programmer and the attached PLC. reset1 c:bigbx level 1 reset1 c:ftr level 1 reset1 Reminders for autonumbers that need to be restarted manually (first instance will always be 4) let_in level 1: A. l 1 reset1 c:obx:l 1.restart lowapp ARestart oddapp: ARestarts for autonumbers that do not restart in each chapter.B. reset table_ap level 1. rom_in level 1: I. reset1 Lowapp Alwbox restart evenap:A1app_big level 1. using the configuration software. or COM4 instead of the Work Station Interface Board. to the hardware modules in the system. steps level 1: 1. reset chap_big level 1. it is recommended that configuration be done first. as well as other characteristics. C. 2. and Micro programmable controllers. 3. COM2. It may be done either before or after programming. figure bi level 1. resetA a:bigbx level 1 resetA a:ftr level 1 resetA c:ebx. Programming consists of creating an application program for a PLC. reset table level 1. reset Table 1. Series 90-20. Because Series 90-30 PLCs. all can be programmed using this software. II. and Micro PLCs have a common instruction set. B. resetA figure_ap level 1. Note In this manual. The standard serial communications version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software refers to using ports COM1. III. 2. l 1 resetA a:obx:l 1. GFK-0466L 1-1 . 2.

1 What You Will Need To run Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software.2 or higher) for optimum performance.480 bytes) of available DOS application memory in order to run. The Standard Serial COM Port version requires either a minimum of 564 KB (577. or h A personal computer with an Intel 80386 or higher processor and a minimum of 2 Megabytes of memory. or 520 KB (532.480 bytes) of available DOS application memory and 42 KB of available High Memory Area. 1-2 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . see chapter 2. or h A Zenith™ Mastersport™ SL notebook computer. ™ ® Zenith and Mastersport are trademarks of Zenith Data Systems Corporation. Upper Memory Block or Expanded Memory for the COM port driver (see page 6-6 and following for details about the Standard Serial COM Port version and memory management). MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.SYS files to make more memory available. you will need: D A computer with a hard disk: h A Workmaster® II industrial computer with a 101-key keyboard. Both the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro Release 5 WSI and the Standard Serial COM Port versions require a minimum of 520 KB (532. If additional DOS application memory (also called “low memory”) is needed. Both versions require a minimum 1024 KBofLotus/Intel/MicrosoftExpanded Memory (LIM EMS 3. D D At least 4 Megabytes of free disk space.BAT and CONFIG. of this manual. For additional information. system software error ID: 0000 EX: 0000 will occur. Remove any unneeded TSR (Terminate and Stay Resident) programs and any unnecessary device drivers from the AUTOEXEC. section 3.536 bytes) of available DOS application memory.

This information may also be displayed on the programmer screen by pressing ALT-K to access key help. or ALT-K for key help. When you are ready to begin. press ALT-H for help. and read the status information on your screen. Appendix E also contains a perforated Help card which can be removed from this manual. Help Screens Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software includes detailed Help screens. Before You Begin You will find Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software easy to use and to understand. It will tell you: D D D D How to install the software in your computer. Consult your MS-DOS User’s Manual for information on configuring for your country. To access the Help screens.0 (or higher) must be installed on your computer. How to start up the software. After starting up the software. move the cursor.1 The MS-DOS Version Needed To run Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. depending on the configuration of MS-DOS residing on the host computer. ALT-I for instruction mnemonic help. monitor a system. “Key Functions. When you are ready to use the programming software to create a program. How to use your computer’s keyboard to perform special programming functions. you will find instructions in other chapters of this book. try the short programming lesson in appendix A and the configuration lesson in appendix B. Key Functions Appendix E. GFK-0466L Chapter 1 Introduction 1-3 . turn to chapter 2.” lists the keyboard functions that are active in the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software environment. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software provides foreign keyboard support. How to enter data. MS-DOS® Version 5. These Help screens are loaded onto the hard disk of your programmer during the software installation procedure and are readily accessible. or perform any of its other functions.

PLC Memory Allocation You can display the current memory allocated to both discrete references and register references. These settings can be displayed and changed using the CPU configuration function in Model 331 or higher CPUs. 313. 323. Faults can be cleared from the fault table display. A time-of-day clock is not available in CPU Models 321. 313. Fatal faults cause the CPU to set fault references and then go to STOP mode. Section 3 of chapter 10 explains how to complete the CPU configuration for your system. the PLC must be able to respond appropriately to certain types of faults. This will set up or change the system features described below. 323. 211. nor in Micro CPUs Models 004 and lower. and location. and Micro CPUs Models 004 and lower do not support a time-of-day clock. PLC ID. it displays faults that are stored in the PLC fault table. Entries for CPU date and time are displayed as 00-00 00:00:00 in the fault tables. 311. and time of day). 211. System Response to Faults To assure safe operation of the control system. Note CPU Models 321. but the PLC keeps operating. Fault Display and Clearing When the programmer is monitoring a PLC. date. 311. PLC Time and Date The PLC maintains the current time and date. All faults are identified by time.1 Section 2: Configuration Software CPU Configuration Configuration software is used to display and modify the characteristics of the CPU (such as memory allocation. Diagnostic faults cause the CPU to set fault references. 1-4 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .

such as the counter type for a High Speed Counter Module. move. you will: 1. These logical addresses are independent of physical location or function. you may also select options. Use the Next and Previous page keys. to assign logical addresses. this address may be changed. 2. The I/O configuration rack screen represents the appearance of the Series 90-30 I/O rack. Select the module present in each slot. to display another rack. delete. For some modules. or undelete configurations. To complete the I/O configuration. and select options for individual modules. 3. Then use the Left and Right cursor keys to move the cursor to the slot to be displayed or configured. however. Editing features make it easy to copy. The configuration software automatically supplies the next highest reference address for each module. Assign each module a reference address. Chapter 10 explains how to complete the I/O configuration for your system.1 I/O Configuration The I/O configuration function is used to describe the modules that are present in the PLC racks. or the Up and Down cursor keys. GFK-0466L Chapter 1 Introduction 1-5 . replace.

place the cursor on the [ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] marker and press Insert (F1). This table lists all blocks which are part of the complete program. known as subroutines. Blocks do not have block declaration tables. When that is done.” describes how to create and edit programs. The main block has a block declaration table.1 Section 3: Programming Software Creating or Editing a Program Chapter. Start/End of ProgramLogic 1-6 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . “Program Editing. To enter logic. blocks can be called from the main block or from any block in the program. However. blocks must be declared before they are called. All logic is placed between these two markers. A program can include more than one block of logic. move the cursor to this marker and press Zoom (F10). The basic elements of a program are shown when the programming screen is first selected: Marker Variable Declarations Block Declarations Description To access the variable declaration table. Nicknames and reference descriptions can then be entered in the table. can be called from other blocks. Additional blocks.

Chapter 3. All faults are identified by time. Faults from the I/O system are listed in the I/O fault table. and rung comments) are supported by Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. any faults that have occurred are displayed in one of two fault tables. Faults can be cleared from the fault table displays. There are separate tables for each type of program reference.” describes how annotation can be added to a program to make the program easier to read and understand. See whether or not CONSTANT SWEEP TIME mode is enabled. This timer is used to shut down the CPU if the sweep time is too long. communications windows. date. and read its setting. “PLC Control and Status. and location. all discrete outputs (%Q). delete. they are from the current folder. and all registers (%R). “PLC Control and Status. select. section 4. Three types of annotation (nicknames. PLC faults are listed in the PLC fault table. search and goto functions are provided to position the cursor on a particular rung or element. You can also return a standard reference table to its default format and fill the table locations with zero. “PLC Control and Status. refer to chapter 5. cut. include. refer to chapter 5. An optional feature of the search function is the replacement of the search target with a user-specified element and/or reference address.” explains how to use the programming software to: D D D D Display the current CPU sweep time. “Reference Tables. or by pressing ALT-R from any screen.1 Editing functions include rung insert/edit. This is the amount of time required for one complete cycle of program execution. I/O scan. there are 99 user-defined tables called mixed reference tables. Displaying Tables of Reference Values Chapter 4.” PLC Sweep Time Display and Change Chapter 5. If the programmer is connected to a PLC and in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. 1-7 GFK-0466L Chapter 1 Introduction . the values shown in the table are from the PLC. Display the time period of the watchdog timer. In OFFLINE mode. all discrete inputs (%I). paste. “Program Annotation. reference descriptions. In addition.” Fault Display and Clearing When the programmer computer is monitoring an operating PLC system. In addition. For more information. The format of individual items or an entire reference table can easily be changed to units that are suitable to your application. Display the times currently allocated for the programmer window and the system communications window. Start/Stop PLC Execution PLC program execution is started or stopped from the Run/Stop PLC screen. for example.” explains how to use the reference tables feature to display the current values of program references. Additional information about each fault can be displayed by positioning the cursor on the fault in the fault table and pressing the Zoom (F10) softkey. For information about the PLC and I/O fault tables. and other functions. and write.

Their purpose is to provide different levels of access privilege for the PLC when the programmer is in ONLINE mode. when the programmer is in OFFLINE mode. section 8. mode selection can be made by: D D Pressing the ALT and M keys simultaneously. For those computers without a keyswitch. and annotation. For more information on using the Programmer Setup screen to select the operating mode. Passwords may be used to restrict changing I/O and PLC configuration data. Chapter 3. A selectable operating mode. A software lock that can be applied to individual subroutine blocks. declarations. and clearing faults. or the password access (privilege) level may not be changed. and Micro PLC. data. MONITOR. “Subroutine Blocks. “PLC Control and Status. with or without the computer connected to a PLC. changing programs. In MONITOR mode. you may configure the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software to use the keyswitch to select the operating mode. Chapter 5.” System Security Security for configuration and program functions consists of: D D D D A range of four privilege levels for the PLC. no data transfer takes place between the computer and the PLC. A software lock that can be applied to individual program folders. and ONLINE. Memory used for configured program references. Selecting the Programmer Operating Mode Both the programmer and the configuration software operate in three modes: OFFLINE. Passwords may not be set. which may be protected using passwords.1 PLC and Program Memory Information Chapter 5.” describes how individual subroutine blocks may be locked and unlocked. refer to chapter 6. the computer can read data from the PLC but may not transfer data to it. In OFFLINE mode. Passwords are a configurable feature of the Series 90-30. Repeatedly pressing ALT-M switches the operating mode from OFFLINE to MONITOR to ONLINE and then back to OFFLINE. Program memory used for logic. Programs and configuration data may conveniently be developed in OFFLINE mode. With communications established in ONLINE mode. 1-8 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . if communications have been established between the computer and the PLC. PLC memory used and available. If you are using a Workmaster or CIMSTAR I industrial computer. programs and other data can be transferred between the PLC and the computer. or if the keyswitch is not enabled.” also explains how to display information about: D D D D PLC memory size. “Programmer Setup. 90-20. The use of passwords is optional and may be set up using the status functions in the configurator.” describes the programmer’s privilege levels and explains how to enter passwords. Going to the Programmer Setup screen (Shift-F7) and selecting an operating mode. Chapter 5 also describes how passwords are specified. “PLC Control and Status.

COM3. and to save or recall those configurations from disk files.” for instructions on PLC communications serial port setup. For more information on locking program folders. Both the configuration software and the programming software use a set of program utility functions to create and maintain program folders. Delete an unneeded program folder. see chapter 7. COM3. Setting Up PLC Serial Communications for Standard Serial COM Ports For the standard serial communications version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. Program Folders Each program and the corresponding configuration is assigned to a subdirectory called a program folder. The COMSET serial port setup is used to configure the COM1. “Program Folders. The COMSET serial port setup function is used to configure the WSI serial port. Make a backup copy of the current program folder. Create a new program folder. They can also be copied using Logicmaster folder utilities to floppy disks for portability or for independent storage. “Programmer Setup. COM2. Restore a program folder with its backup copy. After a folder is locked. Application programs and related files can be stored on the same hard disk as the software. the serial port on the Work Station Interface (WSI) Board in the programmer provides serial communication between the programmer and the attached PLC. COM2. Clear the contents of the current program folder. Refer to chapter 6. Chapter 7.” explains how to use the program folder functions to: D D D D D D D D D Select another program folder. the COM1. GFK-0466L Chapter 1 Introduction 1-9 .1 Program folders can be protected to prevent accidental changes to program and configuration information. Each program folder can be either “locked” or “unlocked”.” for instructions on WSI serial port setup. “Programmer Setup. Lock/unlock a program folder. Rename a program folder. Refer to chapter 6. its contents cannot be changed or deleted.” Setting Up PLC Communications Using a WSI Board For the WSI version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. or COM4 serial port. or COM4 serial port may be set up to provide serial communications between the programmer and the attached PLC. Copy the contents of one program folder into the current program folder. and to save or recall those configurations from disk files. “Program Folders.

section 5. Compare a program or configuration in the PLC with the current folder to determine if they are the same. “Print Configuration.” for information about printing configuration screens. or configuration in the PLC with EEPROM. Compare a program. In addition. register (%R) table. “Program Utilities. described in chapter 8. You can also print copies of your system configuration by using the print function in the configuration software. you can print cross references for the references used in the program. and configuration between the PLC and EEPROM.1 Transferring Programs The program utility functions. Clear part or all of the program and/or configuration from PLC memory. 1-10 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Printing Programs and Configuration The programming software includes a complete set of print functions. Refer to chapter 9. register (%R) table.” are used to: D D D D D Transfer programs and configuration between the PLC and the programmer. You can select the contents and format of the printout. Transfer a program.

Chapter 2 contains the following sections: Section 1 Title Hardware Setup (WSI Version) Hardware Setup (Standard Serial CommunicationsVersion) SoftwareInstallation Description Describes the two Work Station Interface Boards which are available. Describes the serial card which must be installed in your computer in order to use the standard serial communications version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. Shows the format of the display screen and describes the information that appears. It also explains keyboard use and content of the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Microsoftwarescreens. Explains how to install the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming and configuration software on your computer ’s hard disk. Describes keyboard functions in the Logicmaster90-30/20/Microsoftwareenvironment.Chapter 2 Operation section level 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1 2 This chapter explains what you will need to know to install and start up the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. Section 1 also provides information on grounding and cabling. Page 2-2 2 2-3 3 2-4 4 5 Startup/Exit Keyboard Functions 2-16 2-24 6 Screen Format 2-27 GFK-0466L 2-1 . Describes how to start up Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software.

the WSI Board is installed at the factory. connect the computer to the PLC by first attaching the cable to the Work Station Interface Board and then to the port on the rack power supply. When a Workmaster II computer is ordered as the programming device. possible erratic operation may cause conditions which are hazardous to personnel and equipment. Warning If the programmer is not connected as described above. and the other is for a PS/2-type computer. There are two Work Station Interface Boards available. After installing the Work Station Interface Board in your computer. one is for an AT-type computer. For installation instructions on other programming devices. Cabling The communications cable that connects the computer to the PLC is a shielded twisted pair cable with a 3-pin D connector on each end. The maximum length for this cable is 50 feet.2 Section 1: Hardware Setup (WSI Version) Installing the Work Station Interface Board The Work Station Interface (WSI) Board provides a high-performance serial interface between a Series 90-30 or Series 90-20 PLC and the programmer for the WSI version of Logicmaster90-30/20/Microsoftware. If the programmer is online to an operating system. Grounding Be sure the computer has a ground connection in common with the CPU rack. This is usually done by connecting the programmer computer to the same power source (with the same ground reference point) as the rack. 2-2 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . The WSI Board is included as part of a package with Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software. consult the computer manufacturer’s instructions for option boards. Erratic control operation may also result. damage to the Work Station Interface Board can occur.

or GFK-0551. COM2. or COM4 must be installed in the computer in order to communicate with the PLC. a serial card with COM1. without having a Work Station Interface Board installed in the computer. GFK-0466L Chapter 2 Operation 2-3 . or Micro PLC serial port and the serial port on the programming computer. for instructions on establishing a serial connection between the Series 90-30. Refer to GFK-0356. Series 90-30 Programmable Controller User’s Manual. Series 90-20. COM3.2 Section 2: Hardware Setup (Standard Serial Communications Version) If you have the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro version of software which communicates with the PLC using the standard serial communication ports. Series 90-20 Programmable Controller User’s Manual.

MS-DOS Version 5.) D The WSI version of Logicmaster 90-70 software requires a minimum of 520 KB (532.SYS Files Before starting to install Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software.SYS file.SYS (System Configuration) file is a short. If you prefer. they are installed automatically. system software error ID: 0000 EX: 0000 will occur. Different software packages may use different system configurations. The Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro installation procedure creates three subdirectories on the hard disk: Software Version WSI Subdirectories Created \LM90 \LM90\P30 \LM90\C30 \LM90 \LM90\P30S \LM90\C30S Standardserial communications AUTOEXEC. Operation of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software requires these files to be present.BA T and CONFIG. If additional DOS application memory (also called “low memory” or “conventional memory”) is needed. minimum is 15. readable file that describes the configuration of MS-DOS. you can edit your existing files for use with Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. The CONFIG.480 bytes) of available DOS application memory and 42 KB of available High Memory Area. For all Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro applications. (Recommended buffer size is 40. you may be asked during installation whether the install process should modify them. the file must contain at least these two lines: Files = 20 Buffers = 40 If you want to check the content of an existing CONFIG. Upper Memory Block or Expanded Memory for the COM port driver (see page 6-6 and following for details about the Standard Serial COM Port version and memory management). If they are not.2 Section 3: Software Installation To use Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. Both versions require a minimum 1024 KBofLotus/Intel/MicrosoftExpanded Memory (LIM EMS 3.0 or higher must already exist on the hard disk.536 bytes) of available DOS application memory.480) bytes of available MS-DOS application memory in order to run.SYS and AUTOEXEC. The Standard Serial COM Port version requires either a minimum of 564 KB (577. or 520 KB (532. Remove any unneeded 2-4 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . you can use the TYPE command.BAT are present. If your hard disk already has these two files. check the content of your hard disk root directory to see whether the files CONFIG. it must be installed on the programmer computer ’s hard disk.2 or higher) for optimum performance.

g. If additional memory is required. e.) t t t t In addition.2 TSR (Terminate and Stay Resident) programs and any unnecessary device drivers from the AUTOEXEC. (See IPI GFK-0350 which comes with this Logicmaster release for examples of tested configurations using QEMM and 386MAX .. GFK-0466L Chapter 2 Operation 2-5 .UMB DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.BAT file must have (drive ID):\LM90 added to the existing path. system software error ID: 0000 EX: 0000 will be displayed.SYS files to remove any device drivers and Terminate and Stay Resident (TSR) programs in order to free more RAM. t QEMM-386 and QRAM are trademarks of Quarterdeck Office Systems. Check the AUTOEXEC. however. To prevent this error. If you have over 537 MB of free hard disk space and you have the statementDEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386. the “EMM386.EXE 1024 RAM X=CE00–CFFF FILES=20 BUFFERS=40 Note The above EMM386.BAT and CONFIG.SYS.EXE 1024 RAM” specification enhances performance and may be necessary if you have over 537 MB of free hard disk space (see next paragraph below).SYS.EXENOEMS in your CONFIG.EXE 1024 RAM.SYS files to make more memory available. Inc.0) CONFIG. The following configurations will assist you in setting up your computer system to run Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software optimally on 386/486 computers with a minimum of 2 MB RAM. such as QEMM or 386MAX .SYS DOS=HIGH . If you need to run Version 4.SYS device driver. this precaution may not be necessary. you will receive the following error: (00032) An unknown error occurred during install initialization.SYS Configuration DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM. The AUTOEXEC.BAT file: SET $PLCROOT=(drive ID):\LM90 t 386MAX is a trademark of Qualitas. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software does not require the ANSI.EXE switch “X=CE00–CFFF ” is used to reserve this area of memory for the Series 90-30/20/Micro WSI card. If you are using a commercial memory manager. the special precautions discussed below are unnecessary. add this to your AUTOEXEC. DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.01 or later of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software from a disk that does not contain the software. some folders may require additional memory. from occurring. the “X= CE00– CFFF” is not required.BAT and CONFIG. If you have less than 537 MB of free hard disk space. (drive ID) is the letter which corresponds to the hard disk drive where Logicmaster 90-30/20/Microsoftwareisinstalled. LM90-30/20/Micro Software (Standard MS-DOS Version 5. you must specify Expanded Memory in your CONFIG. If the computer does not have a WSI card.

but you cannot install it without rebooting into DOS mode. then type INSTALL. it consumes less of the system resources. From the Shut Down dialog box. If you do not have MS-DOS on your NT system. easily handling the multitasking attributes of the Windows NT or Windows 95 operating system. press Enter. refer also to the IPI accompanying the software disks for additional information about installing Logicmaster. Configure your CONFIG.2 Installing Logicmaster Under Windowsr 95/98 You can run Logicmaster under Windows 95 or 98. At the DOS prompt. You must shut down the Windows 95/98 operating system and restart the computer in DOS mode before running the Logicmaster 90 Install program for both Logicmaster and SFC. Then follow the steps shown above for Windows 95/98 beginning with the third step. 2-6 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Proceed with the standard installation. you can temporarily reboot from a floppy drive with an MS-DOS system disk if your NT system uses FAT-based file system. Although Windows 95 and Windows 98 support most standard DOS programs. There is a new version of Logicmaster (IC641SWP316) that was specifically designed as a DOS application that installs and works under Windows NT and Windows 95. the Logicmaster distribution diskettes contain a copy protection track that cannot be read using normal DOS file services. restart your computer and select the option that takes you into standard DOS mode. or Windows NT. Note Logicmaster 90-30 TCP/IP Ethernet for DOS (IC641SWP313) cannot be run from a DOS window under Windowsr.BAT files as discussed previously. For the other versions of Logicmaster. Windows 95/98. To do so. This new version provides SNP or TCP/IP Ethernet communications to Series 90-70 PLCs and uses standard TCP/IP Windows drivers to provide maximum compatibility in a network environment. Follow these steps for a successful installation. As a program designed for Windows NT and Windows 95. D D D D D D Click the Windows 95/98 Start button and select Shut Down. select the “Restart the computer in MS-DOS mode” option and press Enter. but you cannot install it without going into DOS mode. Restart your computer. insert the first Logicmaster distribution diskette and type A: (or B:).SYS and AUTOEXEC. Installing Logicmaster Under Windows NTt You can run Logicmaster under Windows NT.

MS-DOS version 6 or later also includes the MEMMAKER command to optimize upper memory usage. which terminate and stay resident.SYS file with different file names. it may be removed in order to obtain more memory. Run it selecting Custom mode and select YES for options adding Upper Memory. you must maintain multiple versions of the CONFIG. In that case. or if you are using MS-DOS version 6 or higher.sys—see your DOS manual for information on this feature.SYS device driver.2 Running Other Software with the CONFIG. The MS-DOS CHKDSK command may be used to determine available memory (bytes free). Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software does not require the ANSI.SYS File for Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro Software Other types of software may require different entries in the CONFIG. GFK-0466L Chapter 2 Operation 2-7 . these programs may need to be removed before installing and running the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. Note For MS-DOS version 6.0 or later.SYS file. you can create multiple boot options within one config. If you have loaded device drivers for special devices or a local area network. Your MS-DOS manual contains other information about the CONFIG. use the MEM /C /P command to display a list of all programs in memory and whether they are loaded in Conventional or Upper Memory.SYS file.SYS file that may be useful to you. It is not always possible to combine the requirements for multiple software packages in one CONFIG.

Boot up the computer using MS-DOS. Be sure CONFIG. For example. Note If you are using Windows 95/98 or Windows NT as your operating system. the target sector was not found” or “[+2553] Not Original Master Diskette” or a similar message will be displayed. Insert the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software disk into the computer’s disk drive. The following screen is displayed.e. type A: and press the Enter key. an “ERROR: Disk Error. Remove the write-protect tab from the disk. 5.. enter the designation of the disk drive followed by a colon.2 Installation Instructions 1. 6. 2. FILES=20. 3. if the disk is in drive A.SYS has files set to at least 20. At the MS-DOS prompt. 2-8 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . 4. Other wise. you must restart your computer in (16-bit) DOS mode. Begin the installation procedure by typing INSTALL and pressing the Enter key. i.

press: Y (Yes). If any fields are empty or invalid when the Enter key is pressed. You may print this screen by pressing the Print Screen key. GFK-0466L Chapter 2 Operation 2-9 . The system will prompt you to confirm that the registration information is correct as displayed. Each field is validated as you move off the field. Specify the hard disk drive and press the Enter key. 8. The data is then encoded and written onto the master distribution disk. or just press the Enter key if the default is correct. When the registration data is correct. the first invalid field is highlighted and an error message is displayed. If the registration data is not correct. You must fill in all of the fields and press the Enter key in order for the installation process to continue.2 7. or until the installation program is aborted by pressing the Escape key. Note The Serial Number field must contain the serial number from your registration card or the back of the distribution disks. This screen is displayed until the registration data is successfully written to the master disk. The following screen is displayed if this is the first installation of this disk. press: N (No) and correct the registration information. Use the cursor keys to move between fields.

the installation process can begin. This information is displayed each time an installation is performed.2 9. (Registration is not required once the data is written to the master disk. Press the Escape (ESC) key to terminate INSTALL and return to MS-DOS.) Read the licensing agreement. Pressing the Enter key after reading this screen means you agree to comply with the stated terms. or on future Logicmaster installations of the same software package. When the registration data is successfully written to the master disk. The following screen is displayed after the registration data has been entered. 2-10 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .

they are both created. enter N (No). respectively. If you already have AUTOEXEC. they will be renamed to AUTOEXEC. These files must contain certain commands to ensure that Logicmaster90-30/20/Microsoftwareexecutes properly. If there were already versions of those files in the root directory. If you want the AUTOEXEC. INSTALL checks the files AUTOEXEC.2 10.SYS files and plan to edit them yourself.BAT and/or CONFIG.SYS files to be automatically modified.SYS in the root directory of the hard disk. If neither file exists. enter Y (Yes) or press the Enter key. If either file already exists. The following screen is displayed: GFK-0466L Chapter 2 Operation 2-11 .BAT and CONFIG.L90. First. INSTALL will ask if the files should be automatically modified.L90 and CONFIG.BAT and CONFIG. the Installation procedure creates the \LM90 directory in the root directory.

If you change your mind and want INSTALL to automatically update the AUTOEXEC. any files in them are deleted and the new files installed. The computer must now be re-booted in order to complete the installation process. they are not deleted. Only in special circumstances will this file need to be changed. “Programmer Environment Setup. 14. INSTALL attempts to create three subdirectories under the root directory on the hard disk. INSTALL will then prompt you to insert any other disks. enter Y (Yes). Refer to appendix C.” for instructions on modifying the setup parameters.SYS files. If the subdirectories already exist.2 11. press CTRL-ALT-Delete to re-boot the computer. After removing the last disk used during the installation process. Otherwise. enter N (No) or press the Enter key.BAT and CONFIG. After all the files have been transferred. the final installation screen is displayed. and transfers the appropriate files to those subdirectories. 12. When the MS-DOS prompt is displayed. 2-12 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Programmer Setup A default setup file is created during installation. If folders exist. 13. enter LM90 to start up the software.

GFK-0466L Chapter 2 Operation 2-13 . Press F8 to select the modem auto dial feature. 1.2 Using a Modem Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software has a modem auto dial feature which can be accessed from the main menu of Series 90 PLCs and functions by selecting Logicmaster 90 Utilities (F7). Note The Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro modem auto dial feature only supports COM1 and COM2.

Note You can add any non-numerical characters that your modem accepts for the dial prefix or suffix. Press the Enter key to select a parameter for each field. Complete the fields on the screen displayed. A. commas to add pauses (particularly useful when trying to connect to a number in a different country). as shown in the following screen. Press Zoom (F10) to display other values. When all the fields are complete.. 2-14 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . B. See your modem user’s manual for acceptable non-numerical characters. move the cursor to Setup and press the Enter key. press the Escape key. To set the modem parameters.2 2.g. e. using the Enter key to move among the fields and the right/left cursor keys to move within each field.

this means forcing DTR high or telling the modem to ignore DTR. press the Enter key with the cursor on Dial. move the cursor to Edit and press the Enter key. Usually. GFK-0466L Chapter 2 Operation 2-15 . or press ALT-F8. Move the cursor to Hangup and press the Enter key to abort the call and hang up the modem. set up the modem to stay connected (i. After exiting Logicmaster. Highlight the entry you wish to edit. or select: < add new entry > and press the Enter key to add a new listing.2 3. B. Note All computers with modems or add-in card or PCMCIA slot modems include communications software. When all the fields are complete. and then press the Enter key to dial the number. NOT to hang up the line) when exiting the software (so that you can start Logicmaster). using the Enter key to move among the fields and the right/left cursor keys to move within each field. Use the cursor keys to select an entry. especially if you are using COM3 or COM4. To edit an entry or enter a new listing in the directory. cursor to one of the choices. Complete the fields on the screen displayed. To exit the modem. A. If you use other communications software. you must re-enter the modem software package to send a command. such as the command to hang up the line. 6.e. press the Escape key. You may choose to use one of these packages to dial and connect Logicmaster to a remote PLC. and then press F10 again or the Enter key to select the parameter.. cursor to Quit and press the Enter key. 4. Press Zoom (F10) to display the choices for each parameter. To dial a number. 5.

“Programmer Environment Setup. If only one version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software (either WSI or standard serial communications) is installed. Note Beginning with Release 3. a teach file can be used to enter the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. If both versions are installed. The menu of Series 90 PLCs and functions is displayed. Refer to appendix C. type LM90 and press the Enter key. 3. At the MS-DOS prompt. “Keyboard Functions. section 5.” for instructions on modifying the programmer environment setup. it will be run automatically. or PCM configuration software.” 2. configuration. This entry teach file will contain the keystrokes previously taught while entering the programming or configurator software. Use the function keys to select the programming. the Logicmaster 90 Setup Package (F9) can be used to select the version to run. Information on using a teach file to enter the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software can be found in chapter 2.2 Section 4: Startup/Exit To start up Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software: 1. 2-16 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .

If the configuration file does not already exist in the selected program folder and the 90-20 (Shift-F2) key is pressed before booting the Logicmaster software. The default PLC type can be selected using the appropriate shift-function key sequence. the reference defaults and CPU will be that of a Model 211 CPU. or select PCM (F3) to load the PCM configuration software. the reference defaults and CPU will be that of a Micro CPU. If the configuration file does not already exist in the selected program folder and the 90-30 (Shift-F3) key is pressed before booting the Logicmaster software.2 Starting the Programming or Configuration Software To load the programming software. After selecting Program (F1) or Config (F2). the reference defaults and CPU will be that of a Model 331 CPU. refer to the Series 90 PCM Development Software (PCOP) User’s Manual.) The Series 90-30. Series 90-20. and Micro PLCs use the same Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software package for programming. select Program (F1) from the menu of Series 90 PLCs and functions. If you wish to load the configuration software. the following screen appears: GFK-0466L Chapter 2 Operation 2-17 . but any of the three PLC types can be configured using the configuration package. GFK-0487. as described below. shown above. (For information on the PCM development software package. select Config (F2). D D D If the configuration file does not already exist in the selected program folder and the Micro (Shift-F1) key is pressed before booting the Logicmaster software.

If you respond to the exit prompt (“Exit Logicmaster 90 Package? (Y/N)”) by entering a 1 instead of a Y (Yes) or N (No).2 When the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software powers up. You should always exit the software before turning the computer off. If you need more information about program folders. that folder is selected.” Exiting (Quitting) the Programming or Configuration Software To exit the software at any time. “Program Folders. The next time you run the software. some changes may be lost.) After entering a name. If the current directory is a program folder and its name matches the program name in the attached PLC. If the current directory is a program folder. press the Enter key. Once in the programming software. whose name matches the program name in the attached PLC. the initial select screen is displayed with the name of the last folder selected in the Folder field. refer to chapter 7. or repeatedly press the Escape key at each prompt. 2-18 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Note At serial baud rates of 1200 or less. it is selected. If there is a program folder beneath the current directory. press CTRL-Break and confirm the prompt. Other wise.”) Enter a name of up to seven characters for the program folder. a bookmark feature saves the current context. you may use the auto function to automatically select a folder. “Program Folders. whose name matches the program name in the attached PLC. it attempts to automatically select a program folder: D D D D D If there is a program folder beneath the drawer last selected. otherwise. that folder is selected. however. (The name is also used for the program. you will return to the same general location when you re-enter the software. that folder is selected. (Refer to the information on “Automatic Folder Selection” in chapter 7. the folder cannot be automatically selected during startup.

This menu is used to access the primary functions of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software. WSI is displayed after the version number in the screen shown above.2 Programming Software Main Menu If you selected Program (F1) from the menu of Series 90 PLCs and functions. To select a particular reference table. or verify a program. Chapter 6 describes these functions. enter the reference type on the command line before pressing F2. Chapter 4 describes monitoring data and explains how to change tables and variable data. Display and change reference data. delete. or clear PLC memory. clear. the Programming Software main menu shown below is displayed. Print a program folder. Load. Select the status functions. For the standard serial communications version of software. The memory configuration and the current PLC access level can also be viewed. COM is displayed after the version number. Display and change serial port setup and other programmer configuration. or back up a program folder. lock. select. These functions include displays of I/O faults and PLC faults. rename. Chapter 3 describes the program display and explains how to create or edit a program. Create. Note For the WSI version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. store. Chapter 9 describes the print functions. Chapter 5 describes these functions. Function Key F1 F2 Function Program Tables Description Create or edit a program or monitor program logic. Chapter 7 explains how to use these functions. Chapter 8 explains how to use the utility functions. F3 Status F7 F8 F9 F10 Setup Folder Utility Print GFK-0466L Chapter 2 Operation 2-19 .

section 6. When Password Protection (F2) is pressed (PLC Control and Status functions). The bottom of the main menu screen contains three lines of status information. When PLC Fault Table (F3) or I/O Fault Table (F4) is pressed (PLC Control and Status functions) . “Screen Format. Serial Port Setup F5 View Modes Setup F8 Program Folder Functions F1 Select/ Create F2 Delete F3 Auto– Select F4 Backup F5 Restore F4 F5 Clear PLC Memory F2 Store to PLC F3 Verify PLC With Programmer F9 Program Utility Functions F1 Load from PLC F10 Print Functions F1 Setup Printer Parameters F2 Designate Screen Print Device MAIN MENU F1 Program Display and Edit F1 Insert F2 Edit F3 Modify F4 Search F1 F2 Signed Integer F3 Double Precision Integer F4 Real F5 F5 Hexadecimal F6 F6 F7 Option F8 Goto F9 More F10 Zoom F1 Coil Check F2 Editor Options F8 Timer/ Counter F9 Mixed F10 Change All F10 (SEE NOTE) F10 F9 (SEE NOTE) F9 F9 F10 Copy to Current F9 F10 Read/Write/ Verify EEPROM Binary F7 ASCII F2 Reference Tables F3 PLC Control and Status F1 Run/Stop PLC F2 Password Protection F3 PLC Fault Table F4 I/O Fault Table F5 PLC Memory Usage F6 Block Memory Usage F7 Reference Table Sizes F8 PLC Sweep Table F8 F7 F6 F4 F5 F6 F3 F4 Print Program Logic F5 Select Cross Reference Options F6 F6 Rename F7 Clear F8 Lock Or Unlock F8 F7 F6 Print Values F7 F8 F9 Pause F10 Save F1 Select F2 Cut F3 Paste F4 Include F5 Write F6 Delete F7 F8 Goto F9 More F10 Zoom NOTE: Press Insert Rung (F1). a43565 F7 Programmer Mode and Setup F1 Printer Serial Port Setup F2 Set Programmer Mode F3 Select SNP Connections F4 PLC Comm. or Modify Rung (F3) to display the programming instruction menus. Programming Software Menu Tree 2-20 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . You can go directly from one programming function to another without returning to the main menu by simultaneously pressing the Shift key and the desired function softkey. Chapter 2.2 The function keys remain active after selecting a programming function. F9 will become the Clear softkey and F10 will become the ZOOM softkey. F9 will become the OEM softkey.” explains the content of the screen’s status area. Figure 2-1. Edit Rung (F2).

The remaining entries are used to select support functions. The status function displays I/O faults and PLC faults. Chapter 11 describes the CPU configuration. The menu lists the primary functions of the software. WSI is displayed after the version number in the screen shown above. Chapter 9 describes these print functions. You will also use this function to display PLC information such as memory usage and to assign passwords. CPU configuration sets the operating characteristics of the CPU. For the standard serial communications version of software. the Configuration Software main menu shown below is displayed. current operating mode. Note For the WSI version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. and PLC connection. The first three menu entries are used to select PLC configuration functions. Function Key F1 F2 F3 Function I/O CPU Status Description I/Oconfiguration is the process of describing to the software the content of a PLC system’s rack(s). Chapter 10 tells how to complete I/O configuration. The programmer setup function sets up the computer ’s serial ports. delete. Chapter 5 describes these displays. Chapter 7 describes these functions. and limit access to configuration and program files. F7 Setup F8 Folder F9 Utility F10 Print GFK-0466L Chapter 2 Operation 2-21 . Program utilities are used to transfer information between the computer and the PLC. Chapter 8 explains how to use the program utilities. Refer to chapter 6 for information on the setup function. back up. COM is displayed after the version number. Print functions are used to generate configuration printouts and to set up a destination for screen prints. Program folder functions are a group of file-handling utilities which you will use to create.2 Configuration Software Main Menu If you selected Configuration (F2) from the menu of Series 90 PLCs and functions. An additional program utility is used to clear memory in the PLC.

MAIN MENU F1 I/O Configuration F2 CPU Configuration F1 PLC Time – of – Day Clock F3 PLC Control and Status F1 Run/Stop PLC F2 F2 Password Protection F3 Assign SNP ID F4 Memory Allocation PLC Fault Table F4 I/O Fault Table F5 PLC Memory Usage F4 F5 F6 F7 Programmer Mode and Setup F1 Printer Serial Port Setup F2 Set Programmer Mode F3 Select SNP Connections F4 PLC Comm. Configuration Software Menu Tree 2-22 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . You can go directly from one function to another without returning to the main menu by using the shift function keys. Serial Port Setup F5 View Modes Setup F8 Program Folder Functions F1 Select/ Create F2 Delete F3 Auto– Select F4 Backup F5 Restore F4 F5 Clear PLC Memory F5 F9 Program Utility Functions F1 Load Configuration from PLC F2 Store Configuration to PLC F3 Verify PLC Configuration with Programmer F10 Print Functions F1 Setup Printer Parameters F2 Designate Screen Print Device a43566 F3 F3 F4 Print Configuration F5 F6 F6 F6 F6 F7 F6 F6 F7 F7 F7 Clear F8 F7 F7 F8 F8 F8 Lock or Unlock F8 F8 F9 F9 F9 F9 F9 F9 F10 Pause F10 Save F10 F10 F10 F10 Read/Write/ Verify EEPROM F1 Equal continued on next page Figure 2-2.2 The functions are selected using the function keys shown on the top line of the screen.

Configuration Software Menu Tree (cont’d) GFK-0466L Chapter 2 Operation 2-23 .2 continued from previous page F1 Model 30 I/O F1 Discrete Input F2 Discrete Output F3 Discrete Mixed F4 Analog Input F5 Analog Output F6 Analog Mixed F7 Other F7 F7 F7 F7 F6 F6 F6 F6 F5 F5 F5 F4 F4 F4 F3 F3 F1 F2 GCM F2 F2 F3 Serial F2 Genius F3 F4 Power Supply F1 F1 F5 Rack Selection F6 Communications F7 F8 Other a44987 F9 F10 Zoom F1 PCM F2 HSC F3 Foreign Modules F4 Operator Interface F5 APM PS F8 F8 F2 F8 F8 F8 F9 Default F9 F9 F9 F10 F10 F10 F10 F10 Figure 2-2.

Keyboard Macros (Teach Mode) Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software can be instructed to record sequences of keystrokes and play them back with a single keystroke. which can be used to assign sequences of frequently-used keystrokes to a file for simple recall later on. PC-AT. but have not been tested. “Rung Edit. it is located in the current program folder. section 9. or CIMSTAR I industrial computer. would be difficult to use since Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software was designed to use with standard keyboards. Key Functions Appendix E. described at the end of chapter 3.” lists the keyboard functions that are active in the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software environment. where x is a digit in the set 0 to 9 that you choose when you create the keystroke macro. This file is called a teach file. developed for use with Logicmaster 6 programming software. or a Workmaster.2 Section 5: Keyboard Functions This section describes the keyboard functions that are active in the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software environment. Workmaster II. It also describes playback functions. This information may also be displayed on the programmer screen by pressing ALT-K to access key help. 2-24 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . “Key Functions. Keyboards Supported Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software can be used with the 83-key or 101-key keyboard for an IBM PC personal computer. These sequences of keystrokes are referred to as keystroke macros or teach sequences. Appendix E also contains a perforated Help card which can be removed from this manual. The keystrokes that make up a keystroke macro are stored in a file named KEYx. or IBM-compatible computer may work with Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. The 91-key keyboard for the Workmaster computer.DEF. An example of a simple keystroke macro would be the sequence of keystrokes needed to create the following line of logic: | | ??????? ??????? |——| |————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )— | The auto-next highest reference address function. A combination of keystrokes might represent a series of frequently used functions or part of a program that you want to duplicate. Other types of keyboards for the IBM PC-XT.” provides another example of using a keystroke macro.

You must remember this starting point when you execute or play back the macro you are about to record. The software will stop recording keystrokes and create a teach file. For example. 3. Pausing the Playback of a Teach Sequence A pause may be entered in a keystroke macro. and you will be prompted to continue or stop the key sequence. press ALT-Q to exit TEACH mode. or the Edit Program commands. When the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software encounters the ALT-Z key combination during playback. When you wish to begin recording keystrokes. When you have completed your sequence of keystrokes. it displays a prompt and waits until the space bar is pressed to continue. The only keyboard input recognized during playback is ALT-A.2 Creating a Teach Sequence Follow the steps below to create a keystroke macro: 1. press and hold the ALT key while pressing the T key. Then. Playing Back a Teach Sequence Before replaying the keystroke macro. If you are recording a sequence of keystrokes and need to pause playback to examine something on the screen. 2. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software will now record all the keystrokes that you make. press the ALT-digit combination you were prompted for when you started recording. select a playback file by pressing one of the key combinations between ALT-0 and ALT-9. The software will rapidly execute the keystrokes you recorded as though they were entered from the keyboard. an error message is displayed. if you are editing ladder diagram logic. If you select a key combination that has been used previously in the current folder. It is often simplest to begin the macro from an easy-to-remember starting point such as the main menu. which causes the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software to ask you if you want to stop the playback. A message will be displayed telling you that a user prompt key (a pause) has been recorded. the Print menu. you must ensure that a condition such as whether you were in EDIT mode when you started recording holds when you are playing back the macro. GFK-0466L Chapter 2 Operation 2-25 . be sure that the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software is in the state it was in when you started recording the macro. the software will ask you if you want to overwrite it. Then. press ALT-Z at the point where you would like playback to pause. playback is paused. If an error condition is encountered during playback. This may be done as many times as you like while recording a macro. Select the starting point in Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software at which you wish your macro to begin.

tch t To end the teach sequence. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software may be run using a teach file. The file extension must be . the batch file must contain the line: c:\lm90\wsil30 i before the command to create or play back the teach file. For example: c:\lm90\wsil30 i c:\lm90\p30s\prg9030 p c:\lm90\wsil30 r 2-26 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .tch. to play back a macro for the programming software. To play back the keystroke macro. For example.tch) and the letter t after the path. For example.tch could be used as the file name for the programming software and cfg9030. prg9030. enter: C:\lm90\p30\prg9030 prg9030. This feature allows LM90 to be invoked from an MS-DOS batch file. which corresponds to the version of software installed on your computer: Software Version WSIprogrammer WSI configurator Standardserialcommunicationsprogrammer Standard serial communications configurator Executable Path c:\lm90\p30\prg9030 c:\lm90\c30\cfg9030 c:\lm90\p30s\prg9030 c:\lm90\c30s\cfg9030 Enter the name of the teach file for this macro (e. enter: C:\lm90\p30\prg9030 prg9030. The file name must identify either the programming or configuration software package. For example. at the MS-DOS prompt.02. The t indicates TEACH mode. The keystroke macro is stored as the text file <filename>.tch could be used for the configurator software. prg9030. to play back keystrokes to perform desired function(s). to begin recording keystrokes to a teach file named prg9030.g. enter the path and teach file name.2 Using a Teach File to Run Software from an MS-DOS Batch File Beginning with Release 3. To begin recording keystroke macro. followed by the letter p for PLAYBACK mode. or CTRL-Break to end the teach sequence and exit the software.tch. which contains keystrokes previously taught while entering the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming or configuration software packages. and to return to the batch file to execute the next command. press ALT-Q.tch p or c:\lm90\p30\prg9030 p To initialize the communications driver for the standard COM port version of Logicmaster 90 software. enter the executable path.. The line: c:\lm90\wsil30 r must be added after the command to create or play back the teach file in order to remove the communications driver. This can be helpful when executing multiple print requests.tch.

without using the Shift key. they are the display formats that are available while using reference tables. and other information related to the function you are currently using. The lower line displays the secondary functions that can be selected with that main function key active. Function Key Assignments The top two lines of the screen show the functions that are currently available. In the example above. The main functions displayed in the upper line are selected by pressing the Shift key with a function key. GFK-0466L Chapter 2 Operation 2-27 . data. The active function appears in a reverse-video block. F1 through F10. F1 through F10.2 Section 6: Screen Format This is a typical bit-oriented reference table display for Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. The main part of the screen shows menus. In the following example. These formats are selected by pressing a function key. the active main function is reference tables.

Errors in command syntax. displays typed entries. or comments. Prompts for additional information required from the user are also displayed on the message line. For some programming functions. Items appear in the status information area only when needed. are displayed on the message line. Status Information The bottom three lines display information about the status of the programmer. the PLC. Shows the status of the keyboard. such as data to be used for the table being displayed. identified by the > prompt. It is used to enter instructions. or those discovered while executing commands or selections. Description Displaysinformation about the attached PLC and the programmer. references.2 Message Line Directly under the function key area is the message line. whether Caps Lock. the program. The information displayed will change depending on the programmer mode. and the keyboard. Command Line The command line. described in later sections of this manual. and whether the keyboard is in REPLACE or INSERT mode. Scroll Lock or Num Lock is active. For example: ID CONVEY RUN/ENABLE 25msFIXED ONLINE C:\ACME\CONVEYOR\CVLINE3 PRG: CVLINE3 REPLACE L3 ACC: WRITE LOGIC LOGIC NOT EQ Status Area Top line Second line Third line Identifies the current program. the third status line displays additional information. 2-28 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .

Actively communicating with the PLC. clear fault tables. PLC stopped due to a fault. Some of the information displayed reflects selections made using the PLC monitoring functions. scan exceeds the set time limit. scan fixed to set time limit.” snp id plc state scan time mode access level equality Items that may appear on this line are explained in the following table. Access Level The password access level of the PLC: LEVEL 4: LEVEL 3: LEVEL 2: LEVEL 1: Changepassword. but programmer cannot modify the contents of the PLC. For information about using these functions. The block can be stored to the PLC by pressing ALT-S. no I/O scan. refer to chapter 5. Description The Series Ninety Protocol (SNP) identifier assigned to the PLC.) Field SNP ID PLC State The current status of the CPU: RUN/OUT EN: STOP/IOSC AN: STOP/NOIO: STOP/FAULT: Scan Time PLC running the logic program. outputs enabled. the current block is being edited online and may be different in the programmer. PLC stopped. check fault tables. or no PLC attached. This is followed by the type of the scan. which may be: SCAN: FIXED: OVER: Each scan executed as fast as possible. Same as ONLINE. Program versions may be different. Equality This field compares the program in the PLC with the version in the folder: LOGICEQUAL: LOGICNOTEQ: BLOCKEDIT: Both program versions are the same. The PLC program is the same as that in the current programfolder. not executing the logic program.2 PLC/Programmer Status: Definitions The top line of the status area displays information about a PLC and about the programmer.PLCstopped. scanningI/O. PLC stopped. Writelogic/configuration. Write data.writelogic/configuration. not executing the logic program. (Items will not appear on the status lines if they are not used for the currently active function. The CPU sweep time in milliseconds. Mode The current mode of the programmer connected to the CPU: OFFLINE: ONLINE: MONITOR: No communications with PLC. “PLC Control and Status. GFK-0466L Chapter 2 Operation 2-29 . Constant sweep timer enabled. Constant sweep timer enabled. Read PLC only.

then press the M key). no data transfer takes place between the computer and the PLC.” 2-30 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . If you are using a Workmaster or CIMSTAR I industrial computer. Repeatedly pressing ALT and M switches the operating mode from OFFLINE to MONITOR to ONLINE and then back to OFFLINE. if communications have been established between the computer and the PLC. Programs and configuration data may conveniently be developed in OFFLINE mode. and ONLINE. the computer can read data from the PLC but may not transfer data to it.e. With communications established in ONLINE mode. refer to chapter 6. “Programmer Setup. or if the keyswitch is not enabled. MONITOR. Going to the Programmer Setup screen (Shift-F7) and selecting an operating mode. mode selection can be made by: D D Pressing the ALT and M keys simultaneously (i. In MONITOR mode. press the Alt key and hold. In OFFLINE mode. programs and other data can be transferred between the PLC and the computer.. For those computers without a keyswitch. For more information on using the Programmer Setup screen to select the operating mode.2 Selecting the Programmer Operating Mode Both the programmer and the configuration software operate in three modes: OFFLINE. with or without the computer connected to a PLC. you may configure the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software to use the keyswitch to select the operating mode.

and editing rungs. GFK-0467. include. paste. Describes how to search for a reference or instruction using the search function. for additional information on each of these instructions. Chapter 3 contains the following sections: Section 1 Title LadderLogic Program Elements Program Format Program Entry Program Annotation Variable Declaration Table Rung Comments Changing the Display Mode Subroutine Blocks Rung Edit Description SummarizestheSeries90-30/20/Microinstruction set. Program logic may be viewed. Describes how to show reference description information at each symbol or reference address in the program. you may have to enter a password in order to use the functions described in this chapter. Describes how to insert rung comments. Refer to the Series 90-30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual. If insufficient space exists to support changes to the program. but not changed. If space is freed up on the disk using MS-DOS. Describes how to insert logic elements and functions in a program and three ways to exit from a rung. Program display and editing may be protected by passwords. Describes how to modify an existing program by adding rungs. If your system has been set up to use passwords and is in ONLINE mode. including multiple coil use and automatic insertion of references. Also describes how to import and export files in SNF format. and write rungs or declarations. the folder is temporarily locked.Chapter 3 3 Program Editing 12section level 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1 This chapter describes the program edit features of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software. the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software checks the amount of space on the disk containing the program folder. 3-1 GFK-0466L . deleting rungs. cut. and how to use the open space functions to open element spaces in the rung. Describes options in the program editor. Describes the format of a ladder logic rung. the lock state is automatically cleared when you runLogicmaster90-30/20/Microsoftware. Page 3-2 2 3 4 5 3-18 3-23 3-30 3-33 6 7 8 9 3-46 3-52 3-57 3-67 10 11 12 Editor Options Search Function Online Editing/ Monitoring 3-92 3-98 3-104 Note When the program editor is entered. Describes how to use block declarations in a main programblock. This section also describes how to select. Describes how to make changes to or debug a program while the program is running. Describes how to enter annotation using the variable declaration table. Describes program annotation and how to enter nicknames and reference descriptions.

bit test. greater than. Control Limit program execution. Data Move Select basic data move functions: move. 3-6 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-2 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . and search for all array Functions values which are equal. greater than or equal. Page 3-3 3-5 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 Select addition. to select one of the math functions. bit sequencer. Or. and less than or equal. For example. bit set. less than. Relational Select functions which can compare two numbers: equal. inverse cosine. Functions logical invert. sine. first press Shift-F3 to display the math functions listed in table 3-3 in this section. coils. shift register.3 Section 1: Ladder Logic Program Elements The tables in this section summarize the programming instructions available for Series 90-30 PLCs. block Functions clear. inverse sine. cosine. You can access all of these instructions from either the Insert (F1) or Edit (F2) function by selecting one of the main functions displayed in the upper line shown below. These function keys provide access to the instructions required to edit ladder diagram rungs: Function Key F1 F2 Function Relay Functions Timer/ Counter Functions Math Functions Description Select contacts. multiplication. select the appropriate math function by pressing the function key for that particular function. and Micro PLCs. Press the Shift key and the function key for the function you wish to select. square root. call a subroutine. OR. and inverse tangent functions. subtraction. Table Copy from one array to another. less than. and bit position. Select on-delay and stopwatch-type timers. and communications request. or less than or equal to a specified value. not equal. block move. Bit Select functions which can perform comparison and move Operation operations on bit strings: Logical AND. shift left or right. division. up counters. bit clear. Conversion Convert a data item from one number type to another. and exclusive OR. test a value against a range of numbers. Series 90-20 PLCs. and down counters. modulo division. enter a comment in Functions a program. Then. and alter the way the CPU executes the program. such as Functions signed integer to 4-digit BCD format or BCD-4 to signed integer format. rotate left or right. greater than or equal. tangent. and links in ladder logic rungs. greater than. not Functions equal.

Its state is retained through power failure and STOP-TORUN transition. Relay Functions Key F1 F2 F5 F6 Instruction Mnemonic Function Description Selecting Relay Functions(Shift-F1) displays these function key assignments: –| |– &NOCON Normally A normally open contact passes power Open Contact if the associated reference is ON. A vertical link with no contact function or reference. “Instruction Mnemonics. Please refer to the Series 90-30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual. –(SM)– &SMLA T Retentive SET The associated reference is set ON if Coil the coil receives power. –(RM)– &RMLA T Retentive RESET Coil The associated discrete reference is reset OFF if the coil receives power. –( )– &NOCOIL Normally The associated reference is set ON if Open Coil the coil receives power. also acts as a delete function. for additional information on each instruction. –|/|– &NCCON Normally A normally closed contact passes power Closed Contact if the associated reference is OFF. Its state is retained through power failure and STOP-TO-RUNtransition.” lists the complete mnemonics for each programming instruction. Table 3-1. The reference remains set until reset by an –(RM)– coil.3 Appendix D. The reference remains reset until set by an –(SM)– coil. F7 F8 F9 F10 vert | horz – more &VE &HO Vertical Link Horizontal Link GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-3 . GFK-0467. Additional relay functions you can select. A shunt.

the reference will be set ON for one logic scan. Return to the first level of relay functions. Relay Functions (Continued) Key F1 Instruction Mnemonic Function Description Pressing More (F10) displays these additional relay function key assignments: –––<+> &COILCTD Continuation If power to the coil is ON. the reference will be set ON for one logic scan. The associated discrete reference is set ON if the coil receives power. The state is retained through power failure and STOP-TO-RUN transition. The associated discrete reference is set ON if the coil does not receive power. The associated discrete reference is set OFF if the coil receives power. It remains reset until set by an –(S)– coil. <+>––– &CONCTD Continuation Contact Negated Retentive Coil The continuation contact passes power to the right if the preceding continuation coil is set ON. the continuation coil sets the next continuation contact OFF. the Coil continuation coil sets the next continuation contact ON. If the associated discrete reference is OFF when the coil receives power. The associated discrete reference is set ON if the function does not receive power. If power is OFF.3 Table 3-1. The state is retained through power failure and STOP-TO-RUN transition. It remains set until reset by an –(R)– coil. This coil can be used as a one-shot. The associated discrete reference is set ON if the coil receives power. If the associated discrete reference is ON and the coil is not receiving power. F2 F3 –(/M)– &NCMCOIL F4 F5 –(/)– –(M)– &NCCOIL &NOMCOIL Negated Coil Retentive Coil F6 –(S)– &SLA T SET Coil F7 –(R)– –( ↑)– &RLA T RESET Coil F8 &PCOIL Positive Transition Coil F9 –( ↓)– &NCOIL Negative Transition Coil F10 more 3-4 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .

or thousandths of seconds. and resets to zero when power flow is on. If the current value stored in the counter is greater than or equal to a preset value. instrs Return to the timer and counter functions.5 and later of all models of CPUs. The R input is used to reset the counter to zero. upctr &UPCTR Up Counter The UPCTR function increments by 1 each time the function receives transitionalpower. and when using Logicmaster 90-30/20 4. tmbase Select the time base of a timer. the function passes power.5 or higher. 0. It passes power if Timer the current value exceeds the preset value. 0. and passes power if the current value is greater than or equal to a preset value. If the current value of the counter is zero. Time may be counted in tenths of seconds (the default selection). The range is 0 to +32.001 second Time is counted in thousandths of a second. The function accumulates time while receiving power.1 second Time is counted in tenths of a second. Time may be counted in tenths of seconds or hundredths of seconds. Timer and Counter Functions Key F1 Instruction Mnemonic Function Description Selecting Timer/CounterFunctions(Shift-F2) displays these function keyassignments. These features are not available to earlier releases of CPUs. Pressing Timebase (F10) displays these function key assignments: 0.001s _TH 0.767 time units. nor earlier versions of Logicmaster. oftd &OFTD Off-Delay Timer The OFDT function increments while power flow is off.01 second Time is counted in hundredths of a second. dnctr &DNCTR Down Counter The DNCTR function counts down from a preset value every time the function receives transitional power. tmr &TMR On-Delay Timer Note The Off-Delay timer and the thousandth of a second timebase are available to Release 4. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-5 . The R input is used to set the current value to equal the preset value. the function passes power. hundredths of seconds.3 Table 3-2. The state of this timer is retentive on power failure.1s _TEN 0. no automatic initialization occurs at power-up F2 F3 F4 F5 F10 F2 F3 F4 F10 The current value of the TMR function is set to zero when the function transitions on. The current value is reset to zero when the reset (R) input receives power.01s _HUN 0. ondtr &ONDTR On-Delay The ONDTR function accumulates time Stopwatch while receiving power.

for all other 350 and higher CPUs. Divide one number by another. yielding a quotient. The MOD function passes power unless there is an attempt to divide by zero. Divide one number by another. sub &SUB Subtraction Subtract one number from another. the value of the output Q is set to the square root of the input IN.3 Table 3-3. floating point support began with Release 9). The SUB function passes power if the operation does not result in an overflow. but Real data requires a floating-point CPU(all releases of 352 CPUs. Find the square root of an integer or real value. The MUL function passes power if the operation does not result in an overflow. Multiply two numbers. yielding a remainder. Select a data type for the function. The ADD function passes power if the operation does not result in an overflow. F2 F3 mul &MUL Multiplication F4 div &DIV Division F5 mod &MOD ModuloDivision F6 sqrt &SQRT Square Root F9 more F10 types Note Math functions can generally use the Real data type. Math Functions Key F1 Instruction Mnemonic Function Description SelectingMath Functions(Shift-F3) displays these function key assignments: add &ADD Addition Add two numbers. Pressing more (F9) displays the Trig functions plus the degree/radian functions (see next page). 3-6 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . The DIV function passes power if the operation does not result in an overflow and if there is no attempt to divide by zero. When the function receives power flow. Pressing Types (F10) displays the function keys described in Table 3-10 on page 3-15.

Pressing More (F9) displays these additional math function key assignments: F2 cos &COS Trigonometric Cosine F3 tan &TAN Trigonometric Tangent F4 asin &ASIN Inverse Sine F5 acos &ACOS Inverse Cosine F6 atan &ATAN Inverse Tangent F7 deg &DEG Convert to Degrees F8 rad &RAD Convert to Radians F9 more Note The above math functions require a floating-point CPU (all releases of 352 CPUs. Find the trigonometric tangent of the input. whose units are radians. Math Functions (Continued) Key F1 Instruction sin Mnemonic &SIN Function Trigonometric Sine Description Find the trigonometric sine of the input. When the function receives power flow. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-7 . Find the trigonometric cosine of the input. whose units are radians. a DEG_TO_RAD conversion is performed on the real degree value in input IN and the result is placed in output real radian value Q. it computes the inverse tangent of IN and stores the result in output Q. whose units are radians. When the function receives power flow. it computes the inverse cosine of IN and stores the result in output Q. it computes the inverse sine of IN and stores the result in output Q. whose units are radians. and stores the result in output Q. When the function receives power flow. it computes the tangent of IN.3 Table 3-3. When the function receives power flow. Find the inverse tangent of the input. When the function receives power flow. whose units are radians. When the function receives power flow. When the function receives power flow. and stores the result in output Q. When the function receives power flow. and stores the result in output Q. Changes the menu to additional math functions. for all other 350 and higher CPUs. it computes the sine of IN. it computes the cosine of IN. whose units are radians. a RAD_TO_DEG conversion is performed on the real radian value of IN and the result is placed in output degree real value Q. floating point support began with Release 9). Find the inverse cosine of the input. Find the inverse sine of the input.

3-8 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . floating point support began with Release 9). it finds the base 10 logarithm of the real value in input IN and places the result in output Q. X is raised to the power specified by IN and the result is placed in Q. When the function receives power flow. When the function receives power flow.3 Table 3-3. Math Functions (Continued) Key F1 Instruction log 10 Mnemonic &LOG Function Base 10 Logarithm Description When the function receives power flow. F2 ln &LN Natural Logarithm F3 exp &EXP Power of e F4 expt &EXPT Power of X Note The above math functions require a floating-point CPU(all releases of 352 CPUs. it finds the natural logarithm base (e) of the real value in input IN and places the result in output Q. the natural logarithm base (e) is raised to the power specified by IN and the result is placed in Q. for all other 350 and higher CPUs. When the function receives power flow.

Pressing Types (F10) displays the function keys described in Table 3-10 on page 3-15. floating point support began with Release 9). Select a data type for the function.5 and above.50 or higher CPUs (4. Relational Functions Key F1 Instruction Mnemonic Function Description F2 F3 F4 Selecting Relational Functions(Shift-F4) displays these function key assignments: eq &EQ Equal Test for equality between two numbers. Test the input value against a range of two numbers.02 of the 341) and in Logicmaster90-30/20Version 4. but Real data requires a floating-point CPU(all releases of 352 CPUs. lt &LT Less Than Test for one number less than another. The GE function passes power if the first parameter is greater than or equal to the second parameter .3 Table 3-4. gt &GT Greater Than Test for one number greater than another. The LE function passes power if the first parameter is less than or equal to the second parameter . for all other 350 and higher CPUs. F5 F6 le &LE Less Than or Equal To F7 range &RANG Range F10 types Note You can use the Real data type for Relational functions except Range. The LT function passes power if the first parameter is less than the second parameter . The GT function passes power if the first parameter is greater than the second parameter. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-9 . ge &GE Greater Than or Test for one number greater than or Equal To equal to another. Test for one number greater than or equal to another. The NE function passes power if the inputs are not equal. The EQ function passes power if the two inputs are equal. ne &NE Not Equal Test for non-equality between two numbers. This instruction is only available for release 4.

bitclr &BCLR Bit Clear Set one bit within a string to false. shl &SHL Shift Left Shift a bit string left. shr &SHR Shift Right Shift a bit string right. rol &ROL Rotate Left Rotate a bit string left. not &NOT LogicalInvert Logical inversion of a bit string. Bit Operation Functions Key F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 Instruction Mnemonic Function Description F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 SelectingBit Operation Functions(Shift-F5) displays these function key assignments: and &AND LogicalAND Logical AND of two bit strings.5 and above. bitset &BSET Bit Set Set one bit within a string to true.5 or higher CPUs and in Logicmaster 90-30/20 Version 4. or &OR Logical OR Logical OR of two bit strings.3 Table 3-5. xor &XOR Logical Exclusive Logical Exclusive OR of two bit OR strings. more Return to the first level of bit operation functions. Pressing Types (F10) displays the function keys described in Table 3-10 on page 3-15. ror &ROR Rotate Right Rotate a bit string right. more Additional bit operation functions you can select. mskcmp &MCM Masked Perform a masked compare of two Compare arrays (available only for Release 4. bitpos &BPOS Bit Position Locate a bit set to true within a bit string.). Pressing More (F9) displays these additional bit operation function key assignments: bittst &BTST Bit Test Test a bit within a bit string. types Select a data type for the function. 3-10 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .

blkclr &BLKCLR Block Clear Clear (0) one or more bytes/words of PLC memory. srh ne &SRCHNE Search Not Equal Search array for values not equal to a specifiedvalue. srh le &SRCHLE Search Less Than Search array for values less than or or Equal equal to a specified value. floating point support began with Release 9) Table 3-7. for all other 350 and higher CPUs. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-11 . but Real data requires a floating-point CPU(all releases of 352 CPUs. srh lt &SRCHL T Search Less Than Search array for values less than a specifiedvalue. types Select a data type for the function. Data Move Functions Key F1 F2 F3 F4 Instruction Mnemonic Function Description F5 F7 F10 SelectingData Move Functions(Shift-F6) displays these function key assignments: move &MOV Move Move one or more bits of data within PLC memory. blkmov &BLKMOV Block Move Move a block of up to 7 constants to PLC memory. Pressing Types (F10) displays the function keys described in Table 3-10 on page 3-15. bitseq &BITSEQ Bit Sequencer Sequence a 1 through a group of bits in PLC memory.3 Table 3-6. Note You can use the Real data type with Move and Block Move functions. Pressing Types (F10) displays the function keys described in table 3-11 on page 3-15. comreq &COMMREQ Communication Send a communications request to a Request smart module in the PLC. types Select a data type for the function. arrmov &ARRMOV Array Move Copy a specified number of data elements from a source array to a destination array. srh gt &SRCHGT Search Greater Search array for values greater than Than a specified value. Table Functions Key F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F8 Instruction Mnemonic Function Description F10 Selecting Table Functions(Shift-F7) displays these function key assignments: srh eq &SRCHEQ Search Equal Search array for values equal to a specifiedvalue. srh ge &SRCHGE Search Greater Search array for values greater than Than or Equal or equal to a specified value. shfreg &SHFR Shift Register Shift one or more words or bits of data through a block of PLC memory.

147.648 to +2.483. if so.483.648 to +2. Pressing Types (F10) displays the function keys described in Table 3-10 on page 3-15. and power flow is not passed. Truncate to a 32-bit signed number. Pressing Types (F10) displays the function keys described in Table 3-10 on page 3-15. Conversion Functions Key F3 Instruction Mnemonic Function Description F5 F6 F7 F8 F10 SelectingConversion Functions(Shift-F8) displays these function key assignments: →bcd-4 &TO_BCD4 Convert to Convert a value to 4-digit BCD BCD-4 format.483.147.647). →int &TO_INT Convert to INT Convert a value to signed integer (From BCD-4 or format.768 to +32.535).647. the conversion is then set to the maximum or minimum (based on exceeding or going below the limits of the range). The [→] REAL function always BCD-4 or WORD) passes power. and power flow is not passed. DINT. →real &TO_REAL Convert to Real Convert a value to real value format. if so. The range is –2.767). and power flow is not passed. Pressing More (F9) displays these additional conversion function key assignments: →→int →→dint &TRINT &TRDINT Truncate to INT (from REAL) Truncate to Double Precision INT (from REAL) Truncate to a 16-bit signed number. (From INT.768 to +32. →word &TO_WORD Convert to Word Convert a Real value to Word (FromREAL) format.147.483. The [→] DINT funcREAL) tion passes power unless the number to be converted is out of range (–2. the conversion is then set to the maximum or minimum (based on exceeding or going below the limits of the range).3 Table 3-8. The range is –32. The [→] WORD function passes power unless the number to be converted is out of range (0 to 65. →tdint &TO_DINT Convert to DINT Convert a value to double precision (From BCD-4 or integer format. The →BCD-4 function passes (From INT) power unless the number to be converted is out of range (greater than 9999). the conversion is then set to the maximum or minimum (based on exceeding or going below the limits of the range). Return to the first level of conversion functions. if so. F1 F2 F9 F10 more types 3-12 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . and no conversion is performed. Select the type of data for the function.147. The [→] INT function passes REAL) power unless the number to be converted is out of range (–32.767. types Select the type of data for the function.

Control Functions Key F1 Instruction Mnemonic Function Description F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 SelectingControl Functions(Shift-F9) displays these function key assignments: call &CALL Call Cause a program execution to go to a specified subroutine block. do io &DOIO DoI/O Service a specified range of inputs or outputs immediately (all inputs or outputs on a module will be serviced if any addresses on that module are included in the function – partial I/O module updates are not performed). This instruction is useful for debuggingpurposes. The CALL function always passes power. the text can be typed in by zooming into the instruction. Additional control functions you can select. After programming the instruction. This function passes power if power is received and the function executes properly . pidisa &PIDISA ISA PID Select the standard IDS PID algorithm. Optionally. A special PLC service function. end &END Temporary End The program executes from the first of Logic rung to the last rung or the END instruction. F8 F9 svcreq &SVCREQ Service Request F10 more GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-13 . SER &SER Sequential Capture a series of events in the proEvent Recorder gram execution into an array. whichever is encountered first. commnt &COMMENT Comment A rung explanation. sfcres &SFCRES SFC Reset Force an SFC block to start from the initial step on power-up or after a STOP-to-RUNtransition.3 Table 3-9. Algorithm pidind &PIDIND Independent Select the non-interacting PIDAlgorithm independent PID algorithm. a copy of the scanned I/O can be placed in internal memory.

labeln &LABELN Nested Label The target location of a JUMP instruction. Return to the first level of control functions. endmcn &ENDMCRN Nested End End a nested master control relay Master Control range. mcr &MCR Non-Nested Start a non-nested master control Master Control relay range. A non-nested MCR causes all rungs between the non-nested MCR and its subsequent non-nested ENDMCR to be executed with no power flow. jump &JUMP Non-Nested Jump Jump to a specified location indicated by a LABEL in the logic. This is the non-nested Relay form of the MCR instruction. Control Functions (Continued) Key F1 Instruction Mnemonic Function Description F2 F3 F4 F6 F7 Pressing More (F10) displays these additional control function key assignments: mcrn &MCRN Nested Master Start a master control relay range. jumpn &JUMPN Nested Jump Jump to a specified location indicated by a LABELN in the logic. This is the non-nested form of the JUMP instruction. There can be nothing after a non-nested MCR in a rung. This is the non-nested form of the LABEL instruction. F8 F9 label &LABEL Non-Nested Label F10 more 3-14 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . There can be nothing after an MCRN in a rung. There can be nothing after a nested MCR in a rung. This is the nested form of the Relay ENDMCR instruction. This is the non-nested Control Relay form of the ENDMCR instruction.3 Table 3-9. This is the nested form of the LABEL instruction. endmcr &ENDMCR Non-Nested End End a non-nested Master Control Master Relay range. This is the nested form of the JUMP instruction. Control Relay This is the nested form of the MCR instruction. There can be nothing after a non-nested ENDMCR in the rung. An MCRN causes all rungs between the nested MCRN and its subsequent ENDMCRN to be executed with no power flow. The target location of a JUMP instruction.

MOV or SHFREG). byte _BY Byte A Byte has an 8-bit value. Double precision integers are stored in 32-bit data memory locations (actually two consecutive 16-bit memory locations) and are always signed values. and are represented in 2’s complement notation..3 Table 3-10. Data Types Key F1 Instruction bit Mnemonic Function Description F2 F3 SelectingData Types (F10) displays these function key assignments: _BI Bit A Bit data type is used with instructions which operate on bit strings that are not multiples of 16 bits.768 to +32. and the bits are not looked at together to represent an integer number. instead of the bits in the data location representing a number.g. the bits are independent of each other. but. Four-digit BCD numbers use 16-bit data memory locations. dword _DW Double Word A Double Word data type has the same characteristics as a single word data type. The range of numbers that can be stored in this format is from ±1.401298E–45 to ±3.) The valid range of a DINT data type is -2147483648 to +2147483867. Real numbers use 32 consecutive bits (actually two consecutive 16-bit memory locations).402823E+38. The valid range of word values is 0 to +65. F4 F5 bcd-4 _BCD4 Four-Digit Binary Coded Decimal F7 real _REAL Floating Point F8 int _INT Signed Integer F9 dint _DI Double Precision Integer F10 instrs GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-15 .767. except that it uses 32 consecutive bits in data memory instead of only 16 bits. or whose reference address is not on a byte boundary (e. The valid range of an INT data type is -32. Each BCD digit uses four bits and can represent numbers between 0 and 9. Each bit represents its own binary state (1 or 0). word _W Word A Word data type uses 16 consecutive bits of data memory. Signed integers use 16-bit memory data locations. Return to the functions displayed on the screen. (Bit 32 is the sign bit. This BCD coding of the 16 bits has a legal value range of 0 to 9999.535.

therefore. In the example above. Using the Data Zoom Feature The data zoom feature is only available in the program editor. 2. In ONLINE mode when the program folder is identical to the PLC. changes made to values are only stored to disk. are truncated upon entry. changes made to values are only stored to the PLC. displayed as a signed integer. To use this feature: 1. In OFFLINE mode. like those displayed in the Sample period field. with the cursor positioned on the first field whose value can be changed. Loop No. Fixed point numbers. Real-time updates are maintained within the data zoom window. and Min slew time is a timing parameter displayed in seconds. Position the cursor within a PID function block and press Zoom (F10). The data zoom feature is available in either ONLINE or OFFLINE mode. any changes made on the Data Zoom screen will be lost when you exit the screen.3 Data Zoom The data zoom feature supports the PID functions by providing a display window that expands the parameters of the function block and displays them in real time with labels in a format consistent with their use. a word of data may contain several boolean flags. For example. Each field in the window is displayed in a format consistent with its usage in the function. The boolean inputs and outputs to the function are also displayed. The following screen shows an example screen for the PID_ISA function. 3-16 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Each flag is labeled and displayed separately. The PID function is displayed as a window. indicates the number this PID is within a loop structure and is. Note If you try to write-protect a floppy disk while the Data Zoom screen is displayed.

In the PID function.(-100)] = 150/200 = . Using this formula with the values displayed on the Data Zoom screen shown on the previous page results in a value of 75% for SP: SP = [50 . Parameter SP 4. use the arrow keys to highlight the field. where quantity is the current value of PV. Using this formula with the values displayed on the Data Zoom screen shown on the previous page results in a value of 10% for CV: CV = [0 . and press the Enter key.min value). 3. GFK-0467. For the PID function. The bar will display up to 100%. minimum and maximum scaling values will also need to be displayed. The software will not allow you to highlight those fields whose values cannot be changed.(-100)] / [+100 . Formula Percentage = (quantity . the CV. Whenever a bar graph is displayed in data zoom.lower clamp). In the screen shown above. where quantity is the current value of SP .50 or 50% CV Percentage = (CV . PV.000. the –100 and +100 displayed immediately above the bar graphs correspond to the minimum and maximum SP and PV scaling values. Percentages less than zero are set to 0%.min value) / (max value . The following table lists the formulas used to compute the percentages in these fields.min value) / (max value . the recommended default minimum and maximum values for the SP and PV bars are -32. For more information on the PID function and its parameters. and Enable fields cannot be changed. The New Value field functions like a command line.10 or 10% Percentages are calculated to the nearest 1% on the screen.lower clamp) / (upper clamp . The value of the field will be changed when the Enter key is pressed. refer to the Series 90-30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual. You can also use the Tab key to change the value of a field.(-10)] / [+90 .(-100)] / [+100 .000 and +32.3 While the data zoom window is active. Press the Escape key to exit the data zoom window and return to your original position within the editor before the data zoom feature was begun.75 or 75% PV Percentage = (quantity . 5. Percentages greater than 999 are set to 999%. enter a new value in the New Value field. Most field values associated with explicit parameters can be changed. To change the value of any field (provided that field can be changed).(-10)] = 10/100 = . GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-17 . the function softkeys normally displayed at the top of the screen will be blank. Using this formula with the values displayed on the Data Zoom screen shown on the previous page results in a value of 50% for PV: PV = [0 .(-100)] = 100/200 = .min value). The minimum and maximum scaling values for the CV bar are the lower and upper clamp values.

The main block has a block declaration table. blocks can be called from the main block or from any block in the program. When that is done. Power is considered to flow from the left rail through a contact to the coil or function block connected to the right. Marker Variable Declarations Block Declarations Description To access the variable declaration table. Nicknames and reference descriptions can then be entered in the table. can be called from other blocks. move the cursor to this marker and press Zoom (F10). select Program Display/Edit (F1). From the main menu. A program can include more than one block of logic. 3-18 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . All logic is placed between these two markers. known as subroutine blocks. However. To enter logic. blocks must be declared before they are called.3 Section 2: Program Format Program elements are combined to form rungs of ladder logic. The screen displays a list of markers which represent parts of a program. Additional blocks. A ladder diagram has a symbolic power source. Blocks do not have block declaration tables. This table lists all blocks which are part of the complete program. Start/End of ProgramLogic The cursor keys are used to highlight the area of the program to be displayed or edited. place the cursor on the [ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] marker and press Insert (F1).

or a coil. it will not allow you to enter a rung with incorrect format or syntax. timers. Examples of an element include a normally open contact. however. Each rung may contain up to eight parallel lines. placed together to form rungs of logic. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-19 . math functions. a normally closed contact. and other functions. | _____ |%I0001 | | %Q0001 |——| |———| ADD_|—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )— | | INT | | | | |%I0017 —|I1 Q|—%Q0017 | | | | | | | CONST —|I2 | | +0004 |_____| | Structure of a Ladder Logic Rung The programmer allows great flexibility in entering program elements.3 Creating or Editing Program Logic Program logic consists of various elements such as relays. each line may have up to ten elements connected in series. or to place elements in parallel or series with one another. Horizontal and vertical links are used to carry power around an element. 1 | |——| | |——| | |——| | |——| | |——| | |——| | |——| | |——| | | 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 |—————| |—————|/|—————| |——————| |——————|/|——————|/|——————| |——————| |——————( )— | | | | | | | |—— | | | | | | | | | | | | |—————————— | | | | | | | | | | |—————————————————— | | | | ← vertical link | | | | |——————————————————————————— | | | | | | |———————————————————————————————————— | | | | |————————————————————————————————————————————— | | |—————————————————————————————————————————————————————— ↑ horizontal link Note Programs created using the Hand-Held Programmer must conform to this format to be totally compatible with Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software.

Ladder Logic Language Rules These guidelines should be followed when creating or editing ladder logic: 1. 4. | |——| |—————| |—————| |—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )— | |——| |—————| |—————|/|—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )— | In the next example. Function blocks cannot be tied directly into the power rail. If a rung has a transitional coil. A rung may contain up to eight coils. It must be the last instruction in the rung. jump. A call instruction may occupy columns 9 and 10. function. or vertical link. Contacts must be entered and cannot be left blank. may be used to satisfy rules 3 and 4 above. 3. forming only one rung. | |——| |——+——| |—————| |—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )— | | | +——| |—————|/|—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )— | The last element of a group of rung elements in series must be a coil. MCR. A rung must contain at least one contact before any coil. a jump. Note The ALW_ON contact. and there cannot be a coil in the same rung. two rung lines are connected by a vertical link. 2. or a function. shown below. A rung line is not required to have elements in each column. Short circuits are not allowed. it must be the only coil in the rung. There can be only one JUMP or MCR per rung. ALW_ON ——| |—— 3-20 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .3 The following example shows two separate rungs. The tenth position of a rung line is reserved for coils and jumps. which must be entered and accepted separately. Nothing may be to the right of a coil or a jump.

the rung line containing the %I0005 contact branches into the middle of the sub-expression (%I0002 OR (%I0003 AND %I0004)). A. There can be no branch around (above or below) a function in a rung. | |%I0001 %I0002 %Q0001 |——| |—————| |——+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )— | | | | ————— | —| FUNC|— | ————— | GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-21 . The following rung is not allowed. There can be no branches either into or out of another branch. The following examples contain improperly nested rungs. | |%I0001 %I0002 %Q0001 |——| |——+——| |——————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )— | | | | |%I0003 %I0004 | | +——| |——+——| |——+ | | |%I0005 | |——| |——————————+ | B. In this example. the rung line containing the %I0005 contact branches out of the middle of the sub-expression (%I0002 OR (%I0003 AND %I0004)). In this example. A rung must be composed of properly nested sub-expressions. | |%I0001 %I0002 %I0006 %Q0001 |——| |——+——| |——————————+——| |——+—————————————————————————————————————————————( )— | | | | | |%I0003 %I0004 | | | +——| |——+——| |——+ | | | | | |%I0005 | | +——| |——————————+ | 6.3 5.

| | _____ |%I0001 %I0002 | | %I0004 %Q0001 |——| |—————| |——+————————| FUNC|————————————————————————————————+——| |——————( )— | | | X | | | |%I0003 | | |%I0005 %Q0002 | +——| |———| | +——| |——————( )— | |_____| | 8. There can be no sub-paths starting from a vertical in a rung containing a function. The next rung is not allowed. too.3 7. the first (lowest rung line) parallel branch is executed first. it goes through contacts first. | | _____ |%I0001 %I0002 | | %Q0001 |——| |—————| |———————————| FUNC|————————————————————————————————+———————————( )— | | X | | |%I0001 %I0002 %I0003 | | | %Q0002 |——| |—————| |—————| |———| | +———————————( )— | |_____| | B. except for sub-paths leading directly to coils. Note that the rung in the last example above fails this rule. The first of multiple sub-paths is executed first. It also has a sub-path that does not lead directly to coils. The following rung is allowed because the first sub-path comes directly off the power rail and the second leads directly to coils. It has a sub-path starting from a vertical and leading into the function. A. execution order of rung elements is left-to-right. Within a group of parallel branches. In general. There can be no contacts following a function in a rung. 9. 3-22 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .

GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-23 . just enough characters for the entry to be unique. you can also specify a data type or reference address. Using Mnemonics Mnemonic entry enables you to enter an instruction by typing its mnemonic on the command line.” Note Program folders on write-protected floppy disks are automatically locked. While programming. For example. For information on annotation. By allowing entry of program elements with either function keys or mnemonics. Appendix D. it is not necessary to type the entire mnemonic. Remove the write-protect tab and unlock the folder using the lock/unlockcurrent program folder function (see chapter 7). Instruction Mnemonics. you can also display a list of mnemonics by pressing ALT-I. For some instructions. For example. reference descriptions. and rung comments) can be input either prior to logic entry or as each logic element is entered. instead of typing &ADD to enter the ADD function. to enter the ADD function. “Program Annotation. Rung comments can be entered as logic is created or inserted after the logic has been debugged. you could simply type &AD and press the Enter key. section 4. refer to chapter 3. Annotation (nicknames. both frequent and occasional users can be satisfied. you would type %ADD on the command line and press the Enter key. &ADD_DINT would enter the double precision integer version of the ADD function at the current cursor position in the rung.3 Section 3: Program Entry Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software was designed to allow for rapid entry of relay ladder diagram programs. lists the mnemonics of all program instructions. For example. For many functions.

3-24 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . press the desired function key. press Insert (F1). For example. Rungs are always inserted before the rung the cursor is on.3 Inserting Logic Elements 1. to enter a normally open contact. To enter a relay element at the cursor location. 2. you may enter the normally open contact by typing the mnemonic &NOCON on the command line and pressing the Enter key. Or. With the cursor on the [ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] marker. press F1 with the relay functions displayed for the softkeys at the top of the screen.

Entering the number before the reference type eliminates having to enter the % character.. %I1).g. Note The previous two operations can be combined into one by entering the reference address before pressing the contact function key. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-25 . ready for entry of the next element. For each reference. 1I). A reference may now be entered on the command line. Then.g.3 3. By entering the reference type and then the address (e. The software automatically places the entry in the correct order and format when you press the Enter key. You may also combine the previous step and this step into one operation by typing the mnemonic &NOCON I1 on the command line and pressing the Enter key. Some program functions require references that begin on a word or byte boundary.. By entering them in reverse order (e. or B. The Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software will automatically adjust the entries to be properly aligned. The cursor automatically advances to the next position. press the Enter key. There are two ways to do this: A. include both a user reference and location.

the rung is not accepted and the cursor is placed on the incorrect element for correction. 3-26 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . or the Plus (+) key on the numeric keypad. If there is an error in the rung. This process can be continued until a rung is completed and is ready to be accepted.3 4. A rung can be accepted by pressing the Enter key with the command line empty.

Or. use the relay function keys to enter the enabling logic. to select math functions.3 Inserting Functions Functions can be entered as easily as relay elements. For example. press Add (F1). a normally open contact with reference address %I1 is entered at the enabling logic. Select the function desired using the function keys. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-27 . you may enter the ADD function by typing the mnemonic: &ADD on the command line and pressing the Enter key. First. 3. Select the type of function using the shift-function keys. For example. In the first example screen shown below. press Shift-F3. 2. 1. to select the ADD function.

“Ladder Logic Program Elements. refer to chapter 3.” 3-28 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . simply type the value to be entered in this position on the command line (for example.” For information on zooming into entries. The Tab key can now be used to move the cursor to each parameter position around the function. section 1. When the cursor is on the first input. refer to chapter 3. %R0001 or 1R). 5. For information on entering comments. This process can be continued until the rung is completed and accepted. and press the Tab key or Enter key to place this entry into its position. section 6. “Rung Comments. Pressing the Tab key will move the cursor to the next entry position.3 4.

Pressing ALT-A a second time exits the insert function. Each rung is not saved to disk as it is accepted. ready for the next rung to be entered. this would be an empty rung. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-29 . In INSERT mode. 2. 1. To update the disk. Then. press Shift-F1 from the reference table to return to the same place in the program. Press the Escape key to attempt to accept the current rung. 3.) under the cursor by pressing ALT-F2. of a function block operand. Using the Cursor to Select a Reference Table You may go directly to the reference table of a reference (e. However. the cursor moves to the next rung. If the rung passes the software validity test. etc.3 Exiting Rung Entry There are three ways to exit from a rung. in INSERT mode a new rung is automatically opened below the newly created rung. After accepting a rung. Press ALT-A to exit the insert or edit function without modifying the existing ladder diagram logic. Confirmation is required. press the Escape key to exit the program editor and return to the Programming Software main menu. the original function key selections (shown below) are restored and the new logic is added to the program. Pressing ALT-A the first time will restore the rung to its original state.. an error message is displayed and the cursor is positioned on the location where the error occurred. or press ALT-U. Press the Enter key with the command line empty (or the Plus (+) key on the numeric keypad).g. If the logic fails the check. contact. This causes the same response as pressing the Escape key. Informational messages relating to the executability of the logic may also be displayed. coil.

A reference description can be used with or without a nickname. Program Annotation Type Nickname Description An optional 1.. and &.subroutineblock.to 7-character identifier. Note Files containing program annotation exist only in the folder. ReferenceDescription Comment 3-30 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . the local use of that nickname will remain in upper-case letters. A nickname is case-insensitive. however.g. %. an underscore. switch1). Longer blocks of text (rung explanations).program name. The first character of the nickname must be a letter.g. which can be used for each program reference. <. the global use of that nickname will be displayed in lower-case letters (e. On the screen. #. The comment can also be printed as part of the ladder logic. @. or the special characters +. not in the PLC.. >. the text of a comment can be read by pressing Zoom (F10) with the cursor located at the comment rung. When a global nickname (e. -.g. a numeral from 0 through 9. A comment consists of up to 2048 characters of text. An optional text description of up to 32 characters which is associated with a machine reference or with implicit identifiers (e. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software provides the following types of program annotation: Table 3-11. This text makes the program easier to read and to understand..3 Section 4: Program Annotation Annotation is optional explanatory text in a program.orJUMP/LABEL/MCR/ENDMCR). SWITCH1) has been reassigned in a subroutine. unless a global nickname has been reassigned in a subroutine. The characters used in a nickname may be a letter from A through Z. =.

GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-31 . and reference description by a space. The first way is to create a nickname while programming.3 Entering Nicknames and Reference Descriptions Nicknames and reference descriptions can be entered in two different ways. Use quotation marks before and after the reference description. The order of entry is not important. For example: >%I0001 name “Reference Description” Reference Description Space (required) Nickname Space (required) Machine reference Separate the reference. This is done by entering the nickname and/or reference description on the command line as the reference is used. A double colon (::) may also be inserted between the nickname and the reference description. quotation marks are not required around the reference description. nickname. If a double colon is used.

“Programmer Setup. and will show the way the description will look above a reference when printed or displayed in expanded mode. press the CTRL key and the Left or Right cursor key to move within the command line to correct the entry. The second and simplest way to enter nicknames and reference descriptions. It is also temporarily included in the variable declaration table for that program. As each entry is made in the variable declaration table. 3-32 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . the reference description for the current entry will appear in a window in the upper right portion of the table. however. Depending on which display mode is active.” for more information on specifying which modes will be displayed when ALT-N is pressed. the contents of the command line are not applied to the instruction and a message is displayed. if there are no conflicts. the display would look like this: | |%I0104 |——|/|——— | If you entered a nickname and (optionally) a reference description for the reference on the command line: %I0104 XWATMOV “’x’ APM waiting move” The display would look like this instead: | |XWATMOV |——|/|——— | Note Use ALT-N to toggle between reference address display. nickname display. While inserting or editing a rung. Then. reference description display. if you enter a nickname for a reference. and compressed rung display. the nickname is displayed above the program element. Refer to chapter 6. If a conflict or error occurs when you press the Enter key. this information is removed from the table. Temporary entries are marked with an asterisk. When the rung is accepted. If the rung is aborted before it is accepted. the nickname is permanently added to the table. it is displayed in the program instead of the reference. each 7 characters in length. Press CTRL-Home to recall the last entry made on the command line. For example. is to use the variable declaration table. you can press ALT-V to view the variable declaration table.3 When you press the Enter key. This window consists of 4 lines. if you entered the reference %I0104 for a normally closed contact in the logic. described in the next section.

If it does not have a local nickname. as shown in these examples: BLOCK A BLOCK B %L1 %L2 RESET RESET When using a reference address in a program block. Note 5000 declarations (variables and identifiers) are allowed in the program’s _MAIN variable declaration table. To enhance performance.g.3 Section 5: Variable Declaration Table Program annotation can be entered in a program using the variable declaration table. the software then looks at the reserved nicknames (e. Nicknames in the program’s _MAIN (global) variable declaration table are known to all subroutine blocks. You may enter nicknames in the program or any subroutine. the software retrieves the nickname from the program’s _MAIN table. Each subroutine block may have its own local use of nicknames. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-33 .. %S0001). Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software retrieves the nickname from the local table. The same reference may have different local nicknames in different subroutine blocks. performance in the program editor may be affected. as described in this section.02 or later) or SMARTDRV may be used. FST_SCN. and 256 declarations (variables and identifiers) are allowed in each subroutine block’s variable declaration table. Each table is always arranged in sorted reference address order. As more nicknames are used. 736K of Expanded Memory (LIM/EMSVersion 3. If the nickname is not in the program’s _MAIN table. Nicknames in a subroutine block’s (local) declaration table are known only to that subroutine. as shown in these examples: BLOCK A BLOCK B %R1 %R1 Light_1 Light_2 Two subroutine blocks may have the same nickname for different references.

3-34 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . 2. Press Zoom (F10).3 Displaying the Variable Declaration Table To display the variable declaration table: 1. Move the cursor to highlight the [ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] marker.

press the Escape key to exit the window. cannot be edited. by pressing ALT-V (ALT-V once for local variables. You cannot insert new entries on this display screen. Entries temporarily listed (those created or modified during the current editing session) in the variable declarations table can be easily identified by an asterisk (*).3 3. Variable declarations may be viewed in a window on the screen. For example. however. LABELs. This table lists the program name. without leaving the insert or edit function. MCRs. The variable declarations displayed in this window. Use the Up/Down cursor keys or Page Up/Down keys to scroll through the entries in this window. then. you could assign an identifier description to the program name. and subroutine blocks declared in this folder. you can edit entries already displayed. ALT-V twice for global variables). JUMPs. ENDMCRs. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-35 . however. 4. The identifier table can be displayed from this screen by pressing Switch (F10).

press the Enter key. The variable declaration table is automatically sorted each time you press the Enter key to accept a new entry. To exit INSERT mode. 5. simply press the Enter or Tab key and the next reference in sequence (in this example. IN_REG). 3-36 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 . or the Plus (+) key on the numeric keypad. Enter a nickname (e. press the Escape key. Only 28 characters of the 32-character reference description are displayed in the window. You can continue this process until all references have been defined. press Escape again. 4.g. 2.g. %R2 or 2R). GFK-0466L 6. and then press the Enter or Tab key to move to the Nickname field. To enter a nickname for the next reference. Press Insert (F1). The cursor then moves to the Reference field on the next line.to 32-character description of this reference. The cursor will move to the Nickname field. To accept this entry. %R0002) will be inserted into the Reference field. You may want to add extra space in the reference description in order to have the words correctly separated in the window. Enter a 1. simply type in this reference and press the Enter key. To exit the variable declaration table and return to the logic entry screen.. The Logicmaster software breaks reference descriptions on boundaries after every seventh character for display in a 4-line x 7-character window.. A field will appear in the reference column. 3. Enter the reference in this field (e. and then press the Enter or Tab key to move to the Reference Description field. 7.3 Entering Variable Declarations To enter new nicknames and reference descriptions as you go: 1. To enter a nickname for a different reference.

follow these steps: D D D D Enter the line you wish to copy in the standard way. Press the Copy function key (F5 as can be seen in the sample shown below). This editing feature is particularly useful when you are creating a program that has several similar variables using similar nicknames and reference descriptions as in the example shown on this page. After you press Enter at the end of the reference description. The line you copied moves down one. First enter a new reference number.3 Copying a Variable Declaration You can copy text from the NICKNAME and REFERENCE DESCRIPTION of another variable.e. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-37 . the upward cursor mover key) once to move the cursor back to the line you just entered. and a copy of it appears where your cursor is located (awaiting your modifications).. To use this feature. then edit the nickname and description. press the Escape key to accept that variable and change the selections available through the function keys. Press the Up Arrow key (i. The sample shown on the next page shows the screen that appears immediately after pressing the Copy key (F5) from the screen shown above.

e. i. you can use Ctrl-Right Arrow. you would only need to key over the last digit on both the nickname and the description. You will also need to assign a unique NICKNAME and REFERENCE DESCRIPTION. Remember. If you just press the Right Arrow key to advance to the NICKNAME field.3 Notice that the cursor is resting in the REFERENCE (i.e. in the example shown above.. the reference number from the line you copied will drop in by default which will force you to change it to an unused number when you press Enter at the end of that line..g. reference number) field so that you can assign a unique reference number to it. hold the Control key down and press the Right Arrow (or Right cursor key). Then key over or add to the text you want to change. Note Make sure you enter a unique reference number. 3-38 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . to move the cursor across the letters or words you want to keep.e..

To undo the delete. cut. include. enter n on the command line. Press Search (F4) to display the search function window. press the Enter key. Another way to delete entries from the table is to use the Select (F1) softkey to select the variable declaration you wish to delete. and press Goto (F8).” Note You may not paste or include variable declarations if a reference address in the paste buffer or include file is already in the variable declaration table. can also be used to select. Cut/Pasting Variable Declarations The region functions. to move the cursor to the first variable declaration. Repeat this procedure until all the entries you wish to delete have been removed from the table. Enter either the reference or its associated nickname into the Search for field. “Rung Edit. you cannot undo a deletion made within that table. cursor keys. or Tab key to move from field to field. described in the rung edit section of this chapter. For more information on these functions. However. 2. Type over the entry as needed. Place the cursor at the declaration to be changed.3 Editing Variable Declarations To change the content of a variable declaration: 1. cut. Use the Enter key. 3. press ALT-A before leaving the table. enter 1 on the command line. write. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-39 . and press Goto (F8). To move to the nth variable declaration. and delete variable declarations. Using Goto The Goto (F8) function key may be used to move the cursor within the variable declaration table. Searching for Variable Declarations The variable declaration table may be searched for a reference or nickname. it cannot be searched for a reference description. and delete variable declarations. write. refer to chapter 3. You cannot enter a reference description in this field. section 9.” Deleting Variable Declarations To remove one or more entries from the variable declaration table. Press the Escape key to accept the changes and terminate the editing session. section 9. then press the Delete (F6) edit softkey. you may edit the variable declaration table before the paste or include operation to eliminate any reference address conflicts. refer to chapter 3. After changing the entry. paste. Once you leave a table. and press Edit (F2). The region functions. For example. To initiate a search in the variable declaration table: 1. For more information on these functions. press the Enter key or the Plus (+) key on the numeric keypad to accept the changes and move to the next table entry to continue editing. described in the rung edit section of this chapter. place the cursor at the first declaration to be deleted and press Delete (F3) or ALT-D. Then. include. can also be used to select. 2. “Rung Edit. paste.

Enter either the reference or its associated nickname into the Search for field. For information on automatically inserting references. refer to chapter 3. You cannot insert new entries on this display screen. The identifier table in the _MAIN program contains the program name. To initiate a search in the identifier table: 1. Then. press the Enter key. The program name cannot have its identifier edited. MCRs. section 10. You cannot enter a reference description in this field. All other identifiers and descriptions can be edited.3 Automatically Inserting References References which do not have nicknames or reference descriptions can be automatically inserted into the variable declaration table as the program is being developed. A subroutine block can have its identifier edited if it is not called.” Viewing the Identifier Table The identifier table may be displayed by pressing Switch (F10) from the variable declaration table. 3-40 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . The identifier table in a subroutine block contains JUMPs. and ENDMCRs. Then. The identifier table may be searched for a reference or nickname. and ENDMCRs. LABELs. MCRs. 2. it cannot be searched for a reference description. subroutine block names. “Editor Options. at a later time. JUMPs. LABELs. Press Search (F4) to display the search function window. you can go to the variable declaration editor and enter just the annotation.

Move the cursor to highlight the shown on page 3-34. make sure that your SNF is in the same directory as the program into which you are going to import. For information about SNF format. Press region (F9). the SNF files must adhere to the standards discussed in Appendix I of this manual. Exporting an SNF from the Variable Declarations Table gives you the ability to use the exported file with CIMPLICITYr and third party operator interfaces. 3. see Appendix I. The steps for importing and exporting files that use the SNF format are shown here. [ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] marker as 4. 2. If your file does adhere to those standards. Your screen display will change to the one shown on the following page. Press Zoom (F10). Before you begin the next steps (which are all from within the programming software). Importing an SNF into the Variable Declarations Table gives you the ability to define nicknames ahead of time in a spreadsheet program. 3-41 GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing . then follow these steps to import: 1.3 Importing to and Exporting from the Variable Declarations Table Comma Separated Variable (CSV) Format For Logicmaster uses an extension of the industry-standard Comma Separated Variable (CSV) format called Shared Name File (SNF) format. Importing SNF Formatted Files When importing Shared Name File (SNF) format files.

The path is optional because in Step 1 you ensured that the SNF was in the same directory as the folder.3 5. You will see the message shown in the following sample screen. Press import (F7). As long as your SNF follows the guidelines discussed in Appendix I. it will import correctly into the Variable Declarations Table. 3-42 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Type the file name. 6.

When exporting your Variable Declarations Table to SNF format. Press region (F9). For information about SNF format. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-43 . Logicmaster will put the Variable Declarations into Shared Name File (SNF) format. 1. The selections at the top of the screen will change to the ones shown below. 2.3 Exporting SNF (CSV) Formatted Files SNF is an extension of the industry-standard Comma Separated Variable (CSV) format. Move the cursor to highlight the shown on page 3-34. Press Zoom (F10). refer to page 3-41. [ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] marker as 3. refer to Appendix I of this manual. For more information about CSV and SNF formats.

the file will save in the same directory where your program resides. Then press the Cursor Down key (the Down Arrow key) until you have highlighted the portion of the Variable Declaration Table you wish to export. 5.) If you do not enter a path. Press export (F8). The selected region will appear in reverse video as represented in the sample shown below. then type the name you wish to call the SNF that Logicmaster will create from your Variable Declarations. 3-44 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . (The recommended method of nomenclature is to use the same name for your SNF as the folder from which it came. Refer to Appendix I for more information about SNF format.3 4. You do not have to add an extension.SNF. Press select (F1). Logicmaster will automatically add the extension .

press Enter. Press the Escape key after seeing the “Export completed” to return to the program.3 6. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-45 . 7. The words “Export completed” will appear in the upper left portion of your screen just below the menu. After typing in a name.

3-46 Press the Escape key to accept the rung and exit INSERT mode. Press F8 to select the COMMENT function. Release 1 and Release 2 of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software permitted two or more comments to be associated with one block of text. Now. Inserting a Rung Comment To insert rung comments. This allows you to copy a COMMENT instruction by cutting and pasting the text.3 Section 6: Rung Comments Each COMMENT instruction has a unique text block associated with it. write the entire block contents to a side file and delete all the logic. The text for any COMMENT instruction is edited independently of any other COMMENT instruction. or use the mnemonic by typing: &COMMENT on the command line and pressing the Enter key. GFK-0466L Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 . “Variable Declaration Table. Pasting/including a comment will create a copy of the text block for each COMMENT instruction pasted. section 5. 2. 1. The screen should appear as shown below: 3. you can edit the pasted text. each of the duplicate comment locations will have its own copy of the text. Press Insert (F1) and then Control (Shift-F9) to select the control functions. Then. then. include the side file into the empty block. move the cursor to the rung you wish to insert a comment before.” for information on cutting and pasting variable declarations. Refer to chapter 3. If you have such duplicate comments and want to separate them.

Position the cursor at the end of the comment text. which allows you to input your rung description. Move the cursor up one page. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-47 .3 Adding Text Text can be entered into the COMMENT instruction by positioning the cursor on the COMMENT instruction and pressing Zoom (F10). This is a simple full-screen editor. Up to 2048 characters of text are permitted. The available keys in the comment editor include: Key Cursor keys Page Up key Page Down key Insert key Delete key Backspace key Home key End key Description Move the cursor within the rung. Position the cursor on the first character of the first line of the comment text. Move the cursor down one page. Delete the character to the left of the cursor position. Change the text editing mode (INSERT or REPLACE). Delete the character at the cursor position.

If \F4 is not specified.3 User-Defined Footers in Listings You can define up to four (4) lines of text to be printed at the bottom of each listing page generated by the Logicmaster 90-30 Programmer printing utility. If the \F4 directive is specified without text. etc. To use create a footer for a program file. subtitle and border directives (\T . but each must be on a separate line and must be at the beginning of the comment text in which they are entered.) A sample of this is shown below: 3. Note Footer 4 supercedes the standard LM90 listing page footer line. (You can enter up to four footers in this manner. press the Escape key to return to your program and accept that rung. Regardless of the order entered. using F1. When you are finished with your footers. and F4 as the footer line directives for footers 1 through 4 respectively. Footer 2 before Footer 3. t 3-48 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . and \B respectively). key in \F1 (for Footer 1). the standard Logicmaster 90 footer is printed. the LM90 footer line will not be printed. Specify these lines of text using comment directives similar to the existing title. then key in the text you wish to appear in the footer.” On a separate line at the beginning of the comment text. Follow the steps described on the previous pages to create a “COMMENT. F2. \S. You can enter them in any order. F3. they will always print with Footer 1 before Footer 2. 2. follow these steps: 1.

the comment containing the user-defined footers must be the first instruction in the main block of the program. but without text. For a 132-column listing. you can enter up to 132 characters. footer lines will be printed on each page of the listing until they are changed with user-defined footer line directives in subsequent comment text. that footer line will no longer be printed. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-49 . For an 80-column listing. Footer line text less than the page width is centered to the page. If text for a specified footer line has been previously defined and that footer line directive is specified again. To start user-defined footers on the pages prior to the logic.3 The following text shows the footer that resulted from the comment/footer settings shown on the previous page: Issued by: DB Introduced: EC Number: 14012 Approved: LM Latest: EC Number: 14013 xxxx This is a sample program xxxx Program: STATMNG C:\LM90\STATMNG Block: _MAIN The following restrictions should be observed: D D D D D D Any blank footer lines will be printed in the listing as blanks. Once specified. you can enter text up to 80 characters in length.

as instructed below: 1.3 Creating Borders To make comments stand out in program printouts. then Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software prints asterisks by default. 3. 6 | | EMSTOP START CLAMPED %I0073 EMERGST +———| |——+——| |——+——| |——+——| |—————————————————————————————————————————————————( ) | | | 29 | | |EMERGST|SPN MTR| | +——|/|——+——|/|——+ | 6 8 | The border of question marks shown in this example will be used for all subsequent rung comments in the program. The software will automatically create the border using any character you enter. enter \B followed by the space character. 12/2/93 11:49 GE FANUC LOGICMASTER 90-30 DOCUMENTATION TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE Page 3 | << RUNG 4 STEP #0049 >> | | (???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????) | (? The following logic rung enables automatic mode when all enabling ?) | (? conditions are met. If the comment text does not contain \B followed by the ASCII character for the border. borders can be printed around them. unless it is changed or the border is deleted. as lowercase alphanumeric characters are also recognized) and an ASCII character to be used as the border. 2. ?) | (???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????) | | <<RUNG 5 STEP #0050 >> Cross reference for AUTO | |/| 5. The ASCII character must be the next character after the B. 3-50 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . At the beginning of the comment on a line by itself. entering \B? would create a border of question marks around the outside of the text. enter \B (or \b. For example. 7 | | AUTOPB LISUP UNISUP %Q0012 RSTAHPB EMERGST %Q0006 COOLANT AUTO +——| |—————| |—————| |—————| |——+——|/|—————|/|—————|/|—————|/|——————————————————( ) | 9 10 19 | | AUTO | +———|/|—————————————————————————+ | 5 | | << RUNG 6 STEP #0060 >> Cross reference for EMERGST | | | 5. To print out a comment with no border. Create the text for the comment.

Create the text for the comment. \B. On the first line of the comment.3 Starting a New Page of Comments To print a new page of comments: 1. or \S must be on separate lines. the subdirectory or folder. Enter \P or \p. but they can be in any order. C. Longer text can be included in printouts (but not displayed in program function or mode) using an annotation text file. 2. This will be printed as the beginning of a new page. \T or \t with the new title (up to 62 characters) on the same line. 3-51 GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing . B. A. 2. At the place in the program where the new title and subtitle should begin. The text following the \P character will then begin on a new page. Continue editing the program. or exit to MS-DOS. Enter text to the point where the text from the other file should begin. The new title and subtitle will appear on each subsequent page. as described below: 1. enter the following: A. \T. Give the file the file name in the comment. This title and subtitle will appear on every page. \T or \S alone can be specified. as lowercase alphanumeric characters are also recognized. After exiting the programmer. B. unless changed as described below: 1. on a line by itself. create a text file using any MS-DOS compatible software package. Move the cursor to the beginning of a new line and enter \I or \i. the drive followed by a colon. Those lines must be first in a comment. Create the comment as described on the previous page. as shown in this example: \I d:\text\commnt1 The drive designation is not necessary if the file is located on the same drive as the program folder. and place it on the drive specified in the comment. \S or \s with the new subtitle (also up to 62 characters) on the same line. Creating Longer Comments The maximum number of characters that can be included in a comment is 2048. with text before and after each one. Printing a Title When the printer output is defined as described in chapter 9. 2. a title and subtitle for the printout are created. The \P can be used several times within a comment. enter a comment in the logic. and the file name.

C. mode A to B). nicknames off. Reference descriptions on.” enables you to specify which modes are displayed when you press ALT-N. 7 screen lines per rung line. Compressed rung mode. nicknames on. Note The mode identifier letters A. 3 screen lines per rung line. Reference descriptions on. 3-52 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Display all mode shows reference description information in four 7-character segments at each occurrence of an identifier or reference address in the program editor. The Variable Declaration Editor displays a 4 x 7 character window with the reference description for the current entry. These view modes range from showing only rung references to showing reference names and reference descriptions in an expanded rung form (display all mode). D. Refer to the information on “View Modes Setup (ALT-N)” in chapter 6.. Mode A is the default mode. the display cycles back to mode A.g. the editor display will move to the next display mode. The five display modes are listed below. nicknames off. “Programmer Setup. Reference descriptions off. Each time ALT-N is pressed. Display All Mode A B C D E Description Reference descriptions off. the mode changes to the next mode (e. “Programmer Setup. nicknames on. and E are used for reference in this document only. You can also view the maximum amount of program logic on a screen by selecting a compressed rung mode. If ALT-N is pressed while mode E is displayed. Each time ALT-N is pressed. Lines / Rung 3 screen lines per rung line. described in chapter 6. 1 screen line per rung line. Note The display mode (ALT-N) cannot be changed during RUNG EDIT or RUNG INSERT mode.” in order to select the modes displayed when ALT-N is pressed. 7 screen lines per rung line.3 Section 7: Changing the Display Mode The view mode setup function. B.

Display Mode B: Reference descriptions off. nicknames on. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-53 .3 Display Mode A: Reference descriptions off. nicknames off.

Display Mode D: Reference descriptions on.3 Display Mode C: Reference descriptions on. 3-54 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . nicknames on. nicknames off.

Display Mode D without status lines (press ALT-E to remove the status lines): GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-55 .3 Display Mode E: Compressed rung mode.

3 The following screen shows how the reference description breaks within the 4-line x 7-character window when the cursor is on %I0105. 3-56 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .

The number corresponding to the Hand Held Programmer ’s subroutine number. Subroutines are declared through the block declaration editor. Once you have zoomed into the block to enter logic. A graphic box containing a subroutine name of up to 7 alphanumeric characters. Subroutine blocks are not available for the Series 90-20 PLC nor for Micro PLCs. this field is blank. Initially. place the cursor on the [ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ] marker. The language the subroutine was programmed in. up to 64 subroutine block declarations are allowed. (See screen capture at top of the next page for an example of the error message. This indicator is only displayed if the block is not executable. To create or modify subroutine declarations. A 32-character descriptive explanation. Subroutine block declarations consist of: D D D D A label identifying the block as being used with a subroutine instruction. For 90-30 PLCs. It will remain empty until you have entered some logic for the subroutine. An indicator that it has errors. press Zoom (F10) to display the block declarations screen.3 Section 8: Subroutine Blocks Subroutine blocks in Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software provide structured programming for the Series 90-30 PLC.) 3-57 D D GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing . the letters LD (ladder diagram language) are displayed after LANG: beside the block name. Then.

a box containing seven question marks (???????) will be displayed for the subroutine block. or press the Escape key to exit editing. Use the Tab. place the cursor at the declaration to be changed and press Edit (F2). or the cursor keys to move the cursor. Previous. enter the block name on the command line. and press Insert (F1).3 The following screen shows an example of two subroutine block declarations. Back Tab. Adding Subroutine Block Declarations To add a subroutine block declaration. the next available Hand Held Programmer number (from 1 to 64) is assigned to it. Editing Subroutine Block Declarations To change a subroutine block declaration. or Next key. one without errors and one with errors. When the subroutine block declaration is inserted in the software. place the cursor at the desired location. If you press F1 with the command line blank. press the Enter key (or Plus (+) key on the numeric keypad) to move to the next table entry and continue editing. A 32-character explanation can also be inserted at this time. Type over the entry as needed. When you leave the subroutine block declarations. You can also update the program folder while working on the screen by pressing ALT-U. After changing the entry. 3-58 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . any changes made are automatically stored to the current program folder. Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to scroll the display up and down.

and press Goto (F8). or enter &CALL to search for all subroutine CALL instructions. Using Goto The Goto (F8) function key may be used to move the cursor. Enter the name of the subroutine block in the Search for field. to move the cursor to the first subroutine block declaration. and press the Enter key. you must have the Block Declaration screen displayed on your programmer. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-59 . enter the name of the subroutine block in the Search for field. place the cursor on the block name and press Zoom (F10). place the cursor at the declaration to be deleted and press Delete (F3). Then. You may also go to a subroutine block by simply entering the block name on the command line and pressing Goto (F8). and press the Enter key. To delete a subroutine block and declaration. press Search (F4). To move to a particular subroutine block declaration. Zooming into Subroutine Block Logic To display the subroutine block logic. enter 1 on the command line. You can search for a subroutine CALL instruction from either the logic or the Block Declaration screen by pressing Search (F4).3 Deleting Subroutine Block Declarations A subroutine block declaration can be deleted if there are no CALL instructions to that subroutine block in the program logic. Searching for Subroutine Block Declarations In order to search for a subroutine block declaration. Deleting a subroutine block also deletes its associated logic. You can edit the logic on this screen. For example. and press Goto (F8). set the Scope to LOCAL. Then. enter the number of that declaration on the command line.

A search or search and replace function may be performed on a view-locked subroutine. you cannot zoom into that subroutine. refer to chapter 3. For more information on search and search/replace.” Folders that contain locked subroutines may be cleared or deleted. the locked subroutine is skipped and the search continues from the next subroutine. For more information on program folders. In addition to the locking capability. (Continue/Quit) For edit-locked subroutines: Cannot write to locked block. “Program Folders. (Continue/Quit) You may continue or abort the search. instead of logic: For view-locked subroutines: Found in locked block. these blocks remain locked when the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software copy.3 Locking/Unlocking Subroutines The block locking feature allows you to lock subroutines.” 3-60 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . backup. section 11. If a folder contains locked subroutines. refer to chapter 7. Four types of locks are available: Type of Lock View Edit Perm View Perm Edit Description Once locked. and restore folder functions are used. unless they are permanently locked. The subroutine is permanently locked and cannot be unlocked. If you decide to continue. the search is aborted. the information in the subroutine cannot be edited. Once locked. one of the following messages is displayed. locked subroutines can also be unlocked. The subroutine is permanently locked and cannot be unlocked. If the target of the search is found in a view-locked subroutine. If you decide to quit. “Search Function.

move the cursor to the desired subroutine and press Lock (F5) to display the Lock/Unlock Block screen. The subroutine name is included as part of the title on this screen. Move the cursor to the [ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ] marker and press Zoom (F10).3 Locking a Subroutine To lock a subroutine: 1. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-61 . In the block declaration editor. 2.

If you enter Y (Yes) after the confirmation prompt. Move the cursor to the Password field. the locking process begins. Then. press the Enter key. the message “Block already locked” is displayed in the message area and the screen remains displayed. press ALT-A. Specify a password of up to four characters to lock a subroutine. Once a password is set. If you try to zoom into the subroutine. The software will prompt you to confirm the locking process with the message “Is logic block to be locked?(Y/N)”. S PERMVIEWLOCKorPERMEDITLOCK: The subroutine is permanently locked and cannot be unlocked once it is locked. If a lowercase letter is entered. When the desired value is displayed in the Lock State field. enter the value in the LockState field. press the Escape key. it is converted to an uppercase letter. If you try to lock a subroutine that is already locked. If a lock is set on the current subroutine. the same password must be entered before the subroutine can be unlocked. Once the subroutine is successfully locked. To set the lock. 6. 3-62 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Validcharacters include A through F and 0 through 9. If you try to edit the subroutine. the Lock State field is set to UNLOCK when the screen is displayed. Password 3. and the subroutine cannot be changed. 4. Use the Tab key to view the values for this field: S UNLOCK: The current subroutine is unlocked. Initially. the error message “Edit denied because the block is locked” is displayed. then the LockState field is set to the type of lock imposed on the block. and enter a password. the Password field is empty. To quit the Lock/Unlock Block screen. the type of lock and password are written to the subroutine lock header. Entering N (No) aborts the process. and the Password field is cleared. If no lock is set on the current subroutine. S VIEWLOCK : A view lock is set on the subroutine. For PERMVIEWLOCK and PERMEDITLOCK. a message is displayed in the message area of the screen and the field remains active. the message “Block locked” is displayed in the message area of the screen. and you cannot zoom into the subroutine. the Password field is ignored. S EDITLOCK : An edit lock is set on the subroutine. press the Enter key. To restore the value of the fields to their original values. If you try to enter an incorrect value or leave the field empty. The characters of the password are displayed as they are typed into the Password field. the error message “Zoom denied because the block is locked” is displayed.3 Field Lock State Description Specify the operation to be performed on the current subroutine. Passwords are not required and cannot be used with permanently locked blocks. 5.

the LockState field indicates the type of lock. If the current subroutine is locked. the Password field is cleared. Then. Move the cursor to the Password field. To restore the value of the fields to their original values. the LockState field is set to UNLOCK and the Password field contains the password of the block just unlocked. unless it is permanently view locked or permanently edit locked. 5. 6. press the Enter key. the error message “Incorrect password given for unlock” is displayed in the message area of the screen. an asterisk is displayed in the field. the subroutine is unlocked and the message “Block unlocked” is displayed in the message area of the screen. Move the cursor to the desired subroutine block and press Lock (F5) to display the Lock/Unlock Block screen. and enter the correct password.3 Unlocking a Subroutine A previously view-locked or edit-locked subroutine may be unlocked in the block declaration editor. As each character of the password is typed. the password is cleared in the subroutine header. To quit the Lock/Unlock Block screen. The Password field is initially empty. the subroutine is not unlocked. 4. 1. If the subroutine is not locked. and the Lock/Unlock Block screen remains displayed. Once the subroutine is unlocked. 3. press ALT-A. The current subroutine name is included as part of the title on this screen. press the Escape key. In addition. the field is set to UNLOCK. The password you entered is compared with the password last set. 2. To unlock the subroutine. If the passwords do not match. If the two passwords are identical. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-63 . set the value of the LockState field to UNLOCK.

3
Permanently Locking a Subroutine
In addition to VIEWLOCK and EDITLOCK, there are two types of permanent locks. If a PERMVIEWLOCK lock is set, all zooms into a subroutine are denied. If a PERMEDITLOCK lock is set, all attempts to edit the block are denied. Therefore, passwords are not required and cannot be used with permanently locked subroutines.

Warning
Permanent locks differ from the regular VIEWLOCK and EDITLOCK in that once set, they cannot be removed.

Once a PERMEDITLOCK is set, it can only be changed to a PERMVIEWLOCK; you cannot unlock the block first and then set a PERMVIEWLOCK. A PERMVIEWLOCK cannot be changed to any other type of lock. When you press the Enter key to initiate the locking, the software will prompt you to confirm any permanent lock.

Displaying the Lock Status of the Subroutine
The display zoom level function (ALT-X) can be used to display the lock status of the subroutine in the block declaration editor. Move the cursor to the desired block, and press ALT-X. The following example screen shows a block that is locked for view.

3-64

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Periodic Subroutines
Model 340 and higher CPUs support the use of a periodic subroutine. A periodic subroutine is a single subroutine with a unique name in the form 1Tiiii, which will execute periodically during RUN mode. If a subroutine with this name is present in the PLC when it transitions from STOP to RUN mode, this subroutine will be executed at periodic intervals while the PLC is in RUN mode. If a RUN MODE STORE is performed, a periodic subroutine will be stopped while the PLC is in PAUSE mode. (For more information on RUN MODE STORE and PAUSE mode, refer to chapter 8, “Program Utilities.”)

Note
Only Model 340 and higher Series 90 -30 PLCs support use of a periodic subroutine. More specifically, Model 341 CPUs, Version 4.20 or later, all Model 340 CPUs, and all 350 and higher CPUs support periodic subroutines. You can specify a periodic subroutine by giving the block a name in the form: 1T0001, where the four digits after the T indicate the number of time intervals between executions of the block. If the leading zeros of the interval are not specified, the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software will fill them in so that the total number of characters is six. If the time interval specified is too small for execution of the subroutine and the rest of the normal PLC sweep, the PLC watchdog timer may be activated. The time per interval is .001 seconds. The maximum time allowed between executions is 10 milliseconds. When you enter a subroutine name with the correct format for a periodic subroutine, the timebase, interval value, and “INTR” will be displayed beside the subroutine’s name and number, instead of “SUBR.”

t

Executing a Periodic Subroutine
Each execution of the periodic subroutine will occur interval seconds after the previous start, as shown below:

t start < end interval start > end

>

Note
The latency for the periodic subroutine (i.e., the maximum interval between the time the periodic subroutine should have executed and the time it actually executes) can be around .35 milliseconds if there is no PCM, CMM, or ADC module in the main rack. If there is a PCM, CMM or ADC module in the main rack — even if it is not configured or used — the latency can be almost 2.25 milliseconds. For that reason, use of the periodic subroutine with PCM-based products is not recommended.
GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-65

3
Restrictions on Use of the Periodic Subroutine

D D D D

Only one periodic subroutine per program is allowed. Periodic subroutines cannot be called by the main program or by another subroutine. If you call another subroutine from the periodic subroutine, the subroutine being called must not be called from anywhere else in the program. If you attempt to load a program with a periodic subroutine into a version of Logicmaster 90-30 software prior to Release 4.01, you will not be able to display or edit the program. Likewise, you cannot store a periodic subroutine to a PLC prior to Version 4.20. If a DOIO function block whose I/O reference range includes an intelligent module is executed within a periodic subroutine, communication with the module may be lost. Timer (TMR, ONDTR, and OFDTR) function blocks will not execute properly within a periodic subroutine. A DOIO function block within a periodic subroutine whose reference range includes references assigned to a Smart I/O Module (HSC, APM, Genius, etc.) will cause the CPU to lose communication with the module. The FST_SCN and LST_SCN contacts (%S1 and %S2) will have an indeterminate value during execution of the periodic subroutine. A periodic subroutine cannot call or be called by other subroutines. The PID function block depends in its implementation on the sweep time of the main program. Consequently, it will not function properly when called from a periodic subroutine.

D D

D

3-66

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998

GFK-0466L

3

Section 9: Rung Edit
After a logic program has been entered, there is always a need to make modifications, either to correct logic errors or to add new capabilities. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software has an array of features to make this process easy. The same function keys used to initially enter a rung are available to insert new rungs. In addition, there are function keys to edit or modify existing rungs.

Function Key
F1

Function
Insert

Description
Add one or more rungs to the program. Selecting the insert function opens a new space above the rung where the cursor is positioned and displays the Edit Rung keys, which are used to select program elements. This allows you to create a new rung. Edit the rung at the cursor location. The edit function activates the current rung, enabling you to modify that rung. When F2 is pressed, the Edit Rung keys are displayed at the top of the screen. These keys are used to select program elements. Initiateword-for-word instruction changes using the rung edit softkeys instead of mnemonics. Locate a program element. Access coil checking and other editor options. Go to the specified rung. To use this feature, type the rung number you want to go to, then press F8. Access additional rung edit softkeys. Go to a more detailed level. To return to the original level, press the Escape key.

F2

Edit

F3 F4 F7 F8 F9 F10

Modify Search Option Goto More Zoom

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-67

3
Pressing More (F9) displays these additional rung edit softkeys.

Function Key
F1

Function
Select

Description
Select or deselect a rung or group of rungs. Rungs or declarations may also be deselected by pressing F1 again, by pressing ALT-A, or by pressing the Escape key. After deselecting the rungs or declarations, the message “Select mode cancelled” is displayed on the message line and the cursor remains on the last rung or declaration that had been selected. Delete the selected section of rungs or declarations from a program and put them in the cut buffer. After a cut operation, the cursor will appear on the rung or declaration immediately after the selected region. Insert previously cut rungs or declarations from the cut buffer. Cut rungs and declarations may be pasted any number of times, until they are replaced by new information in the cut buffer, or until the program editor is exited. Insert previously written rungs or declarations back into the original program, or into any other program. Written rungs and declarations may be included any number of times. Copy the selected section of rungs or declarations from a program into a special file. After a write, the cursor remains on the last rung or declarationselected. Delete the rung at the cursor location or a range of selected rungs. Enter the rung number on the command line, and then press F8 to “go to” a specific rung in the ladder diagram logic. You can also specify a subroutine number and rung number in the subroutine to “go to” a specific rung in that subroutine. Return to the first level of rung edit softkeys. Zoom into the item the cursor is on.

F2

Cut

F3

Paste

F4

Include

F5

Write

F6 F8

Delete Goto

F9 F10

More Zoom

Note
The function keys listed above can also be applied to the variable declaration table. Using the file write function, a group of reference descriptions can be written to a file to be used by another program.

3-68

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Editing a Rung
When either the insert, edit, or modify function is activated by pressing F1, F2, or F3, respectively, the following softkey selections are displayed at the top of the screen.

These function keys provide access to the instructions required to edit ladder diagram rungs.

Note
Only one rung is active at a time in either the insert or edit function. Each rung must be completed and accepted by the software before the next rung can be edited.

Entering Insert or Edit Mode
Enter either INSERT or EDIT mode by: 1. Pressing F1 to enter INSERT mode. In this mode, the new rung is inserted before the rung on which the cursor is positioned. Therefore, make sure the cursor is on the rung following the location for the new rung before you press F1. Pressing F2 to enter EDIT mode. Then, move the cursor to the rung element you want to change.

2.

Entering Instructions
Select instructions by: 1. After entering Insert or Edit mode (as discussed above), typing the mnemonic for the instruction, preceded by an ampersand character (&). (Refer to appendix D, Instruction Mnemonics, for a listing of the mnemonics for Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software.) Then, press the Enter key. After entering Insert or Edit mode (as discussed above), pressing the Shift key and a function key to display a specific group of instructions. Then, select a specific instruction within that group by pressing its function key.

2.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-69

3
In this example, the ADD function is selected by typing the mnemonic: &ADD on the command line.

After pressing the Enter key, the screen adjusts to display the complete new instruction and the ADD function is inserted.

3-70

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Entering/Modifying Data Types
Some instructions support different data types. To change ADD_INT to ADD_DINT, press Types (F10) with the math functions still displayed on the screen. Then, press DINT (F9) with the cursor on the ADD function block to create the following screen. An alternative way to select ADD_DINT is to type &ADD_DINT on the command line, and then press the Enter key.

Moving the Cursor within a Rung
Use the keys listed in the table below to move within the rung. Key
Cursor keys Tab and Shift-Tab Home key End key Insert key Delete key Backspace key CTRL-Left Cursor or CTRL-Right Cursor

Description
Move the cursor within the rung. Move among the inputs and outputs of a function. Position the cursor on column 1 in row 1. Position the cursor on the last defined row. For Command Line Entry Change the text editing mode (INSERT or REPLACE). Delete the character at the cursor position. Delete the character to the left of the cursor position. Move the cursor within the command line.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-71

3
Entering a Reference Address
Enter a reference address on the command line. Then, press the Enter key to apply the reference to the operand at the current cursor location. Repeat this step for each operand in the instruction. For multiple operand instructions, you may find that pressing the Tab key is more efficient because doing so causes Logicmaster to apply the reference to the operand at the current cursor location and automatically moves the cursor to the next operand location awaiting your input. For single operand instructions, the reference address can be entered on the command line before pressing the function key (described in the previous step). Then, when the function key is pressed, the reference address is automatically applied to the instruction.

Entering Nicknames
Nicknames can also be created or modified on the command line. To do this, enter the nickname together with its machine reference and any associated reference description. (Refer to chapter 3, section 4, “Program Annotation,” for more information on entering nicknames and reference descriptions.)

Using Vertical and Horizontal Links
Use Vertical Links (F8) and Horizontal Links (F9) to connect the instructions within a rung. These links are available from the relay functions, but may also be entered without returning to the relay function menu by pressing the Vertical bar (|) key to enter a vertical link or the Tilde (~) key to enter a horizontal link.

3-72

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Using Continuation Coils and Contacts
Use the Continuation Coil (F1) and the Continuation Contact (F2) to continue relay ladder rung logic beyond the limit of ten columns. These keys are available from the relay functions by pressing More (F10); they may also be entered using their mnemonics (&COILCTD and &CONCTD). There can be only one continuation coil and/or one continuation contact per rung. The Continuation Coil (F1) is used to carry the current rung’s status to the rung which has a continuation contact. The continuation coil can only be placed in column 10 of the rung. It does not require the use of a continuation contact in following rungs for editing. The Continuation Contact (F2) is used to continue the status of the continuation coil rung’s logic on the continuation contact’s rung.

The state of the last executed continuation coil is the flow state that will be used on the next executed continuation contact. The continuation contact does not require the use of a continuation coil in previous rungs for editing. However, if the flow of logic does not execute a continuation coil before it executes a continuation contact, the state of that contact will be no flow.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-73

or enter a horizontal link. one position to the right in all lines. Delete an entire row of instructions (including verticals) and operands within a rung. Delete an entire column of instructions (including verticals) and operands within a rung. select Open Space (Shift-F10). (You may also press ALT-D to delete an operand or instruction. All elements to the right of the deleted column will automatically move left. The Tilde (~) key or Horizontal Link (F9) softkey can also be used to clear the link. Shunts are automatically inserted into the new column in the rung. Then. select the specific function key described below: Function Key F1 Function Move Right Description Move the element at the cursor position. Delete an operand or instruction from a rung. press ALT-D or Open Space (Shift-F10) and then press Delete Instruction (F10). place the cursor on each logic segment and press ALT-D. Create room for an additional line of logic above the line the cursor is on. Using Open Space Functions To add open space to a rung in INSERT or EDIT mode. An instruction may also be deleted by replacing it with another instruction. Enter another instruction in the space left by the deleted instruction.) Page 3-83 F3 F5 Move Down Delete Column Delete Row Delete Nickname Delete Instruction 3-84 3-85 F7 F9 3-86 N/A F10 3-87 3-74 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .3 Deleting an Element To delete an operand or instruction from a rung while in INSERT or EDIT mode. and all the elements to the right of the cursor position. Enter the nickname to be deleted on the command line before pressing F9. To remove the horizontal links and coil that follow the ADD_DINT instruction. Remove nicknames from the variable declaration table.

Press ALT-A to quit the rung without saving any changes in the program. Entering an Instruction Length To change the length of the instruction (in this example to 8). the length appropriate for your situation—8 in this example) on the command line. do the following: D D D Position the cursor on the function.3 Completing (Accepting) Rung Entry After changing the rung.e. You will remain in INSERT mode until you press the Escape key. In EDIT mode.. In INSERT mode. Type 8 (i. it is not necessary to press Edit (F2). Press the Enter key. press the Enter key with the command line empty (or Plus (+) key on the numeric keypad) to accept the edited rung and move the cursor to the next rung for editing. You will still be in INSERT mode after the rung is accepted and can enter the next rung. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-75 . you must press the Edit (F2) key after the rung is accepted in order to edit the next rung.

3-76 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . These new or modified declarations will remain declared if the rung is accepted. an asterisk (*) is displayed next to the variable declarations that were created or modified during the current editing session. Deleting a Rung To remove a single rung of logic. The window allows cursor and page key scrolling. press ALT-V to invoke the variable declaration window. press More (F9). In RUNG INSERT or EDIT mode. and then press Delete (F6).3 Viewing Variable Declarations To view the current set of variable declarations from anywhere in the Program Editor. place the cursor at the rung. or simply press ALT-D (while not in INSERT or EDIT mode). Pressing ALT-V again will show the next table if it exists (local or global).

Then.. To deselect the selected rungs. Once this function is active. Home. By pressing the Up/Down cursor keys. you can add subsequent or previous rungs into the selected region. Note The select function can also be used to select variable declarations and interrupt declarations. The message “Select mode initiated . 2. Next. The Select (F1) softkey acts as a toggle between the select and deselect functions. The current rung is automatically selected. press Select (F1). press the Select (F1) key or ALT-A. To select the rungs: 1.” displayed on the message line indicates that the select function has been activated. Press Cut (F2) to cut the selected rungs. or End keys. Press Delete (F6) or ALT-D to delete the selected rungs. write. Selected rungs are shown in reverse video on the display. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-77 . help. press Select (F1). Press Write (F5) to write the selected rungs to a file. A. Page Up/Down. 5.. the only functions available are cursor. 3. The F1 key acts as a toggle between the select and deselect functions. cut. page. B. Move the cursor to the rung at the beginning or end of the section to be selected. and goto.3 Selecting Rungs The cutting and file writing of rungs requires that a section of rungs first be selected. Prev. C. To deselect the selected rungs. Press More (F9) to display the cut/paste function keys. 4.

To cut a section of rungs from the current program’s logic: 1. All rungs below the selected section will scroll up to fill the gap of the just-cut section. Press Cut (F2) to cut the selected rungs from the program.3 Cutting Selected Rungs The cut function enables you to remove a section of previously selected rungs from the current program. However. repeat the operation. Select one or more rungs. reference descriptions. The select function is automatically exited as part of the cut operation. The cursor will be on the rung after the cut section of rungs. 3. nicknames and reference descriptions remain in the variable declaration table. This function can be used to reorder logic within the program. or comment annotation used within the selected rungs are also copied with the cut rungs for later use in a paste operation. If the cut buffer becomes full. selecting a smaller amount of logic. 2. Note Cut rungs are saved only as long as you remain in the program editor. 3-78 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Any nicknames. as previously described. it is also useful for deleting a section of rungs.

Any unique reference address nickname assignments and any identifier name will be added to the current program’s variable declaration table. the different meaning would be a different reference address. Implicit declarations. A nickname in the buffer that is identical to one in the target program is simply passed over and ignored during the paste operation.. Once the cut operation is complete and the logic has been placed in the buffer. the declaration from the buffer is not added to the existing program’s declaration table. e. $LA00001) in the pasted logic indicates that name collisions have occurred during the paste operation. and then adding it to the target program. such as JUMPs. The position of the cursor remains the same. The presence of system names (any name beginning with the $ character.3 Pasting Previously Cut Rungs The paste function enables you to insert a copy of a section of previously cut rungs before the current rung. For a nickname. LABELs. but a different meaning. All entries below the inserted section will scroll down to make room for the just-pasted rungs. A name conflict occurs when a declaration in the buffer has the same name as a declaration in the target program. are handled in the same way. and MCR names. Conflicts may occur between declarations in the section of rungs to be pasted (buffer) and declarations in the existing (target) program.g. When a declaration in the buffer has the same reference address but a different nickname than a declaration in the target program. press Paste (F3) to initiate the paste function. Name conflicts are resolved by automatically generating a unique system name for the conflicting declaration in the buffer. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-79 .

2. 1. or use the WARN MULTIPLE coil check option.) %T references may later be replaced with %Q or %M references. minus an extension.3 Note If coil checking is set to SINGLE. The selected section of rungs is written out to the specified file. can be used for the side file. If no path is specified. Enter the name of the side file on the command line. Note The file write function differs from the cut function in that selected rungs are not removed from the program. you should select the entire table from the variable declaration section of the program. (Refer to the information on coil checking later in this section. select additional rungs required. Only variable declarations used in the rungs that are selected are written to the file. %T references should be used on coils to allow rungs to be pasted. To write the entire variable declaration table to a file. you must first select the rungs to be written to the side file. 3-80 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . and press Write (F5). Any valid file name. It is not created as part of a file write operation. rung(s) may not be pasted should a coil-use conflict occur. If the file specification includes a path. This function is useful for creating a file of commonly used rungs which can be used in different programs. Press F1 to select the current rung. the current folder is assumed. Writing Selected Rungs to a File The file write function enables you to store a copy of a section of previously selected rungs from the program logic to a disk file called a side file or program segment. To use the file write function. the specified directory must already exist. then.

press the Enter key. a unique system name is automatically generated for the program declaration before it can be added to the target folder. minus an extension. To use the file include function. Any unique reference address nickname assignments and any identifier names are added to the current program’s variable declaration table. The contents of the specified disk file are included before the current rung in the program. can be used for the side file.3 Including Rungs from a File The file include function enables you to insert a copy of a file of previously written rungs before the current rung in the program logic. the current folder is assumed. Any valid file name. Note Side files which contain subroutines cannot be inserted into folders using Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software releases prior to Release 3. 2. If the program name in the include file declaration matches a program name in the target folder. A corresponding initial logic block and data block are also created. however. 1. Press Include (F4) and enter the name of the side file on the command line. if no path is specified. A new name is generated for END-OP ($MC0001). Then. For example. but END_OP is also the name of the folder (or a nickname). the duplicate entry is not added. an MCR has the name END_OP in the include file. All rungs below the inserted section will be scrolled down to make room for the just-included rungs. the program logic to be included must have been previously stored to a particular disk file.” If the program name from the include file conflicts with a non-program name in the target folder. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-81 . The file specification may include a path. Conflicts are handled as previously described under “Pasting Previously Cut Rungs.

while editing a rung. Function Key F1 Function Move Right Description Move the element at the cursor position. to open element spaces in the rung. To display the open space function keys shown below. one position to the right in all lines. Delete an entire row of instructions (including verticals) and operands within a rung. and all the elements to the right of the cursor position. press F10.3 Open Space Functions Open space functions are used. Enter the nickname to be deleted on the command line before pressing F9. Create room for an additional line of logic above the line the cursor is on. Remove nicknames from the variable declarations table. All elements to the right of the deleted column will automatically move left. Delete an entire column of instructions(includingverticals) and operands within a rung. (You may also press ALT-D to delete an operand or instruction.) Page 3-83 F3 F5 Move Down Delete Column Delete Row Delete Nickname Delete Instruction 3-84 3-85 F7 F9 3-86 N/A F10 3-87 3-82 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Shunts are automatically inserted into the new column in the rung. Delete an operand or instruction from a rung.

3 Move Logic Right The Move Right (MOV RT) function moves the element at the cursor position. and all the elements to the right of the cursor position. Before: After: GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-83 . In the following example. the column next to the power rail is moved right one column by positioning the cursor in column 1 and pressing Move Right (F1). Shunts are automatically inserted into the new column in the rung. one position to the right in all lines.

3 Move Logic Down The Move Down (MOV DN) function is used to create room for an additional line of logic above the line the cursor is on. All elements in the region to be moved must be located entirely in the same row as the cursor. or in the rows below. In the following example. the rung of logic beginning with %I0002 is moved down one row by positioning the cursor in row 2 and pressing Move Down (F3). Before: After: 3-84 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .

as long as the function template itself is totally contained within the column. all columns to the right of the deleted column are moved left one column. In the following example. It can be used to delete a column that contains functions as well as contacts or coils. the column which contains %I0007 is deleted by positioning the cursor in column 3 and pressing Delete Column (F5).3 Delete Column The Delete Column (DEL CN) function is used to delete an entire column of instructions (including verticals) and operands within a rung. Before: After: GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-85 . When the column to be deleted is within a rung that contains no coil or jump instructions.

but it cannot delete a row containing an ADD_INT function because the ADD_INT function spans several rows. its verticals are automatically deleted. the DEL RW function can be used to delete a row with a function such as MCR. After the deletion. When a row is moved up to the first row position. In the following example. Before: After: 3-86 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . all rows beneath the deleted row move up one row. are totally contained within the row. the row which contains %I0001 is deleted by positioning the cursor on that row and pressing Delete Row (F7). For example. together with their operands. It can only be used to delete a row whose instructions.3 Delete Row The Delete Row (DEL RW) function is used to delete an entire row of instructions (including verticals) and operands within a rung.

the ADD instruction is deleted by positioning the cursor on the ADD function block and pressing Delete Instruction (F10). The ALT-D key sequence may also be used to delete instructions. Another instruction or a horizontal link may then be entered in the space left by the deleted instruction. In the following example. the cursor will automatically move to the right after the deletion. however. Before: After: GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-87 .3 Delete Instruction The Delete Instruction (DELINS) function is used to delete an operand or instruction from a rung.

The same reference address on a normally open contact will increment or decrement by one (e. %R0005 to %R0006).. 3-88 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . %I0001 to %I0002). The value will remain displayed on the command line after the function is completed so that the reference address can be incremented/decremented by the same value again. the increment/decrement value is one byte when the value on the command line is between 0 and 8. If there is a numeric value on the command line. an error message is also displayed. it is used as the number of bits to add to or subtract from the reference address. %I0001 to %I0009). If the cursor is not on a reference address and you attempt to increment or decrement the address. Decrement key sequence. It allows you to increment or decrement the reference address where the cursor is located by either one or the amount specified on the command line.g. two bytes when the value is between 9 and 16. a discrete input reference address of a MOVE_INT function block will increment or decrement by one byte (e. For parameters that are byte-aligned. If the reference address reaches the current configuration limit..3 Increment/Decrement Reference Address The increment/decrement reference address feature is available in either INSERT or EDIT mode in the program editor and from the variable declaration editor. the reference address is incremented/decremented by one byte. A register reference address on the input of an ADD function block will also increment or decrement by one (e. Key CTRL-U CTRL-D Description Increment key sequence. For example..g.g. an error message is displayed and the function is not performed. Note For reference operands which must be byte-aligned. etc.

Press CTRL-U five times to display the reference address %I0041. as shown in this screen. 1. In this example. First. 2. position the cursor on the reference address to be changed. that would be %I0001.3 Incrementing/Decrementing within a Rung This example illustrates how to increment reference address %I0001 in a ladder diagram rung. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-89 .

when used in conjunction with TEACH mode. and press the Tab key. where n is the number to be used for the teach file. For example. enter %R on the command line again (or press CTRL-Home to display the previous command line contents). Press ALT-Q to exit TEACH mode. The value 16 displayed on the command line does not disappear when the decrement is completed.g. 6. Press ALT-T to enter TEACH mode. Or. To use this function.3 3. 3. press CTRL-D twice. type ALW_ON &NOCON and press the Enter key. %Q. type &MOV on the command line and press the Enter key. 3-90 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . “Keyboard Functions”). Auto-Next Highest Reference The auto-next highest reference address function automatically uses the next reference offset of the specified type. and then press ALT-N. etc. For this example. The following example illustrates how useful the auto-next highest reference address function can be. Enter INSERT mode by pressing Insert (F1) from the program editor. refer to chapter 2. %I. 8. use ALT-0. enter the % character and the user reference (e. Type %R on the command line. you could enter the decrement amount 16 (2 bytes) on the command line and press CTRL-D. To decrement the reference address to %I0025. 1. (For more information on TEACH mode. section 5. and press the Enter key twice. Then. %I0024 (the next available aligned reference) is automatically used. 2. 5. It continues to be displayed on the command line so that you may continue decrementing by that same amount. press the Enter key.) on the command line. 7. If the parameter requires a byte-aligned reference offset. the next available aligned offset is automatically provided. 4. %R. if the highest %I reference already used during an editing session is %I0019 and %I is specified as the address for an input operand to an ADD_INT function block. Then. On the command line. It allows rungs to be entered and reference addresses automatically assigned to the next available reference address.. after the highest currently used in the folder during an editing session. Use the Tab key to position the cursor on parameter IN of the MOVE function block. Then. The % character is used to distinguish a reference type from a nickname character.

Note that the reference address has automatically been changed to the next available address. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-91 .3 9. The following screen is displayed. Press ALT-0 to play back the teach file.

Then. press Options (F7) from the program editor. 3-92 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Beginning with Release 3 of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software.3 Section 10: Editor Options The Program Editor Options menu provides access to options in the program editor. Instructions for selecting the desired level of coil checking begin on page 3-93. you can select the level of coil checking desired from a screen similar to the one shown below. To access this screen. press Program (F1) from the Programming Software main menu. These options include multiple coil use and automatically inserting references. Coil Checking The coil check function of the programming software checks for multiple uses of %M or %Q references with relay coils or outputs on functions.

A “checking coil use” message is displayed while the map is rebuilt.Logicmaster 90-30/20/Microsoftwareallowsmultiplecoiluse without any restrictions or messages. When coil use is set to WARN MULTIPLE. only the current level of coil checking is displayed. the coil use map is rebuilt. Refer to the information on unlocking program folders described in chapter 7. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-93 . an error message is displayed and the cursor is placed on the first conflict found. You can correct the inaccurate message by following the steps on the next page or you can avoid using the Warn Multiple setting with Micro PLCs. You can change the level selected. The Current Coil Use field is updated. When coil use is set to SINGLE. When coil use is set to MULTIPLE. and checks for and displays coil use conflicts on demand.3 Three levels of coil checking are available: Level SINGLE Name Coil checking enabled Description Single coil use only. it is only updated when no conflicts are found. the level of coil checking cannot be changed and the coil map cannot be rebuilt. allows you to change the level. Only one screen of conflicts is displayed.. If conflicts are found. Warn Multiple can give misleading feedback for Micro PLCs: if coil references are added or deleted in the RLD program. Coils can function as SET Coils or as RESET Coils with MULTIPLE or WARN MULTIPLE coil checking enabled. Note If the program folder is locked. the Logic-Not-Equal warning will be displayed. refer to the information on “SET Coils” and “RESET Coils” in Section 1. If conflicts are found. When this setting is accepted.e. No conflicts are displayed. Logicmaster90-30/20/Microsoftwaredoesnotallow multiple coil use. only the reference address of the conflict is listed. and the coil use map is not rebuilt.” The Coil Check screen shows the current level of coil checking. An error message is displayed if you try to change the coil check level.” of Chapter 3 of the Series 90 -30/20/Micro Reference Manual (GFK-0467). “Program Folders. the Current Coil Use field is not updated. LOGIC EQUAL status is displayed). regardless of which level was previously selected. t Note When the program mode is MONITOR or ONLINE and the program in your computer is identical to the program in the PLC (i. Only one screen full of conflicts is displayed. For details on the possible effects of MULTIPLE and WARN MULTIPLE checking on Coils. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Microsoftwareallowsmultiplecoilusewith warning messages. You cannot exit the rung edit until the conflicts are resolved. WARNMULTIPLE* Coil checking disabled with warning MULTIPLE Coil checking disabled * Default selection. When the rung is accepted and multiple use is detected. A message is displayed while the map is rebuilt and the conflicts are listed. and the coil use map is rebuilt. The CurrentCoil Use field is updated. “Relay Functions.

Then. 3-94 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . 2. Press Program (F1) from the Programming Software main menu.3 To change the level and check for conflicts: 1. Press Coil Check (F1) to display the Multiple Coil Use screen. press Options (F7) from the program editor to display the Program Editor Options menu.

Only one screen full of conflicts is displayed. . “Selecting a Screen Print Device. The message “Checking Block . For information on printing a screen display. To rebuild the coil map without changing the current setting. When you leave this screen. and then press the Enter key. repeatedly press the Tab key until the desired setting is displayed. A message indicating that an abort has occurred is displayed. The rebuilding of the map takes approximately 15 seconds per block. The coil use map is automatically rebuilt when the SINGLE or WARN MULTIPLE level is accepted. any conflicts found are listed. 6. Conflicts are not saved in memory. The screen shows the current level of coil checking. the Check (F1) softkey may be pressed to check for coil conflicts. Press ALT-A to abort the rebuild and restore the old coil use map. they will not be redisplayed if you re-enter this display screen.” GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-95 . F1 may be used regardless of the current coil use setting. Then. press the Enter key to accept the change. 5. Both explicit and implicit use conflicts are displayed. section 2. However. ” is displayed as the map is built. . press Check (F1). refer to chapter 9. When the rebuild is complete. along with the name of the block currently being checked.3 3. Or. To select another level. you can type the desired setting into the Coil Use field. 4. a program consisting of 10 to 15 blocks may take up to two minutes to rebuild the map. For example. ALT-P may be used to print a screen of conflicts.

From the Programming Software main menu. To enable the automatic insertion of references: 1. 3-96 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . you can go to the variable declaration editor and enter just the annotation. at a later time. press Program (F1) and then Options (F7) to display the Program Editor Options menu. Press Editor Options (F2) to display the Editor Options screen. Then. 2.3 Automatically Inserting References References which do not have nicknames or reference descriptions can be automatically inserted into the variable declaration table as the program is being developed.

Enter Y (Yes) and press the Enter key to enable automatic insertion. a message is continuously displayed for each reference entered until some of the references are deleted. 5. Any reference to be removed from the variable declaration table must be deleted using the variable declaration table editor. References entered during a word-for-word operation are not automatically inserted into the variable declaration table. 4. the explicit reference %I0001 is inserted automatically in the variable declaration table. enter N (No). In the following example. references entered on the command line are not placed into the variable declaration table. References associated with rungs that are pasted or included are added to the variable declaration table only if this operation were enabled when the rungs were cut or written. Every new folder defaults to NO. When this feature is disabled. Note The default selection for automatically inserting references is N (No). unless they have a nickname or reference description associated with them.3 3. To disable the automatic insertion feature. Use the variable declaration table editor to delete some references in order to make room for more insertions. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-97 . Removing rungs using either the cut/paste function or the file include function does not affect the table. Explicit references entered on the command line during an edit session are automatically inserted in the variable declaration table. | _____ |%M0001 | | %Q0001 |——| |———| ADD_|——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )— | | INT | | | | |%I0001 —|I1 Q|—%Q0017 | | | | | | | CONST —|I2 | | +0004 |_____| | In addition. %S and %T references are not added to the table. %I0002 through %I0016 are implicit references and are not inserted automatically in the table. implicit references (those references not entered while programming logic) are not automatically inserted in the table. If the variable declaration table becomes full.

press ALT-F4. If the target is not found. If the target is found in a block that is locked for view. Pressing only the Search key accesses the search function again. and the search function will remain active. To begin the search function. For more information on viewing locked blocks. reference address. 1. A message acknowledging the abort is displayed. all remaining blocks are searched. nickname. and reference description anywhere in the program. a search function window is displayed on the screen. instruction plus reference address. When F4 is pressed. 4. the search is aborted. instruction. 3-98 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Since all fields are already set as desired. select Search (F4) from the program edit functions. section 8.” 5.3 Section 11: Search Function The search function enables you to locate an identifier name. instruction plus identifier name. instruction plus nickname. The search can be aborted at any time by pressing ALT-A (abort). 3. the following message is displayed: Found in locked block <block_name>. To continue searching for the same target. a message indicating this is displayed. The search function will remain active. 2. If you decide to quit. refer to chapter 3. (Continue/Quit) If you continue. simply press the Enter key to initiate the search. “Subroutine Blocks.

g. Starting from this found target. nickname (e. & COIL %Q0001). Enter the desired target into this field. either FORWARD or BACKWARD. it searches the main variable declarations table and finally the reserved table. 2. For the search and replace function. an instruction plus reference address (e. The search operation stops when the first occurrence of the search target is found. For the search function. Modify the search by specifying whether the target should be searched for in the current subroutine block only or across all subroutine blocks in the program. you may display the search target.. WIDGET). Implicit will check for memory usage by functions with memory lengths greater than 1 as well as memory addresses explicitly visible in the logic. Note You should change the default Scope to Global and change Usage to Implicit when searching a program for address conflicts. replace the rest of the found targets without prompting (i. Disregard the found target and continue. More information about implicit search can be found at the end of the search function. When Y (Yes) is selected and the target is found. use the Tab key to toggle through the available choices. Replace the current found target and continue.. First. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-99 . Modify the search by specifying whether only explicit usage of the reference is checked for (EXPLICIT) or both explicit and implicit usage (IMPLICIT). Usage Prompt Direction Start From The direction of the search. or identifier name (e.e. or terminate the actual search but remain in the search function. Terminate the replace but remain in the function.3 Refer to the definitions in the following table when making entries in the search function window. or from the bottom of the block (BOTTOM).. Global will search all blocks including _MAIN. either from the current position (CURRENT). Choices for this field include LOCAL for the current block only or GLOBAL f or all blocks. disregard this instance of the target and continue searching. an instruction (e.g. &COIL WIDGET). change the prompt value to N (No)). Replace with Scope What will replace the target being searched for. the software searches the local table if you are in a subroutine block. a reference address (e. from the top of the block (TOP). selecting Y (Yes) indicates that the system will prompt you for confirmation before the found target is replaced.. Action to be taken if the search target is found.g. Next.. &COIL).. 4. &JUMP BLK1). Search allows you to locate all uses of a nickname. The search order for all blocks is the subroutine block declaration order.g. selecting Y (Yes) indicates that the system will prompt you for confirmation before searching for the next target. It may be an identifier name. Field Search for Description The target to be searched for. To change a selection in one of the fields. %I0012) or nickname (e. There are four choices available: 1. The starting point of the search. 3.g.. or a reference description entered in quotes. beginning with the current block. other than the Search for and Replace with fields.g.

Identifier of the same type.”formoreinformation on making word-for-word changes. 3-100 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .3 The following table shows the legitimate replacement items for the different types of search items. section 12. Refer to chapter 3. Search Item Reference address or nickname Identifier Instruction Replacement Item Reference address or reference nickname. Word-for-word equivalent instruction. No replacement allowed. section 12. Refer to chapter 3. “Online Editing/Monitoring.” for more information on making word-for-word changes. “OnlineEditing/Monitoring. Instruction and reference Instruction and identifier Description Note If a program contains references that have the same reference description text. searching for the reference description always finds the first occurrence of the reference description. Identifier of the same type. Word-for-word instruction or reference or nickname.

or press the Escape key to exit this screen. If the Prompt field is set to No. refer to chapter 3. If the target is found in a block that is locked for view. For more information on viewing locked blocks.” In the following example. “Subroutine Blocks. This screen shows the parameters selected for this search.3 Using Search and Replace The search and replace function is used to search and replace the target within the same variable declaration table. To use the search and replace function: 1. a “busy” prompt is displayed on the search screen with the current replacement count. 2. Since the Prompt field is set to No. (Continue/Quit) 3. %M0016 will be searched for and replaced with %M0020. no confirmation is required. indicating that the search and replace function is in progress. Press the Enter key to begin the search function. You may continue the search and replace operation at the next block or terminate the search and replace. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-101 . It cannot be used to search for the target in one variable table and replace it in another variable table. Enter the target to be searched for in the Search for field and the replacement item in the Replace with field. the following message is displayed: Cannot write to locked block <block_name>. Other fields can be changed to further modify the search. section 8.

the rung number where the error occurred is displayed at the top of the ladder diagram screen with the cursor on the erroneous item. In addition. %M0016) is found: Replace %M0016 with %M0020 ? (Yes. No. Press Y (Yes) to skip the erroneous replacement and continue with the search and replacement function. Pressing Q (Quit) terminates the current search and replace process. confirmation is required before each replacement. but remains in the function. If an error occurs while replacing one of the reference addresses.3 4. cannot be aborted. If the Prompt field is set to Y (Yes). or press N (No) to stop. a prompt displayed on the message line will ask you to either stop the function or skip the erroneous replacement and continue the function. an appropriate message including the replacement count is displayed and the function remains active. All. Assuming that the function replaced one occurrence of %M0016 with %M0020 without error. The following prompt is displayed each time the found target (in this example. 6. 5. and proceed to replace the rest of the found targets with the replacement item. however. beginning with this found target. Press A (All) to drop the confirmation process. 3-102 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Quit) Press Y (Yes) to replace the current found target with the replacement item and then continue the search. A search and replace function. Select N (No) to disregard this instance of the target and continue the search.

| _____ |%M0001 | | %Q0001 |——| |———| ADD_|———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )— | | INT | | | | |%I0001 —|I1 Q|—%Q0017 | | | | | | | CONST —|I2 | | +0004 |_____| | Search by Reference Type The search by reference type function allows you to locate all uses of a specific reference type within the program. press the Enter key.. The search will begin at the current location and continue to search for the reference address until a coil with the specified address is found. An implicit search enables you to locate these implicit references within a program. The reference address continues to be displayed on the command line so that you can find the next occurrence of a coil with the specified reference address by simply pressing Search (F4) again. Quick Search for a Coil The quick search feature allows you to search for a coil with a particular reference address by entering the reference address on the command line and then pressing the Search (F4) softkey.3 Implicit Search Implicit references are those references which are not directly programmed in the logic. %I0001 is an explicit reference and %I0002 through %I0016 are implicit references.g. (Explicit references are those references you entered while programming the logic for your program or subroutine block. due to the length of a function parameter. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-103 . However. they are included. enter the % character and the user reference (e. Then.) In the following example. Selecting IMPLICIT in the Usage field of the search function window means that both explicit and implicit references will be searched for. %R for register references) in the Search for field. The % character is required in order to distinguish a user reference from a name character. To initiate this type of search.

GFK-0466L S S 3-104 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 . Inserting or Editing Rungs (Block Edit) Logic in the program folder and the PLC may be inserted or edited from the program editor while the PLC is in STOP mode and the programmer is ONLINE and EQUAL. Refer to chapter 8. or deleting from) a program while the PLC is in RUN mode is allowed. There must be enough PLC memory to store both the old block and the new block. the status line will change from LOGIC EQUAL to BLOCK EDIT. constant values. Prior to Release 6. Otherwise. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software supports several online functions. ALT-S may also be used to save a single subroutine block while the PLC is in STOP mode. To make online changes.61 or Later CPUs) Press ALT-S (holding the ALT key and then press the S key) from the Program Logic Editor while in Block Edit mode to store changes to a program in the PLC.. adding to. editing (changing. this operation was not allowed while the PLC is in RUN mode. Block edit Run Mode store Note Changes made when ONLINE and EQUAL are restricted to those of equal size. Substituting instructions.” for information on verifying the program with the PLC. One or more rungs may be inserted or modified. Note that stores while in RUN mode from the Program Utility Store screen in Logicmaster will behave as before (i. unfragmented memory to store the subroutine that is being modified and the main program. “Program Utilities. those stores will “pause” the execution of the PLC while the store takes place). After accepting all the changes.61. Please note the following: S Only one subroutine may be modified at a time. Online changes for data values. and logic in the current folder and PLC must be EQUAL. the modified logic may be saved to both the program folder and PLC by pressing ALT-S. After pressing INSERT (F1) or EDIT (F2) to enter INSERT or EDIT mode and making a change.61 of the CPU firmware and Release 6.3 Section 12: Online Editing/Monitoring In addition to offline editing. The PLC is updated as each change is completed. Forcing and overriding discrete references. starting with Release 6. Block Edit (“Bumpless”) Run Mode Store Function (6. and there must be enough unused. However.60 of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro. the programmer must be in ONLINE mode. and reference addresses. the PLC will need to be stopped to perform the store.e. The functions available when online and equal include: D D D D D Monitoring logic and registers.

3 Substitutions If the programmer is in ONLINE mode and communicating with an operating PLC and if the program logic in the PLC and in the programmer are EQUAL. Data types cannot be changed within each group. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-105 . an instruction. constant. Instruction substitutions are permitted within the groups listed in the following table. therefore. it is not necessary to include the data type. Every substitution updates the logic in the program folder and in PLC memory. or reference address may be substituted with another.

Type This &NOCON &NCCON &NOCOI &NCCOI &SL &RL &NOMC &NCM &SM &RM &PCOI &NCOI &ON_TE &ON_H &ON_TH &TM_TE &TM_H &TM_TH &OFDT_TE &OFDT_H &OFDT_TH &UP &DN &AD &SUB &MUL &DIV &MOD &AD_DI &SUB_DI &MUL_DI &DIV_DI &MOD_DI 3-106 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Double Integer Math Functions Double precision integer addition. Negated coil. Thousandth of a second time base. Signed integer multiplication. Thousandth of a second time base. Retentive coil. Double precision integer multiplication. Substitution Groups Function –| |– –|/|– –( )– –(/)– –(S)– –(R)– –(M)– –(/M)– –(SM)– –(RM)– –( ↑)– –( ↓)– ONDTR_TENTHS ONDTR_HUNDTHS ONDTR_THSDTHS TMR_TENTHS TMR_HUNDTHS TMR_THSDTHS TMR_TENTHS TMR_HUNDTHS TMR_THSDTHS UPCTR DNCTR ADD_INT SUB_INT MUL_INT DIV_INT MOD_INT ADD_DINT SUB_DINT MUL_DINT DIV_DINT MOD_DINT Description Contacts Normally open contact. Thousandth of a second time base. RESET coil. Positive transition coil. Hundredth of a second time base. Down counter. Double precision integer subtraction. Coils Normally open coil. Double precision integer division. Normally closed contact. Retentive RESET coil. On-Delay Timer Function Tenth of a second time base. SET coil. Hundredth of a second time base.3 Table 3-12. Integer Math Functions Signed integer addition. Off-Delay Timer Function Tenth of a second time base. Hundredth of a second time base. Negated retentive coil. Double precision integer modulo. Signed integer division. Negative transition coil. Signed integer modulo. Counter Functions Up counter. Retentive On-Delay Timer Function Tenth of a second time base. Signed integer subtraction. Retentive SET coil.

Power of e. Naturallogarithm. Test for no equality between two double precision integers. Real/floating-point division. Real / Floating-Point Logarithmic Functions Square root. Test for one double precision integer value greater than another. Test for one integer value greater than or equal to another.3 Table 3-12. Degree / Radian Conversion Functions Convert to degrees. Test for one double precision integer value less than another. Inverse cosine. Test for one integer value greater than another. Cosine. Type This &AD_R &SUB_R &MU_R &DIV_R &EXPT_R &SIN &COS &TAN &ASIN &ACOS &ATAN &SQRT &LOG &LN &EXP &DEG &RAD &EQ &NE &GT &GE &LT &LE &RANG &EQ_DI &NE_DI &GT_DI &GE_DI &LT_DI &LE_DI &RANG_DI GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-107 . Convert to radians. Substitution Groups (Continued) Function ADD_REAL SUB_REAL MUL_REAL DIV_REAL EXPT_REAL SIN_REAL COS_REAL TAN_REAL ASIN_REAL ACOS_REAL ATAN_REAL SQRT_REAL LOG_REAL LN_REAL EXP_REAL RAD_TO_DEG DEG_TO_RAD EQ_INT NE_INT GT_INT GE_INT LT_INT LE_INT RANG_INT EQ_DINT NE_DINT GT_DINT GE_DINT LT_DINT LE_DINT RANG_DINT Description Real / Floating-Point Math Functions Real/floating-point addition. Test the input value against a range of two numbers. Inverse tangent. Test for one double precision integer value less than or equal to another. Real/floating-point subtraction. Real/floating-pointpowerofX. Base 10 logarithm. Inverse sine. Test for one integer value less than another. Integer Comparison Functions Test for equality between two integers. Test for no equality between two integers. Real / Floating-Point TrigonometricFunctions Sin. Test for one integer value less than or equal to another. Test for one double precision integer value greater than or equal to another. Real/floating-point multiplication. Double Integer Comparison Functions Test for equality between two double precision integers. Test the input value against a range of two numbers. Tangent.

Substitution Groups (Continued) Function EQ_REAL NE_REAL GT_REAL GE_REAL LT_REAL LE_REAL Description Real / Floating-Point Comparison Functions Test for equality between two real/floating-point values. Test for one real/floating-point value less than another. Search for array values greater than a specified value. Search for array values not equal to a specified value. Test for one real/floating-point value greater than or equal to another. Double Integer Search Table Functions Copy from one array to another. Search for array values equal to a specified value. Bit Operation Functions (Words) Logical “and” of two 16-bit word strings. Rotate bit string right. Search for array values greater than or equal to a specified value.3 Table 3-12. Test for one real/floating-point value less than or equal to another. Logical “or” of two 16-bit word strings. Shift bit string right. Search for array values less than a specified value. Search for array values less than or equal to a specified value. Test for no equality between two real/floating-point values. Test for one real/floating-point value greater than another. Type This &EQ_R &NE_R &GT_R &GE_R &LT_R &LE_R AND_WORD OR_WORD XOR_WORD SHL_WORD SHR_WORD ROL_WORD ROR_WORD BIT_SET_WORD BIT_CLR_WORD &AN &OR &XO &SHL &SHR &ROL &ROR &BS &BCL &AR &SRCHE &SRCHN &SRCHGT &SRCHGE &SRCHL T &SRCHLE &AR_DI &SRCHE_DI &SRCHN_DI &SRCHGT_DI &SRCHGE_DI &SRCHL T_DI &SRCHLE_DI ARRA Y_MOVE SRCH_EQ SRCH_NE SRCH_GT SRCH_GE SRCH_LT SRCH_LE ARRA Y_MOVE SRCH_EQ SRCH_NE SRCH_GT SRCH_GE SRCH_LT SRCH_LE 3-108 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Shift Bit String Functions (Words) Shift bit string left. Integer Search Table Functions Copy from one array to another. Clear a bit within a bit string. Search for array values less than or equal to a specified value. Search for array values greater than a specified value. Search for array values equal to a specified value. Search for array values greater than or equal to a specified value. Search for array values less than a specified value. Rotate Bit String Functions (Words) Rotate bit string left. Bit Set/Clear Functions (Words) Set a bit within a bit string to 1. Search for array values not equal to a specified value. Logical “exclusive or ” of two 16-bit word strings.

Search for array values less than a specified value. Search for array values equal to a specified value. Search for array values less than a specified value. Search for array values greater than a specified value. Search for array values equal to a specified value. Search for array values greater than or equal to a specified value. Type This &AR_W &SRCHE_W &SRCHN_W &SRCHGT_W &SRCHGE_W &SRCHL T_W &SRCHLE_W ARRA Y_MOVE SRCH_EQ SRCH_NE SRCH_GT SRCH_GE SRCH_LT SRCH_LE &AR_BY &SRCHE_BY &SRCHN_BY &SRCHGT_BY &SRCHGE_BY &SRCHL T_BY &SRCHLE_BY GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-109 . Substitution Groups (Continued) Function ARRA Y_MOVE SRCH_EQ SRCH_NE SRCH_GT SRCH_GE SRCH_LT SRCH_LE Description Integer Search Table Functions (Words) Copy from one array to another.3 Table 3-12. Search for array values greater than a specified value. Search for array values greater than or equal to a specified value. Search for array values not equal to a specified value. Search for array values not equal to a specified value. Integer Search Table Functions(Byte) Copy from one array to another. Search for array values less than or equal to a specified value. Search for array values less than or equal to a specified value.

Enter the new instruction mnemonic on the command line.3 Modifying Instructions The following steps describe how to change relay ladder diagram elements and update the PLC while online and the PLC is running. and then type Y (Yes) in response to the confirmation prompt. (Instruction groups are listed in the table at the beginning of this section.) 3. 3-110 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . 1. The new instruction must be in the same instruction group as the existing instruction. 2. Press the Enter key. Place the cursor on the element to be changed.

For example. enter the new instruction mnemonic &LE_INT on the command line and press the Enter key. use the function softkeys to enter the new instruction. Place the cursor on the reference to be changed. Position the cursor on the rung where the substitution is to be made and press Modify (F3). With the cursor on the NE_INT function. When the change is completed. which currently contains a value of 20. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-111 . Modifying a Reference Address or Constant A reference address or other parameter can be changed while online and the PLC is running. press the Escape key. Enter a new value of 40 on the command line. To restore the original values prior to the substitution. You can also use the Modify (F3) softkey to change a reference address or constant parameter and to create/modify nicknames. the cursor is positioned on the TMR function’s PV parameter. Using the Modify Softkey The Modify (F3) softkey enables you to substitute instructions from the rung editor environment by using the rung editor instruction softkeys. Then. 1. and press the Enter key. In this example. the NE_INT function can be replaced with the LE_INT function. press ALT-A.3 The same steps are used to replace functions for other functions in the same instruction group.

3 2. 3-112 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Press Y (Yes) in response to the confirmation prompt to update the PLC with the new operand value.

To force the discrete reference %T0001 in the following example. 4. and press F11 or the keypad (*) key again. and pressing F12 or the keypad (–) key. Note Only 331 and higher CPUs are capable of forcing and overriding discrete references. press F12 to update the PLC. For input points that are being scanned or output points that the logic program changes. 2. position the cursor on the use of the reference address. you must first override the point by pressing F11 or the keypad (*) key before forcing the reference. Once a point has been overridden.3 Forcing and Overriding Discrete References A value that is overridden can be protected from change by the program logic. GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-113 . position the cursor on an element which uses that reference. 3. the first character of the reference address or nickname will flash. Discrete points can be forced or toggled by positioning the cursor on a contact or coil with the reference address to be modified. To remove an override. Then. however. 1. an overridden value can be forced or toggled.

3-114 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . (For this example.) 3. Press the Enter key.3 Changing Register Values The following steps describe how to change the value of a register at the current cursor position. The register value for this example will change from 0 to 30. enter 30 on the command line.) Enter the new value on the command line. 2. 1. place the cursor on %R0003. (For this example. Place the cursor on the register to be changed. as shown in the screen below.

Set all the reference values in the table to zero.Chapter 4 Reference Tables section level 1 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1 4 The display reference tables function is used to: D D D D D Display tables of reference values. Chapter 4 contains the following sections: Section 1 2 3 4 5 Title DisplayingReference Tables Changing Reference Table Values Using Overrides Changing Display Formats Mixed Reference Tables Description Explains how to display reference tables. Explains how to change reference values. Explains how to remove control of discrete references from the logic program. Explains how to make format changes. Change reference values. Override discrete references (remove reference control from the PLC). Change the formats in which reference tables are displayed or printed. Page 4-2 4-4 4-9 4-11 4-20 GFK-0466L 4-1 . Describesmixed reference tables.

4 Section 1: Displaying Reference Tables Reference tables can be displayed directly from the main menu in any programming mode. you can change the format of any references in the table for a particular application. 4-2 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . reference values from the current program folder are displayed. references from the PLC are displayed. or from any main menu function screen. Offline values from a reference table (values from the folder) can also be printed using the print function. While a table is displayed. In ONLINE or MONITOR mode. the values must first be loaded from the PLC and then printed. To print values displayed online. This is a sample reference table used for discrete inputs (%I): Note In OFFLINE mode. These values will have the formats you set up on the display.

Enter one of the reference types listed in the following table: User Reference %I %Q %M %T %G %S. of a function block operand. Use the End key to go to the last value in the table. Discrete output. enter %AI. press Tables (Shift-F2). enter just the reference type. use the Page Down key. Discrete system. Analoginput. B. %SC %AI %AQ %R Reference Table Discrete input.g. For example. Then. enter the reference on the command line and press the Enter key. Use the CTRL-Page Up keys to move the cursor to the first reference of the previous line.4 Displaying a Reference Table To display a reference table: 1. enter the reference in the command line and press the Enter key. A. you may go to a different reference table by entering the reference on the command line and pressing the Enter key. Discretetemporary. Once in the reference tables function. For example. Discrete internal. %SB. To view the lowest-numbered table of a particular type. Using the Cursor to Select a Reference Table You may go directly to the reference table of a reference (e. contact. Register . To move to a specific reference in any table. To view a table containing a specific reference. 3.. or use Shift-F2. Use the Page Up key to display the previous screen. for the lowest-numbered analog input table. coil. %AI123 or 123AI. etc.) under the cursor by pressing ALT-F2. 2. Discrete Genius global data. Moving the Cursor in a Reference Table Follow these guidelines for moving the cursor in a reference table: D D Use the cursor keys to move one value horizontally or vertically in the table. To move the cursor to a specific reference in the same table. press Shift-F1 from the reference table to return to the same place in the program. To display the next screen of the same table. Then. Analogoutput. Use the Home key to go to the first value in the table. 4-3 D D D GFK-0466L Chapter 4 Reference Tables . Use the CTRL-Page Down keys to move the cursor to the first reference of the next line. enter the reference or its nickname. %SA.

signed integer) currently assigned to the reference. Note If the programmer mode is OFFLINE. No changes to the PLC can be made while the programmer is in MONITOR mode. In order to make online changes.” If the programmer mode is ONLINE. If possible. This method can be used to load a value into a register. the status line at the bottom of the screen must show that the programmer is online to the CPU. 4-4 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Enter a new value on the screen’s command line and press the Enter key. described in chapter 8. In the reference table that contains the reference. “Program Utilities. move the cursor to highlight the reference or enter the reference on the command line. The new value will be interpreted in the format (for example. if they are improperly used. changes will only be made to the current program folder. Online program changes should always be made with extreme care. Proper external power disconnects should be made to prevent undesired equipment operation. 2. they should be done with direct visual control over the system and the process. Warning Improper use of online program changes can damage equipment or cause personal injury.4 Section 2: Changing Reference Table Values You can force (change) both discrete and register reference values with the reference tables function. Changing a Register Reference You can enter or change the values of a register reference as described below. and on the process to which it applies. Online changes can have serious and unforeseen results on a control system. any changes will only be made to reference values in the PLC. Reference values in the PLC may then be loaded to the program folder by using the load utility function. Changes made to the program folder may later be stored to the PLC by using the store utility function. It is recommended that these functions not be used with people near the equipment. To change a register reference value: 1. also described in chapter 8.

beginning with the reference the cursor is on. There is no limit. can be entered in word-oriented tables. on the command line and then pressing the Enter key. A string can be accepted without a closing quote.g. as explained on the following pages of this manual. other than the size of the command line.g.. The software performs a check to verify that the value is a valid decimal number.. the size of the command line. but only to the last non-space character. “null” to terminate a string) may be included in the ASCII string by entering a backslash and the three-digit decimal value of the non-printable character (e. GFK-0466L Chapter 4 Reference Tables 4-5 . The following screen shows the reference table display after the string “Registers in this table are displayed from left to right” is entered. to enter the string: Use “ALT-N” to toggle you must enter ::Use “ALT-N” to toggle on the command line. enclosed in quotes. The string of text is entered the same as a name explanation and is displayed one character at a time. on the number of non-printable characters a string may have.4 ASCII String Entry An ASCII string up to 79 characters. To include quotes within a string of text. The string is entered by typing the text. (The display mode of any reference table can be changed from right to left or left to right.) Non-printable characters (e. “###BOT_TEXT###00”). For example. Trailing spaces are lost without the closing quote. enter two backslashes. you must begin the string with two colons. If you wish to include a backslash (\) in the text.

4-6 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . The next example shows the reference table after the null terminated string is accepted.4 This example shows a null terminated string.

the Escape key. ONLINE. 1. Follow the steps below to change the display mode. in that the quotes are removed and the format is treated more as a byte (1 character) instead of a word (2 characters). entry. press Setup (F7) from the Programming Software main menu and then View Modes Setup (F5) from the Programmer Setup menu. The default display mode is the last mode selected with ALT-N. and cursor keys function the same. The default reference table display mode is displayed on the View Modes Setup screen. To validate and save the default view mode selection in the home directory file %LM090. Then. Reference Table View Modes.PSU. Next. move the cursor to the. or the shifted function key. The Home End. 4-7 3. The display mode can be changed in any table (fixed or mixed) and in any program mode (OFFLINE. use the Tab key to toggle the selection to N (No) or enter N. Page Up and Page Down.4 Changing the Reference Display Mode (ALT-N) The ALT-N key sequence enables you to display table data either right to left (lowest reference address on the right) or left to right (lowest reference address on the left). To change the default view mode to display left to right. Data displayed in ASCII format differs slightly. Note The print function cannot distinguish between these two display modes and prints all tables right to left. 2. regardless of the view mode selected. or MONITOR). GFK-0466L Chapter 4 Reference Tables . “Programmer Setup”). The view mode in the following screen is right to left (the default display).. Enabled. Previous. To display this screen. field for the. press ALT-U. If the display mode has never been changed. the default set in the programmer setup is used (see chapter 6.

This usually occurs within one sweep. 3. The following method is easier. such as rung solution or I/O servicing. Press Binary (F6) to convert the base back to binary values. Changing the Values of a Word of Discrete References You can change the value of the word where the cursor is. 4-8 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . If the reference being forced is currently overridden (described below). Press the Enter key to change the reference at the cursor position to the new value.4 Forcing a Discrete Reference In discrete reference tables. All logic elements in the program that use the reference will reflect the new status. For example. first you must change the number base of the references. suppose you want to convert discrete references (see below) 0225 through 0240 to ones. If the reference is not overridden. place the cursor on the reference to be forced. To toggle a reference: 1. a reference can be forced on or off. To do that. Press the keypad minus (-) key or F12 key to change that reference to its opposite state. 2.) Use the function keys to change the number base to one of the following: signed integer (by pressing F2) or hexadecimal (by pressing F5). type the equivalent of the binary value in the selected format. 1. With the table displayed on the screen. The cursor indicates the rightmost (lower-numbered) byte of the word to be changed. References 0225 through 0240 _______|_______ | | 0256 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 2. it retains its new status until forced again. References 0225 through 0240 _______|_______ | | 0256 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Follow the steps below to change a word of discrete references. You can enter the desired state (0 or 1) on the command line. On the command line. (The software automatically adjusts the cursor position if it is incorrectly placed. 4. it retains its new status until changed by some other function. or toggle the reference state as described below.

Non-relay functions such as timers. Similarly. (This feature is not available in Models 323.4 Section 3: Overrides Discrete references in Models 331 or higher CPU can be overridden from the reference tables display. fuses. the override is useful in a monitored system. and other hardware. You can also check a program when I/O is connected. You can test a program in a PLC that is not connected to I/O hardware by using overrides to simulate inputs. If a sensor or input module should fail while the process is in operation. and data move functions still work when a coil is overridden. by using overrides to prevent coil operation. or copying the program. An override removes control of the reference from its normal source. Overrides are retained even when power is removed from the system. and Micro CPUs. Use the reference tables function to verify all inputs and coils before removing them from the programmer. indicator lights. that input can be overridden. the process can be continued until it can be shut down safely. you will see an error message on your screen stating that overrides are not allowed. counters. the coil may pulse on for one sweep when the override is removed. it can be tested by activating each coil with an override to verify I/O communications. Overridden inputs ignore information from the devices wired to the I/O structure. Thus. References should not be overridden when the programmer is removed from the process. math functions. Discrete references that have been overridden are indicated by flashing digits on the reference table screen. module operation. Warning If overrides are applied to a reference associated with a transitional coil. wiring to a device. power to a device. 211. The override is a very powerful tool for program checking and maintenance. 311. or when making copies of a program. After the control system is thoroughly checked and placed in operation. overridden outputs ignore programmed logic and internal power flow. such as limit switches or pushbuttons. GFK-0466L Chapter 4 Reference Tables 4-9 .) Note If you attempt to use overrides with a CPU below Model 331. After the I/O is wired up. 313. 321.

including the last three lines which may be hidden beneath the status lines (Press ALT-E to remove the status lines. Enter Y (Yes) to remove the overrides. toggle it by placing the cursor on the reference and pressing the keypad Asterisk (*) key or F11. This toggles the state of the reference between overridden and not overridden.4 Using Overrides Overrides should be used on an operating system only with extreme care. or starting character in a tag name on a displayed rung. 1. Press Change All (F10). Caution The reference will be overridden throughout the program. Warning Improper use of the override can damage equipment or cause personal injury. To remove all overrides shown on the current screen. Removing Overrides All discrete reference bits on a reference table screen. the value displayed in the table will flash. 3. will flash if they have been overridden.): 1. Place the cursor on the reference to be overridden. The screen prompts: “Remove overrides from displayed references ? (Y/N)”. 2. Press the keypad Asterisk (*) key or F11. not just at the cursor location. When overridden is selected as the state of reference. 4-10 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . To remove an override from one reference. Press the keypad Asterisk (*) key or F11. 2.

each reference table can be uniquely formatted to be most meaningful for the type of information it contains. This section explains how to make format changes. %SB. %S memory is read only and cannot be written.) Note The format for system status references (%S. The %S reference table values cannot be cleared or changed. and %SC) cannot be changed. GFK-0466L Chapter 4 Reference Tables 4-11 . and discrete global data (%G). %SA. The format may be changed to signed integer or hexadecimal. The bit values in the %SA. be cleared or toggled. discrete internal coils (%M). and %SC reference tables can. Any of these formats can be used for some of the values in the table. System status references can only be displayed in binary format. discrete temporary coils (%T). %SB. and %SC). or for the entire table. discrete system status references (%S. %SB. %SA. discrete outputs (%Q). Thus. Discrete Reference Tables The sample reference table below is used for discrete inputs (%I). (Double precision integer and timer/counter are not allowed for discrete references. however.4 Section 4: Changing Display Formats The format of any reference in a table can be changed for a particular application while the table is displayed on the programmer screen. The default format for discrete reference table displays is to have the values displayed or printed in binary.

analog inputs (%AI). In addition. The format can also be changed for some of the values in the table or for the entire table. ASCII. 4-12 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . The format can be changed to double precision integer. or timer/counter. hexadecimal. The default format for register reference table displays is for the values to be shown or printed as signed integers.4 Register Reference Tables The sample register reference table below is used for system registers (%R). the value of the reference at the cursor is displayed at the top of the table in binary format. and analog outputs (%AQ). binary.

.. In addition. a single reference is required (e.g. Two consecutive references are required.401298E–45 to ±3. 9. type an h at the end of the numeric string to ensure that the entry is read as a hexadecimal number. 33.. 32 consecutive bits (actually two consecutive 16-bit memory locations).767.648 to +2. This format can be used for discrete reference tables only. Changes are automatically saved when you leave a reference table display. 25. In discrete reference tables.647. which support timer/ counter functions.). 17. 1.4 Display Formats Use the function keys to change display formats. Command codes and non-displayable characters appear on the screen as the characters ^@ (e. beginning at a multiple-of-2-minus-one boundary (e. –21846).147. A single reference is required to make up 2 (packed) ASCII characters. press ALT-U.. The Real format requires a 352 CPU. Register references cannot be displayed in binary format. beginning at a multiple-of-16 boundary (e. Select a user-defined table. Three contiguous reference addresses. If you want to save changes to the program folder without leaving the reference table display. This format can be used for register reference tables only. A single reference is used. In discrete reference tables. a leading A through F must be preceded by a zero. beginning at a multiple-of-8-plus-one boundary (e. 17. 16 consecutive references are used. The remaining 7 bits in each section are converted as shown below. A 1-bit number with a value of 0 or 1.147.g. The range of numbers that can be stored in this format is from ±1. Binary values are displayed in groups of 8 references (e.768 to +32. X W).10101010). a single reference is required (e. 33. Function Key F2 Format Signed Integer Description A 16-bit number from –32. the 16-bit binary equivalent of the value indicated by the cursor is automatically displayed at the top of the table. Regardless of whether the reference is assigned to a timer or counter. 3. However .g. 16 consecutive references are used for the display. The table will continue to be displayed in the new format until the format is changed again. The rightmost character of the pair corresponds to the low byte of the reference word.483. 7. A 32-bit number from –2. Press F10 to change the format of all elements in the table. 5. display the current value. This format can be used for register reference tables only.g.).483.g. etc. In register reference tables. More information on this format is provided later in this chapter.. etc. When entering hexadecimal numbers on the command line. Signed Double Integer F3 Real F4 Hexadecimal F5 Binary F6 ASCII F7 TMRCTR F8 Mixed Change All F9 F10 GFK-0466L Chapter 4 Reference Tables 4-13 . Bit 8 of each pair is a parity bit and is ignored.. 0AAAAh). 8-bit encoded characters.). A 16-bit number from 0000 to FFFF. Up to 99 user-defined tables may be created. This format can only be used in register reference tables.g.g. and the control word.402823E+38. the format can be used as long as the reference type is %R. In register reference tables. 1. the preset value. etc. 1..

4 Table 4-1. < = > ? Bit Pattern X1000000 X1000001 X1000010 X1000011 X1000100 X1000101 X1000110 X1000111 X1001000 X1001001 X1001010 X1001011 X1001100 X1001101 X1001110 X1001111 X1010000 X1010001 X1010010 X1010011 X1010100 X1010101 X1010110 X1010111 X1011000 X1011001 X1011010 X1011011 X1011100 X1011101 X1011110 X1011111 Character @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ∧ _ Bit Pattern X1100000 X1100001 X1100010 X1100011 X1100100 X1100101 X1100110 X1100111 X1101000 X1101001 X1101010 X1101011 X1101100 X1101101 X1101110 X1101111 X1110000 X1110001 X1110010 X1110011 X1110100 X1110101 X1110110 X1110111 X1111000 X1111001 X1111010 X1111011 X1111100 X1111101 X1111110 X1111111 Character ’ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { | } tilde delta 4-14 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . ASCII Characters Bit Pattern X0000000 X0000001 X0000010 X0000011 X0000100 X0000101 X0000110 X0000111 X0001000 X0001001 X0001010 X0001011 X0001100 X0001101 X0001110 X0001111 X0010000 X0010001 X0010010 X0010011 X0010100 X0010101 X0010110 X0010111 X0011000 X0011001 X0011010 X0011011 X0011100 X0011101 X0011110 X0011111 Character ∧@ ∧A ∧B ∧C ∧D ∧E ∧F ∧G ∧H ∧I ∧J ∧K ∧L ∧M ∧N ∧O ∧P ∧Q ∧R ∧S ∧T ∧U ∧V ∧W ∧X ∧Y ∧Z ∧[ ∧ ∧] ∧∧ ∧_ Bit Pattern X0100000 X0100001 X0100010 X0100011 X0100100 X0100101 X0100110 X0100111 X0101000 X0101001 X0101010 X0101011 X0101100 X0101101 X0101110 X0101111 X0110000 X0110001 X0110010 X0110011 X0110100 X0110101 X0110110 X0110111 X0111000 X0111001 X0111010 X0111011 X0111100 X0111101 X0111110 X0111111 Character (blank) ] “ # $ % & ’ ( ) * + . . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : .

you can change as many reference formats as you want. Press Change All (F10). move the cursor to that reference and press the appropriate function key. press F2 to select signed integer. Within any standard reference table. To change the format of an entire table: 1. The new format will appear at the rightmost position of the reference(s). Changing the Format of a Table You can also change the format of an entire table.4 Changing the Display Format To change the format of one reference. Select the format for the display. including the values not currently on the screen or portions of the table. as shown by the example below. 2. GFK-0466L Chapter 4 Reference Tables 4-15 . For example.

hex). restore the data values stored at the time of the last disk update). Entering only a valid starting reference will cause the formats from the starting reference to the end of the table to change.. press ALT-A to abort the change. Entering a valid starting reference followed by an invalid entry will also cause the formats from the starting reference to the end of the table to change. Enter a starting reference (the lower address) and an ending reference (the higher address) from the current table (e. 1. Select the format (e. 65i 128i). 2..g. Press Change All (F10).4 The Change All (F10) key can also be used to change a specified block of range formats. 4-16 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . To restore the previous format (and in OFFLINE mode. To save all the changes and remain in the reference table. press ALT-U. press the Escape key. 3. To save the changes and exit from the reference table.g. Pressing ALT-A will undo all format changes and value changes made since the last disk update.

and bit 16 contains the enable status (EN). In the control word. the format can be used as long as the reference type is %R. using the Timer/Counter (F8) function key. the preset value.4 Timer/Counter Format To support the timer/counter function. bit 15 contains the output status (Q). the contents of the reference or the constant are written to the PV reference of the timer/counterformat when in RUN mode. and the control word. If a reference or constant was assigned to the PV parameter of the timer/counter function. GFK-0466L Chapter 4 Reference Tables 4-17 . The rest of the bits in the control word are not used by a counter. The example screen below shows the timer/counter format displayed. Regardless of whether the reference is assigned to a timer or counter. the rest of the control word bits contain the timer accuracy. a timer/counter format requiring three contiguous reference addresses will display the current value. For a timer. The preset value (PV) can be modified in both ONLINE and OFFLINE mode.

4 Returning to Default Values After editing. Change all references in a discrete reference table back to binary format. Select Change All (F10). The screen prompts: “Initialize table data and formats to default ? (Y/N”. Enter Y (Yes) to restore the table’s default content. To restore the table to its default content: 1. This will: D D D Set all the reference values in the table to zero. 3. For example: 4-18 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . and press the Enter key. Change all references in a register reference table back to signed decimal format. 2. you can return a standard reference table to its default format and fill the table locations with zeros. Enter 0 on the command line.

%SA. pressing the Home or Page Up key will position the cursor on %S0001. (No data is displayed in OFFLINE mode. and the cursor cannot be moved to blank lines.) The system reference table resembles a mixed reference table. Pressing the End or Page Down key will place the cursor on %SC0032. the Change All (F10) function key cannot be used. and %SC). while in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. The system reference table is displayed with the cursor on the reference address entered. or the reference address associated with the nickname entered. format changes are not allowed. In the screen shown above. GFK-0466L Chapter 4 Reference Tables 4-19 . %SB. however.4 System Reference Table The sample system reference table below is used for system references (%S.

A number from 1 to 99. 16 display lines. overwriting the last character. To select a mixed table. no cursor movement or other mixed table functions are allowed. Mixed Table Number Cursor Item Line Table Data 4-20 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . A number from 1 to 99 is associated with each table. it remains fixed. Information about the address the cursor is on. This is an example of a mixed reference table display: Field User-Defined Table Title Description A description of the mixed table. which indicates the mixed table currently displayed. Therefore. Note The mixed table function is used only for viewing PLC information. except for changing tables.4 Section 5: Mixed Reference Tables A mixed table represents a collection of data from one or more of the fixed tables. When the cursor is on the 63rd character. the identical information displayed in a mixed table could also be displayed on the related fixed tables. enter a number from 1 through 99 on the command line and press Mixed (F9). the current reference. A total of 99 user-defined mixed reference table displays can be supported. When OFFLINE. reference nickname. namely. A maximum number of 63 characters is allowed. or changing modes. Some may be program block headers or blank lines. exiting reference tables. mixed reference tables are not valid when the programmer mode is OFFLINE. and current value binary representation. therefore.

press the Enter key or the Down cursor key. a blank mixed table (no data. GFK-0466L Chapter 4 Reference Tables 4-21 . as in fixed table displays. the abort function will restore the lines.4 If the mixed table entered is not defined. position the cursor on the title of the display by moving the cursor to the topmost data display line and pressing the Up cursor key. only the mixed table number) is displayed. To return to the display area. Note Since mixed reference tables are defined on a line-by-line basis. as shown below. The Change All (F10) key is not supported for global format changes. While editing the title. Editing the Title To edit the table title. formats. any lines defined or title edited are lost. and title displayed upon entry. The Mixed (F9) key is used to change from one mixed table to another. Unless an update to disk was done. A message is displayed when the function is complete. no title. The cursor will return to the original position in the topmost data display line. The Tables (Shift-F2) key sequence can also be used to get to any table. the Update or Abort key can be used to save or restore a title.

position the cursor on the display line where a certain data value should be displayed. or it may be a blank line. Enter the reference address or nickname of the desired data value on the command line. enter %I1 onto the command line. First. The line may already be defined. With the cursor positioned on the top line of the display. 4-22 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . 1. 2.4 Defining a Mixed Table A mixed reference table display is created or changed by pressing the Change Line (F10) key. a line is defined in mixed reference table 1. In the following example.

GFK-0466L Chapter 4 Reference Tables 4-23 . If the current line is already blank. Press Change Line (F10) to display the desired information. when F10 is pressed. Any information currently displayed is replaced with the new requested information.4 3. moving the cursor to the next line will produce the same result as pressing F10 with the command line blank. The default display format for data extracted from a discrete table is binary. the line is cleared and the cursor is automatically moved to the next line. The cursor will be positioned on the requested data value. for register tables. If the two lines below the %R line are defined or are beyond the table size. Deleting a Line If the command line is blank when the Change Line (F10) key is pressed. the data value positioned at reference %I0012 is entered into the topmost display line. In this example. The timer/counter format can be used for a %R line in a mixed table if enough exists for the format. an error message is displayed. it is signed integer.

You can cursor to lines which contain a message. Timer/Counter Format The timer/counter format in a mixed table is the same as in a fixed table. in order to access the title. the search begins with the first non-blank line. the next two lines must be blank so that there is sufficient room for the format. If the Enter key is used to move the cursor to a duplicate reference address. Cursoring up is allowed when the cursor is on the topmost line. The Enter key cannot be used to change tables. Since blank lines can be defined in a mixed table.4 Moving the Cursor Cursor movement is the same in mixed tables as in fixed tables. except for the first timer/counter format of the line. This allows you to delete or re-define the line. If the reference address is not found in that section. indicating that the reference is out of range. The same line of references can also be defined twice on the same mixed table display. the search for the reference address begins with the next reference and continues to the end of the table. an error message is displayed. 4-24 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . the cursor is allowed on blank lines. Otherwise. an error message is displayed. If the reference address is still not found. In the timer/counter format. lowest reference.

To use these features. the programmer must be connected to the PLC and must be in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. some of these features may be protected by passwords. press STATUS (F3) from the main menu. F9. F9 will become the OEM softkey. Note The screen displayed above identifies the CPU model which is attached and its software revision. is not present unless the active function is OEM protection. GFKĆ0466L 5Ć1 . The F9 and F10 softkeys are now blank when the PLC Control and Status menu is displayed. If the programmer is not connected or is in OFFLINE mode. Several additional features involve interaction between the programmer and an operating PLC. which had previously been designated as the OEM softkey. Monitoring program execution and reference tables was described in previous chapters. To use most of them. When the function is OEM protection. asterisks may be displayed in place of values in many fields when the function screens are displayed. or Shift-F3 from any other main menu function.Chapter 5 5 PLC Control and Status section level 1 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1 The programmer can interact with an operating PLC in many ways. In addition.

is not used unless the active function is either the PLC fault table or the I/O fault table. Programmer Environment Setup. this field is initialized to STOP . Refer to appendix C. default values are displayed on the screen. not executing the logic program. The PLC is stopped. The PLC field on the screen shown above indicates whether the attached PLC is to be started or stopped. When either fault table function is active. GFKĆ0466L Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . When the programming software is initially executed. press PLC Run (F1) from the PLC Control and Status menu or from another PLC functions screen. but is scanning I/O. Run/Stop the PLC To start or stop program execution in the PLC. Press ALT-M to change the programmer operating mode to ONLINE or MONITOR mode. not executing the logic program.) ALT-R can also be used to toggle the PLC mode between RUN and the configured STOP mode.September 1998 . Mode Run/Outputs Enabled Stop/IOScan Stop/No IOScan 5Ć2 Description The PLC is running the logic program with outputs enabled.5 F10. no I/O scan. then. (For the Workmaster and CIMSTAR I computers. and to determine the state of outputs if the PLC is started. Communications between the programmer and the PLC must already be established." for instructions on using the keyswitch. The PLC is stopped. F10 will become the Zoom softkey and F9 will become the Clear softkey. use the keyswitch. Use the Tab key to select one of the modes listed below. If the programmer is in OFFLINE mode. press the Enter key. which had previously been designated as the Clear softkey.

5 PLC Password Protection PLC password protection can be used to restrict access to selected PLC functions. Password protection is not intended to restrict access to the programming or configuration software. To display or change the current protection level of the PLC. After passwords have been set up. If the screen appears without entries. protection level will automatically return to the highest unprotected level. the programmer is in OFFLINE mode. Press ALT-M to change the programmer operating mode to ONLINE or MONITOR mode.) GFKĆ0466L Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status 5Ć3 . a protected function cannot be used unless the proper password has been entered. (For the Workmaster and CIMSTAR I computers. use the keyswitch. the programmer must be in ONLINE or MONITOR mode and communicating with the intended PLC. Select Password (F2) from the PLC Control and Status menu or from another PLC functions screen. If PLC communications are suspended.

Display. PLC and I/O fault tables can be cleared. the addition/deletion of program logic. Write to any data memory. including wordĆforĆword changes. except overriding discrete I/O. all privileges at lower levels are permitted. and also all protection levels below that level. Privileges accumulate as the level increases. the programmer must be in ONLINE or MONITOR mode and communicating with the PLC. A valid password enables you to access the protection level for that password. Move the cursor to the line at the bottom of the screen which prompts you to enter a password to change the access level. The PLC can be started or stopped. 1. D Level 3: D Level 2: D Level 1: Password Active Current Level Access Description A Y (Yes) displayed in this column indicates that a password has been assigned to this access level in the PLC. at any given level. 2. 5Ć4 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . Access allowed at each level. Configuration may only be written in STOP mode. or delete passwords for any level. set. and the overriding of discrete I/O. Changing the Privilege Level To access any level. and press the Enter key. Read any PLC data except passwords. Characters are not displayed as you type them. consisting of up to 4 ASCII hexadecimal digits (0ā-ā9. (This is the default if no passwords are assigned. Aā-āF). logic may be written in STOP or RUN mode. no PLC memory may be changed. An X displayed in this column indicates the current protection level of the PLC. Type a password.) Write to any configuration or logic.5 Field Access Level Description Each access level includes all the privileges of lower levels: D Level 4: Write to all configuration or logic.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L .

locate the cursor at a level you want to protect or unprotect. using the status function as described below. so there should not be any gaps" in protection levels. by place the master diskette No. if the CPU battery is not attached. enter a password consisting of up to 4 ASCII hexadecimal digits (0 Ć 9. Respond to the prompt that appears by pressing the Y (Yes) key. change. To exit. A column titled Password" appears on this screen.5 Creating. that the PLC always defaults to the highest unprotected level. or remove passwords: 1. To remove an existing password previously stored to the PLC. Then: A. it is not necessary to use any passwords at all. 3. Once passwords have been entered. or Removing Passwords Passwords are created in the configuration software. After restarting the PLC. they can only be changed by performing one of the following tasks: D OR D In the configuration software. A Ć F). The use of passwords is an optional feature. begin by creating one. this level is automatically available. Press the Enter key to validate your entry. it is important to keep the original software master diskettes in a secure location. passwords must be sent to the PLC again. press the Enter key again. 5. however. C. This will protect the passwords you enter against unauthorized changes. 2. enter four blank characters or press ALT-C to clear the field. To enter or change passwords. Entering or changing passwords requires access to the highest level. Note. To create or change a password. You can also use passwords to restrict access to some PLC features but not to others. press the N (No) key. If there is not already a password set for the highest level. 1 in the system disk drive of the computer and press the ALT and O keys. GFKĆ0466L Enter the correct password to access the highestĆlevel privileges. this column is not displayed in the programming software. If no passwords have been set up for the system. If you want to quit without saving any passwords to the PLC. To save each new password to the PLC. B. where they are stored. Changing. Use this column to enter new passwords. the computer must be in ONLINE mode and communicating with the PLC. Access the Password Protection screen in the configuration software by pressing Password (F2) from the PLC Control and Status menu. use the Escape key or any main menu function key. Because this allows passwords to be overridden or changed without entering the correct password. 4. In the password column. They are then transmitted to the PLC. To create. Caution The PLC may not save passwords through a loss of power. 5Ć5 Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status .

You may want to disable this feature to prevent someone from setting passwords in the CPU. press Zoom (F10) with the cursor positioned on the CPUĆconfigured slot on the Rack Configuration screen. If you do not have an HHP .September 1998 GFKĆ0466L ." for more information on configuring this module. 5Ć6 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . call the GE Fanuc Technical Service Hotline (1Ć800Ć828Ć5747) for assistance. The HHP needs to be connected. The values for the Password field are ENABLED (default selection) or DISABLED. Configuring the CPU Module. Caution In order to reĆenable passwords once they have been disabled. entering DISABLED will prevent the password feature from being used.5 Enabling/Disabling Passwords The ability to use passwords may be enabled or disabled in the configuration software. Entering ENABLED will allow the password feature to be used. Then power off the PLC. PLC memory must be cleared with an HHP . section 3. Please refer to chapter 10. A sample CPU module detail screen displaying the Passwords field that would be used to enable or disable the password feature is shown below. To access this screen. Then hold both the <CLR> and <M/T> keys down while powering the PLC back up.

The OEM protection state cannot be toggled to locked until the OEM key is set to something other than the NULL (blank) string.0 of Logicmaster. GFKĆ0466L Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status 5Ć7 .5 OEM Protection The OEM protection feature provides a higher level of security than password protection. Note Beginning with version 3. If the OEM key has never been set. OEM protection may be locked or unlocked in the programming software. The OEM key is a 1 to 4 hexadecimal digit password. Moving logic to a block and locking only that block allows the end user to access other parts of the PLC. it will equal the NULL (blank) string. The OEM protection state is toggled between unlocked and locked each time the OEM key is correctly entered. however. Refer to page 4Ć60 for a description of each of the Lock options and page 4Ć61 for directions on how to use the Lock feature. It may be used to further restrict access to program logic and configuration parameters. Once the OEM protection is locked. The OEM protection state is retentive across a power cycle. OEM protection is enabled and disabled by entering the OEM key. Definition of the OEM key may only be performed in the configuration software. the OEM protection state will remain locked when power is restored to the PLC if the CPU battery is attached. Subroutine View and Edit Lock features have provided a more flexible method for limiting access to OEM logic than the OEM Password feature which locks both configuration and all logic. If the OEM protection is locked in the PLC and power is lost. press OEM (F9) from the Password Protection screen. To display the OEM Protection screen. it will remain locked until the OEM key is correctly entered to toggle the protection state.

entries for date and time in the fault tables are displayed as 00Ć00 00:00:00. The number of entries lost because the fault table has overflowed since it was cleared.5 PLC Fault Table The PLC Fault Table screen lists PLC faults such as password violations. The current date and time. PLC fault data is displayed. if the programmer is in OFFLINE mode. This information is maintained by the PLC. In ONLINE or MONITOR mode. However. no faults are displayed. faults can be cleared (this may be password protected). 311. 313. press PLC Fault (F3) from the PLC Control and Status menu or from another PLC functions screen.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . The total number of faults since the table was last cleared. In ONLINE mode. This is also maintained by the PLC. For example: To display the PLC Fault Table screen. PLC/configuration mismatches. 5Ć8 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . 211. Field Top Fault Displayed Total Faults Table Last Cleared Entries Overflowed PLC Time/Date Description The index of the PLC fault currently at the top of the fault display is shown on the first line of this screen. The date and time faults were last cleared from the fault table. Note Because the Model 323. and Micro CPUs do not support the timeĆofĆday clock. parity errors. and communications errors. The programmer may be in any operating mode. The PLC fault table can contain up to 16 faults. 321.

. Low battery signal. Password access failure. Different faults will result in different reactions. or extra. NonĆfatal module hardware failure. Constant sweep time exceeded. Addition of.g. PLC CPU hardware failure. For example. End. GFKĆ0467. The fault that has occurred: Loss of. For diagnostic faults. for more fault information. GFKĆ0467. or missing. and the following information about the fault: Field Fault Location Fault Description Description The location of the fault (rack/slot address). PLC system fault table full. option module.2 refers to rack 3. Corrupted user program on powerĆup. Communications failure during store. slot 2. PLC CPU system software failure. User application fault. and cursor keys. or missing. the display shows the date and time the fault occurred. I/O module. Informational faults do neither. the CPU sets fault references. some faults will stop the CPU.5 Fault Table Entries For each fault. No user program present. Program checksum failure. 3. refer to the Series 90Ć30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual. GFKĆ0466L Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status 5Ć9 . For fatal faults. Refer to the Series 90Ć30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual. System configuration mismatch. Option module software failure. e. I/O module. the CPU sets fault references and places the CPU in STOP mode. you can display them using the Home. Page Up and Page Down. If there are more faults than will fit on one screen. Loss of. or extra. For more information about each type of fault. others will not. rack. Addition of.

however. the fault table operates as a FirstĆInĆFirstĆOut queue. the first 8 faults are logged into the table and remain there until the table is cleared. Fault 16 Fault 15 Fault 14 Fault 13 Fault 12 Fault 11 Fault 10 Fault 9 Fault 7 Fault 6 Fault 5 Fault 4 Fault 3 Fault 2 Fault 1 New faults are added here. and faults are lost. None of these eight faults is dropped if the table overflows. Additional faults cause the table to overflow.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . As faults occur. 5Ć10 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . Faults overflow here. fault 9 is dropped from the table. The system reference SY_FULL (%S0009) is set to indicate that the fault table is full.5 Number of Faults in the PLC Fault Table The PLC fault table can contain up to 16 faults. For faults 9 through 16. Clearing the fault table removes all the fault entries. When fault 17 occurs.

of course. By moving the cursor to a particular fault and pressing Zoom (F10). GFKĆ0467. except for Exit (Shift-F10). as described in the Series 90Ć30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual. you may want to print a copy of the fault table screen by pressing the Print Screen key before clearing the fault table. and appropriate corrective action is displayed on a screen similar to this one for a low battery signal. If a printer is connected to the programmer. GFKĆ0467. Clearing the fault table. If passwords have been enabled in the PLC. or during a STOP-TO-RUN transition. Clearing the Fault Table Pressing Clear (F9) in ONLINE mode clears all faults from the fault table.5 Zooming into the PLC Fault Table The Zoom (F10) softkey enables you to obtain additional information pertaining to each fault listed in the PLC fault table. please refer to the Series 90Ć30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual. the fault may be reported again after storing the configuration. The Abort key (ALT-A) and the Escape key may also be used to exit from this screen and return to the PLC fault table. default action. Faults can also be cleared from the program logic using the SVCREQ function. Note A hexadecimal dump of the fault can be displayed by pressing CTRL-F from this screen. All softkeys are disabled on this screen. For more information on fault explanations and correction and CTRL-F. does not clear fault conditions in the system. GFKĆ0466L Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status 5Ć11 . information about the error code. description of the error. you must be at level 2 or higher in order to clear the fault table. cycling power to the PLC. If the condition that caused a fault still exists.

313. Field Top Fault Displayed Total Faults Fault Description Table Last Cleared Entries Overflowed PLC Time/Date Description The index of the I/O fault currently at the top of the fault display is shown on the first line of this screen. This information is maintained by the PLC. The total number of faults since the table was last cleared.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . This is also maintained by the PLC. Note Because the Model 311. entries for date and time in the fault tables are displayed as 00Ć00 00:00:00. In ONLINE or MONITOR mode. press I/O Fault (F4) from the PLC Control and Status menu or from another PLC functions screen. The current date and time. The I/O fault table can contain up to 32 faults. address conflicts. The programmer may be in any operating mode. PLC fault data is displayed. 5Ć12 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . The number of entries lost because the fault table has overflowed since it was cleared. and I/O bus faults. if the programmer is in OFFLINE mode. The date and time faults were last cleared from the fault table. In ONLINE mode.5 I/O Fault Table The I/O Fault Table screen lists I/O faults such as circuit faults. However. faults can be cleared (this feature may be password protected). For example: To display the I/O Fault Table screen. 211 and Micro CPUs do not support the timeĆofĆday clock. An explanation of the fault that is currently highlighted in the I/O fault table. forced circuits. no faults are displayed.

The address consists of a two or three character identifier (%I. %Q. For example. you can display them using the Home. For more information.5 Fault Table Entries For each fault. %AQ) specifying the memory type and a fiveĆdigit offset within the memory type. None of these 16 faults is dropped if the table overflows. the CPU sets fault references and places the CPU in STOP mode. Page Up and Page Down. For fatal faults. This further explains the fault category. End. and cursor keys. GFKĆ0466L Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status 5Ć13 . the fault table operates as a FirstĆInĆFirstĆOut queue. The system reference IO_FULL (%S0010) is set to indicate that the fault table is full. Fault Type If there are more faults than will fit on one screen. however. For more information. the CPU sets fault references. As faults occur. the first 16 faults are logged into the table and remain there until the table is cleared. refer to GFKĆ0467. For faults 17 through 32. refer to GFKĆ0467. The general type of fault that has occurred. and faults are lost. The I/O reference address where the fault was detected. Number of Faults in the I/O Fault Table The I/O fault table can contain up to 32 faults. and the following information about the fault: Field Fault Location Circuit Number Reference Address Fault Category Description The location of the fault (rack/slot address). When fault 33 occurs. The relative position of a point within its module. For diagnostic faults. %AI. slot 2. Faults overflow here.2 refers to rack 3. 3. Additional faults cause the table to overflow. fault 17 is dropped from the table. Fault 32 Fault 31 D D D Fault 17 Fault 16 Fault 15 D D D Fault 1 New faults are added here. Clearing the fault table removes all the fault entries. %IQ. The value may be from 0 to 1023. the display shows the date and time the fault occurred.

September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . By moving the cursor to a particular fault and pressing Zoom (F10). and appropriate corrective action is displayed on a screen similar to this one for an Addition of I/O Module error. description of the error. 5Ć14 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . Note A hexadecimal dump of the fault can be displayed by pressing CTRL-F from this screen. GFKĆ0467. For more information on fault explanations and correction and CTRL-F. default action.5 Zooming into the I/O Fault Table The Zoom (F10) softkey enables you to obtain additional information pertaining to each fault listed in the I/O fault table. please refer to the Series 90Ć30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual. information about the error code.

GFKĆ0467. (This may be password protected. refer to chapter 3." in the Series 90Ć30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual. All softkeys are disabled on this screen. GFKĆ0466L Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status 5Ć15 . For more information on fault explanations and correction. Clearing the Fault Table You can clear the fault table in ONLINE mode by pressing Clear (F9). cycling power to the PLC. or during a STOPĆtoĆRUN transition. The Abort key (ALT-A) and the Escape key may also be used to exit from this screen and return to the PLC fault table.) Faults can also be cleared from the program logic. Clearing the fault table does not clear fault conditions in the system. Clearing the fault table removes the faults it contains. Fault Explanation and Correction. except for EXIT (Shift-F10). the fault may be reported again after storing the configuration. If the condition that caused a fault still exists.5 Press the Page Down key to display additional data pertaining to the fault.

The amount of program memory occupied by the logic program. This field displays the actual CPU model. Model Software Revision User Memory Available User Program Program Remaining *PLC model 321 uses the CPU311 in a 10Ćslot rack. not the PLC model. The amount of program memory remaining. The model number of the attached PLC: D CPU 211: Series 90Ć20 PLC Model 211 D UDR1/2: Series 90 Micro PLC Model UDR001 or UDR002 D UAA003: Series 90 Micro PLC Model UAA003 D UDR005: Series 90 Micro PLC Model UDR005 D UAL006: Series 90 Micro PLC Model UAL006 D UAA007: Series 90 Micro PLC Model UAA007 D CPU 311: Series 90Ć30 PLC Model 311 (5Ćslot) or 321* (10Ćslot). D CPU 313: Series 90Ć30 PLC Model 313 (5Ćslot) or 323* (10Ćslot). the name of the PLC being communicated with. The ID name can be set on the Assign PLC ID screen in the configuration software.5 PLC Memory Used The PLC Memory Usage screen shows the amount of PLC memory available and the amount used for application program information.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . It will always be the same as that shown in the status area of the screen. The amount of memory in the PLC that is available for application program information. D CPU 331: Series 90Ć30 PLC Model 331 with a 10Ćslot rack. D CPU 340: Series 90Ć30 PLC Model 340 D CPU 341: Series 90Ć30 PLC Model 341 D CPU 350: Series 90Ć30 PLC Model 350 D CPU 351: Series 90Ć30 PLC Model 351 D CPU 352: Series 90Ć30 PLC Model 352 D CPU 360: Series 90Ć30 PLC Model 360 D CPU 363: Series 90Ć30 PLC Model 363 D CPU 364: Series 90Ć30 PLC Model 364 The revision of PLC software. To display this screen. press PLC Memory (F5) from the PLC Control and Status menu or from another PLC functions screen. This is an example of the PLC Memory Usage screen: Field PLC ID Description In ONLINE or MONITOR mode. 5Ć16 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . PLC model 323 uses the CPU313 in a 10Ćslot rack. Likewise.

The first block for which information appears is the _MAIN block. This field will always display asterisks since no explanations are currently stored in the PLC.5 Block Memory Usage The Block Memory Usage screen shows the amount of memory used for different parts of the application program. GFKĆ0466L Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status 5Ć17 . To display information for another subroutine block. press Block Memory (F6) from the PLC Control and Status menu or from another PLC functions screen. Declarations The block's symbol table size. For example: To display the Block Memory Usage screen. Block Checksum The result of a comparison of the code checksums for the block from the programmer and from the PLC. Program The block's logic memory size. enter its name on the command line and press the Enter key. Explanations The block's explanation text size. Values can also be displayed for locked blocks. Field Block Name Description The name of the block for which values are displayed. This is either EQUAL or NOT EQUAL.

September 1998 GFKĆ0466L .PLC Description Lists the highest value used. This function is available in all programmer operating modes and also to locked blocks. Values that do not match are highlighted. Lists a configuration value for each reference type in the folder.5 Configured Reference Sizes To see how much memory has been used for program references. No values are displayed for the configuration file if there is no configuration file in the current folder. Field Highest Used . Lists a configuration value for each reference type in the PLC. 5Ć18 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . press Reference Size (F7) from the PLC Control and Status menu or from another PLC functions screen.Folder Config Limit .Folder Config Limit . No values are displayed for the PLC if the programmer is in OFFLINE mode.

. you can change it for the current RUN and have the resulting effects immediately applied. and it only affects the PLC during that RUN. You can use the Active Constant Sweep Mode Parameter to toggle the sweep mode of the PLC without having to change the configured sweep settings. Then press the Tab key to change the first selection. Press the GFKĆ0466L Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status 5Ć19 . each time the PLC goes from STOP to RUN mode. No matter what the default sweep setting is. 323. during a RUNĆMode store.e. For CPU models 313.) To display or change PLC timers. In ONLINE or MONITOR mode. the sweep impact may be as much as 12 ms. i. and no one sweep is impacted by more than 6 milliseconds. it will already say CNST SWP"). it is processed over multiple sweeps. Note The default window mode for the programmer window is LIMITED". and 331.5 PLC CPU Sweep Control You can set the Sweep while the PLC is in RUN mode. press the Tab key to change the first selection (Mode") from NORMAL" to CNST SWP" (if necessaryĊif you are just changing the time of the Constant Sweep. the default sweep mode takes effect. if a request takes more than 6 milliseconds to process. i. the software shows the current CPU sweep time information.. or you can change the amount of time for the constant sweep on this same screen. press sweep (F8) from the PLC Control and Status menu or from another PLC functions screen. If you change the programmer window mode to COMPLETE." press the down arrow (cursor) key once to highlight the programmer window field. (This may be very useful when you need to fine tune the sweep time while the PLC is running a program. To change the programmer window mode from LIMITED" (the default) to COMPLETE." then the sweep time may be impacted by as much as 50 milliseconds. To change the Active Constant Sweep Mode Parameter.e. but the response to external programmer devices will be quicker.

Also remember that the change you make through the Active Constant Sweep Mode Parameter will have immediate effect but will be replaced by the default sweep mode each time the PLC goes from STOP to RUN mode.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . section 3. 5Ć20 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual .5 Right Cursor (arrow) key to advance the cursor to the Time" selection. you can change it when the PLC is in RUN mode and have the resulting effects immediately applied. (This may be very useful when you need to fine tune the sweep time while the PLC is running a program. For an explanation of the PLC sweep. GFKĆ0467. Also remember that the change you make through the Active Constant Sweep Mode Parameter will have immediate effect but will be replaced by the default sweep mode each time the PLC goes from STOP to RUN mode. after entering the PLC Sweep Control screen. System Operation. Configuring the CPU Module. Note Remember that the number of seconds entered here cannot exceed the value of the Watchdog Timer." in the Series 90Ć30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual. settings from this screen are only stored in the PLC. For more information. refer to chapter 10.) To change the constant sweep time (unless it is passwordĆprotected) or the mode. Enter the desired number of milliseconds (5 to 200 with a default of 100). not in the folder. You can use the Active Constant Sweep Mode Parameter to toggle the sweep mode of the PLC without having to change the configured sweep settings. Then enter the desired number of milliseconds (5 to 200 with a default of 100 for most CPUsĊ5 to 500 for the 350 and higher CPUs). refer to chapter 2. press the Tab key to change the first selection Sweep Mode" from NORMAL" to CNST SWP" (if necessaryĊif you are just changing the time of the Constant Sweep. Press the Escape key when done. Note Remember." Active Constant Sweep Mode Setting No matter what the default sweep setting is. Press the Right Cursor (arrow) key to advance the cursor to the Time" selection. These settings may be configured and stored in the folder using the configuration function. it will already say CNST SWP"). To set the Active Constant Sweep Mode Parameter. or you can change the amount of time for the constant sweep on this same screen. Note Remember that the number of seconds entered here cannot exceed the value of the Watchdog Timer. Logicmaster must be in ONLINE mode.

press SETUP (F7) from within the programming software. unless the keyswitch was disabled during programmer setup. the Mode Selection (F2) key does not appear on the Programmer Setup screen.Chapter 6 6 Programmer Setup section level 1 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1 This chapter explains how to set up the programmer for communication with the PLC and how to select the programmer operating mode. To use the programmer setup features. such as the Workmaster or CIMSTAR I industrial computer. GFKĆ0466L 6Ć1 . Note On computers with a keyswitch.

MONITOR mode allows programs to be examined and realĆtime status to be displayed. For Workmaster and CIMSTAR I computers. To change the programmer operating mode.g. ONLINE mode provides full CPU communications. The programmer mode can also be changed by pressing ALT-M from another programming function. as described in appendix C. but no changes of logic. reference values or I/O overrides are allowed. allowing data to be both read and written. 6Ć2 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual .. The programmer does not communicate with the PLC in OFFLINE mode. the Workmaster II computer). the computer is always in one of three operating modes: Mode OFFLINE Description OFFLINE mode is used for program development. To use either of these operating modes. communications must have been established between the computer and the CPU. use the Tab key to toggle choices at the cursor position or type in a new value. Press the Enter key. For computers without a keyswitch (e. Mode Selection Both the Workmaster and CIMSTAR I computers have a keyswitch which must be used to select the programmer operating mode. The presence of this keyswitch must be indicated in the programmer setup file. ONLINE MONITOR Many functions require the computer to be in either MONITOR or ONLINE mode. power flow display and reference values are not updated.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . MONITOR mode is the only mode which allows the key to be removed from the keyswitch.6 Section 1: Programmer Operating Mode During configuration and programming. the programmer mode can be selected by pressing Mode (F2) from the Programmer Setup menu or the Serial Port Setup screen.

Beginning with Release 6. You can then recall the setup from this saved file and perform the setup within that screen. The name used to identify the PLC to be communicated with. They can. but it may be helpful to refer to this listing when selecting a specific SNP ID. The serial link configuration. Prior to Release 6. In a multidrop configuration. or multidrop configuration with several PLCs connected to the WSI Board serial port.PSU is used. Selected SNP ID Port Connection SNP ID Numbers GFKĆ0466L Chapter 6 Programmer Setup 6Ć3 . This field allows you to save the setup parameters to a file other than the default file name. A null string may be specified as the SNP ID by leaving the field blank. all PLCs must be set up with the same parity and number of stop bits. The serial port can be set up for direct (pointĆtoĆpoint) communication with one PLC.6 CPUs. Direct connection should not be used with a multidrop configuration. the default name %PLC030. the maximum length was six characters.6 Section 2: Selecting SNP Connections The Select SNP Connections" screen provides a log of SNP IDs defined by the user. however. If no file name is entered. These fields allow you to enter the SNP IDs which have already been defined.6. This allows communication to any PLC using the currently active serial port setup. since all PLCs will respond in a multidrop configuration. Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software does not create or use the information in these fields. The null string SNP ID should be used only for direct (pointĆtoĆpoint) PLC connections. have a different baud rate. Field File Name Description The name of a disk file containing the PLC selection information. the SNP ID may be up to seven characters long.

September 1998 . refer to page 3Ć16 and appendix C. GFKĆ0467. If the programming package is ordered as IC641SWC306 (or IC641SWC307 depending on the type of diskettes used).") Connect the cable between the computer's serial port (COM1. The following steps must be performed in order to establish communications with the Series 90Ć30/20/Micro PLC: 1.6 Section 3: PLC Communications Serial Port Setup In the standard serial communications version of the software package. If both versions of the software package (WSI or Standard Serial COM Port) are installed on your computer. GFKĆ0683. is included. Configure the computer memory for the communications driver. 6Ć4 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . (For directions on how to set up your startup menu to handle both versions.5Ćinch Double Density diskettes. COM2. GFKĆ0466. 3. the PLC Communications Serial Port Setup screen takes the place of the Programmer WSI Serial Port Setup screen used in the WSIĆbased version. using the COM1. and a 9Ćpin to 25Ćpin converter plug assembly.25Ćinch High Density diskettes. a Miniconverter Kit. or COM4 serial port instead of a Work Station Interface (WSI) board. skip this information and go to the information on WSI serial port setup which follows. Please refer to Configuring Memory for the Communications Driver" on page 6Ć6. Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software uses a communications driver that may be loaded into different memory areas. The kit consists of an RSĆ422 (SNP) to RSĆ232 miniĆconverter. when added to the Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software. If you are using the WSI Board for serial communications. a 6Ćfoot (2 meter) serial extension cable. This version is available as a separate programming package. or Micro PLC. COM3. Programmer Environment Setup. Series 90Ć30/20/Micro Programmable Controller Reference Manual. It also supports offline programming. Important Product Information for the Standard Serial COM Port Version of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Software. 90Ć20. This communications driver. Standard Serial COM Port The contents of the Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro programming package include: D D D D D Two 5. or COM4). IC690ACC901. COM3. GFKĆ0466L 2. Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual. The Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software uses a software communications driver to perform the functions of the WSI board. COM2. three 3.0 ( or higher) or a commercially available memory manager is used. the RSĆ422/RSĆ485 Converter. and the Series 90Ć30/20/Micro PLC serial port. may not fit in the available memory of most computers unless MSĆDOS Version 5. you must select which version to run from the StartĆup Menu's Setup File Editor. The Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software provides logic programming and configuration for the Series 90Ć30.

MSĆDOS Version 5. These ports must use the INS8250 UART chip. A Miniconverter Kit. At least 564 KB (577.0 (or higher) or a memory manager that complies with one of the following specifications: • • • The LIM/EMS (Lotus Intel Microsoft/Expanded Memory Specification) Version 3.2 or later. you will need: Requirement MSĆDOS Memory Manager Description MSĆDOS Version 5. COM3. or 520 KB of available DOS conventional memory and 42 KB of High Memory Area.6 Note If you have the Miniconverter Kit. or other computer with a 80386 or higher processor and at least one available COM port. A list of some compliant memory managers is included at the end of this section. please refer to GFKĆ0682 for more information. Please refer to Setting up the Computer's Serial Port. for more information. GFKĆ0356. or functional equivalent. or COM4 port in common use by IBMĆcompatible machines. The COM port I/O addresses and interrupt requests are shown in the following table: Port COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 Port Address 3F8 2F8 3E8 2E8 IRQ IRQ4 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ3 GFKĆ0466L Chapter 6 Programmer Setup 6Ć5 . for the COM port driver. Zenith Mastersport SL Notebook.0 or later. Set up the computer's serial port to be used for PLC communications. Computer Hard Disk RAM Miniconverter Kit A Workmaster II." on page 6Ć10.536 bytes) of available DOS conventional memory. or Expanded Memory. This kit contains the necessary cable and converter to connect from your computer to the Series 90 PLC. 4. may be ordered. This version will support either the COM1. At least 4 Megabytes of hard disk space. refer to the Series 90Ć30/20/Micro Programmable Controller Installation Manual.0 or higher. Port Requirements The Standard Serial COM Port version requires at least one Standard Serial COM Port in the host computer in order to provide communications with the PLC. Requirements To run the Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software. IC690ACC901. COM2. IC690ACC901. The XMS (eXtended Memory Specification) Version 2. If you wish to make your own cable. Upper Memory Block. It should match the characteristics of the Series 90Ć30/20/Micro PLC serial port.

If MEMMAKER fails to provide enough memory for the serial comm driver. depending on the computer and the amount of installed memory.6 While the Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software is active. 6Ć6 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . If you are using MSĆDOS version 6. The RTS at the PLC must be connected to CTS at the Logicmaster computer serial port. then you will need to ensure that it can be loaded into one of the other areas of memory described on the next page and discussed in detail on page 6Ć13 and following.BAT memory options. select the Custom option using the space bar. type MEMMAKER at the DOS prompt. if not. and then use MSĆDOS to print the disk files while outside the Logicmaster environment. The communicaĆ tions driver requires 42 KB of memory. Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software must use a connection with the Series 90Ć30/20/Micro PLC that will keep its RequestĆtoĆSend (RTS) active in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. To use it. Then remove any programs not needed.SYS and AUTOEXEC. Configuring Memory for the Communications Driver The Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software requires a communications driver that may be loaded in different memory areas. RSĆ422 multiĆdrop will work as long as the Series 90 PLC slaves transmit only in response to requests from an attached Logicmaster host. Therefore. at a DOS prompt. MEMMAKER will reboot your computer several times as it tries and tests CONFIG. a second serial port is required. A memory manager may be required. Choose YES on the questions about using EMS memory. the serial port assigned to PLC communications will be used exclusively for PLC communications. using RSĆ422 4Ćwire hookups or modems. you can load the communications driver (requiring 42 KB of memory) into conventional memory if you have enough available conventional memory to do so.0 or later. HalfĆduplex modems cannot be used with Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software since they rely on RTS/CTS flow control. First. If a serial printer is being used. Select YES for Scan Upper Memory Aggressively" and for Use Monochrome Area" if you have a color monitor. The Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software supports multiĆdrop connections. MSĆDOS also includes the MEMMAKER program to help optimize usage of upper memory. That is to say. try the following techniques for increasing the amount of free memory. type the command MEM /C /P and press Enter to list all programs and how much Conventional and Upper Memory each program is using as well as showing you the total amount of free memory.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . which is not supported by the software. The Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software monitors ClearĆtoĆSend (CTS) to determine a cable disconnect. use the MEM /D /P command to display which regions of upper memory have free space and use the /L:region_number switches in CONFIG. or you may direct print output to disk files.SYS to load programs manually.

This area can only be accessed by computers with 80286/ 80386/80486 microprocessors. This memory area is suitable for computers with Intel 80xx family processors. GFKĆ0466L Chapter 6 Programmer Setup 6Ć7 .2 or later. Expanded Memory t QEMMĆ386 is a trademark of Quarterdeck Office Systems. Expanded Memory. For more information on using conventional memory on an 80386 (Workmaster II) or higher computer.. Some laptop personal computers with 8086/8088 microprocessor and 1 Megabyte of memory come with an expanded memory manager driver (for example. refer to page 6Ć16. you can configure the memory manager to make this area available. Toshiba 1200). extended memory can be mapped into this area with the aid of a memory manager or MSĆDOS Version 5. The memory managers must comply to the Lotus/Intel/Microsoft LIM Expanded Memory Specification 3. Type High Memory Area Description 65.6 MSĆDOS Memory Areas Defined One of the following memory areas is used to load the communications driver: D D D Extended Memory. For more information on using Expanded Memory on an 80386 (Workmaster II) or higher computer.0 or higher. It is sometimes referred to as low memory (RAM) or base memory (RAM). refer to page 6Ć17.0. This memory space is usually Block used for BIOS or video RAM. Upper Memory Memory space between 640 KB and 1 Megabyte.SYS or QEMMĆ386t memory manager. The memory manager must comply to the Extended Memory Specification XMS 2. refer to page 6Ć15. For more information on using the High Memory Area on an 80386 (Workmaster II) or higher computer.g. refer to page 6Ć16. PCs with 8086/8088/80188/80186 microprocessors cannot address this memory space. consisting of Conventional Memory and Upper Memory. Use of the High Memory Area (HMA) requires either HIMEM. GEXMEM). For more information on using the Upper Memory Block on an 80386 (Workmaster II) or higher computer. On computers with 80386/80486 microprocessors and extended memory installed. Conventional Memory The first 640 KB of memory addresses. If you want the communications driver loaded into this area. MSĆDOS System Memory. The communications driver may be loaded to the page frame area. consisting of the High Memory Area and extended memory blocks.520 bytes of memory space just above the 1 Megabyte boundary (addresses 0FFFFF to 10FFFF). refer to page 6Ć14. The userĆinstalled memory option that can be accessed with an expanded memory manager through a page frame area between the MSĆDOS 640 KB and 1024 KB addresses (e. For more information on using video RAM on an 80386 (Workmaster II) or higher computer.

the driver is installed in the High Memory Area. Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software will examine the Expanded Memory.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . If all these steps fail." i." for instructions on how to change the memory allocation for this driver. Then. If the High Memory Area is not available. Instructions for memory management are listed on page 6Ć13 and following of this manual and are also included in your DOS manual.e. Note The PLC Communications Serial Port Setup screen in the setup function of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software will display where the communications driver was loaded.. Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software will examine the MSĆDOS conventional memory. If the expanded memory manager is installed. such as QEMM. you must ensure that one of the memory areas listed in steps 1 through 4 above is available. 6. 2. the loader will try to allocate an expanded memory page frame area and install the driver in the page frame area. Refer to Setting Up the Computer's Serial Port" on page 6Ć10 for more information. You will get a warning that Logicmaster needs 1024 KB of EMS memory even though EMS memory is present. Next. if neither the High Memory Area nor the Upper Memory Block is available. the following prompt will be displayed: Do you wish to continue? (Y/N)" If you answer: Y. according to the following sequence: 1. you must enter Setup from the main menu." In addition. the driver will be installed in the MSĆDOS memory space as a TerminateĆandĆStayĆResident (TSR) program. Refer to appendix C.6 Communications Driver Load Order To specify the area for the communications driver. Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software will look for the Upper Memory Block area. 3. 6Ć8 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . you let Logicmaster decide how best to set up the memory allocation. If the MSĆDOS conventional memory space is large enough for Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software and the communications driver to coexist. Note If the COMM driver has to load here in the EMS page frame. communications driver is loaded into the first available memory area found. you may wish to refer to that manual as well. The recommended setting for this driver memory allocation is Automatic. the driver can be installed in the Upper Memory Block space. If the High Memory Area is free and the computer supports the High Memory Area. 5. 4. PLC communications driver was not installed. If there is enough space for the driver. you may program offline without PLC communication capability. If you still wish to communicate with the PLC. If the option selected from the PLC Communications Options screen is automatic. then the driver is not installed and a message will appear on your screen stating. EMS memory will be disabled for storing the Variable Table. Programmer Environment Setup. If you have an additional memory manager.

the programmer software would display this screen: GFKĆ0466L Chapter 6 Programmer Setup 6Ć9 . the Logicmaster 90 main menu is displayed.) The main menu screen is then displayed. the message. You may then exit back to MSĆDOS to correct the memory problem. (You may program offline. As mentioned previously.6 Running Logicmaster 90 Software When entering the Standard Serial COM Port version of the software package. The software will prompt you to continue." will appear on the Initializing screen. the software will attempt to install the correct communications driver in the available memory space. If you enter Y. PLC communications driver was not installed. the software will proceed without PLC communication capability. For example. if the driver cannot be installed. If you enter N after the prompt.

. 19200 baud. Section 3. 6Ć10 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . COM3. The table on the next page (i." Of special significance. Section 3. or COM4) may be set up from the PLC Communications Serial Port Setup screen in the setup function. the 351 and 352 PLC CPUs have two configurable ports. Note This section of the manual discusses setting up the ports on your PC. refer to page 4Ć18. Configuring the CPU Module. For information about configuring the ports on the PLC.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L .g.).e. for information on configuring those ports. the facing page) provides detailed information about the fields in the screen shown above. odd parity. COM2. etc.6 Setting Up the Computer's Serial Port The computer's serial port (COM1. Press COMSET (F4) (COMSET is the abbreviation for Communications Setup) from the Programmer Setup menu to display the PLC Communications Serial Port Setup screen shown below: Note The PLC CPU defaults to the parameters displayed on this screen (e. Configuring the CPU Module"). These parameters must match the CPU slot configuration that was last stored to the PLC before communications can be established (see Chapter 10.. refer to Chapter 10.

Use the Up and Down Arrow (cursor mover) keys to move from field to field.PSU will contain additional information. Do not use the same COM port for printing that you are using for communicating with the Series 90Ć30/20/Micro PLC. or. Once all the values have been entered.PSU. These parameters must match the CPU slot configuration that was last stored to the PLC before communications can be established (see chapter 11. COM2. PLC Information on the communications driver. section 3. Baud Rate: The transmission rate. Pressing F1 while completing the screen will delete all the changes that have been made. Driver • Where the driver was installed: High Memory Area (HMA). etc. Slower devices may use two stop bits. If no modem is used. Conventional MSĆDOS Memory (DOS). you can use the Tab key to cycle through the valid selections. select none.6 Field Port Selection Setup File Name Description Select the serial COM port (COM1.) Stop Bits: All serial communication uses at least one stop bit. in bits per second. COM2. Parity: Specify whether the parity bit is odd or even.PSU file. Displaying Port Settings Press Show Port (F1) to display the current settings for the Serial Port Setup screen. Modem Turnaround Time: The time required for the modem to start data transmission after receiving the transmit request. The previous settings of the current driver will then be reĆdisplayed on the screen. Note The Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software requires either the COM1. • MSĆDOS INT vector that it will use.g. When the PLC is connected through a modem.. ShiftĆTab to reverse the direction of the selection display. The %COM030. 19200 baud. as displayed on the screen shown above (e. the value must be one or greater. Configuring the CPU Module"). Press Default (F3) to set the parameters on this screen to their default values. or COM4) to be used for communicating with the PLC.). if no no parity bit is needed. Parameters Setting Up the Port To set up the serial port. press Setup (F6). place the cursor on the field and press Tab to toggle forward (ShiftĆTab to toggle backwards. The PLC CPU defaults to these parameters. see the Serial Printer Setup" section at the end of this chapter. of data through the port. specify zero. or Upper Memory Block (UMB) Area. to avoid any confusion with the WSIĆbased version. or COM4 as the communications port for communicating with the Series 90Ć30/20/Micro PLC. For additional information. enter the appropriate values in the fields on the Serial Port Setup screen. which is not present in the %WSI030. • MSĆDOS segment address at which the driver is loaded.PSU to %COM030. COM3. Information Expanded Memory (EMS). COM3. 1 stop bit. such as the COM port selection. odd parity. GFKĆ0466L Chapter 6 Programmer Setup 6Ć11 . In each field. including: Communication • Version. To toggle the selections. The default file name for saving the setup parameters is changed from %WSI030.

PSU is used. the settings are stored to a file and also set up on the port. In this case. If no path is specified. Displaying File Settings The settings currently stored in a file can be viewed by first entering the file name and then pressing Show File (F2). specially for COM3.PSU. You can check if I/O ports are defined by starting DEBUG at the DOS prompt or in a DOS window under Windows or Windows 95. enter a file name other than the default name. 2F8. the PLC communications file %PLC030L. a warning is displayed and the setup is not done. To avoid any conflicts. If the Printer Serial Port Setup screen is displayed and you attempt to perform a setup on the designated PLC communications port. 3E8 and 2E8) and interrupts (IRQ4 and IRQ3) for COM1 to COM4. Logicmaster will indicate that the COM port is not available. the default setup file settings are displayed. you will see the I/O port addresses defined for COM1 to COM4. If more than one setup file is found for the designated PLC communications port. The BIOS in some computers may not initialize the BIOS data area at power up. Any attempt to select the designated PLC communications port as the output device is denied. If no file extension is provided.6 Saving the Port Setup Press Save (F7) to save a copy of the current serial port settings to a disk file. the current default directory is used. If you reverse the bytes (Intel style). After you press Save (F7). If you do not specify a file name. This file is used to initialize the PLC communications port. If the File Name field is blank. If no path is given.PSU is used. Port Usage Conflicts The standard serial communications version will reserve one of the COM ports for PLC communications. you should follow these guidelines: Conflict Setup Files Description The setup file looked for during system initialization is %COM030. 6Ć12 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . If no file extension is provided. Enter the command. User Setup Print Destinations Note Logicmaster only supports standard I/O ports (3F8. The data will be saved to a separate file. COM4 or serial PCMCIA cards. the current default directory is used. The Print utility provides several screens for selecting the print output device. . The selected I/O port must also be defined in the standard BIOS data area at hex offset 40:0. a default name will be assigned. To create a file of settings which is not automatically invoked. D 40:0 at the dash (-) prompt and look at the first 8 hex bytes on the first line.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . .PSU will take precedence.

6
Memory Manager Specifications
Any memory manager used to support the Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software must comply with one of the following specifications: 1. 2. LIM/EMS (Lotus Intel Microsoft/Expanded Memory Specification) Version 3.02 or later. XMS (eXtended Memory Specification) Version 2.0 or later.

Compliant Memory Managers
The following are some drivers which comply with the memory manager specifications listed above: 3. QEMMĆ386 (Quarterdeck Expanded Memory Manager for 386). This driver can be used on computers with 80386/80486 microprocessors. It is available from: Quarterdeck Office Systems 150 Pico Boulevard Santa Monica, CA 90405 (213) 392–9701 4. QEMM (Quarterdeck Expanded Memory Manager). This driver can be used on computers with 8086/8088 microprocessors. It can be ordered from same address listed above. HIMEM.SYS (MSĆDOS Version 5.0 or higher) from Microsoft Corporation. This Microsoft memory manager complies with XMS specification. It can be used on computers with 80386/80486 microprocessors. EMM386.SYS (MSĆDOS Version 5.0 or higher) from Microsoft Corporation. This Microsoft memory manager simulates expanded memory while using extended memory. It can be used on computers with 80386/80486 microprocessors. BlueMAXt for PS/2 computers and 386MAXt for 80386 ATĆbased computers. Both are available from: Qualitas, Inc. 7101 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1386 Bethesda, MD 20814 (301) 907–6700

5.

6.

7.

Restrictions
To avoid conflicts of memory usage between the Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software and MSĆDOS programs, the following rules must be followed: 1. If the computer is set up to use the High Memory Area memory area, the VDISK program must not be used. Any program using VDISK must remove VDISK before running the Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software. Another application cannot use Expanded Memory if the communications driver is loaded into Expanded Memory.

2.

t BlueMAX and 386MAX are trademarks of Qualitas, Inc.

GFKĆ0466L

Chapter 6 Programmer Setup

6Ć13

6
Using High Memory Area on an 80386 (Workmaster II) Or Higher Computer
Physical Extended Memory for High Memory Area Operation
If not already present, you must add and configure physical memory on your computer to be accessed in memory addresses over 1 Megabyte (FFFFF).

386 Memory Manager
You must install a 386 high memory manager such as Microsoft HIMEM.SYS (MSĆDOS Version 5.0 or higher), Quarterdeck QEMMĆ386 or 386MAX. The memory manager should be compliant with the Extended Memory Specification (XMS) Version 2.0 or later. You can install HIMEM to allow use of the High Memory Area. 1. Verify that your CONFIG.SYS file contains a device command for the HIMEM.SYS extended memory manager (or another memory manager that conforms to the XMS specification). For example: device=c:\dos\himem.sys 2. If you have MSĆDOS 5.0 (or higher) and wish to use the High Memory Area, do not load MSĆDOS into the High Memory Area. (The CONFIG.SYS file should not have a DOS=HIGH command.) Restart your computer by pressing CTRLĆALTĆDelete.

3.

6Ć14

Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFKĆ0466L

6
Using Upper Memory Block on an 80386 (Workmaster II) Or Higher Computer
Physical Extended Memory for Upper Memory Block Operation
If not already present, you must add and configure physical memory on your computer to be accessed in memory addresses over 1 Megabyte (FFFFF).

386 Memory Manager
You should install a 386 memory manager such as Microsoft EMM386 (MSĆDOS Version 5.0 or higher), Quarterdeck QEMMĆ386 or 386MAX. The memory manager must be compliant with the Extended Memory Specification (XMS) Version 2.0 or later. With MSĆDOS 5.0 (or higher), you can install HIMEM and EMM386 to allow use of the Upper Memory Block. 1. Verify that your CONFIG.SYS file contains a device command for the HIMEM.SYS extended memory manager (or another memory manager that conforms to the XMS specification). For example: device=c:\dos\himem.sys 2. Add a device command for EMM386 to your CONFIG.SYS file. The device command for EMM386 must come after the device command for HIMEM and before any commands for device drivers that use expanded memory. For example: device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram

Note
With MSĆDOS 6.0, more upper memory can be obtained from B000 B7FF that is reserved for monochrome VGA display memory; however, this address space is unused on most computers. To enable extra UMBs, include this address range using the following command line instead of the one above: device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram i=b000–b7ff 3. Add a DOS=HIGH command to the CONFIG.SYS file. For example: dos=high,umb 4. Restart your computer by pressing CTRLĆALTĆDelete.

GFKĆ0466L

Chapter 6 Programmer Setup

6Ć15

6
Using Conventional Memory on an 80386 (Workmaster II) Or Higher Computer
Extended Memory and MSĆDOS 5.0 or Higher
If you have MSĆDOS 5.0 (or higher), you can load MSĆDOS into high memory. This will free more conventional memory for Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software and the communications driver. You must have at least 564 KB (577,536 bytes) of available DOS conventional memory. 1. Verify that your CONFIG.SYS file contains a device command for the HIMEM.SYS (MSĆDOS Version 5.0 or higher) extended memory manager and the command to load MSĆDOS into high memory. For example:

device=c:\dos\himem.sys dos=high 2. Restart your computer by pressing CTRLĆALTĆDelete.

Using Expanded Memory on an 80386 (Workmaster II) Or Higher Computer
Extended Memory
You must install a 386 memory manager such as Microsoft EMM386 (MSĆDOS Version 5.0 or higher), Quarterdeck QEMMĆ386 or 386MAX. These memory managers use extended memory to simulate expanded memory. The memory manager should be compliant with the Extended Memory Specification (XMS) Version 2.0 or later.

386 Memory Manager
To install EMM386 as an expandedĆmemory emulator: 1. Verify that your CONFIG.SYS file contains a device command for the HIMEM.SYS extended memory manager (or another memory manager that conforms to the XMS specification). For example: device=c:\dos\himem.sys 2. Add a device command for EMM386 to your CONFIG.SYS file. The device command for EMM386 must come after the device command for HIMEM and before any commands for device drivers that use expanded memory. For example: device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram 3. 4.
6Ć16

Disable or remove any other device commands for expanded memory managers. Restart your computer by pressing CTRLĆALTĆDelete.
GFKĆ0466L

Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

6
Using Video RAM on an 80386 (Workmaster II) or Higher Computer
As described above, the QEMM VIDRAM program from Quarterdeck Office Systems can use the EGA/VGA graphic display memory to gain additional MSĆDOS conventional memory for use by the communications driver. The graphic display memory (if your EGA/VGA has 64 KB to 96 KB graphic memory) can be turned into 64 KB to 96 KB contiguous memory following the 640 KB conventional memory. 1. Verify that your CONFIG.SYS file contains a device command for the QEMM memory manager. For example: device=c:\qemm\qemm386.sys 2. Verify that your AUTOEXEC.BAT file contains a command for the VIDRAM program. For example: c:\qemm\vidram on

GFKĆ0466L

Chapter 6 Programmer Setup

6Ć17

6
Tested Configurations
The configurations listed below have been tested using the Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software. GE Fanuc offers this list as a guide to selecting compatible hardware for this version of software. These products have demonstrated compatibility with GE Fanuc via inĆhouse testing and/or customer reports; however, hardware manufacturers' modifications to their products may affect compatibility. This list is not exhaustive and is offered as a guide only. No endorsement of any particular product is intended. If you have any questions, please contact the GE Fanuc Hotline, 1Ć800Ć828Ć5747.
Computer
Zenith Data Systems ZĆNote 433 Lnc+ (Driver in MSĆDOS) Zenith Data Systems ZĆNote 433 Lnc+ (Driver in UMB) Zenith Data Systems ZĆNote 433 Lnc+ (Driver in EMS) Gateway 2000 4DXĆ33 (Driver in MSĆDOS) Gateway 2000 4DXĆ33 (Driver in UMB) Gateway 2000 4DXĆ33 (Driver in EMS) Workmaster II (Driver in MSĆDOS) Workmaster II (Driver in UMB) Workmaster II (Driver in EMS) ZEOS 486 (Driver in MSĆDOS)

MSĆDOS / Memory Manager
MSĆDOS 6.0 Microsoft HIMEM MSĆDOS 6.0 Microsoft HIMEM MSĆDOS 6.0 Microsoft HIMEM MSĆDOS 6.0 Microsoft HIMEM MSĆDOS 6.0 Microsoft HIMEM MSĆDOS 6.0 Microsoft HIMEM MSĆDOS 5.0 Microsoft HIMEM MSĆDOS 5.0 Microsoft HIMEM MSĆDOS 5.0 Microsoft HIMEM MSĆDOS 6.0 QEMM 6.0

CONFIG.SYS File *
device=c:\dos\himem.sys device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram dos=high device=c:\dos\himem.sys device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram dos=high,umb device=c:\dos\himem.sys 1024 ram device=c:\dos\emm386.exe dos=high device=c:\dos\himem.sys 1024 ram device=c:\dos\emm386.exe dos=high device=c:\dos\himem.sys device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram i=b000Ćb7ff dos=high,umb device=c:\dos\himem.sys device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram dos=high device=c:\dos\himem.sys device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram dos=high device=c:\dos\himem.sys device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram dos=high,umb device=c:\dos\himem.sys device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram dos=high device=c:\dos\qemm386.sys dos=high

ZEOS MSĆDOS 6.0 device=c:\dos\qemm386.sys ram=D000ĆDfff 486 QEMM 6.0 dos=high (Driver in UMB) * Each CONFIG.SYS file contains the lines: files=20 and buffers=48.

Note
If your computer has a WSI card, the switch x=ce00-cfff should be added to the device=c:\dos\emm386.exe lines above to reserve this area of memory for its use. For optimum performance, SMARTDRV should be used.

TCP/IP Communications
If you are using a TCP/IP Ethernet version of Logicmaster, refer to Chapter 3 of Logicmastert 90Ć30 and Logicmaster 90Ć70 TCP/IPĆEthernet User's Manual Supplement (GFKĆ1029B or later).
6Ć18 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998 GFKĆ0466L

6

Section 4: WSI Serial Port Setup
The serial port on the Work Station Interface (WSI) Board in the programmer provides serial communication between the programmer and the attached PLC. The WSI serial port setup functions are used to configure the WSI serial port, and to save or recall those configurations from disk files. If you do not have a WSI Board for serial communications, turn to the information on PLC communications serial port setup which preceded this information. To display the WSI Serial Port Setup screen, press COMSET (F4) from the Programmer Setup menu.

Note
The PLC CPU defaults to the parameters displayed on this screen (e.g., 19200 baud, odd parity, one stop bit, etc.). These parameters must match the CPU slot configuration that was last stored to the PLC before communications can be established (see chapter 10, section 3, Configuring the CPU Module").

GFKĆ0466L

Chapter 6 Programmer Setup

6Ć19

6
The WSI serial port settings may be viewed, changed, saved to a disk file, or recalled from a disk file in all modes of operation by pressing the appropriate function key. Field
File Name

Description
The name of a disk file containing the WSI port setup parameters. If no file name is entered, the default name %WSI030.PSU is used. This field allows you to save the setup parameters to a file other than the default file name. You can then recall the setup from this saved file and perform the setup within that screen. The transmission rate, in bits per second, of data through the port. Specify whether the parity bit is odd or even; or, if no no parity bit is needed, select none. To toggle the selections, place the cursor on the field and press Tab to toggle forward (ShiftĆTab) to toggle backward. All communications use one stop bit. Slower devices may use two stop bits. The time required for the modem to start data transmission after receiving the transmit request. If no modem is used,specify zero. When the PLC is connected through modem, the value must be one or greater.

Baud Rate Parity

Stop Bits Modem Turnaround Time

Setting Up a Port
To set up the serial port, enter the appropriate values in the fields on the WSI Serial Port Setup screen. Once all the values have been entered, press Setup (F6).

Displaying Port Settings
The current settings for the WSI Serial Port Setup screen can be displayed by pressing Show Port (F1). Pressing F1 while completing the screen will delete all the changes that have been made. The previous settings of the current driver will then be redisplayed on the screen.

Saving the Port Setup
A copy of the current serial port settings may be saved to a disk file by pressing Save (F7). The data is saved to a separate file. If no file name is specified, a default name is assigned. To create a file of settings which will not be automatically invoked, a file name other than the default name can be specified. If no path is given, the current default directory is used. If no file extension is provided, .PSU is used. When Save (F7) is pressed, the settings are stored to a file and also set up on the port.

Displaying File Settings
The settings currently stored in a file can be viewed by first entering the file name and then pressing Show File (F2). If no path is specified, the current default directory is used. If no file extension is provided, .PSU is used. If the File Name field is blank, the default setup file settings are displayed.

6Ć20

Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFKĆ0466L

6

Section 5: View Modes Setup (ALTĆN)

The view mode setup function enables you to specify which modes are displayed when you press ALT-N. These view modes range from showing only rung references to showing reference names and reference descriptions in an expanded rung form (display all mode). You can also view the maximum amount of program logic on a screen by selecting a compressed rung mode. The Home, End, Page Up and Page Down, Previous, Next, and cursor movement keys function the same, regardless of the view mode selected. Display modes are selected from the View Modes Setup screen. To display this screen, press View Mode (F5) from the Programmer Setup menu.

When the View Modes Setup screen is displayed, the mode selections which were last saved are shown. The default selections are Y (Yes) for the programmer view modes and N (No) for minimum rung size mode. Use the Up and Down cursor keys to move between selection fields. Then, use the Tab key to toggle each selection between Y (Yes) and N (No), or enter Y for the view modes you want to sequence through when you press ALTĆN. Enter N to disable the modes you do not want to sequence through. To validate and save the view mode selections in the home directory file %LM090.PSU, press ALTĆU or the Escape key. At least one selection must be Y (Yes) in order for the selections to be valid. If all view mode selections are N (No), an error message is displayed and the selections are not saved. To abort the selections and use the last saved setup, press ALT-A.
GFKĆ0466L Chapter 6 Programmer Setup 6Ć21

6
Changing the View Mode
The ALTĆN key sequence also enables you to display table data either right to left (lowest reference address on the right) or left to right (lowest reference address on the left). The view mode can be changed in any table (fixed or mixed) and in any program mode (OFFLINE, ONLINE, or MONITOR).

Note
The print function does not distinguish between these two display modes and prints all tables right to left. The default view mode is the last view mode selected with ALTĆN. If the view mode has never been changed, the default set in the programmer setup is used. 1. The default reference table view mode is displayed on the View Modes Setup screen. To display this screen, press View Modes Setup (F5) from the Programmer Setup menu. The view mode in the following screen is right to left (the default display).

2.

To change the default view mode to display left to right, move the cursor to the Enabled field for the Reference Table View Modes entry. Then, use the Tab key to toggle the selection to N (No) or enter N. To validate and save the default view mode selection in the home directory file %LM090.PSU, press ALT-U or the Escape key.

3.

6Ć22

Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFKĆ0466L

D The mode command can be entered as an MSĆDOS command or placed in the AUTOEXEC. If you are printing to a serial printer. The MSĆDOS mode command must be used to configure the serial printer port before entering the Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software package. however. Do not use the same COM port for printing that you are using for communicating with the Series 90Ć30/20/Micro PLC. COM2. n specifies no parity. the buffer size on the printer may have to be increased and the serial baud rate configured for the port may have to be lowered.BAT file. 1 stop bit per character. Read the user manuals provided with your printer and the MSĆDOS sections in the manual concerning serial ports. COM3. and 1 specifies 1 stop bit. 8 specifies 8 bits per character. and stop bits. printing. If persistent errors occur when printing listings to COM1 or COM2 from within the Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software package. the serial printer port must be configured with the MSĆDOS mode command to match the printer settings. make sure you observe the following guidelines: D Either COM1 or COM2 can be used for serial printers. D Note The Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software requires either COM1. with 8 bits per character. GFKĆ0466L Chapter 6 Programmer Setup 6Ć23 . An example mode command for a serial printer operating on COM2 at 1200 baud. or COM4 as the communications port for communicating with the Series 90Ć30/20/Micro PLC. the serial printer port must be configured with the MSĆDOS mode command to match the printer settings. parity.1 In the example mode command displayed above. COM2: is the port. 12 specifies 1200 baud. Note This is a significant change from the previous versions. and no parity bits would be: mode com2:12. and the mode command.50. The following printer settings must be configured: baud rate.n.6 Section 6: Serial Printer Setup The COM1 and COM2 serial ports can be used for serial printers. Beginning with Logicmaster 90Ć30/20 Release 4.8. data bits.

Note Drawers must be created using MS-DOS before they can be used by Logicmaster90-30/20/Microprogrammingsoftware. When Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software is entered. for example: C:\LM90\FOLDERS\. the current MS-DOS directory is the default drawer. you need to have one folder for each program. GFK-0466L 7-1 . ← CPU Configuration ← I/O Configuration ← Program Logic ← Reference Tables ← Rung Comments ← Backup ← Teach Files PROGRAM FOLDER Drawer A drawer is an MS-DOS directory path which contains one or more folders. Folders must be created using Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. The default drawer may be changed from the Select screen by pressing ALT-C to clear the Program Folder field and then entering the MS-DOS directory path (ending in\) of the subdirectory containing the folders you want. To store more than one PLC program. An existing MS-DOS directory cannot be used as a folder. A folder is an MS-DOS subdirectory which contains all information about one PLC program.Chapter 7 Program Folders section level 1 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1 7 Series 90 programs and configuration data are stored in folders. Refer to appendix G for an explanation of the files created with Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software.

*. MS-DOS may only be safely used to copy an entire program folder to another program folder of the same name. TEMP Program Folder The special program folder TEMP does not require the folder name and program name to match. If another program was developed in the TEMP folder prior to the download operation. you will not be able to select the program folder. Note Annotation files (nicknames. reference descriptions. or delete program folders. Caution Do not use MS-DOS to copy individual files from one folder to another or to delete files. 7-2 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Therefore.7 Program Folder Names Every program will reside in its own program folder. and comment text) remain in the folder and are not stored to the PLC. Temp folders created for the Series 90-30 and Series 90-70 are not compatible. The TEMP folder can be used if you need to view a user program and monitor its operation when you do not have the original folder on your machine. Using Program Folder Functions Both the configuration software and programming software provide a group of program folder functions. If you have a 90-70 TEMP folder. select. then RD TEMP). The software will check these names to be sure they match. described below). The name of the program in the folder and the program folder will be the same (except for the “TEMP” folder. Those files are still in the original folder where the program was developed. Programming functions. without overwriting the previous version. The folder name is the program name in the PLC. are not allowed if the names do not match. you must exit to DOS and delete the TEMP directory before creating a 90–30 TEMP folder. Doing so may produce unexpected results. If MS-DOS functions have been used to place program files into a program folder with a different name. You can use the DOS DELTREE command (DELTREE \LM90\TEMP) or delete all files in TEMP and remove the directory with the RD command. such as loading a program from the PLC to the computer. modify. when loading a program from the PLC to the TEMP folder. the annotation in the recently loaded program will actually belong to the previous program. the annotation will be missing. The TEMP folder can also be used to load a copy of a program and modify it. These functions can be used to create. DEL TEMP\*. (CD \LM90.

backup. these blocks remain locked when the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software copy. Clear the contents of the current program folder. Restore a program folder with its backup copy. Page 7-4 7-7 7-5 7-8 7-9 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-14 Note If a folder contains locked subroutines. press Folder (F8) from the main menu. section 8. refer to chapter 3. and restore folder functions are used. Remove a program folder that is no longer needed. For more information on locking and unlocking subroutines.” GFK-0466L Chapter 7 Program Folders 7-3 . “Subroutine Blocks. Make a backup copy of the current program folder. or select a previously created folder.7 To use a program folder function. Copy a program folder into the current program folder. Use this function to make a copy of a program folder that can be modified while retaining the original. Automatically select the correct program folder and attempt to verify equality with the PLC program. Rename a program folder to a new folder name. Lock or unlock a program folder. Locking a program folder prevents its files from being changed or deleted. Function Key F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F10 Function Select Delete Auto Backup Restore Rename Clear Lock Copy Description Create a new program folder.

you cannot use that folder with an earlier release of software. Selecting a Previously Created Folder with a New 351 or 352 (or Later) Configuration If you are using a 351 or 352 CPU hardware configuration and select a folder created previously when you had a different CPU configuration. There is the potential of having that folder translated to 331 CPU format. press Select (F1) from the Program Folder Functions menu. Caution Do not use a pre-Release 7 version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro to store folders to a 352 CPU.7 Selecting/Creating Program Folders To create a new program folder or use one that already exists. 7-4 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Logicmaster prompts you if you are using 351 or 352 or later hardware configuration and then select a folder created under a different CPU configuration. you will be prompted to convert the folder to one that uses the code written for 351 or 352 CPUs. Logicmaster does allow that. Note Once you edit a program folder using Release 3 or later of Logicmaster 90-30/20 software. Note As mentioned above. If you plan to use that folder again with lower model CPUs. but make sure you stay within the memory limit and program size limits of the lower model CPU.

the name of this program appears in the PLC Program Name field. use the Escape key. After the select screen is exited. To select a folder in a different drawer. move the cursor to the desired folder name or type the name of the program folder in the Program Folder field. enter C:\LM90\FOLDERS\. Position the cursor on the name of the program folder you wish to select or type the name of the program folder. (This is also the name of the program. If the program folder already exists. first select the drawer by entering the drawer MS-DOS path. To select a folder in the current drawer. the TEMP folder is selected or created if one does not exist. the following message is displayed: “Folder matching PLC name not found. an error message is displayed and the select screen continues to be displayed. no folder is selected and the select screen remains displayed on the screen. In the configuration software. An entry in this field may not be edited. the names of the folders in the newly selected drawer are displayed. this field is blank. the programming software checks to see if a folder exists under the current directory whose name matches the name of the program in the PLC. Program logic and configuration are loaded from the PLC into the TEMP folder.g. If N (No) is entered. the software will prompt you for confirmation to create a new program folder. a message is displayed indicating that the auto-select function is not available in that mode. If Y (Yes) is entered.. and press the Enter key. To cancel any changes made to this screen. In the programming software. load program to TEMP folder? (Y/N)”. Other program folders in the current drawer are also listed on the screen. the message displayed when a matching folder does not exist is “load configuration to TEMP folder?”. When F3 is pressed in MONITOR or ONLINE mode. the list of folders is not updated. it is automatically selected. If the TEMP folder already contains logic and/or configuration files. If the attached PLC contains a user program. and updates the equality field on the status line based on the result. In order to have the folder list updated. If an error is encountered verifying or loading data from the PLC. If the program folder does not already exist. and pressing the Enter key. The software then attempts to verify the program or configuration in the folder with that in the PLC. The status lines are updated to show that the folder program is equal to the version in the PLC. select whether or not to create a backup copy. this field contains asterisks. GFK-0466L Chapter 7 Program Folders 7-5 . This prevents you from accidentally creating a program folder due to a typing mistake.7 The name of the last folder selected is shown in reverse video in the Program Folder field. If the attached PLC does not contain a user program. When F3 is pressed in OFFLINE mode or if the programmer is not communicating with the PLC. To return to the Program Folder Functions menu. if a matching folder does not exist. If a second floppy disk is inserted after a folder has already been selected or created on the first floppy disk. press ALT-A (abort). If the folder does exist. Auto-Select Function The Auto (F3) softkey is only active when the select screen is displayed. enter A:\). If the programmer is offline or not connected to a PLC. the main menu is displayed. you must reselect the drawer (e. For example. ending with a “Å ”. and press the Enter key. When the Enter key is pressed. those files are backed up prior to the load.) The name can have up to seven characters.

7-6 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . the initial folder selection screen is displayed. Note If the baud rate with the serial version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software is set to 1200 or less.7 Automatic Folder Selection The automatic folder selection feature allows Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software to automatically select the correct program folder and attempt to verify equality with the PLC program. During power-up initialization. the programmer does not automatically go to MONITOR mode. or select a new drawer and press Auto (F3) to try again to select the matching folder and then to check to see if they are both the same. If this attempt is not successful. computers without a keyswitch default to MONITOR mode. If the folder does exist. that folder is automatically selected and an equality check is performed. You can select a folder or press Auto (F3) to load to the TEMP folder. when the initializing screen is displayed. The main menu screen is displayed after the equality check is completed. The programmer mode will default to OFFLINE mode on computers without a programmer mode keyswitch. the initial folder selection screen is displayed. If a connection exists. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software attempts to establish point-to-point communications with an attached PLC. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software will then check to see if a folder whose name matches the PLC program name exists. If a matching folder does not exist.

press the Enter key. GFK-0466L Chapter 7 Program Folders 7-7 . Please refer to the information on unlocking program folders provided later in this chapter. Respond to the confirmation prompt to continue with the deletion.7 Deleting Program Folders Use this function to remove a program folder that is no longer needed. The software will not allow the currently selected folder to be deleted. Then. The window is changed to display the folders in this drawer. If the program folder has a backup. To delete a folder in the current drawer. To return to the Program Folder Functions menu. you cannot delete it. If a program folder is locked (lock status is shown in the lower right corner of your screen). type the name of the program folder in the Program Folder field or move the cursor to the desired folder name. Press Delete (F2) from the Program Folder Functions menu. Once started. To delete a folder in a different drawer. press the Escape key. you must remove them before using the delete function. the delete operation cannot be aborted. that copy is also deleted automatically. enter the full path specification or specify the drawer in the Program Folder field. If you have created any directories using MS-DOS beneath the program folder to be deleted. You may not be able to delete a program folder residing on a virtual drive.

press Backup (F4) from the Program Folder Functions menu. enter Y (Yes) in the corresponding fields: Field ProgramLogic Configuration Reference Tables Description The ladder logic program. A:\LESSON should be used. For example. The BackupDestination field allows you to specify where you want to put the backup archive.7 Backing Up Program Folders To create a backup copy of the currently selected program folder. If only A:\ is specified. To change the destination. you must back up to a subdirectory. The reference tables for the program. 7-8 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . A:\ cannot be used as the backup destination. If no backup folder exists for the current program folder. The default destination is the backup directory of the current folder. move the cursor to this field and enter the new destination. The backup folder is located in a subdirectory under the program folder. enter Y (Yes) in the Entire Folder field. To back up only selected options. To back up the entire contents of the current folder. Note When backing up to a floppy diskette. you cannot restore from the floppy diskette. Use the cursor keys to move from one option field to another. If LESSON is the folder name. The currentconfiguration. one is created automatically.

you must change the status to unlocked before a restore can occur. the backup operation cannot be aborted. A new backup archive will be created to reflect the current contents of the program folder. If the selected options were already stored to the backup. move the cursor to this field and enter the new source. the previous backup is left intact and the selected options are added to the backup. To return to the Program Folder Functions menu. If the program folder is locked (locked status is shown in the lower right corner of your screen). To change the source. Restoring Program Folders To replace the contents of the current program folder with the backup copy. If you back up the entire folder. Once started. press Restore (F5) from the Program Folder Functions menu. If not. To restore a program folder. the message “No backup found to restore” is displayed. they will first be deleted. The RestorationSource field allows you to specify where you want to retrieve the backup archive from. Note The backup archive must be restored to a folder with the same name as the folder from which the backup originally was made. press the Escape key. The default source is the backup directory of the current folder. Please refer to the information on unlocking program folders provided later in this chapter. a backup copy must exist. If you back up only program logic or any other options besides the entire folder.7 Then press the Enter key. the software will prompt you for confirmation and then automatically delete the previous backup. GFK-0466L Chapter 7 Program Folders 7-9 .

the restore operation cannot be aborted. use the Copy command (page 7-15). enter Y (Yes) in the corresponding fields: Field ProgramLogic Configuration Reference Tables Description The ladder logic program. It also does not automatically create the proper folder name when you do a Backup to a floppy. The reference tables for the program. so it will be difficult to restore the folder. an auto-verification is performed to determine whether the restored program or configuration is equal to the PLC. The currentconfiguration. Up to 5 files are created in the BACKUP subdirectory under your current folder. Note The Backup and Restore commands are meant to provide a quick snapshot of your folder to a hard disk. press the Escape key. 7-10 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . enter Y (Yes) in the Entire Folder field.7 Use the cursor keys to move from one option field to another. To restore the entire contents of the current folder. the software will prompt you for confirmation. The files are not compatible with PKUNZIP and may not be accessible with other versions of Logicmaster. Then press the Enter key. If any information exists in the current program folder that would be written over by the backup copy. If you are moving a folder to or from a floppy for transfer to another computer. If the programmer is in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. To return to the Program Folder Functions menu. To restore only selected options. Once started.

it is automatically displayed in the Rename Folder to field. Press the Enter key to start the renaming operation.7 Renaming Program Folders This feature of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software enables you to rename any folder in the current drawer to another folder name that is not being used. the message “Folder renamed successfully” is displayed and the Rename Folder to field is cleared. If you press an alphanumeric key. If the rename operation is aborted. the rename operation cannot be aborted. Enter the new folder name into the Rename Folder to field. You must manually clear the field by pressing ALT-C or use the Delete key to delete the contents of the field. To rename a program folder. press Rename (F6) from the Program Folder Functions menu or from another Program Folder screen. press ALT-C or use the Delete key to delete the contents of the field. GFK-0466L Chapter 7 Program Folders 7-11 . the Rename Folder to field is not automatically cleared since the rename never completed. Once the rename operation is complete. To clear this field. The software will prompt you for confirmation to continue the operation with the message “Current folder ( <file_name>) will be renamed to <file_name>. Continue? (Y/N).” Once started.

Clearing the folder and then loading the program from the PLC results in lost annotation. To clear the entire contents of the current folder.XOV and all .7 Clearing Program Folders To delete the contents of the current program folder while keeping the folder itself for future use. 7-12 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Once any of the other fields is set to Y. Please refer to the information on unlocking program folders provided later in this chapter. the remaining fields are automatically set to N. The Tab key may also be used to toggle the selection of each option. The PRINT. Once the Entire Folder field is set to Y. The reference tables for the program. the Entire Folder field is automatically set to N. you cannot clear it. To clear only selected options. The default selection for the Entire Folder field is Y (Yes).XRF files for the program. press Clear (F7) from the Program Folder Functions menu. all other fields default to N (No). enter Y (Yes) in the Entire Folder field. If a program folder is locked (look at the lower right corner of your screen). The currentconfiguration. Use the cursor keys to move from one option field to another. enter Y (Yes) in the corresponding fields: Field ProgramLogic Configuration Reference Tables Print Cross Reference Files Description The ladder logic program. Note Program annotation files only exist in the folder and not in the PLC.

Then press the Enter key. GFK-0466L Chapter 7 Program Folders 7-13 . press Y (Yes) at the prompt. Use the Tab key to change the access description. you will have a chance to back up the current program folder. press Lock (F8) from the Program Folder Functions menu. press the Escape key. To change the locked status of the current program folder. the software will prompt you for confirmation to continue the clear operation. Locking/Unlocking Program Folders Locking a program folder protects its files from being accidentally changed. Note Program folders on write-protected floppy diskettes are automatically locked. To create a backup copy. If the programmer is in ONLINE or MONITOR mode.7 Press the Enter key to begin the clear operation. To return to the Program Folder Functions menu. If you answer the continuation prompt by pressing Y (Yes). Press N (No) if you do not want to back up the information first. the status is automatically set to NOT EQUAL. The new access description will appear in the lower right corner of the screen. the clear operation cannot be aborted. If there is any information in the folder. Once started. Remove the write-protect tab and unlock the folder using this function.

7 Copying Program Folders Copying to Another Folder on the Hard Disk Use the copy function to copy from another program folder into the current folder. it is not available in the configuration software. Note The Copy feature functions somewhat differently than you might expect. use the cursor keys to move from one option field to another. Then. Notice that you are copying another program folder into the current folder.” then the folder called LESSON becomes an exact copy of ACCTRL. To copy the entire contents of the source folder. If you copy the folder called “ACCTRL.” then LESSON is the name of your current folder (as displayed in the Status line toward the bottom of your screen). they are destroyed by the copy process. press Copy (F10) from the Program Folder Functions menu. The source program folder is copied into the “Current” program folder. Note The copy function is only available in the programming software. That is. Enter the name of the program folder whose contents you want to copy into the currently selected program folder. To make a copy of a program folder. If there are any files in the current folder. if you have been using a folder called “LESSON. enter Y (Yes) in the 7-14 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .

the remaining fields are automatically set to N. Copying to a Diskette To copy to a diskette. To copy only selected options. If the programmer is in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. Once the Entire Folder field is set to Y. The currentconfiguration. the Entire Folder field is automatically set to N. all other fields default to N (No). Press F8 from the main menu to select the Folder functions. the copy operation cannot be aborted. Make sure you specify the disk drive letter. If there is any information in the current folder. Once any of the other fields is set to Y. press the Escape key. type in the name you wish to use for the copy you are about to make. In the Program Folder blank. To return to the Program Folder Functions menu. Place a diskette in your disk drive (usually an A or B drive). an auto-verification is performed to determine whether the programmer/configurator is equal to the PLC. Press the Enter key to begin the copy operation. The default selection for the Entire Folder field is Y (Yes). There should be plenty of room on the diskette. The reference tables for the program.7 Entire Folder field.g. 4. 2.. enter Y (Yes) in the corresponding fields: Field ProgramLogic Configuration Reference Tables Description The ladder logic program. Press select (F1) “Select/Create a Program Folder” (see page 7-3 for screen sample if needed). a:\as shown below: GFK-0466L Chapter 7 Program Folders 7-15 . Once started. e. the software will prompt you for a confirmation to continue the copy operation since everything in the current folder will be overwritten. 3. The Tab key may also be used to toggle the selection of each option. you will need to follow these steps: 1.

create new folder? (Y/N)” 6. Note Notice that you are only creating an empty folder. press the Copy softkey (F10).. After Logicmaster has finished creating a new folder. Press Enter to start the Copy function. When exiting through Ctrl-Break. When the Copy is complete. Press Enter to select this new folder on your A or B drive. Type in the entire path and folder name. 8.) You can now remove your diskette which has a copy of the source folder on it. (An alternate way of exiting the software is to press Ctrl-Break once. e. The following prompt will appear at the top of your screen: “Program folder does not exist. c:\lm90\lesson as shown above. 9. Press the Escape key again to return to the Program Folder Functions menu. Press the Escape key again if you wish to exit the Programming software. the words “Selected folder items have been copied to current folder” will appear towards the top of your screen. Type Y (for Yes) to return to the Logicmaster main menu where you can press either F10 or the Escape key to exit. Be sure to include the DOS drive and directory which is usually c:\lm90.g. Press the Escape key to exit the Copy function which takes you to the Program Folder Functions. you do not need to press the Escape key multiple times. Type Y to confirm that you want to create a new folder on your diskette. 10. 7-16 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . 7. In the next steps you will copy the contents of your source folder into that empty folder.7 5. A prompt will appear asking you if you wish to exit.

stored. press Utility (F9) from the main menu. verified. No operations on program logic or tables may be performed. Note In the configuration software. or Shift-F9 from any main menu function screen. and reference tables between the programmer and the PLC. They are also used to compare the program. and reference tables in the programmer with the program.Chapter 8 Program Utilities section level 1 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1 8 The program utility functions are used to transfer programs. and reference tables in the PLC. and to read/write/verify EEPROM. To access the program utility functions. to clear PLC memory. only the configuration may be loaded. configuration data. or cleared. configuration data. configuration data. GFK-0466L 8-1 .

Page 8-3 8-5 8-8 F5 F10 Clear EEPROM 8-10 8-12 8-2 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . write the entire contents of PLC memory to EEPROM. and/or reference tables in the PLC. and/or reference tables from the PLC to the programmer. and/or reference tables from the programmer to the PLC. Read the EEPROM contents into PLC memory. and/or reference tables from PLC memory.8 Function Key F1 F2 F3 Function Load Store Verify Description Copy program logic. or verify the EEPROM contents with the PLC memory. and/or reference data in the programmer with the program logic. Delete program. configuration data. Compare program logic. Copy program logic. configuration data. configuration data. configuration data. configuration data.

Therefore. Caution You cannot load a Release 4 or above Program with a release earlier than 3. and/or reference tables from a PLC to the programmer. To use the load function. If so.8 Loading from PLC to Programmer Use the load function to transfer program logic. configuration data. reference descriptions. The load function transfers the program. you must know the password in order to use the function. Note In the configuration software. The Load Program screen appears: Note Annotation files (nicknames. and comment text) remain in the folder and are not stored to the PLC. the programmer must be in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. only the configuration may be loaded.50 of of Logicmaster 90-30/20 software. which remains unchanged in the PLC. No operations on program logic or tables may be performed. you must load from the PLC to the original folder containing the annotation in order to retain its annotation. GFK-0466L Chapter 8 Program Utilities 8-3 . This function may be password protected in the PLC. Press Load (F1) from the Program Utility Functions menu or from another Program Utilities screen.

press ALT-A. The Load Program screen shows the currently selected program folder and the program name in the PLC. change the selections for reference tables and configuration to Y (Yes). the selected items are cleared from the current folder. only the program logic is set to Y (Yes). The subroutine block containing the edited identifier descriptions should be stored to the PLC in order to restore equality. or reference tables. To restore the original selections while editing this screen. select whether or not you want to create a backup copy of the current program folder before loading the data. The name of the program in the PLC is checked against the name of the current program folder. When this screen first appears. do not load the program to the folder to restore equality. The currentconfiguration. A program must be loaded to a folder whose name matches the PLC program name or a TEMP folder (e. The program with the updated text should be stored to the PLC instead.. This also applies to identifier descriptions for subroutine blocks which have been edited off-line. To stop a program transfer in progress. To begin loading the data. Correct the error and repeat the load function. If the names are the same. select N (No) for any of the following: Field ProgramLogic Configuration Reference Tables Description The ladder logic program. the software displays the message “Load Complete”. After a successful transfer of data. the load continues. Also. To return to the Program Utility Functions menu. press the Escape key. a folder whose name is TEMP). press ALT-A. Three types of data can be loaded from the PLC to the programmer: program logic. To load all of the data.g. If a communication error occurs during the load process (indicated by a message on the screen). configuration data. The reference tables for the program.8 Note If comment text has been edited since the program was stored to the PLC. Use the cursor keys to select items. you cannot start the load unless the folder name is TEMP . To load only part of the data. press the Enter key. If the names are not the same. 8-4 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . these cannot be changed on this screen. and type in new selections as appropriate.

When you make Online changes to tables or overrides. The data is then stored from the new program folder. only the configuration may be stored. Loading tables from the PLC into the folder allows you to store the same information in a replacement PLC. Note In the configuration software. the reference table information in the PLC is lost. the store function clears both the program and configuration data from the PLC. the programmer must be in ONLINE mode. You may want to do this periodically to capture a snapshot of all PLC register values and override conditions to save in your folder. Storing to PLC from Programmer Use the store function to copy program logic.2K Baud 2 seconds 3 seconds 4 seconds 8 seconds 13 seconds GFK-0466L Chapter 8 Program Utilities 8-5 . configuration data.) Logic Size (Bytes) 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 2400 Baud 12 seconds 17 seconds 26 seconds 45 seconds 84 seconds 19. which remains unchanged in the programmer. To use the store function. If the PLC program name is not the same as the folder name. The store function copies the program. If so. see “Run Mode Store Function” on page 8-6. No operations on program logic or tables may be performed. The PLC can be in either STOP or RUN mode. the information is NOT saved in the folder. The store function may be password protected in the PLC. and/or reference tables from the programmer to the PLC. you must know the password in order to use the function. If you clear PLC memory or replace the CPU.8 Loading Reference Tables from the PLC to Save in the Computer Folder Reference Table data is not automatically uploaded from the PLC unless you select it. (For more information.

If there are errors. which cannot be changed. only the program logic is set to Y (Yes). the store operation is not attempted. its register memory size). To begin storing the data. The reference tables for the program. The Store Program screen appears: The screen shows the currently selected program folder. Three types of data can be stored from the PLC to the programmer: program logic. When this screen first appears.8 Press Store (F2) from the Program Utility Functions menu. Note Annotation files (nicknames. configuration data. 8-6 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . A program containing subroutine blocks and/or subroutine CALL instructions cannot be stored to a Pre-Release 3 PLC. press ALT-A. To restore the original selections while editing this screen. The information to be transferred must fit within the configured boundaries of the PLC (for example. or reference tables. change the selection for reference tables and configuration to Y (Yes). reference descriptions. To store all of the data. press the Enter key. The currentconfiguration. select N (No) for any of the following: Field ProgramLogic Configuration Reference Tables Description The ladder logic program. and must not contain errors in syntax or any instructions which are not supported by the attached PLC. and comment text) remain in the folder and are not stored to the PLC. To store only part of the data. The program must be complete. Use the cursor keys to select items. and type in new selections as appropriate.

The next attach. you cannot abort the transfer of program logic. To correct these problems caused a Store failure. If the PLC is in RUN mode when the store begins. however. all serial port configuration parameters would be lost. the software displays the message “Store Complete”. If a communication or disk error occurs during the store process (indicated by a message on the screen). To stop a program transfer in progress. would be affected by this unless you correct the situation before disconnecting. If you had selected configuration when the Store failed. GFK-0466L Chapter 8 Program Utilities 8-7 . Note If you store a program that was written using a CPU hardware configuration other than model 351 to a 351 CPU. or reference tables) regardless of whether or not they were successfully stored before the point at which the Store failed. you will be prompted to convert the folder to one that uses the code written for 351 CPUs when you start the storing process. To return to the Program Utility Functions menu. configuration. If one of the selected items is the configuration. clears (resets to the default value) everything that had been selected to be stored (program logic. The only exception to this clearing is that passwords are not re-enabled as part of the configuration in the failure. In addition. remember that this includes SNP ID (especially important in a multidrop communications link) and has to be reset manually. on a 351 or 352 CPU. the selected items are cleared from the current folder.8 After a successful transfer of data. press ALT-A if the PLC is in STOP mode. Communications parameters such as Baud rate/parity would have to be reset as well. The connection to the PLC remains usable until you disconnect. such as a “Program too large” fault or any other failure during a Store function. Correct the error and repeat the store function. then try again to store the program or configuration or reference tables to the PLC. you will also have to set the SNP ID as a separate step. (Refer to the Caution note below for further information. Refer to page 7-4 for other considerations when using previously created folders with a 351 CPU. press the Escape key. Caution A Store failure. correct the problem area in the program or configuration.

(A very large program combined with a very low baud rate could result in more than 10 seconds. The logic sweep is stopped for approximately 1 to 10 seconds. refer to page 3-104 in this manual. during this STOP-TO-RUN transition.x or earlier. They are maintained at all times during and after the RUN MODE STORE. For more information about this feature. regardless of their prior state.01 of Logicmaster 90-30/20 software and Release 4. Pause mode will cause the CPU sweep to be suspended and all I/O states frozen until the entire program has been transferred.02. without the STOP-TO-RUN transition that clears non-retentive outputs in CPUs prior to Release 4. non-retentive outputs are maintained during the store operation. but they are not maintained after the store operation is complete.50 or earlier of Logicmaster 90-30/20 software and a CPU Release 3. Note You can store a changed block from Block Edit mode without stopping or pausing the PLC. To do this. 8-8 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . The PLC will then resume operation where it paused.02 CPUs. Beginning with Release 4. a PLC mode called “Pause” will prevent non-retentive outputs from being cleared. as when the system toggles from STOP/IOSCAN mode back to RUN mode. the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software automatically switches the PLC into STOP/IOSCAN mode during the transfer and then switches it back to RUN mode after the transfer is complete. depending on the size of the program and the baud rate. Retentive outputs are not affected by this operation.) Caution With Release 3.8 Run Mode Store Function The RUN MODE STORE function enables you to transfer program logic and reference table data to a running PLC system. All non-retentive outputs are turned OFF.

No operations on program logic or tables may be performed. For more information on viewing locked blocks. Note You cannot verify a view locked block with an unlocked block.” In the configuration software. configuration data. and/or reference tables in the PLC. This function may be password protected.8 Verifying a Program with the PLC Use the verify function to compare program logic. “Subroutine Blocks. GFK-0466L Chapter 8 Program Utilities 8-9 . Press Verify (F3) from the Program Utility Functions menu or from another Program Utilities screen. the programmer must be in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. If so. refer to chapter 3. and/or reference tables in the programmer with the program logic. you must know the password in order to use the function. To use the verify function. section 8. configuration data. only the configuration may be verified. which cannot be changed. The screen shows the currently selected program folder.

If the information being compared is the same. counter and input data will have many changes in reference table data compared to the programmer folder. no miscompares detected” and the program logic equality state is set to EQUAL.8 Four types of data can be compared: program logic. If miscompares are found. The main program block and all of the subroutine blocks (all blocks in the program). or all logic blocks. While the verify is occurring. you can press ALT-A to abort. To compare all of the data. Pressing the keyboard space bar will restore the screen to its original form or bring up the next page of miscompare information. the selections for program logic and all logic blocks are set to Y (Yes). Note A running PLC with timers. Press the Enter key to begin the verify function. For example: Each miscompare displays the name of the logic block and the memory type where the miscompare occurs. you must change the selection for configuration data and reference tables to Y (Yes). The reference tables for the program. If the program is not successfully verified. they are listed on the screen. When this screen first appears. The currentconfiguration. configuration data. the screen prompts: “Verify complete. select N (No) for any of the following: Field Current Logic Block All Logic Blocks Reference Tables Configuration Description The block currently selected in the program display/edit function. including Reference Tables when verifying a running PLC will generate many miscompares that are meaningless. For that reason. To compare only part of the data. 8-10 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . reference tables. the logic equality state is set to NOT EQUAL.

Note Only Model 331 and higher CPUs support reference overrides. the %S fault bits and overrides are cleared. the programmer must be in ONLINE mode. Field ProgramLogic Configuration Reference Tables Override Tables Description The ladder logic program The current configuration The reference tables for the program The reference override tables for the program Press the Enter key to begin the clear function. To clear all of the data. 321. configuration. To use the clear function. do not change any of these selections. 313. %S bits and overrides are not cleared. reference tables. When only the reference tables option is set to Y. and reference override tables. When the clear operation is complete. Press Clear (F5) from the Program Utility Functions menu or from another Program Utilities screen to reach the screen shown below: Four types of data can be cleared: program logic. GFK-0466L Chapter 8 Program Utilities 8-11 . 311. reference tables. the selection for each type is set to Y (Yes). it cannot be aborted. 323. and the Micro. and/or reference override tables in the attached PLC. the software displays the “Clear Complete” message. When all options are set to Y. this is nonapplicable to Models 211. therefore. configuration data. If so.8 Clearing PLC Memory The Clear PLC Memory function gives you the ability to selectively clear the program logic. Once the clear operation has begun. Select N (No) for those you do not want to clear. you must know the password to use the function. This function may be password protected in the PLC. When this screen first appears.

configuration. you can clear Reference Override Tables as well. Beginning with Release 4. 8-12 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . and/or reference tables in the attached PLC. the CPU must be in STOP mode and online with Logicmaster. you must have a privilege level of 3 or above to use this feature. set the “REFERENCE TABLES” to Y (Yes) as discussed on the previous page. Output (%Q). User Internal (%M). Restrictions To clear the reference override tables. When you select “OVERRIDE TABLES” on the CLEAR PLC MEMORY screen. all reference override tables will be cleared in PLC memory. Note Do not confuse this with clearing the reference tables. To clear reference tables.8 Clear Reference Override Tables The Clear PLC Memory function gives you the ability to selectively clear the program logic. Special Considerations for Clearing Reference Overrides The override tables in PLC memory are as follows: Input (%I). If you are using passwords with associated privileges.5. and Global (%G).

The verify EEPROM operation can be performed while the programmer is in either ONLINE or MONITOR mode. and the OEM key. and selectively verify the EEPROM contents with the PLC memory. or enter the desired operation directly into the field. Note CPUs for the Micro as well as Model 340 and higher 90-30 CPUs have Flash memory instead of EEPROM. register data. In addition. all of the instructions listed below apply to all models having Flash memory. the Read/Write/V erify process is the same for Flash as for EEPROM. configuration data. passwords. Note The read/write EEPROM operations require the programmer to be online and the PLC to be stopped. the Operation field defaults to VERIFY. Then. these operations cannot be performed if the PLC is in OEM protection mode. press the EEPROM (F10) softkey from the Program Utility Functions menu or from another Program Utilities screen. That is. as well as all models having EEPROM. When the Read/Write/V erify EEPROM screen is first displayed. however. To use this function.8 Read/Write/V erify EEPROM/Flash The Series 90-30 PLC supports an EEPROM (Electronic Erasable PROM) for storing PLC logic. Use the Tab key to toggle through the valid operations. This EEPROM is located on the Series 90-30 PLC. The read/write/verify EEPROM function of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software enables you to selectively read the EEPROM contents into PLC memory. write the entire contents of PLC memory to the EEPROM. GFK-0466L Chapter 8 Program Utilities 8-13 . select the information to be processed or just press the Enter key to start execution.

%M. and %G for versions 4. Once the write operation has begun.52 of the 90-30. these fields can be changed for the write operation. The software will prompt you to confirm this operation. %AI. %M. Write EEPROM Write the entire contents of PLC memory into EEPROM. %Q. After all the options are selected. %AQ.21 CPUs %R.40 and later (see Note below). %M. %Q. the message “Verify EEPROM complete. When the read operation is complete. %AI. %Q. Press the Enter key (with the PLC connected and stopped) to begin the write operation. you can read. %I. %Q.40 and later (see Note below). Selectively verify the EEPROM contents with PLC memory. all three types of data default to Y (Yes). the software displays the message “Read from EEPROM completed” to indicate that the read was successful. and %I for version 4. you may choose the information to be read or use the default options provided: Program Logic: The ladder logic program. press the Enter key (with the PLC connected and stopped). %I. %AI. Enter N (No) for those types of data you do not wish to read. all of the selective option fields default to Y (Yes). When the write operation is complete. a corresponding error message is displayed to indicate which option(s)miscompared. Once the write operation is selected. Verify EEPROM When this screen first appears. The current configuration %R (%R only) data for 3. %AQ. %M. If no miscompares are found. the software displays the message “Write to EEPROM completed” to indicate that the write was successful.21 could handle all but %G memory). you may choose the information to be read or use the default options provided: Program Logic: Configuration : Data: The ladder logic program. Enter N (No) for those types of data you do not wish to read. %M. and %G (version 4. and verify %R. and %I for version 4. press the Enter key (with the PLC connected and stopped). %AI. %AQ.40.52 and earlier CPU versions %R. Note Prior to version 3. it cannot be aborted. all three types of data default to Y (Yes). After all the options are selected. 8-14 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . If miscompares are found. %Q. %I. no miscompares found” is displayed on the message line. and %G for versions 4.21 CPUs %R. only Register memory (%R) could be read and verified though this utility. Once the read operation is selected. Beginning with version 4. %AI. Configuration : Data: The current configuration %R (%R only) data for 3. %AQ. Once the verify operation is selected. %AQ. When this screen first appears. Once the read operation has begun.52 and earlier CPU versions %R. it cannot be aborted.8 Operation Read EEPROM Description Selectively read the EEPROM contents into PLC memory.

8 Caution A read EEPROM/Flash failure clears (resets to the default value) everything that had been selected to be read (program logic. Communications parameters such as Baud rate/parity would have to be reset as well. remember that this includes SNP ID (especially important in a multidrop communications link) and has to be reset manually. all serial port configuration parameters would be lost. The connection to the PLC remains usable until you disconnect. If one of the selected items is the configuration. If you had selected configuration when the Store failed. however. The next attach. The only exception to this clearing is that passwords are not re-enabled as part of the configuration in the failure. To correct this problem. would be affected by this unless you correct the situation before disconnecting. or register data) regardless of whether or not they were successfully read before the point at which the read failed. In addition. configuration. you will also have to set the SNP ID as a separate step. try again to store the program or configuration or register data to the PLC. on a 351 or 352 CPU. GFK-0466L Chapter 8 Program Utilities 8-15 . This includes SNP ID which has to be set manually.

Explains how to print software configuration data to a printer or a file. Note Print may be used to print the values in the program folder only. Explains how to print reference tables to a printer or to a file. the reference values must first be loaded to the folder by using the load utility function (see chapter 8). Illustrates various hard copy listings which can be produced using the print function. configurations. To print the values from the PLC. Page 9-3 9-5 9-7 4 5 6 7 Print Reference Tables Print Coil References PrintConfiguration Print FunctionExamples 9-14 9-16 9-18 9-21 GFK-0466L 9-1 . cross references. Print copies of programs. variables. and reference tables to files or a printer.Chapter 9 Print Functions section level 1 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1 9 D D D The print function is used to: Determine a printing device or file destination for Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro screen print text. Enter printer parameters. and program annotation to a printer or to a file. Explains how to print coil references to a printer or to a file. Chapter 9 contains the following sections: Section 1 2 3 Title Printer Parameters Selecting a Screen Print Device Print Program Description Explains how to check or to change the currently selected printer parameters. Explains how to designate a printer or file to receive screen prints. Explains how to print program logic.

or Shift-F10 from any main menu function screen. If this is done. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software does not prevent the printing of a listing to a file with the same name as one of the program folder files. Refer to appendix G for a list of file extensions used by the software. 9-2 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . part of the folder may be lost. press Print (F10) from the main menu. Caution Do not use the same file extensions for printing as are used for the program folder files.9 Print Functions Menu To display the Print Functions menu in the programming software.

Type (or use the Tab key) to enter new values as needed. This file is written to the home directory. decide whether your entries or the default values shown above should be used when the system is started. press Save (F10). This causes the printer parameters to be written to the PRINT. GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-3 . Move the cursor to the item you want to change. The setup screen shows the value and possible selections for each parameter. Changing Setup Printer Parameters To change entries on the Printer Parameters screen: 1. To change your printer setup or check its contents. 3. Default values are supplied. These can be changed and stored in a file for continued use. When the programmer is powered up. To save the printer parameters. press Setup (F1) from the Print Functions menu or from another Print Functions screen. 2. these entries will replace the standard default values.SET file. A. To save the printer parameters only until the next power-up (and then return to the default parameters). B.9 Section 1: Printer Parameters The printer setup parameters used by the programmer must match those of your printer. When you are finished. do not press Save (F10).

Note: Some printers automatically insert a formfeed after printing a certain number of lines (typically. If the printer has this feature. If you do not want the programmer to insert a line feed character after each carriage return character. If an associated group of lines will not fit on one page. This feature can be used to put the printer into a particular mode (for example. enter N (No). Refer to the instructions for your printer to determine how it works. In 132-character mode. rung numbers and cross references are printed to the right of the rungs. If you need to enter the backslash character itself. Printer Setup Sequences If the printer uses leading or trailing control characters. a field will appear where you can enter the appropriate characters. enter the characters here. you would enter ###BOT_TEXT###27. specify a shorter page length to prevent an automatic page eject. Table 9-1. Number of Lines per Page Line Feed with a Carriage Return The line feed character advances the paper to the next line for printing. This item determines whether the system automatically inserts a line feed (<CR><LF>) each time the printer head should return to the left page margin. If the printer is set up for standard 8-1/2 inch wide paper. use one backslash followed by the three-digit decimal equivalent of the ASCII representative. 66). rung numbers and cross references are printed above the rungs. Printer control sequences are issued immediately before and after a listing. To have the programmer insert the <LF> character after each <CR> character.9 Printer Parameters Refer to the following descriptions when changing the entries on the Printer Parameters screen. the system will command the printer to advance to the next page after the number of lines specified by this entry. If the printer uses 11-inch (or wider) paper. To enter non-printing characters. to identify the Escape character <ESC>. returning to the original mode after the listing is finished. select 80 characters for the paper width. A leading zero is required. Printer Parameters Parameter Paper Width Description The number of characters printed on a line. If you move the cursor to either of these entries. compressed output). However . enter two backslashes: \. 9-4 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . the format of the ladder logic is the same. Note: Some printers can be set up to automatically advance to the next line by entering only <CR>. you may select either 80 or 132 characters. For example. enter Y (Yes). The number of lines (from 50 to 120) that can be printed on a page (default= 60). From 0 to 60 characters can be specified. In 80-character mode.

Sending Screen Prints to a Printer If screen prints should be sent to a printer. press any key. located in the home directory. the selection for the port should match the current printer port. press Save (F10). Screen prints can be sent to an output port or directed to a file.9 Section 2: Selecting a Screen Print Device The print screen function can be used to print a copy of any screen in the programmer. To specify a screen print destination. To execute a screen print. The printing of the screen is sent to the selected device or file. go to the screen you wish to print and press ALT-P .) To save the port designation. To use COM2. GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-5 . To use the port designation temporarily. When you exit the screen. The port selected is used until the programmer is powered down or until changed on this screen. be sure to set the baud rate using the program setup function. the PC must have two serial ports physically present. If the port is a serial port (COM1 or COM2). To abort the printing before it completes.SET. the programmer will create a file named SCRPRINT. (This is an MS-DOS restriction. press Screen (F2) from the Print Functions menu or from another Print Functions screen. exit the screen without pressing Save. This file is read by the programmer at startup.

which are added to the end of the file. this may or may not be the current folder. use the full path name. the disk swapped for a second disk. the screen print file is written to the folder that was active when the screen print device was specified. the second disk must be formatted before further use. If printing is paused while printing to a floppy disk. You can enter any valid file name for the screen print file. When specifying the screen print device destination to disk.9 Sending Screens to a File If screen prints should be sent to a file. In addition. This file is used to store all future screen prints. 9-6 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . If only a file name is specified. Refer to appendix G for a listing of reserved file extensions. then the port entry should be “file”. neither disk will end up with a usable listing file. and then printing is resumed.

SET. If you do not change a selection. cross references. press Logic (F4) from the Print Functions menu or from another Print Functions screen. GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-7 . variables. cross references. To abort printing while in progress. It contains valid data up to the point where it was stopped. Printing will also abort if you press CTRL-Break. the default values will be used the next time you print program logic. To restart printing. press F5 to select the cross references to be included. the file containing the listing up to that point is closed and is not deleted. When a listing is being printed to a file and the listing is aborted. An attempt to print to a printer that is out of paper results in the message. variables. press Pause (F9). To use the print program function. press F9 again. the software displays the message “Listing complete”. press the Enter key to start printing. If you do not save the content of this screen. or program annotation. and program annotation. This file is located in the directory of the active program folder and is read when the print function is entered. Specify the content for the printout on this screen as instructed on the following pages. Printing will continue unless paused or aborted. To save the content of this screen to a file called PSCREENS. press pause to resume. If the printout should also include program cross references (which show other program uses of selected references). To temporarily suspend printing after it begins. “Printing device is offline.9 Section 3: Print Program The print program function is used to print program logic. press ALT-A and respond to the prompt. which will exit the programming software. When the printing is complete. its default is used. press Save (F10). After completing the selections.” being displayed.

” for more information on selecting the view modes. Print Program Parameters Parameter Title Subtitle Header Page Description An optional title of up to 62 characters centered at the top of each page. “Changing the Display Mode. If Y (Yes) is entered. “Subroutine Blocks. the name of the block being printed appears on the status line at the bottom of the screen. the reference description is printed directly above the reference address or nickname. the reference description is printed above the nickname. section 8. When the print reference description feature is selected. The reference description is divided into four lines of seven characters each. for a total of five lines above the instruction. enter Y (Yes). for a total of six lines above the instruction. If the nickname and reference option is also selected.in bytes. as described in chapter 3. Variable Table AllBlocks IL Logic To print Instruction List logic. ReferenceDescription: Enter Y (Yes) to print reference descriptions above the reference addresses at the next print logic request. “Programmer Setup. section 4. the first 28 characters of the reference description for each reference address in the logic are printed above the reference address. Whether one block or all blocks are printed. Then. CPU reference sizes. specify the content of the logic printout: Reference List: Enter Y (Yes) to print a table at the bottom of a page listing all the program references on that page. RungComments: Enter N (No) to print comments in instruction form only. only the current block is printed. and reference description. If N (No) is entered. the printout will include the IL Logic and Logic items specified below. the table lists the machine address. During listing or printing. The header page for a program shows the program name. IL Logic adds Hand Held Programmer key strokes under each rung which is very useful for maintaining the program with the HHP . For more information on locked blocks. For each reference. Refer to chapter 3. The name of the block is displayed on the status line. even if Y (Yes) is selected for AllBlocks. enter Y (Yes). only nicknames are printed in the logic. To print header pages. To print all blocks (except those that have been view locked) in the selected program. highest references used in the program. To print tables of variables and identifiers. and the size of the program. An optional line of up to 62 characters printed below the title on each page. Nickname and Reference: Enter Y (Yes) to print both machine addresses and their nicknames with the ladder logic. rung explanation text is printed in place of the comment instruction. refer to chapter 3. Logic for blocks which have been view locked cannot be printed. Logic 9-8 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .” If All Blocks is set to N (No). section 7. The title may change if specified in a rung comment. enter Y (Yes). To print ladder diagram logic. If the nickname and reference option is not selected. Table 9-2. be sure the files are present on the specified drive when printing begins. The subtitle may change if specified in a rung comment.” If this has been done. Additional text for rung comments may be created as separate files. nickname. “Program Annotation. enter Y (Yes). enter Y (Yes).9 Print Program Parameters Refer to the following definitions when changing the entries on the Print Program page. Machine addresses are printed for any references that do not have nicknames assigned. A list of the view locked blocks that could not be printed will be included at the end of the printout.” and chapter 6. Examples are provided in section 6 of this chapter.

If the program contains few reference descriptions. enter the number here. 2. Refer to appendix G for a listing of the extensions used by Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software.9 Table 9-2. Starting Page Number Port File Name Shortcuts for Printing Program Logic The following suggestions can help you shorten a program logic printout: 1. This is very helpful when printing in-ladder cross references with logic. You do not want to overwrite one of these files with print text. Do not select both the reference list and reference description options. 3. enter the first and last rung number of the group to be printed. use the reference list option instead of the reference description option. these fields will be ignored. the new file will overwrite it. use the reference description option instead of the reference list option. To send the printout to a file instead of to a printer. If the program contains many reference descriptions. To begin numbering the printout with a page number other than 1. Print Program Parameters (Continued) Parameter From/T o Rung Description To print a range of logic rungs within the program. If a file already exists with the selected name. Specify the destination of the listing. enter a name for the file here. 4. Use the 132-column page width instead of the 80-column page width. GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-9 . A printout file cannot be written to a locked folder. If the AllBlocks option is set to Y (Yes).

The following key can be used for interpreting cross reference instruction symbols: Symbol ### (###) FBIO JMP LABEL MCR EMCR CALL Description Explicitreference. press F5 from the Print Program screen or from another Print Functions screen. Block CALL instruction. Implicitreference. the cross reference tables for each block are printed following the logic for that block.9 Cross References Cross references in a printout show the use of references in the program. or program annotation. cross references. Label. If you do not save the content of this screen. End master control relay. its default is used. If the All Blocks parameter on the Print Program Logic screen is set to Y (Yes).SET. the default values will be used the next time you print program logic. press Save (F10). To save the content of this screen to a file called PSCREENS. Master control relay. To include cross references. Press Logic (F4) from this screen to return to the Print Program Logic screen. Specify the content and format of the cross reference printing on this screen. This file is located in the directory of the active program folder and is read when the print function is entered. Function block direct reference. If you do not change a selection. Jump control. 9-10 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . variables. Cross references can be included as part of the ladder logic text and/or listed as separate tables.

The printout contains a table for each reference type which has at least one address reference used anywhere in a program. one set of cross reference tables for the program is printed. Within each table. the implicit usage of a reference address by an instruction is printed with parentheses around the rung number of the rung containing that instruction. The default for this option is N (No). A global cross reference table for a reference type will contain all the cross reference information for references of that type used anywhere within the scope of the program. Cross Reference Parameters Parameter In Ladder Description To include cross references as part of the ladder logic. For references used more than once on a given rung in the same instruction. The default for this option is N (No). the global identifier name cross reference table will consist only of the usage information for block names. The information for a reference address will consist of each block. each time the reference address is used on a contact.9 Refer to the following definitions when changing the entries on the Cross Reference screen. Global cross reference tables will be printed after all other logic listing text that you selected has been printed and before the global use tables. Specify whether to print separate tables of cross references for each block and/or a single set of cross reference tables for the program. Per Block: If Y (Yes) is selected for PerBlock. sets of unique cross reference tables for each block are printed. A per block cross reference table contains only the cross reference information for references used within the scope of a single block. Cross Reference Table GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-11 . and the rung numbers within each block of the rungs containing the CALL instruction. the rung number is listed only once. Implicit cross reference data may be included or excluded from either type of cross reference table listing by entering Y or N in the Implicit Xref field. by the instructions on which the reference is used. An identifier name global cross reference table will be printed when the Xref TablesGlobal option is selected. Cross references for each reference address used on the coils in a rung are printed with that rung. Table 9-3. In addition. Global: If Y (Yes) is selected for Global. the cross reference data is grouped by block and. then within each block. For each block name. Since the only identifier table names known and used globally in a program are the block names. enter Y (Yes). The nickname and reference description defined for a reference address within the scope of a block is printed when the global cross reference data for that reference address and that block is printed. If included. For each reference address offset. and instruction on which the address was used. rung number. rung numbers are printed in ascending order. cross reference information is printed in ascending order of reference address offset. the most recent rung on which the reference address was used on a coil (referred to as the controlling rung) is listed under the contact. the global cross reference identifier table will list the blocks in which it is called. For each instruction. The information will also include the unique nickname and reference description assigned to the reference address within each block.

The symbol + means used implicitly by an instruction. if the MOVE_INT instruction has an input %AI001. the symbol # is used. Implicit reference usage data may be included or excluded from either type of reference use table listing by entering Y or N in the Implicit Xref field. there are really 5 words of input/output. When both * and + apply. JUMP . The default for this option is N (No). and a length of 5. %AI001 and %AQ001 are explicitly used. Due to the length. ENDMCR.9 Table 9-3. The tables will begin at reference address offset 1 and end with the highest used reference address offset of each reference address type in the program or block. To include cross references of block names. (Refer to the entry for implicit cross references in this table for more information. an output %AQ001. Global: If Y (Yes) is selected for Global. A global reference use table for a reference type will contain reference use information for the entire program. For example. but which do not appear directly in the program. The symbol * means used explicitly on an instruction operand. The next 4 words are implicitly used. enter Y (Yes). and LABEL names in a cross reference table printout. A per block reference use table contains only the reference use information for references used within the scope of a single block. and MCR. To include both implicit and explicit references in cross reference tables. one set of reference use tables for the program is printed. Enter N for those references whose cross reference tables and/or reference use tables will not be printed. Enter Y to select the reference types for which cross reference tables and/or reference use tables will be printed. enter Y (Yes) in the Identifiers field. Memory Types 9-12 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . The symbol – means a reference is not used. sets of unique reference use tables for each block are printed. If N (No) is entered. only explicit references are printed. ImplicitCross Reference Implicit references are references that are used.) Per Block: If Y (Yes) is selected for PerBlock. The default for this option is N (No). Cross Reference Parameters (Continued) Parameter Use Tables Description Specify whether to print separate reference use tables for each block and/or a single set of reference use tables for the program.

This prevents having to cross reference the same blocks each time a listing is started. Cross Reference Parameters (Continued) Parameter Directory Description Specify a directory to store cross reference data files. the files are stored in the current folder. The cross reference files cannot be sent to a floppy disk or a locked folder.9 Table 9-3. an error message is displayed. When subsequent listings from the same folder are generated. an expanded memory device. Delete Files After Use GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-13 .PTX cross reference data files must be either a hard disk. or aborts. terminates with an error. The default selection for the DeleteFiles After Use field is N (No). To delete cross reference files from a folder without printing a listing.XOV files. and GLOBAL. Do not overwrite one of the Logicmaster 90 files with print text. The file will exist during a listing that includes global cross reference text. Refer to appendix G for extensions used by Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software.XRF. In addition to the . only the cross reference data files for the blocks which have changed since the previous listing are deleted and recreated. If you want the cross reference files to remain on disk. it will be deleted when the global cross reference listing terminatessuccessfully. If no entry is made here. The specified location for the . enter Y (Yes). The . PRINT. a temporary file named GLOBAL. In either case.PTX is created. Note: Cross reference data files are not automatically deleted when exiting the print function.XOV . To delete the cross reference files after the listing completes.XRF and PRINT.XRF and PRINT. or a RAM Disk. use the selected clear folder function.XOV files remain in the designated directory unless you enter Y (Yes) in the Delete Files After Use field. enter the default N (No).

9-14 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . |64 |56 |48 |40 |32 |24 |16 |8 |1 ADDRESS +——————— +——————— +——————— +——————— +——————— +——————— +——————— +——————+ %I0064 01101001 00001000 00010101 01011011 00010000 11100100 11010100 01001110 %I0128 00001101 11101111 01100100 01111011 01000011 11001010 00010110 00011000 %I0192 01011111 11110010 00111000 11100011 00010001 10101011 00000000 00000000 %I0256 00000000 00000101 00010010 00011100 00000000 00101101 01011011 10011100 Specify the content of the printout on the Print Values screen. The listing can be directed to a printer or to a file. (See the next section for printing coil references. the reference values must first be loaded to the folder by using the load utility function (see chapter 8). For example: ***** I N P U T V A L U E T A B L E ***** REF.) Note Print may be used to print the values in the program folder only. To print the values from the PLC. press Values (F6) from the Print Functions menu or from another Print Functions screen.9 Section 4: Print Reference Tables To print reference table values (excluding coil references) for the program. These tables correspond to the tables that can be displayed and formatted using the reference tables function.

enter Y (Yes). enter Y (Yes). CPU reference sizes. Enter values only for types of references to be printed. To restart printing. When the printing is complete.SET. cross references. This file is located in the directory of the active program folder and is read when the print function is entered. You do not want to overwrite one of these files with print text. Printing will also abort if you press CTRL-Break and confirm your action. To print value tables (input. Specify the destination of the listing.9 Table 9-4. press the Enter key to start printing. the address ranges will be re-initialized. press Pause (F9). the new file will overwrite it. enter zeros in both the FROM and TO fields. %Q. To print header pages. Value Tables Overrides Starting Page Address Range Port File Name To save the content of this screen to a file called PSCREENS. by changing folders. GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-15 . and the size of the program. If the configured limits change (i. Value Table Parameters Field Title Subtitle Header Page Description An optional title of up to 62 characters centered at the top of each page. A printout file cannot be written to a locked folder. Note When a listing is being printed to a file and the listing is aborted. the file containing the listing up to that point is closed and is not deleted. To print the override value tables associated with selected %I. If you do not save the content of this screen. press Save (F10). enter a name for the file here. press F9 again. The header page for a program shows the program name. During printing.). An optional line of up to 62 characters printed below the title on each page. or downloading from the PLC). the software displays the message “Listing is complete”.. It contains valid data up to the point where it was stopped. highest references used in the program. and %M references. After completing the selections. clearing a folder. variables. Specify the range of values to be printed. the default values will be used the next time you print program logic. If a file already exists with the selected name. Printing will continue unless paused or aborted. To temporarily suspend printing after it begins. press ALT-A to abort the printout. This will exit the programming software. output. in bytes. enter the number here.e. Refer to appendix G for a listing of the extensionsusedbyLogicmaster90-30/20/Microsoftware. The title may change if specified in a rung comment. etc. The subtitle may change if specified in a rung comment. To send the printout to a file instead of to a printer. or program annotation. If any references should not be printed. Value tables are printed in groups of three lines at a time. To begin numbering the printout with a page number other than 1. enter Y (Yes).

the coil reference descriptions print in a single line to the right of each coil’s reference address as shown above. When set for an 80-column listing. The “REFERENCE DESCRIPTION” option controls the printing of reference descriptions for all other references.and 132-column print. See Note below for information about the differences between 80.9 Section 5: Print Coil References You can print reference descriptions for coils through the new parameter “COIL REF DESCRIPTION” as shown below: The default for this print parameter is No. the coil reference descriptions print in the standard LM90 reference description form of four lines above each reference address. The sample section from a 132-column print (shown below) resulted from the settings shown above. |AUTOPB LISUP %Q0038 %Q0012 %I0013 EMERGST %Q0006 %Q0075 %Q0005 << RUNG 4 STEP #0001 >> +––] [–––––] [–––––] [–––––] [––+––]/[–––––]/[–––––] [–––––] [–––––––––––––( )–– | | |%Q0005 | +––]/[––––––––––––––––––––––––––+ | |EMSTOP %I0100 CLAMPED %I0073 EMERGST << RUNG 5 STEP #0011 >> +––] [––+––] [––+––] [––+––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–– (* Emergency Return | | | | | |EMERGST|UNISUP | | +––]/[––+––]/[––+ | |%Q0005 %Q0012 %I0021 %I0022 %M0001 << RUNG 6 STEP #0020 >> +––]/[–––––]/[–––––] [–––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–– *) Note For 132-column listings. See the table on the next page for additional considerations. 9-16 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .

If you set the REFERENCE DESCRIPTION print option to: Y And the COIL REF DESCRIPTION print option to: N The results are: Prints reference descriptions above contacts and instruction operands. N Y Y Y GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-17 . Prints reference descriptions for all references. but it does not print coil reference descriptions. Prints reference descriptions for coils only.9 The following table is provided to explain the options you now have for printing references.

or to a file for later printing. The following functions are provided: D D D D D View/change printer parameters. the print function enables you to obtain a listing of all I/O and CPU configuration data. press Print (F10) from the main menu. and to section 2 for information on selecting the screen print output destination. Generate a rack hardware configuration listing.9 Section 6: Print Configuration In the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro configuration software package. Generate a configured reference address listing (Ref View). To display the Print Functions menu in the configuration software. The Setup (F1) and Screen (F2) keys perform the same functions as their corresponding keys in the programming software. Select the screen print destination. Generate a CPU configuration listing. 9-18 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Refer to section 1 of this chapter for information on setting up the printer parameters. The listing can be directed to a port for immediate printout. or Shift-F10 from any main menu function screen.

or program annotation. If you do not save the content of this screen.SET. cross references. press Save (F10). GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-19 . the default values will be used the next time you print program logic. The following screen will be displayed: The Print Configuration menu defines which parts of the rack configuration should be printed out and the destination of the listing. variables. This file is located in the directory of the active program folder and is read when the print function is entered.9 Accessing the Print Configuration Screen To use this function. press Print Configuration (F4) from the Print Configuration menu. To save the content of this screen to a file called PSCREENS.

The value of this field may not exceed the value of the To I/O Rack field. Table 9-5.9 Refer to the following definitions when changing the entries on the Print Configuration screen. A new file is always created. To print CPU configuration data. 9-20 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .767. Because the length of a listing page may be changed and there are a variable number of detail screens for a given module. Specify the destination of the listing. enter the name of the file to which the printout is to be directed. enter Y (Yes). all the screens of a particular module may not be displayed on the same page. Only one rack per page is permitted. If “file” is selected for the destination in the Port field. enter Y (Yes). Any valid file specification may be entered in this field. Print Configuration Parameters Field Title Subtitle I/ORack Detail Reference View CPU Configuration Starting Page Number FromI/ORack To I/O Rack Description An optional title of up to 62 characters centered at the top of each page. In order to print a single rack of information. To begin numbering the printout with a page number other than 1. This field is only available when the selection for the I/O Rack field is Y. To print rack information. enter Y (Yes). both the From I/O Rack and To I/O Rack fields must contain the same value. Enter the number of the last rack whose configuration data is to be printed. The printing of a given detail screen cannot be broken across pages. enter the number here. To print the reference view tables. Port File Name Pagination Guidelines Only one type of screen can be printed on a given page. To print the detailed configuration screens. The value of this field may not be less than the value of the From I/O Rack field. overwriting any existing file of the same name. enter Y (Yes). An optional line of up to 62 characters printed below the title on each page. Enter the number of the first rack whose configuration data is to be printed. but multiple detail screens may be printed on a single page if they will fit on that page following these guidelines: Table 9-6. The value may range from 1 to +32. Pagination Guidelines Field Rack Detail Description The printing of a given rack cannot be broken across pages.

The user-supplied title and subtitle are centered on the second and third lines of the page. The first line of each page of the listing will contain the date. and page number. The current program folder specification appears in the bottom center of the page. GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-21 . software version number. respectively.9 Section 7: Print Function Examples The following examples illustrate various hard copy listings which can be produced with the print function. regardless of what specific item is currently being printed. The program name appears in the bottom left corner of the page. time. Certain information is presented on every page.

This is an example program header page: 01–15–93 12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4. the configured reference sizes supported by the host PLC. The header page for the program includes the program name. and the size of the program in bytes.9 The header page is printed when Y (Yes) is selected for the header page option on the Print Program Logic screen. the highest reference address used in the program.00) Page 1 GGGG EEEEE G E G GGG EEEE G G E GGG EEEEE FFFFF F FFF F F AAA A A AAAAA A A A A N N NN N N N N N NN N N U U U U U CCCC U C U C U C UUU CCCC AAA A A AAAAA A A A A U U U U U TTTTT OOO U T O O U T O O U T O O UUU T OOO M M MM MM M M M M M M M AAA TTTTT IIIII OOO A A T I O O AAAAA T I O O A A T I O O A A T IIIII OOO N N NN N N N N N NN N N (******************************************************************************) (* *) (* Program: NEW *) (* *) (* PLC PROGRAM ENVIRONMENT HIGHEST REFERENCE USED *) (* –––––––––––––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––––––––––––– *) (* INPUT (%I): 512 INPUT: %I0100 *) (* OUTPUT (%Q): 512 OUTPUT: %Q0061 *) (* INTERNAL (%M): 1024 INTERNAL: %M0006 *) (* GLOBAL DATA (%G): 1280 GLOBAL DATA: NONE *) (* TEMPORARY (%T): 256 TEMPORARY: NONE *) (* REGISTER (%R): 2048 REGISTER: %R0003 *) (* ANALOG INPUT (%AI): 128 ANALOG INPUT: NONE *) (* ANALOG OUTPUT (%AQ): 64 ANALOG OUTPUT: NONE *) (* *) (* PROGRAM SIZE (BYTES): 208 *) (* *) (* *) (******************************************************************************) Program: NEW D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\NEW 9-22 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .

01–15–93 12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00) Page 1 << START OF BLOCK _MAIN >> << RUNG 4 #0001 << RUNG 5 #0002 #0003 #0004 #0005 #0006 #0007 #0008 #0009 #0010 #0011 << RUNG 6 #0012 #0013 #0014 #0015 #0016 #0017 #0018 #0019 #0020 << RUNG 7 #0021 #0022 #0023 #0024 #0025 #0026 #0027 #0028 << RUNG 8 #0029 #0030 #0031 STEP #0001 >> 01 NOOP STEP #0002 >> LD AND AND AND OR AND AND AND AND OUT %I0004 %Q0002 %Q0044 %Q0012 %Q0005 %I0003 %Q0025 %Q0006 %Q0061 %Q0005 NOT NOT NOT NOT STEP #0012 >> LD LD OR AND LD OR AND AND OUT %I0002 %I0100 %Q0025 %Q0020 %Q0004 %I0073 %Q0025 NOT BLK NOT BLK STEP #0021 >> LD AND LD AND OR AND AND OUT NOT NOT NOT BLK %I0021 %I0022 %M0001 %Q0005 %Q0012 %M0005 %M0006 STEP #0029 >> LD NOT AND FUNC 60 P1: P2: P3: OUT %Q0044 %M0002 ADD %R0001 %R0002 %R0003 %Q0006 #0032 #0033 END OF PROGRAM Program: NEW D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\NEW Block: _MAIN GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-23 .9 This example printout was generated by selecting only Y (Yes) for the IL Logic option.

01–15–93 12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4.9 In this example printout.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE Page 1 |[ START OF LD PROGRAM SAMPLE ] (* This is a sample program *) | |[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] | |[ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ] | |[ START OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | | << RUNG 4 STEP #0001 >> | |I140_00 I141_07 SMP_PMP %T0086 +——] [——+——] [——+——] [——+———————————————————————————————————————————————————(S)—— | | | | | |B152_00| | B152_00 | +——] [——+ +———————————————————————————————————————————————————(S)—— | | << RUNG 5 STEP #0008 >> | |I140_00 I141_07 +—————+ SMP_PMP +——] |——+——] [——+————————————————+ONDTR+————————————————————————————————————( )—— | | | |0. Logic is set to Y (Yes). and all Logic options (Reference List. Nickname and Reference. Reference Description.10s| | |B152_00| | | | +——] [——+ +————————+R | | | | | |I140_01 | | | +——] [——————————————————+ CONST –+PV | | +00100 | | | +—————+ | %R0004 | |(* COMMENT *) | | << RUNG 7 STEP #0016 >> | |I141_01 B152_00 +——]/[——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————(R)—— | | << RUNG 8 STEP #0018 >> | |PB_SUM %T0075 +——] [——+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )—— | | |BAD_RAM| %T0107 +——] [——+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )—— | |[ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | Program: SAMPLE D:0FOLDERS\SAMPLE Block: _MAIN 9-24 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . and Rung Comments) are set to N (No).

and a reference address are printed on an instruction operand. if defined.10s| | |B152_00| | | | |%M0627 | | | | +——] [——+ +————————+R | | | | | | 140_01 | | | |%I0502 | | | +——] [——————————————————+ CONST –+PV | | +00100 | | | +—————+ | | %R0004 | |(* COMMENT *) | | << RUNG 7 STEP #0016 >> | |I141_01 B152_00 |%I0504 %M0627 +——]/[——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————(R)—— | | << RUNG 8 STEP #0018 >> | |PB_SUM |%SA001 %T0075 +——] [——+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )—— | | |BAD_RAM| |%SB010 | %T0107 +——] |——+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )—— | Program: SAMPLE D:0FOLDERS\SAMPLE Block: _MAIN GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-25 . 01–15–93 12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4.9 In this example printout. the Nickname and Reference option is set to Y (Yes) and the Reference Description option is set to N (No). Both a nickname.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE Page 1 |[ START OF LD PROGRAM SAMPLE ] (* This is a sample program *) | |[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] | |[ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ] | |[ START OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | | << RUNG 4 STEP #0001 >> | |I140_00 I141_07 SMP_PMP |%I0501 %I0505 %M0997 %T0086 +——] [——+——] [——+——] [——+———————————————————————————————————————————————————(S)—— | | | | | |B152_00| | B152_00 | |%M0627 | | %M0627 | +——] [——+ +———————————————————————————————————————————————————(S)—— | | << RUNG 5 STEP #0008 >> | |I140_00 I141_07 SMP_PMP |%I0501 %I0505 +—————+ %M0997 +——] [——+——] [——+————————————————+ONDTR+————————————————————————————————————( )—— | | | |0.

if defined. is printed above each instruction operand.9 In this example printout. With the Reference Description option enabled. a four-line reference description. only a single line of either a nickname or a reference address is printed on an instruction operand. the Nickname and Reference option is set to N (No) and the Reference Description option is set to Y (Yes). 01–15–93 12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4.10s| | |Bulb | | | | |B152 | | | | |Circ 00| | | | |Switch | | | | |B152_00| | | | +——] [——+ +————————+R | | | | | |Air | | | |Intake | | | |Valve | | | |Switch | | | |I140_01 | | | +——] [——————————————————+ CONST –+PV | | +00100 | | | +—————+ | Seconds | to chk | complet | ion | %R0004 Program: SAMPLE — D:0FOLDERS\SAMPLE Block: _MAIN 9-26 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . Since the Nickname and Reference option is not selected.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE Page 1 |[ START OF LD PROGRAM SAMPLE ] (* This is a sample program *) | |[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] | |[ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ] | |[ START OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | | << RUNG 4 STEP #0001 >> | | Intake Sump | Valve Pump 1 | Control Density Conveyr | Switch meter Check |I140_00 I141_07 SMP_PMP %T0086 +——] [——+——] [——+——] [——+———————————————————————————————————————————————————(S)—— | | | | | |Bulb | | Bulb | |B152 | | B152 | |Circ 00| | Circ 00 | |Switch | | Switch | |B152_00| | B152_00 | +——] [——+ +———————————————————————————————————————————————————(S)—— | | << RUNG 5 STEP #0008 >> | | Intake Sump | Valve Pump 1 | Control Density | Switch meter |I140_00 I141_07 +—————+ SMP_PMP +——] [——+——] [——+————————————————+ONDTR+————————————————————————————————————( )—— | | | |0.

528. and for %M on the Select Cross Reference Options screen. 519. 553 FBIO (296) ::STEP 17 MAIN BIT SEQ –] [– 227. 641 FBIO (296) ::STEP 20 MAIN BIT SEQ –] [– 275. 289 FBIO (296) ::STEP 24 MAIN BIT SEQ –] [– 154. 228. 482. 289 FBIO (296) %M0248 : MSTP_15 %M0249 : MSTP_16 %M0250 : MSTP_17 %M0251 : MSTP_18 %M0252 : MSTP_19 %M0253 : MSTP_20 %M0254 : MSTP_21 %M0255 : MSTP_22 %M0256 : MSTP_23 %M0257 : MSTP_24 Program: SAMPLE D:0FOLDERS\SAMPLE Block: _MAIN GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-27 . 523. 288. 289. 289. 487 FBIO (296) ::STEP 21 MAIN BIT SEQ –] [– 289. 537. 291 FBIO (296) ::STEP 19 MAIN BIT SEQ –] [– 232. 483. 534. 533. 288. 293. 520. 508. 514. 591. 487.9 This example printout was generated by selecting Y (Yes) for the Cross Reference Table and Implicit Cross Reference options. 527. 269. 535. 480. 540. 01–15–93 12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4. 516. 273. 295. 526. 274 FBIO (296) ::STEP 23 MAIN BIT SEQ –] [– 156. 590 –]/[– 268. 512 FBIO (296) ::STEP 16 MAIN BIT SEQ –] [– 287. 288. 521. 592 FBIO (296) ::STEP 18 MAIN BIT SEQ –] [– 262. 263. 481. 272. 229.00) Page 1 ***** I N T E R N A L ***** ***** C R O S S R E F E R E N C E T A B L E ***** REFERENCE ––––––––– %M0247 NICKNAME –––––––– : MSTP_14 REFERENCE DESCRIPTION / CROSS REFERENCES ––––––––– ––––––––––– – ––––– –––––––––– ::STEP 14 MAIN BIT SEQ –] [– 287 FBIO (296) ::STEP 15 MAIN BIT SEQ –] [– 287. 270. 271. 588 FBIO (296) ::STEP 22 MAIN BIT SEQ –] [– 267. 294. 530. 293. 265. 513.

00) Page 1 ***** I N T E R N A L U S E T A B L E ***** REF.9 This example printout was generated by selecting Y (Yes) for the Use Tables and Implicit Cross Reference options. and for %M on the Select Cross Reference Options screen. |64 |56 |48 |40 |32 |24 |16 |8 |1 ADDRESS +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––+ %M0064 %M0128 %M0192 %M0256 %M0320 %M0384 %M0448 %M0512 %M0576 %M0640 %M0704 %M0768 %M0832 %M0896 %M0960 %M1024 – no use ******** ******** ******** ######## –––––––– ******** ––––**** ++#####* –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– *–––**** ****–––* ***–**–– ######## –––––––– ******** ******** ++++++++ –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– ******** ******** ––––––** #######* +++####* ******** ******** ++++#### –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– ******** ******** ******** ******** +++++### ++++#### ******** ######## ++++++++ –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– ******** ******–– ******** ***–**** #######* #######* ******** #######* ++++++## –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– ******** –––––––* **–**–** ******** +++++### ++++++++ ––**–*** –––––*** ######## –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– ******** ––****** –**–**** ******** #######* ++#####* ******** ******** #######* –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– ******** **––––** ******** ––––**** ++++#### ******–* ******** ******** ++++++++ –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– **––––– * explicit use + implicit use # explicit and implicit use Program: SAMPLE D:0FOLDERS\SAMPLE Block: _MAIN 9-28 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . 01–15–93 12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4.

9 This example printout was generated by selecting Y (Yes) for the Value Tables option and setting the %M reference address range to 1 to 1024 on the Print Values screen.00) Page 1 ***** I N T E R N A L V A L U E T A B L E ***** REF. Program: SAMPLE D:0FOLDERS\SAMPLE GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-29 . |64 |56 |48 |40 |32 |24 |16 |8 |1 ADDRESS +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––+ %M0064 %M0128 %M0192 %M0256 %M0320 %M0384 %M0448 %M0512 %M0576 %M0640 %M0704 %M0768 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00011000 00000000 00010010 00000000 00000011 10010100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00001100 00000000 00000000 00000100 00000110 00000000 00000000 0008 00000000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100101 01110011 00001111 +00724 00000001 10000000 01000111 01010000 01000000 10000000 00000000 00000100 00000000 01000000 00000001 00010000 01000001 10010000 00000000 00000000 00000000 6179 00000001 11011100 10000100 00000001 00000100 00000000 00000000 00000001 01010010 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 00001111 00000000 00000000 00000010 00010001 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 +09232 00000100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000100 10101100 10011000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 There are no non–zero values in the range from %M0769 to %M1024. 01–15–93 12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4. |64 |56 |48 |40 |32 |24 |16 |8 |1 ADDRESS +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––+ %M0064 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00011000 00000000 00010010 ***** I N T E R N A L V A L U E T A B L E ***** REF.

00) Page 1 ***** I N T E R N A L O V E R R I D E T A B L E ***** REF.9 This example printout was generated by selecting Y (Yes) for the Overrides option and setting the %M reference address range to 1 to 1024 on the Print Values screen. 01–15–93 12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4. |64 |56 |48 |40 |32 |24 |16 |8 |1 ADDRESS +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––– +––––––+ %M0064 %M0128 %M0192 %M0256 %M0320 %M0384 %M0448 %M0512 %M0576 %M0640 %M0704 %M0768 %M0832 %M0896 %M0960 %M1024 –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– ––––––0– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– ––––01–– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––0–1–– –––––––– –––––0–– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––1–– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– ––––––00 0––––––– –––––––0 –––––––– –––1–––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– 0––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– 00000000 000––0–– ––––0––– –10–0––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––0–––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––0–––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––0––0– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– 0 = overridden in OFF state 1 = overridden in ON state – = not overridden Program: SAMPLE D:0FOLDERS\SAMPLE 9-30 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .

01–15–93 12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4. IL Logic adds Hand Held Programmer instructions under each rung.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE Page 1 |[ START OF LD PROGRAM NEW ] (* *) | |[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] | |[ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ] | |[ START OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | |(* COMMENT *) | #0001 01 NOOP | | << RUNG 5 STEP #0002 >> Cross reference for %Q0005 | –]/[– 5. 6 | |%I0002 %I0100 %Q0020 %I0073 %Q0025 +——] [——+——] [——+——] [——+——] [——————————————————————————————————————————————( )—— | | | | | |%Q0025 |%Q0004 | | +——]/[——+——]/[——+ | 0006 | | #0012 LD %I0002 | #0013 LD %I0100 | #0014 OR NOT %Q0025 | #0015 AND BLK | #0016 LD %Q0020 | #0017 OR NOT %Q0004 | #0018 AND BLK | #0019 AND %I0073 | #0020 OUT %Q0025 | Program: NEW D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\NEW Block: _MAIN GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-31 . Logic. required to maintain the program with an HHP . 7 | |%I0004 %Q0002 %Q0044 %Q0012 %I0003 %Q0025 %Q0006 %Q0061 %Q0005 +——] [—————] [—————] [—————] [——+——]/[—————]/[—————]/[—————] [——————————————( )—— | | 0006 0008 |%Q0005 | +——]/[——————————————————————————+ | 0005 | | #0002 LD %I0004 | #0003 AND %Q0002 | #0004 AND %Q0044 | #0005 AND %Q0012 | #0006 OR NOT %Q0005 | #0007 AND NOT %I0003 | #0008 AND NOT %Q0025 | #0009 AND NOT %Q0006 | #0010 AND %Q0061 | #0011 OUT %Q0005 | | << RUNG 6 STEP #0012 >> Cross reference for %Q0025 | –]/[– 5. and In Ladder Cross Reference options.9 This example printout of an 80-column listing of a short program was generated by selecting Y (Yes) for the IL Logic.

00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE Page 2 | << RUNG 7 STEP #0021 >> Cross reference for %M0001 | NONE | |%Q0005 %Q0012 %I0021 %I0022 %M0001 +——]/[—————]/[——+——] [—————] [——————————————————————————————————————————————( )—— | 0005 | |%M0005 %M0006 | +——]/[—————] [——+ | | #0021 LD NOT %Q0005 | #0022 AND NOT %Q0012 | #0023 LD NOT %M0005 | #0024 AND %M0006 | #0025 OR BLK | #0026 AND %I0021 | #0027 AND %I0022 | #0028 OUT %M0001 | | << RUNG 8 STEP #0029 >> Cross reference for %Q0006 | –]/[– 5 | |%Q0044 %M0002 +—————+ %Q0006 +——]/[—————] [———+ ADD_+————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )—— | | INT | | | | | %R0001 –+I1 Q+–%R0003 | | | | %R0002 –+I2 | | +—————+ | | #0029 LD NOT %Q0044 | #0030 AND %M0002 | #0031 FUNC 60 ADD | P1: %R0001 | P2: %R0002 | P3: %R0003 | #0032 OUT %Q0006 | |[ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | | #0033 END OF PROGRAM | Program: NEW D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\NEW Block: _MAIN 9-32 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .9 01–15–93 12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4.

Rung Comments. page 6–12. *) | (*****************************************************************************) | #0001 01 NOOP | | << RUNG 5 STEP #0002 >> Cross reference for AUTO | –]/[– 5. and In Ladder Cross Reference options.9 This example printout of an 80-column listing was generated by selecting Y (Yes) for the IL Logic. 01–15–93 12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4. Reference List. See operator’s manual. for more information. Logic.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE Page 1 |[ START OF LD PROGRAM NEWPROG ] (* *) | |[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] | |[ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ] | |[ START OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | | (*****************************************************************************) | (* The following logic rung enables automatic mode when all enabling condi– *) | (* tions are met. 7 | |AUTOPB LISUP UNISUP %Q0012 RSTAHPB EMERGST %Q0006 COOLANT AUTO +——] [—————] [—————] [—————] [——+——]/[—————]/[—————]/[—————] [——————————————( )—— | | 0006 0008 | AUTO | +——]/[——————————————————————————+ | 0005 | | #0002 LD %I0004 | #0003 AND %Q0002 | #0004 AND %Q0044 | #0005 AND %Q0012 | #0006 OR NOT %Q0005 | #0007 AND NOT %I0003 | #0008 AND NOT %Q0025 | #0009 AND NOT %Q0006 | #0010 AND %Q0061 | #0011 OUT %Q0005 | REFERENCE %Q0006 %Q0012 %Q0005 %I0004 %Q0061 %Q0025 %Q0002 %I0003 %Q0044 NICKNAME AUTO AUTOPB COOLANT EMERGST LISUP RSTAHPB UNISUP REFERENCE DESCRIPTION Hand Light Table is out Auto Light Auto Push Button Coolant Valve Emergency Return Loader is up Reset Auto / Hand PB Unloader is up D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\NEWPROG Block: _MAIN Program: NEWPROG GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-33 .

6 | |EMSTOP START CLAMPED %I0073 EMERGST +——] [——+——] [——+——]—[——+——] [———————————————————————————————————————————————( )—— | | | | | |EMERGST|SPN_MTR| | +——]/[——+——]/[——+ | 0006 | | #0012 LD %I0002 | #0013 LD %I0100 | #0014 OR NOT %Q0025 | #0015 AND BLK | #0016 LD %Q0020 | #0017 OR NOT %Q0004 | #0018 AND BLK | #0019 AND %I0073 | #0020 OUT %Q0025 | | << RUNG 7 STEP #0021 >> Cross reference for %M0001 | NONE | | AUTO %Q0012 %M0001 +——]/[—————]/[——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )—— | 0005 | | #0021 LD NOT %Q0005 | #0022 AND NOT %Q0012 | #0023 OUT %M0001 | REFERENCE %I0073 %Q0012 %M0001 %Q0005 %Q0020 %Q0025 %I0002 %Q0004 %I0100 NICKNAME REFERENCE DESCRIPTION Table is out AUTO CLAMPED EMERGST EMSTOP SPN_MTR START Auto Light Emergency Return Emergency Stop PB Start Spindle Motor D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\NEWPROG Block: _MAIN Program: NEWPROG 9-34 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE Page 2 | << RUNG 6 STEP #0012 >> Cross reference for EMERGST | –]/[– 5.9 01–15–93 12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v3.

00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE Page 3 | << RUNG 8 STEP #0024 >> Cross reference for %Q0006 | –]/[– 5 | |UNISUP %M0002 +—————+ %Q0006 +——]/[—————] [———+ ADD_+————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )—— | | INT | | | | | %I0097 –+I1 Q+–%Q0097 | | | | %I0113 –+I2 | | +—————+ | | #0024 LD NOT %Q0044 | #0025 AND %M0002 | #0026 FUNC 60 ADD | P1: %I0097 | P2: %I0113 | P3: %Q0097 | #0027 OUT %Q0006 | |[ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | | #0028 END OF PROGRAM | REFERENCE NICKNAME %I0097 %I0113 %Q0006 %Q0097 %M0002 %Q0044 UNISUP Program: NEWPROG REFERENCE DESCRIPTION Hand Light Unloader is up D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\NEWPROG Block: _MAIN GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-35 .9 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v3.

Rung Comments. 01–15–93 15:38 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4.9 This example printout of a 132-column listing was generated by selecting Y (Yes) for the Logic. 7 << RUNG 7 STEP #0021 >> Cross reference for %M0001 NONE REFERENCE %I0073 %Q0006 %Q0012 %M0001 %Q0005 %I0004 %Q0020 %Q0061 NICKNAME REFERENCE DESCRIPTION Hand Light Table is out AUTO AUTOPB CLAMPED COOLANT Auto Light Auto Push Coolant Valve REFERENCE NICKNAME %Q0025 EMERGST %I0002 EMSTOP %Q0002 LISUP %I0003 RSTAHPB %Q0004 SPN_MTR %I0100 START %Q0044 UNISUP REFERENCE DESCRIPTION Emergency Return Emergency Stop PB Loader is up Reset Auto / Hand PB Start Spindle Motor Unloader is up Program: NEWPROG C:\ACME\CONVEYOR\NEWPROG 9-36 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . *) |******************************************************************************) |AUTOPB LISUP UNISUP %Q0012 RSTAHPB EMERGST %Q0006 COOLANT AUTO |%I0004 %Q0002 %Q0044 %Q0012 %I0003 %Q002 %Q0006 %Q0061 %Q0005 +——] [————] [—————] [—————] [——+——]/[—————]/[—————]/[—————] [—————————————( )—— | | 0006 0008 | AUTO | +——]/[——————————————————————————+ | 0005 | |EMSTOP START CLAMPED %I0073 EMERGST +——] [——+——] [——+——] [——+——] [————————————————————————————————————————————( )–– | | | | | |EMERGST|SPN_MTR| | +--]/[——+——]/[——+ | 0006 | | AUTO | I%Q0005 %Q0012 TM0001 +——]/[—————]/[————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )-|0005 | << RUNG 5 STEP #0002 >> Cross reference for AUTO –]/[– 5. Nicknames and References. 7 << RUNG 6 STEP #0012 >> Cross reference for AUTO –]/[– 5. page 6–12. for more information. Reference List.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE page 1 |[ START OF LD PROGRAM NEWPROG ] (* *) | |[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] | |[ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ] | |[ START OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | |******************************************************************************) | (* The following logic rung enables automatic mode when all enabling condi– *) | (* tions are met. See operator’s manual. and In Ladder Cross Reference options.

9 01–15–92 15:38 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE page 2 | UNISUP | %Q0044 %M0002 +—————+ %Q0006 |——]/[—————] [———+ ADD_+———————————————————————————————————————————————————( )—— | | INT | | | | | %I0097 –+I1 Q+–%Q0097 | | | | %I0113 –+I2 | | +—————+ | | |[ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | REFERENCE NICKNAME %I0097 %I0113 %Q0006 Program: NEWPROG REFERENCE DESCRIPTION Hand Light REFERENCE NICKNAME REFERENCE DESCRIPTION %Q0097 %M0002 %Q0044 UNISUP Unloader is up C:\ACME\CONVEYOR\NEWPROG GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-37 .

9 The print function must be able to print large rungs which have been truncated by the editor. Truncated rungs will be shown in the listing as they appear on the editor screen. the special truncation character (+) is printed below the seventh rung line (bottom displayable row).00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE Page 1 |[ START OF LD PROGRAM TEMP ] (* *) | |[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] | |[ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ] | |[ START OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | | (*****************************************************************************) | (* This is a sample program to help illustrate the print feature. If the number of allowed rows is exceeded. If the number of allowed columns is exceeded. *) | (* The following rung is truncated on the right and on the bottom. The following examples show truncated rungs which exceed both the displayable width and height. 01–15–93 12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4. *) | (*****************************************************************************) | | << RUNG 5 STEP #0002 >> | |%I0001 %M0001 %M0002 %M0003 %M0004 %M0005 %M0006 %M0007 %M0008 +——] [——+——] [—————] [—————] [—————] [—————] [—————] [—————] [—————] [———+ | | |%I0002 | +——] [——+ + | | |%I0003 | +——] [——+ + | | |%I0004 | +——] [——+ + | | |%I0005 | +——] [——+ + | | |%I0006 | +——] [——+ + | | |%I0007 | +——] [——+ + | | |+ |+ + + + + + + + + | Program: TEMP A:\TEMP 9-38 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . the special truncation character (+) is printed in the rightmost column.

9 01–15–93 12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4. *) | (****************************************************************************) | | << RUNG 7 STEP #0023 >> | |%T0001 +—————+ +—————+ +—————+ +——] [———+ ADD_+—————————————————+ DIV_+—————————————————+MOVE_+—————————+ | | INT | | INT | | INT | | | | | | | | |%R0001 –+I1 Q+–%R0003 %R0004 –+I1 Q+–%R0006 %R0007 –+IN Q+–%R0008 + | | | | | | LEN | | | | | | |00001| |%R0002 –+I2 | %R0005 –+I2 | +–––––+ + | +—————+ +—————+ | |[ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | Program: TEMP A:\TEMP GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-39 .00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE Page 2 | (****************************************************************************) | (* The following rung is truncated on the right only.

One of these subroutines. is also included in this sample printout. which calls several subroutines.00) Page 1 GGGG EEEEE G E G GGG EEEE G G E GGG EEEEE FFFFF F FFF F F AAA A A AAAAA A A A A N N NN N N N N N NN N N U U U U U CCCC U C U C U C UUU CCCC AAA A A AAAAA A A A A U U U U U TTTTT OOO U T O O U T O O U T O O UUU T OOO M M MM MM M M M M M M M AAA TTTTT IIIII OOO A A T I O O AAAAA T I O O A A T I O O A A T IIIII OOO N N NN N N N N N NN N N (******************************************************************************) (* *) (* Program: DEMO30 *) (* *) (* PLC PROGRAM ENVIRONMENT HIGHEST REFERENCE USED *) (* –––––––––––––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––––––––––––– *) (* INPUT (%I): 512 INPUT: %I0200 *) (* OUTPUT (%Q): 512 OUTPUT: %Q0010 *) (* INTERNAL (%M): 1024 INTERNAL: %M0001 *) (* GLOBAL DATA (%G): 1280 GLOBAL DATA: NONE *) (* TEMPORARY (%T): 256 TEMPORARY: NONE *) (* REGISTER (%R): 2048 REGISTER: %R0002 *) (* ANALOG INPUT (%AI): 128 ANALOG INPUT: NONE *) (* ANALOG OUTPUT (%AQ): 64 ANALOG OUTPUT: NONE *) (* *) (* PROGRAM SIZE (BYTES): 848 *) (* *) (* *) (******************************************************************************) Program: DEMO30 D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\DEMO30 9-40 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L . 01–15–93 16:23 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4.9 The following pages are sample pages from a program named DEMO30. named LIGHTS.

00) Page 2 (******************************************************************************) (* *) (* BLOCK: _MAIN *) (* *) (* *) (* BLOCK SIZE (BYTES): 170 *) (* DECLARATIONS (ENTRIES): 9 *) (* *) (* *) (* HIGHEST REFERENCE USED *) (* ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– *) (* *) (* INPUT (%I): %I0002 *) (* OUTPUT (%Q): %Q0001 *) (* INTERNAL (%M): NONE *) (* GLOBAL DATA (%G): NONE *) (* TEMPORARY (%T): NONE *) (* REGISTER (%R): NONE *) (* ANALOG INPUT (%AI): NONE *) (* ANALOG OUTPUT (%AQ): NONE *) (* *) (******************************************************************************) Program: DEMO30 D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\DEMO30 Block: _MAIN GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-41 .9 01–15–93 16:23 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4.

9 01–15–93 16:23 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00) Page 3 |[ | |[ | |[ START OF LD PROGRAM DEMO30 ] ] ] (* *) VARIABLE DECLARATIONS BLOCK DECLARATIONS SUBR +———————+ 1 |LIGHTS | +———————+ +———————+ 2 |DISPLAY| +———————+ +———————+ 3 | LOG | +———————+ +———————+ 4 |MANUAL | +———————+ +———————+ 5 |GENIUS | +———————+ SUBR SUBR SUBR SUBR SUBR 01 02 03 04 05 LANG: LD (* Shift lights controlled by timer *) SUBR LANG: LD (* Move data from %R2 to lamps *) SUBR LANG: LD (* Count shifts of the lights *) SUBR LANG: LD (* Manual setup and control *) SUBR #0001 #0002 #0003 #0004 #0005 LANG: LD (* Control genius demo case *) |[ START OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | |(* COMMENT *) | #0001 01 NOOP | | << RUNG 5 STEP #0002 >> | | LS1 AUTO +——] [——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————(S)—— | #0002 LD %I0001 | #0003 SET %Q0001 | Program: DEMO30 D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\DEMO30 Block: _MAIN 9-42 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .

9 01–15–93 16:23 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00) Page 4 | << RUNG 6 STEP #0004 >> | | METAL AUTO +——] [——+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————(R)—— | | |FST_SCN| +——] [——+ | | #0004 LD %I0002 | #0005 OR %S0001 | #0006 RST %Q0001 | | << RUNG 7 STEP #0007 >> | | AUTO +—————————————+ +—————————————+ +——] [———+ CALL LIGHTS +–+ CALL LOG + | | (SUBROUTINE)| | (SUBROUTINE)| | +—————————————+ +—————————————+ | | #0007 LD %Q0001 | #0008 FUNC 90 CALLSUB | P1: 00001 | #0009 FUNC 90 CALLSUB | P1: 00003 | | << RUNG 8 STEP #0010 >> | | AUTO +—————————————+ +——]/[———+ CALL MANUAL + | | (SUBROUTINE)| | +—————————————+ | | #0010 LD NOT %Q0001 | #0011 FUNC 90 CALLSUB | P1: 00004 | | << RUNG 9 STEP #0012 >> | | AUTO +—————————————+ +——] [———+ CALL GENIUS + | | (SUBROUTINE)| | +—————————————+ | | #0012 LD %Q0001 | #0013 FUNC 90 CALLSUB | P1: 00005 | |[ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | | #0014 END OF PROGRAM | Program: DEMO30 D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\DEMO30 Block: _MAIN GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-43 .

9 01–15–93 16:24 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00) Page 1 GGGG EEEEE G E G GGG EEEE G G E GGG EEEEE FFFFF F FFF F F AAA A A AAAAA A A A A N N NN N N N N N NN N N U U U U U CCCC U C U C U C UUU CCCC AAA A A AAAAA A A A A U U U U U TTTTT OOO U T O O U T O O U T O O UUU T OOO M M MM MM M M M M M M M AAA TTTTT IIIII OOO A A T I O O AAAAA T I O O A A T I O O A A T IIIII OOO N N NN N N N N N NN N N (******************************************************************************) (* *) (* Program: DEMO30 *) (* *) (* PLC PROGRAM ENVIRONMENT HIGHEST REFERENCE USED *) (* –––––––––––––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––––––––––––– *) (* INPUT (%I): 512 INPUT: %I0200 *) (* OUTPUT (%Q): 512 OUTPUT: %Q0010 *) (* INTERNAL (%M): 1024 INTERNAL: %M0001 *) (* GLOBAL DATA (%G): 1280 GLOBAL DATA: NONE *) (* TEMPORARY (%T): 256 TEMPORARY: NONE *) (* REGISTER (%R): 2048 REGISTER: %R0002 *) (* ANALOG INPUT (%AI): 128 ANALOG INPUT: NONE *) (* ANALOG OUTPUT (%AQ): 64 ANALOG OUTPUT: NONE *) (* *) (* PROGRAM SIZE (BYTES): 848 *) (* *) (* *) (******************************************************************************) Program: DEMO30 D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\DEMO30 9-44 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .

9 01–15–93 16:24 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00) Page 2 (******************************************************************************) (* *) (* BLOCK: LIGHTS *) (* *) (* *) (* BLOCK SIZE (BYTES): 151 *) (* DECLARATIONS (ENTRIES): 2 *) (* *) (* *) (* HIGHEST REFERENCE USED *) (* ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– *) (* *) (* INPUT (%I): %I0200 *) (* OUTPUT (%Q): %Q0010 *) (* INTERNAL (%M): %M0001 *) (* GLOBAL DATA (%G): NONE *) (* TEMPORARY (%T): NONE *) (* REGISTER (%R): %R0002 *) (* ANALOG INPUT (%AI): NONE *) (* ANALOG OUTPUT (%AQ): NONE *) (* *) (******************************************************************************) Program: DEMO30 D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\DEMO30 Block: LIGHTS (SUBR 01) GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-45 .

00) Page 3 |[ START LD SUBROUTINE LIGHTS ] | |[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] | |[ START OF SUBROUTINE LOGIC ] | |(* COMMENT *) | | << RUNG 4 STEP #0002 >> | |%M0001 SFT_RT +—————+ +——] [—————]/[———+ SHL_| | | WORD| | | | | %R0001 –+IN B2+– | | LEN | | |00001| | CONST –+N Q+–%R0002 | 00001 | | |ALW_ON | | +——]/[———————————+B1 | | +—————+ | | << RUNG 5 STEP #0006 >> | | LASTBIT SFT_RT +——] [——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————(SM)– | |[ END OF SUBROUTINE LOGIC ] | Program: DEMO30 D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\DEMO30 Block: LIGHTS (SUBR 01) 9-46 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual – September 1998 GFK-0466L .9 01–15–93 16:24 GE FANUC SERIES 90–30/90–20 DOCUMENTATION (v4.

%AI. Explains how to configure the Analog Combo module. Explains how to display the rack screen. or one BASIC application using one or both serial ports. Explains how to configure a Communications Module in RTU ONLY. two 32-bit counters. two independent CCM ports. Explains I/O configuration for the Model 211 CPU are added to the Series 90-20 base. Explains how to configure the module to transfer global data to and from the PLC. Explains how to configure the High Density Analog Output module. and save the configuration to disk. %Q. Explains how to configure the PCM as one CCM port. Explains how to configure the HSC module to function as four 16-bit counters. Explains how to configure a Micro PLC. Explains how to select the base rack and expansion racks. or CCM/RTU mode. move a configuration to another slot. %AQ. Explains how to configure both a one-axis and two-axisAPM. This chapter contains the following sections: Title DefaultConfiguration Displaying the I/O ConfigurationRack Screen Configuring the CPU Selecting the Base Rack Configuring the Model 211 CPU Configuring a Micro PLC Configuring90-30I/O Modules Configuring an HSC or Embedded HSC Configuring a PCM Module Description Explains how to use the default I/O configuration provided by the PLC. Explains how to configure the CPU module. Page 10-2 10-4 3 4 5 6 7 8 10-9 10-26 10-31 10-36 10-45 10-50 9 10-57 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ConfiguringaTCP/IP Ethernet Module Configuring a CMM Module Configuring an APM Module Configuring an ADC Module Configuring a GCM or Enhanced GCM Configuring a GBC Configuring a High Density Analog Output Module Configuring an Analog Combo Module Configuring a ThirdParty Module Configuration Reference View 10-63 10-67 10-73 10-82 10-83 10-88 10-90 10-94 10-99 10-101 GFK-0466L 10-1 . Explains how to use the Reference View table to display a list of configured modules with the same user reference (%I. change or delete the configuration of a slot. %R. copy a configuration from one slot to another. Explains how to configure a TCP/IP Ethernet Module. or as one 32-bit differential counter. Explains how to configure the ADC module. RTU/CCM. Explains how to configure third-party modules. Explains how to configure 90-30 I/O modules. one CCM port and one BASIC application having one port.Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10 Section 1 2 section level 1 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1 The I/ O configuration function is used to specify the mapping of logical references used by the user program to the physical I/ O modules. Explains how to configure the Genius Bus Controller. or %G).

Last slot in 10-slot Model 323. The PLC will automatically configure the system based on the I/O modules installed according to the following table. etc. slot 2 to rack 1. Last slot in Model 331 or higher. The PCM. no further configuration is required. The Model 331 and higher PLCs will have analog and discrete addresses assigned to 15 of its slots (rack 0. This table shows how I/O references are assigned to each slot in the PLC. etc. system configuration can be changed using the Logicmaster 90 I/O configuration function. Last slot to receive analog configuration in the 10-slot Model 323. For those users who want their system configured differently from the default (additional I/O modules. but slots 9 and 10 will not be assigned analog I/O addresses. Last slot in 5-slot Model 311 or 313. The 5-slot Model 311 or 313 PLC will have I/O addresses assigned to every slot. 10-2 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . All other smart modules (HSC. If you are satisfied with the default configuration. slot 6).). different I/O references. described in the following sections of this chapter. Table 10-1. The default I/O configuration is based on the I/O modules installed in the system. The 10-slot Model 311 or 313 PLC will have discrete I/O addresses assigned to each slot. and the PLC will not automatically configure itself again until the configuration is cleared. a default I/O configuration is created. it will replace the default configuration. Default I/O Configuration Rack Slot 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Discrete Input %I001-032 %I033-064 %I065-096 %I097-128 %I129-160 %I161-192 %I193-224 %I225-256 %I257-288 %I289-320 %I321-352 %I353-384 %I385-416 %I417-448 %I449-480 %I481-512 – – – – Discrete Output %Q001-032 %Q033-064 %Q065-096 %Q097-128 %Q129-160 %Q161-192 %Q193-224 %Q225-256 %Q257-288 %Q289-320 %Q321-352 %Q353-384 %Q385-416 %Q417-448 %Q449-480 %Q481-512 – – – – Analog Input %AI001-008 %AI009-016 %AI017-024 %AI025-032 %AI033-040 %AI041-048 %AI049-056 %AI057-064 %AI065-072 %AI073-080 %AI081-088 %AI089-096 %AI097-104 %AI105-112 %AI113-120 %AI121-128 – – – – Analog Output %AQ001-004 %AQ005-008 %AQ009-012 %AQ013-016 %AQ017-020 %AQ021-024 %AQ025-028 %AQ029-032 %AQ033-036 %AQ037-040 %AQ041-044 %AQ045-048 %AQ049-052 %AQ053-056 %AQ057-060 %AQ061-064 – – – – Notes This slot not configured in Model 331 or 341. APM.) are not included and must be manually configured using the Logicmaster 90 I/O configuration function. CMM. and ADC modules are included in the default configuration. If you edit the default I/O configuration or create a new one and store it to the PLC.10 Section 1: Default Configuration When the PLC is first powered up or configuration is cleared.

parity. Only the CPU parameters (baud rate. Once the clear operation has begun. Press the Load function key (F1) to load the configuration. Press Clear (F5) from the Program Utility Functions menu to clear the configuration. enter N (No) for program logic or reference tables.” for more information about loading configuration from the PLC to the programmer. 2. (Refer to Chapter 8.” The PLC will now automatically configure the system using the default I/O configuration shown in table 10-1. etc.10 You may view the current configuration by loading the configuration from the PLC to the programmer. To put the PLC back into default configuration mode so that it will automatically configure the system. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-3 . Verify that the selection for configuration is set to Y (Yes). Press the Enter key to begin the clear function.) may be changed without taking the PLC out of default configuration mode. follow these steps: 1. If you do not want to clear the ladder logic program or reference tables for that program. 3. “Program Utilities. The PLC remains in default configuration mode until a configuration that is entered or modified by the Logicmaster 90-30/ 20/ Micro configuration software is stored to the PLC. 5.) The configuration can then be viewed from the I/O configuration function and can be printed using the configuration print function. When the operation is complete. it cannot be aborted. 4. the software displays the message “Clear complete.

similar to the one shown below. The remaining slots are numbered 1 through 10.) The size of each rack can be changed on an individual rack basis by pressing Rack Selection (F5) and selecting the desired rack. The remaining slots may contain any Series 90-30 I/O module. 10-4 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . and expansion racks are numbered 1 through 7. The CPU module always occupies slot 1 of rack 0. (All five racks default to be 10-slot racks. Model 331 and higher CPUs can have expansion racks. the I/O Configuration Rack screen.10 Section 2: Displaying the I/O Configuration Rack Screen When I/O (F1) is selected from the Configuration Software main menu. The main CPU rack is rack 0. The Up/Down cursor movement keys and Page Up/Down keys are used to move between racks in ascending or descending order. Up to four subsystem racks are allowed (up to seven subsystem racks in a 351 CPU). Axis Positioning Module. respectively. The rack shown above is divided into 11 slots. or Programmable Coprocessor Module. is displayed. The first slot on the left is labeled “PS” at the top and always contains the power supply. This allows a mixture of 5-slot and 10-slot racks in a Series 90-30 PLC configuration. Genius Communications Module. The following example represents a sample Series 90-30 PLC Model 331 system.

Slot 1 can be used for I/O. and 313. use the Next and Previous page keys or the Up and Down cursor keys. 323. Upon entering the Rack screen. Notice that on Models 311. The following example represents a sample 5-slot rack of the Model 311 PLC. Use the Left or Right cursor keys to move the cursor from one slot to the next. The cursor position on the I/O Configuration Rack screen is indicated by having the slot highlighted in reverse video. the Power Supply slot is shown in reverse video. 321. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-5 . Moving from rack to rack is not allowed.10 Both the 5-slot and 10-slot racks of the Model 311 PLC and the Model 313 PLC are one-rack systems. To display another rack. The following example represents a sample 10-slot rack of the Model 311 PLC.

10 The rack screen presents an overview perspective of the Series 90-30 PLC system.. exit copy mode by pressing the Escape key. The software displays the message “Copy Mode Ended”. A warning occurs when non-fatal overlaps occur. Press Rack (Shift-F1) or the Escape key to return to the rack screen shown above. press Zoom (F10) to display the detail screen. ADC). Function Key F1 F2 F4 F5 F6 F8 F10 Function M30I/O Genius Power Supply Rack Selection Communications Other Zoom Description Add Model 30 I/O modules. the configuration is still valid. press Zoom (F10) to configure it. Edit the reference address (if required) and other characteristics as needed. Change the rack selection. 4. Add a Genius Communications Module. 6. You can repeat this as many times as needed. When finished copying. Configuration Validation CONFIG VALID is displayed in the lower right corner of each display screen after the configuration is successfully validated. If the power supply already exists. When CONFIG INVALID is indicated. Add the power supply. press Copy (Shift-F2). the copy function will adjust the module’s reference address to the maximum allowed. 2. 3. Add other modules (e. however. PCM. Add a Communications Module. For each copy. If the limit for the reference address has been reached. 5. the file may not be stored to the PLC. its reference address is set to the next highest available address. As each module is entered. Non-fatal overlaps are most likely to occur between references other than those described for fatal overlaps. Copying Configuration from Slot to Slot To copy configuration from slot to slot: 1. GFK-0466L 10-6 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 . Move the cursor to another slot and press the Enter key. With the cursor on that slot. 7. Each copy after the maximum reference address has been reached will result in an address overlap. Configure the module. Position the cursor on the first module and press Zoom (F10) to display the slot configuration screen. The most common cause of the CONFIG INVALID status is fatal overlaps among %I or %AI references.g. Display the current configuration of a slot.

then. The configuration of the slot will be deleted. 3. Complete the configuration. then press Rack (Shift-F1) or the Escape key to return to the rack display. Then. Press the function key that represents the type of module you want to place in the slot. 4. Place the cursor at the slot to be changed. 2. Place the cursor on the module and press Delete (Shift-F4). 2.10 Changing the Configuration of a Slot Replacing the Module with Another of the Same Type To change the configuration of a slot by replacing the module with another of the same type: 1. 3. Enter Y (Yes) after prompt “DELETE displayed module from slot ? (Y/N)”. With the list of available modules displayed. 2. press Rack (Shift-F1) or the Escape key to return to the rack display. Use one of the function keys to select a new module type for the slot. To return the configuration to the slot. the module selection screen is displayed. press Undelete (Shift-F5). After confirming the deletion of the existing module. Complete the configuration. Deleting the Configuration of a Module To delete the configuration of a module: 1. Replacing the Module with One of a Different Type To change the configuration of a slot by replacing the module with one of a different type: 1. 4. move the cursor to the correct module and press the Enter key. Place the cursor at the slot to be changed. Press Zoom (F10) to display the module’s detail screen. enter Y (Yes) after the prompt “REPLACE displayed module ? (Y/N)”. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-7 .

press Delete (Shift-F4). When module data has been changed within a rack. 2. and then the Escape key is pressed to return to the Configuration Software main menu. and that new data is moved from that rack to another rack or when you cursor to a new rack. The deleted configuration will appear in the new location. Press Undelete (Shift-F5). The reference address will not be affected. Saving the Configuration to Disk The configuration is automatically saved to a file on disk during the configuration process: D D D When module data has been changed within a rack. The configuration may also be written to disk at any time by pressing ALT-U to update the disk. Enter Y (Yes) after prompt “DELETE displayed module from slot ? (Y/N)”. Move the cursor to the new location. With the cursor at the configuration to be moved. 10-8 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . The configuration of the slot will be deleted.10 Moving a Module to Another Slot To move the configuration of a module to another slot: 1. it may be in another rack. When module data has been changed and Reference View (Shift-F3) is pressed. 3.

(Note that the Model 331 CPU is used in the following screens.) 2.10 Section 3: Configuring the CPU To configure the CPU module: 1. Model 331 or higher CPUs must be located in slot 1 of rack 0. Press Zoom (F10) to display the CPU detail screen: GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-9 . Move the cursor to this slot by pressing the cursor movement keys.

To store the changes to the folder. Choices are 1* or 2. 2400. refer to the “Port Configuration for 351 and 352 CPUs ” section on page 10-18. Refer to the “Standard Sweep Mode Variations” section of chapter 2 in the Series90-30/20/MicroReferenceManual (GFK-0467) and page 5-19 and following of this manual for a discussion of these two types of Constant Sweep Mode. 10-10 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . Default = Disabled. use ODD for direct or multi-drop or None for modem connection. inclusive. the overall PLC sweep time is fixed. or 2 to 10 for modems (larger for radio modem). Modem turnaround delay time counts. tap the Down Arrow key till the cursor rests in the “Sweep Mode:” parameter. Slower communication uses two stop bits. 600. Choices are ODD*. Indicates whether the source of registers is RAM* or PROM. the timer is set to N/A (Not Applicable). Then tap the Down Arrow key once to move the cursor to the “Sweep Tmr ” parameter and enter the number of milliseconds (from 5 to 200—5 to 500 for 351 CPUs) that you want. —5 to 500 for 351 CPUs. and you cannot cursor to the Sweep Timer field. to be any value from 5 to 200 ms. To change the settings. (For use with SFC programming) Timer faults indicate whether or not a fault will be logged in the PLC Fault Table when a step’s time is either outside its maximum or minimum limit. Note: The sweep timer is not configurable when the sweep mode is NORMAL. optional PROM (select PROM for an EEPROM you have installed). Indicates whether passwords are ENABLED* or DISABLED. Communication uses at least one stop bit. Use zero (0) for direct connection. Generally .10 Parameter I/OScan-Stop Power-Up Mode Description Indicates whether the I/O is to be scanned while the PLC is in STOP mode. Maximum communication idle time from 1 to 60 seconds (default = 10 seconds). Choices are 0 through 32. Logic From Registers Passwords Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Modem Turnaround Time Idle Time Checksum Words Sweep Mode Sweep Timer Tmr Faults * Default selection. A byte value which can be configured. Choices are 300. In NORMAL SWEEP mode. or NONE. 1 count = 1/100 second. Choices are 0 to 255 (default = 0). For configuration of Port 1 and Port 2 on 351/2 CPUs. Then press the Tab key to change the selection from “NORMAL ” to “CNST SWP” (if necessary—if you are just changing the time of the Constant Sweep. Sweep mode can be either NORMAL SWEEP mode (NORMAL*) or CONSTANT SWEEP mode (CNST SWP). 4800. Choices are RUN. in 1 millisecond increments. Type of parity bits added to each word. Indicates which state the PLC is to be powered up in. 9600. In CONSTANT SWEEP mode. refer to the “Run/StopSwitchConfiguration (351 and 352 CPS)” section on page 10-17. The number of words of user program to be applied to the checksum function per sweep. Indicates whether the program logic is stored in RAM*. or 19200*. In this mode. Then store the configuration to the PLC and switch the PLC into RUN mode for this change to take effect. For configuration of the Run/Stop switch on 351 and 352 CPUs. EVEN. STOP . This Sweep Mode adjustment is different from the Active Constant Sweep which can be edited only in RUN mode. LAST indicates that the PLC will power up in the same mode it powered down in. it may already say “CNST SWP”). Generally. Transmission rate in bits per second. the PLC sweep executes as fast as possible. 1200. Default = 100. or in an additional. RUN is more suitable for a production system. press the Escape key twice. Choices are YES or NO*. or LAST*. The overall PLC sweep time depends on the logic program plus the time required to compute the checksum.

GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-11 . or for certain models (see below) there are “MEM CLR” pads on the board. –REMOVE ANY AUXILARY BATTERIES. the MEM CLR pads are located on the front. For 350 CPUs and all 360 series CPUs. This will release the top. about one inch below the key switch. Once you remove the CPU from the backplane. 3. For help selecting the parameters. you MUST remove the CPU from the backplane and remove any attached batteries. The HHP needs to be connected. If you do not have an HHP . –Place a small metal screwdriver across the pads for at least 15 seconds to clear all PLC memory. Note The MEM CLR pads are located on the back of 331. Then hold both the <CLR> and < M/T> keys down while powering the PLC back up. call the GE Fanuc Technical Service Hotline (1-800-828-5747) for assistance. Then power off the PLC. NOTE: To prevent physical damage to the PLC. To remove the front shroud.10 Caution In order to re-enable passwords once they have been disabled. insert a small screwdriver into one of the two slots on either side of the unit above the key switch and gently push in. and you can use the same technique to release the bottom of the shroud. press ALT-H. follow these steps: –REMOVE THE CPU FROM THE BACKPLANE. 351 and 352 CPUs. you will be able to see the pads (labeled “MEM CLR”). Use the Tab key and Back Tab key (Shift-Tab) to scroll through the selections for each parameter displayed on this screen. PLC memory may be cleared with an HHP . MEM CLR pad exist on the following models: CPU331Z and CPU331-AA and later All 350 AND 352 CPUs CPU351-EH and later All 360 and higher CPUs If your CPU has MEM CLR pads.

6. When a value has been selected for each parameter. 5. and press the Enter key. Position the cursor on the catalog number for the Model 331 CPU (IC693CPU331).10 4. Press Rack (Shift-F1) or the Escape key to return to the rack display. press CPU (F1) to display a list of catalog numbers and modules. 10-12 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L .

That is to say.g. a port configuration error can occur if try to configure the ports of a pre-Release 7 351 CPU with a Release 7 or later version of Logicmaster (see page 10-18). 2. if you configure a CPU with a recent release of the software.10 Selecting a Different CPU Module Note If you configure a newly-released CPU using Release 4 or later of Logicmaster 90-30/20 software. Use the delete function to delete modules which are not supported. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-13 . For example. To select a different CPU module. move the cursor to the catalog number for the desired CPU type and press the Enter key.. If any modules (e. the following error message is displayed: Selected CPU does not support all currently configured modules 3. Press the Escape key twice. to configure a 10-slot rack for the Model 311 CPU. Then. once to zoom out of the list of catalog numbers and a second time to zoom out of the CPU detail screen back to rack 0. enter Y (Yes) after the prompt “REPLACE displayed module ? (Y/N)”. you cannot use this configuration with an earlier release of the programming software. and press the Enter key. press Zoom (F10) to return to the list of catalog numbers. 4. 1. move the cursor to the entry for that module (IC693CPU321) and press the Enter key. Then. use the same release (or later) for programming. press the Escape key twice to return to the Rack Configuration screen shown below. In addition. Position the cursor once more on the catalog number for the 10-slot rack for the Model 311 CPU (IC693CPU321). intelligent modules) that are not supported by the 10-slot rack have been configured. 5. Then.

Press the Escape key once to return to the detail screen.10 6. 9. Press Zoom (F10) to display the Power Supply/CPU screen. press CPU (F1) to display a list of catalog numbers and modules. GFK-0466L 10-14 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 . press Zoom (F10) again to display the CPU detail screen. 7. Press the Escape key again to save the module configuration and return to the rack display. to configure the 5-slot rack for the Model 311 CPU. Then. 8. Or.

the following error message would be displayed: Slots greater than 5 will be lost. Continue REPLACE? (Y/N) If Y (Yes) is entered. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-15 . Since no boards had been configured in slots 6 through 10. and press the Enter key. the change from a 10-slot rack to a 5-slot rack is allowed. enter Y (Yes) after the prompt “REPLACE displayed module ? (Y/N)”. Move the cursor to the entry for the 5-slot rack (IC693CPU311). the system will automatically delete slots 6 through 10 before changing the CPU module. Then. if boards had been configured in any of slots 6 through 10. However.10 10.

14. 10-16 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . Position the cursor on the catalog number for the Model 311 CPU (IC693CPU311). and press the Enter key. Then.10 11. press the Escape key twice to display the Rack Configuration screen. Press Zoom (F10) and then CPU (F1) to display the CPU detail screen for the 5-slot rack for the Model 311 CPU. 13. 12. Press Zoom (F10) twice and then press CPU (F1) to display the list of catalog numbers and modules. Press the Escape key to return to the rack display. 15. Use the Tab key and Back Tab key (Shift-Tab) to select a value for each parameter displayed on this screen.

one of them being R/S Switch. t The Key Switch can also be used to protect configuration and user program memory and overrides in Release 8 and later CPUs. Refer to the next page for information about this feature.10 Note If you install and configure a 350 and higher CPU and use folders you created previously. you can switch the PLC into Stop mode or from Stop mode into Run mode (Release 7 or later). on the first “page” of their configuration screens as shown below: The R/S Switch parameter enables or disables the RUN/STOP Key Switch functionality available in 351 and 352 CPUs. “System Operation. you will be prompted to convert the folder to one that uses the code written for the higher CPUs. For more information about the operation of the Key Switch. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-17 . With this field enabled. Whether or not the R/S Switch parameter is enabled. refer to the “Key Switch on 350 and 360 CPUs: Change Mode and Flash Protect” section of Chapter 2. and clear faults (Release 7 or later). the Key Switch always functions as a Flash memory protection switch.” in the Series 90 -30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual (GFK-0467). Run/Stop Switch Configuration (350 and higher CPUs) The configuration screens for CPU models 350 and higher have two extra parameters.

10
Memor y Protection Configuration for 350 and Higher CPUs
The configuration screens for 350 and higher CPUs have two extra parameters, one of them being Mem Protect, on the first “page” of their configuration screens as on the previous page. If you change the Mem Protect field from its default state to ENABLED, then the Key Switch can provide memory protection as well. Once ENABLED, when the Key Switch is ON (i.e., in vertical position), two types of memory protection occur:

D D

User program and configuration cannot be modified. Force and override of point data is not allowed.

To change the Mem Protect field to ENABLED, move the cursor down to the Mem Protect field and press Tab.

Note
This enhanced memory protection feature is available only on Release 8 or later 350 and higher CPUs. Also, please note that you can change the Time-of-Day clock while protection is on using Logicmaster (refer to page 11-3), but not with the Hand-Held Programmer.

Port Configuration for 351, 352, and 363 CPUs
The Release 7 and later 351, 352, and 363 CPUs have configurable communication ports. After you have configured the standard information and the Run/StopKey Switch discussed previously, press the PgDn key to display the following configuration screen:

Within each field except SNP ID, you can press the Tab key to toggle through the valid choices.
10-18 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L

10
Note
The port configuration requires a Release 7 or later 351 or 352 CPU, or a Release 9 or later 363 CPU. You will receive an error if you attempt to store this configuration to a pre-Release 7 CPU. This screen did not exist in earlier Logicmaster releases; therefore, you have to have Release 7 or later of Logicmaster to fully utilize this functionality.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-19

10

Parameter
Port 1 Mode

Field Definitions and Values
The mode of communication being used for Port 1: SNP , CCM, RTU, CUSTOM, DISABLED NOTE: The CUSTOM setting provides a way of configuring communications for a generic text output to facilitate communications to third-party modules. Refer to the Series 90 -30Programmable ControllerInstallationManual (GFK-0356) for additional information.

Default
SNP

t

Port 2 Mode

The mode of communication being used for Port 1: SNP , CCM, RTU, CUSTOM, DISABLED See NOTE for Port 1 Mode. Displays the type of access for SNP access: SLAVE, MASTER Defines the data rate for serial communication: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 Type of flow control to be used on the port: HARDW ARE, NONE Specifies the parity used in serial communication. The default parity is Odd. Parity selection can be changed to Even or None if required for communication over modems or with a different SNP master device. Valid choices are NONE, ODD, EVEN. Most serial communication uses at least one stop bit. Slower devices use two stop bits. Valid choices are 1 stop bit or 2 stop bits Length of timeouts used on the port: LONG, MEDIUM, SHORT, NONE Turnaround delay time to be used on the port: 0 to 250 ms This is an identifier that distinguishes this device from others on the same network. Note that for devices that use an SNP ID of 1, enter 49 decimal (31 hexadecimal).

SNP

SNP Mode Data Rate Flow Control Parity

SLA VE 19200 NONE ODD

Stop Bits

1 stop bit

Timeout TurnA (Turnaround) Delay SNP ID (Device Identifier) (7 bytes in length) *

LONG NONE NULL

* For Release 6.5 and 6.6, only the first six bytes are used. For Release 7 and later, the first seven bytes are used.

Note
For additional information about configuration of 351, 352, and 363 CPUs, refer to the Series 90 -30 Programmable Controller Installation Manual, GFK-0356.

t

10-20

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
TCP/IP Ethernet Configuration on 364 CPUs
The configuration screens for the 364 CPU have two extra “pages” used for configuring the TCP/IP Ethernet communications for this CPU. After you select the 364 CPU, the first page you see is the same as that for the 350 and higher CPUs as shown in the discussion of configuration of the Run-Stop switch on page 10-17. When you press the PgDn key for the additional configurations, you will see a screen that looks like this:

Ethernet Parameters for the 364 CPU
Configuration Mode: This is currently fixed as TCP/IP. Status Address: The Status Reference Type is the location of the LAN Interface Status
(LIS) bits (16 bits) and the Channel Status bits (64 bits). The Channel Status bits are always located immediately following the LAN Interface Status bits. The Status address can be assigned to %I, %Q, %R, %AI or %AQ memory. The default value is the next available %I address.

IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway IP Address, and Name Server IP Address: These values should be assigned by the person in charge of your network (the network administrator). TCP/IP network administrators are familiar with these parameters. It is important that these parameters are correct; otherwise, the Ethernet Interface may be unable to communicate on the network and/or network operation may be corrupted. It is especially important that each node on the network is assigned a unique IP address.
However, if you have no network administrator and are using a simple isolated network with no gateways, you can use the following range of values for the assignment of local IP addresses: 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 10.0.0.3 10.0.0.255
GFK-0466L

First PLC Second PLC Third PLC PLC Programmer TCP or host
10-21

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10
Also, in this case, set the subnet mask, gateway IP address, and name server IP address to 0.0.0.0.

Note
If the isolated network is ever connected to another network, the IP addresses 10.0.0.1 through 10.0.0.255 must not be used and the subnet mask, gateway IP address, and name server IP address must be assigned by the networkadministrator. The IP addresses must be assigned so that they are compatible with the connected network. Refer to Chapter 5, “Network Administration Support”, for more information on addressing. See also the section “Determining If an IP Address Has Already Been Used” in Procedure 4.

Note
Do not use the 80 bits assigned to the LIS bits and Channel Status bits for other purposes or your data will be overwritten.

Status Length: This is the sum of the LIS bits and the Channel Status bits. This value is
automatically set to either 80 bits (for %I and %Q Status address locations) or 5 words (for %R, %AI, and %AQ Status address locations).

Network Time Sync SNTP: Selection of the method used to synchronize the Ethernet
clocks over the network. Press the Tab key to choose from possible choices. Currently the choices are DISABLED (for no network time synchronization) and ENABLED (for synchronization to broadcast/multicast mode (mode 5) SNTP servers on the network).

10-22

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998

GFK-0466L

10

After you have configured the IP address, press PgDn to configure the parameters on the following screen:

Refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for Series 90 PLCs manual (GFK-1541) for information about the parameters shown on this screen. All TCP/IP Ethernet configuration information for this CPU is discussed in that manual.

t

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-23

10
User-Configurable Memory Limits for 351 and Higher CPUs
After you have done the standard configuration on a 351 and higher CPU, you can change the default memory limit for %AI, %AQ, and %R references. To change these defaults, from the CPU part of I/O configuration, press the Escape key (usually twice) till you see “CPU” as the F2 selection. Then press F2. Your screen should look similar to this:

Then press F4 (memlim) to go to the PLC Memory Configuration screen:

NOTE: Asterisks (*****) only apear when the programmer is offline. For CPU models that support this feature, the three Size fields under %AI, %AQ, and %R can be edited. Just type the value in each field. By default, the cursor will be on the
10-24 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L

10
%AI field. Press the arrow keys to go to the %AQ and %R fields and type the value you want in each, then press the Escape key to save your changes. The following guidelines and restrictions apply: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. The user-configurable memory is supported only for the 351, 352, 360, 363, and 364 CPUs . Only the %AI, %AQ, and %R references are user-configurable. Adjustments must be in increments of 128 words except for the default of %R (9999 words). The default settings are %AI (2048 words) ; %AQ (512 words) ; %R (9999 words). The following maximum and minimum limitations apply: Maximum of 8192 for %AI and %AQ for Release 9.02 Logicmaster Maximum of 16384 for %R for Release 9.02 Logicmaster Minimum of 128 for each editable reference type (%AI, %AQ, and %R)

D D D

Note
If you are installing a version of Logicmaster later than Release 9.02, check the IPI for increased maximum limits.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-25

10

Section 4: Selecting the Base Rack
The Model 331 and higher CPUs are the non-backplane-mounted CPUs for the Series 90-30 PLC. These model CPUs are plug-in modules, which can be removed from the baseplate. These model CPUs can have expansion racks. Up to five subsystem racks are allowed. The main CPU rack is rack 0, and expansion racks are numbered 1 through 4 (8 in a 351 system). (All racks default to be 10-slot racks.) The size of each rack can be changed on an individual rack basis, allowing a mixture of 5-slot and 10-slot racks in a Series 90-30 PLC configuration. The Up/Down cursor keys and Page Up/Down keys are used to move between racks in ascending or descending order, respectively. 1. Initially, a 10-slot rack is displayed, as shown below for the Model 331 PLC.

10-26

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
2. When Rack Selection (F5) is pressed from any slot of rack 0 of a 5-slot 10-slot Model 331 CPU, a list of catalog numbers and racks is displayed:

If the Escape key or ALT-A (Abort) is pressed while this list is displayed, the rack screen is redisplayed. 3. Position the cursor on the catalog number of the desired rack, and press the Enter key.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-27

10 4. the modules initially configured for the 10-slot rack are not restored. no validation check is performed. When switching from a 10-slot rack to a 5-slot rack. 10-28 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . When switching from a 5-slot rack to a 10-slot rack. continue REPLACE ? (Y/N) If N (No) is entered. note these rules: D D D D D D The rack cursor will always be displayed on the Power Supply module after a successful rack change. Selecting the catalog number of the same size rack currently configured does not change the display. When a previously configured 10-slot rack is changed to a 5-slot rack and then back to a 10-slot rack. can be configured to be a 5-slot rack. Rack 0. The 5-slot rack appears as shown below: When changing the rack selection. If there are. the current rack will remain displayed. the system will automatically delete slots 6 through 10 before changing the rack size. the following message is displayed: Slots greater than 5 will be lost. as well as any expansion rack. a validation check is performed to see if there are any configured modules in slots 6 through 10. the modules will have the same slot location they had in the previous rack. When a rack switch is made. If Y (Yes) is entered.

You must first press Zoom (F10) to zoom into the power supply. and then press Power Supply (F1) to change the base rack (rack 0) power supply. The Power Supply (F4) function cannot be used to change the base rack (rack 0) power supply. and press the Enter key. To select an expansion rack (for example. When Rack Selection (F5) is pressed from any slot of rack 1 of a subsystem rack. the 5-slot expansion rack). Selecting an Expansion Rack Expansion rack catalog numbers are different from the base rack catalog numbers for a Model 331 or higher CPU subsystem. Note The I/O bus of the base rack is extended to the I/O bus of expansion racks via an I/O bus expansion cable.10 Base Rack Power Supply The base rack power supply is automatically configured when the Model 331 or 341 CPU is selected. position the cursor on the catalog number for that rack (for this example. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-29 . a list of catalog numbers and expansion racks is displayed. IC693CHS398).

Note No power supply is configured until an I/O module is configured or the Power Supply (F4) key is used to select one.10 The following rack is displayed if a 10-slot expansion rack with no modules is switched to a 5-slot expansion rack. 10-30 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L .

generic discrete output. and High Speed Counter modules. you may enter a new catalog number or edit the current catalog number. If a different CPU is selected.10 Section 5: Configuring the Model 211 CPU The I/O configuration of the CPU 211 is similar to the configuration of a 5-slot CPU 311. B. If the new CPU is a CPU 211. the detail screen will be displayed and the active field will be the I/O Catalog Number field. leave this field unless it has a valid entry. The reference address assignments for the CPU 211 I/O are fixed. Press CPU (F1) to display a list of catalog numbers and modules. If the active field is the CPU Catalog Number field. the screen will display the detail for that CPU. however. and press the Enter key to select a new CPU. No rack screen is displayed for the 211 PLC. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-31 . (Refer to the information below for configuring the I/O base. cursor to the CPU slot and press Zoom (F10). 1. If a Series 90-30 CPU rack is currently displayed. When the CPU 211 detail screen is first entered. the active field is the I/OCatalog Number field. Cursor to the desired CPU catalog number. generic discrete input.) A. You cannot. This field is used for the catalog number of the I/O base. CPU. which has been configured with a power supply.

1200. Communication uses at least one stop bit. 10-32 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . Maximum communication idle time from 1 to 60 seconds. The CPU Parameter fields may be edited. the timer is set to N/A (Not Applicable). (Default = 10 seconds) The number of words of user program to be checksummed per sweep. Choices are 0 through 32. Transmission rate in bits per second. inclusive. Indicates which state the PLC is to be powered up in. EVEN. In this mode. 9600. press the Escape key twice. or LAST*. it may already say “CNST SWP”). Logic From Registers Passwords Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Modem Turnaround Time Idle Time Checksum Words Sweep Mode Sweep Timer * Default selection. or in an additional. Indicates whether the program logic is stored in RAM*. Indicates whether passwords are ENABLED* or DISABLED. Type of parity bits added to each word. Parameter I/OScan-Stop Power-Up Mode Description Indicates whether the I/O is to be scanned while the PLC is in STOP mode. Choices are ODD*. the PLC sweep executes as fast as possible. Choices are YES or NO*. optional EEPROM . Choices are 0 to 255 (default = 0). Modem turnaround delay time counts.10 2. and you cannot cursor to the Sweep Timer field. tap the Down Cursor Movement key (or Down Arrow key) till the cursor rests in the “Sweep Mode:” parameter. 2400. Then press the Tab key to change the selection from “NORMAL ” to “CNST SWP” (if necessary—if you are just changing the time of the Constant Sweep. To store the changes to the folder. LAST indicates that the PLC will power up in the same mode it powered down in. STOP . In CONSTANT SWEEP mode. Then tap the Down Arrow key once to move the cursor to the “Sweep Tmr ” parameter and enter the number of milliseconds (from 5 to 200) that you want. To change the settings. The overall PLC sweep time depends on the logic program plus the time required to compute the checksum. In NORMAL SWEEP mode. Indicates whether the source of registers is RAM* or EEPROM. Sweep mode can be either NORMAL SWEEP mode (NORMAL*) or CONSTANT SWEEP mode (CNST SWP). 1 count = 1/100 second. A byte value which can be configured (in 1 millisecond increments) to be any value from 5 to 200 ms. (Default = 100) Note: The sweep timer is not configurable when the sweep mode is NORMAL. Slower communication uses two stop bits. 4800. Then store the configuration to the PLC and switch the PLC into RUN mode for this change to take effect. or 19200*. or NONE. the overall PLC sweep time is fixed. as described in the following tables. Choices are 300. Choices are RUN. 600. Choices are 1* or 2.

Note “View Only Parameters” are not editable. IC692MDR541. and IC692MDR741). cursor to the desired base and press the Enter key to select a new I/O base. The I/O Base (F2) softkey is used to select a new I/O base for the CPU 211.10 I/O Base Selection for the CPU 211 1. 2. you cannot cursor to them. With the list of catalog numbers and modules displayed. The I/O base must be selected before a configuration can be saved or the I/O Catalog # field can be left. there are three base modules available (IC692MAA541. Currently. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-33 . This key is only displayed after the CPU 211 has been selected. therefore.

Refer to section 8. The module ID for GENERICBASE (GENERIC 16 IN/12 OUT POWER SUPPLY) is 31. When a program is loaded from the PLC. if the module ID for each base configured in the system is within the range of 0 to 31 but does not match one of the three I/O bases displayed in the previous screen. 10-34 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . the GENERICBASE shown below is displayed. “Configuring an HSC or Embedded HSC.10 3.” on page 10-50 for an explanation of the parameters and values displayed on this screen.

The module ID for UNKNOWNBASE (UNKNOWN/UNSUPPORTED I/O BASE) is 32. If the module ID received from the PLC for the I/O base module is greater than 31. the UNKNOWNBASE base is displayed. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-35 .10 4.

2.) Then press Enter. Press the Micro softkey (Shift-F1) from the Logicmaster 90-30 Main Menu (i. a high speed counter (except for the AC IN / AC OUT models). Logicmaster will then ask you if you want to “create new folder?” Type Y for Yes.. Your screen will look like the one shown below. but also refer to the Series 90 Micro Programmable Controller User’s Manual (GFK-1065) and the Series 90 Micro Programmable Logic Controller Self-Teach Manual (GFK-1104A or later) for additional information. power supply. You can configure the Micro with Logicmaster by following the steps shown below. 3. your screen display will change to one similar to the one shown below. This highlights the word Micro at the top of the Logicmaster display showing you that it is selected.e. After a short pause (during which the Logicmaster copyright screen appears). Press the Config softkey (F2). inputs and outputs all built into one small device. the first screen you see after entering Logicmaster). t t To configure a Micro PLC. (In the example shown above.10 Section 6: Configuring a Micro PLC A Micro PLC has the CPU. 10-36 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . follow these steps: 1. Type the name you want to call your new folder. “micro” was used.

then press the CPU softkey (F1). then skip to step 7 discussed on the next page. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-37 . Press the I/O softkey (F1). The following screen will appear. If the Micro you are installing has the same Catalog # as the default selection. 5. If the Micro you are installing does not have the same Catalog # as the default selection. The following screen will appear.10 4.

On the screen shown above.” in the Series 90 Micro Programmable Controller User’s Manual (GFK-1065) for parameter descriptions for each of the following screen. Move the cursor up or down using the Cursor Movement (or Arrow) keys to the correct selection. (When scrolling through the list. “Configuration. you can either type in your choice or press the Tab key to scroll through the GFK-0466L t 10-38 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 .) When you have your cursor on the correct Catalog #. you may notice that other options include switching to a 90-20 or a 90-30. 6. 7.10 Note Step 6 is only necessary if the Micro you are installing does not have the same Catalog # as the default selection. you can move your cursor from field to field by pressing the Cursor Movement (or Arrow) keys. press Enter which will take you back to the screen shown on the top of this page. Note Refer to Chapter 4. When you are in the field you want to modify.

then press the Tab key once to toggle the default selection to B1– 3. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-39 . Note If you are configuring the HSC (high speed counter) mode B1– 3. B. Notes: A. A4. The High Speed Counter screens will not appear for AC IN / AC OUT models (since they do not have High Speed Counters). press the Page Down key to take you to the screen shown below. move the cursor to the Ctr Types field. From this screen. pressing the Page Down key to advance screens.10 available selections (or Shift-Tab to reverse the direction of the scrolling). 8. press the Page Down key to take you to the screen shown below. You can move your cursor from field to field by pressing the Cursor Movement (or Arrow) keys. A4. %AQ reference addresses will display for DC OUT models only. A4 on another. you can either type in your choice or press the Tab key to scroll through the available selections (or Shift-Tab to reverse the direction of the scrolling). Counters B1– 3 are then configured on one screen. When you are in the field you want to modify. From this screen.

t 10-40 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L .” in the Series 90 Micro Programmable Controller User’s Manual (GFK-1065)—for newer models refer to GFK-1065D or later. refer to Chapter 6. press the Page Down key to take you to the screen shown below. From this screen. Note For parameter and other detailed configuration information about the High Speed Counter. will display on DC OUT models.10 Note Additional fields. 9. PWM Out %Q1 and Pul Out %Q2. When you are in the field you want to modify. you can either type in your choice or press the Tab key to scroll through the available selections (or Shift-Tab to reverse the direction of the scrolling). “High Speed Counters. You can move your cursor from field to field by pressing the Cursor Movement (or Arrow) keys. This applies to all of the following screens.

For parameter and other detailed configuration information about the High Speed Counter. “Configuration. press the Page Down key to take you to the screen shown below.10 10. From this screen. refer to Chapter 4. “High Speed Counters.” in the Series 90 Micro Programmable Controller User’s Manual (GFK-1065)—for newer models refer to GFK-1065D or later. You can move your cursor from field to field by pressing the Cursor Movement (or Arrow) keys.” in the Series 90 Micro Programmable Controller User’s Manual (GFK-1065)—for newer models refer to GFK-1065D or later. When you are in the field you want to modify. you can either type in your choice or press the Tab key to scroll through the available selections (or Shift-Tab to reverse the direction of the scrolling). t t GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-41 . Note For detailed parameter descriptions. refer to Chapter 6.

you can move your cursor from field to field by pressing the Cursor Movement (or Arrow) keys. “Configuration. This will also return you to the main menu of the Configurator package. When you are in the field you want to modify. Use the same techniques to set up this screen as the previous ones. press the Page Down key to take you to the screen shown below.e. “High Speed Counters. press the Escape key to save your configuration. t t 10-42 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L .. i.” in the Series 90 Micro Programmable Controller User’s Manual (GFK-1065)—for newer models refer to GFK-1065D or later. For parameter and other detailed configuration information about the High Speed Counter. refer to Chapter 6. you can either type in your choice or press the Tab key to scroll through the available selections (or Shift-Tab to reverse the direction of the scrolling).” in the Series 90 Micro Programmable Controller User’s Manual (GFK-1065)—for newer models refer to GFK-1065D or later. Refer to Chapter 4. From this screen. After you have set up the final counter. you can configure expansion units (up to 4 expansion units per Micro PLC). 12.10 11. Expansion Units for the Micro PLC For 28-point Micro PLCs.

GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-43 .10 Micro PLC Memory Configuration Limits Memory Type %R %AI %AQ %I %Q %G %M %T %S Memory Limit 256 words 128 words 128 words 512 bits 512 bits 1280 bits 1024 bits 256 bits 128 bits Note These limits are specific to Micro PLCs.

“Existing I/O Configuration will be lost. Continue REPLACE ? (Y/N)” will be displayed. then that existing configuration will be displayed when the I/O softkey is pressed from the Configurator main menu. (3) an 8-pt. 3. If you select the MICRO softkey from the Logicmaster 90 main menu and then select an existing folder that contained either a 9030 or the 9020 configuration. When replacing the CPU (not a CPU211) of a non-default configuration with a SERIES 90 Micro. slot 1. When replacing a SERIES 90 Micro with another CPU (not a CPU211). 4. (5) a 9030 HSC in rack 0. no additional prompts will be displayed. slot 4. If you select either the 90-20 or 90-30 softkey from the Logicmaster 90 main menu and then select an existing folder that contained a SERIES 90 Micro configuration. 10-44 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . 2. the resulting configuration will consist of the following: (1) a PS in rack 0. the additional prompt. (4) an 8-pt Discrete Output module in rack 0. and (6) all other racks unconfigured. 5. When replacing a CPU211 with a SERIES 90 Micro. (2) the new CPU in rack 0. Discrete Input module in rack 0. Confirming the prompt will cause the replacement to occur. otherwise. slot 0. slot 3. then that existing configuration will be displayed when the I/O softkey is pressed from the Configurator main menu. the replacement will not occur.10 Configuration Rules and Miscellaneous Information 1. slot 2.

2. Analog output module. Discrete output module.10 Section 7: Configuring 90-30 I/O Modules To configure a 90-30 I/O module: 1. Analogmixed module Other modules if available (see Note below) Note Other module types are currently unavailable. Analog input module. Move the cursor to the slot where the module will be located and press Module 30 I/O(F1). Press ALT-H to display help information for further explanations. Select the module type by pressing the corresponding function key listed below. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-45 . Function Key F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Module Type d in d out d mix a in a out a mix other Description Discrete input module. This key is reserved for possible future use. Discrete mixed module.

5. 9.. Then. For a discrete module. The next screen lists the catalog numbers and available modules of the type you selected. Press Rack (Shift-F1) or the Escape key to return to the rack display. The next highest available reference address is automatically configured. For example. or 25. %Q0001 through %Q0006 and %Q0009 through %Q0014 will be associated with the output point.10 3. 17. (A byte boundary is a reference address which is a multiple of 8 + 1. the following screen is displayed. 6. but they use bits 1 through 6 and 9 through 14. If you want to use a different reference address. A message is displayed when the highest available address has been assigned. For example. the reference address must begin on a byte boundary. when F1 is pressed. enter it here. Select a module by moving the cursor down to any entry. Note 12-point modules do not use consecutive address bits in PLC memory.g. 10-46 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . press the Enter key. 1. if %Q0001 is assigned to a 12-point output module.) The software will automatically adjust an incorrect entry to begin on a byte boundary. Additional entries may be displayed by pressing the Page Down key. 4. Move the cursor to the module’s reference address. e.

the configuration can assign a generic reference address to that module. For information about configuring a third party module. Configure them as Foreign (third party) module so that the required soft switch configuration data can be entered. The following table lists the catalog numbers to be used to configure modules generically and the function key that would be pressed in order to select a particular generic module. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-47 . refer to page 10-99.10 Configuring Generic I/O Modules If a specific catalog number does not exist for a particular module. Table 10-2. Generic I/O Module Configuration Generic Catalog Number INPUT8 INPUT16 INPUT32 INPUT64 OUTPUT5/8 OUTPUT12/26 OUTPUT32 OUTPUT64 ALGIN4 ALGOUT2 ALGOUT4 INOUT8 INOUT16 INOUT32 INOUT64 Generic Description Generic Input 8 PT Generic Input 16 PT Generic Input 32 PT Generic Input 64 PT Generic Output 5/8 PT Generic Output 12/16 PT Generic Output 32 PT Generic Output 64 PT Generic Input Analog 4 CH Generic Output Analog 2 CH Generic Output Analog 4 CH Generic Input/Output 8 PT Generic Input/Output 16 PT Generic Input/Output 32 PT Generic Input/Output 64 PT Function Key F1 (d in) F2 (d out) F4 (a in) F5 (a out) F3 (d mix) Note Do not configure Horner Electric analog or special modules as Generic.

10 Configuring an I/O Link Interface Module The Fanuc I/O link modules are grouped under the discrete mixed modules. To configure a Fanuc I/O link module on the I/O Configuration Rack screen: 1. Press Module 30 I/O (F1) and then Discrete Mixed (F3) from the I/O Configuration Rack screen to display a list of catalog numbers and discrete mixed modules. and press the Enter key. the choices for the I/O address size are 32 and 64. 3. Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location. Position the cursor on the catalog number. 2. The following detail screen is displayed. IC693BEM320. The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured. The default value is 64. On this screen. 10-48 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L .

If you select 32 as the reference size. Configuring an I/O Link Master Module Complete configuration instructions along with parameter descriptions for this module are in Chapter 3. If you select 64 as the reference size.10 4. the module will occupy 64 discrete inputs and 64 discrete output points. This is the same as if you select the catalog number INOUT32 for the Generic Input/Output 32-Point Module. This is the same as if you select the catalog number INOUT64 for the Generic Input/Output 64-Point Module.” of the Series 90-30 I/O Link Master Module manual (GFK-0823A or later). the module will occupy 32 discrete inputs and 32 discrete output points. 5. “Configuration. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-49 .

Move the cursor to the slot where the module will be located. 2. PULSE/DIRECTION.10 Section 8: Configuring an HSC or Embedded HSC The Series 90-30 High Speed Counter module may be configured to count either up or down. and provides 4 output signals for counter operations. which can operate in UP/DOWN. As one 32-bit differential counter. This configuration is referred to as “T ype B. This configuration is suitable for applications requiring motion control. The module is configured for the application to function in one of three ways: D D D As four 16-bit counters. or homing capability. 10-50 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . This counter uses all 12 of the module’s inputs and all 4 outputs. to count both up and down. To configure the High Speed Counter module: 1. As two 32-bit counters. Each may independently operate in UP/DOWN. or to count the difference between two changing values. or A QUAD B mode.” Each Type B counter has 6 inputs and 2 outputs.” Each Type A counter has 3 inputs and 1 output. Press Other (F8) and then High Speed Counter (F2) to locate a High Speed Counter Module in the slot. differential counting. or A QUAD B mode. For more information on the High Speed Counter module. Many additional features can be changed in the configuration software for the application program. PULSE/DIRECTION. refer to GFK-0293. This module configuration is referred to as “Type A. The High Speed Counter module accepts 12 configurable input signals. Each of the four counters may independently count either up or down.

such as output status. This value is only used if the Oscillator Input field above is set to ON. or C. After pressing the Enter key. OFF selects the input to be used as a counter input. Choices are NORMAL*. and the counter per timebase value. the following screen is displayed. such as output enable/ disable. Parameter Counter Type Control/Status Description Select the desired counter type by entering A*. Oscillator Divider Count Filter Preload Filter * Default selection.counterenable/disable. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-51 . HSC Data Failure Mode Oscillator Input Select the %AI reference location for data sent to the PLC by the HSC module. Discrete output data consists of control information. Press the Enter key to enter the catalog number shown in reverse video. and discrete output data that the PLC sends to the HSC Module. and module ready status. clear error. strobe input status. Discrete input data consists of status information.preloadenable/disable. home input status (for type C). This field identifies the Counter Preload Filter. preload input status. This field allows the use of an internal oscillator reference in place of one count input. or. strobe register contents.press the Tab key. FORCEOFF . This screen displays the module configuration parameters for a Type A counter. and HOLDLAST .10 3. Select the 16-bit value that is divided into 660 Khz in order to achieve the final reference frequency. Choices are ON or OFF*.strobeenable/disable. ON selects the input to be used as an oscillator reference. The base value is 660 Khz. Select the %QI reference location for discrete input data that the High Speed Counter Module sends to the PLC. This field identifies the Counter Input Filter. The length of the discrete data is fixed at 16 bits (2 bytes). The length of the data is fixed at 15 words. and home command (for type C). B. HSC Data consists of accumulated counts. Enter a value to select an output failure mode. The reference is divisible by a 16-bit value (refer to the Oscillator Divider explained below).

767*). Choices are UP* or DOWN. Press the Page Down key to display the detail screen for Type A Counter 1.767).768 to +32.535). (Default = 0) Select the accumulator preload value (-32. Description Select continuous (CONTINU*) or single-shot (SINGSHOT) counting.768 to +32. (Default = 0) Select the output on accumulator value (-32.767) Select the lowest value for the count accumulator (-32. Select the count direction for the type A counter. (Default = 32. Repeatedly press the Page Down key to scroll through the detail screen for each counter and then return to the main detail screen for a Type A counter.768 to +32.768 to +32. Press the Page Up key to display the detail screen for Type A Counter 4 and then scroll through the counters in reverse order. (Default = 0) 10-52 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L .768 to +32. Select the highest value for the count accumulator (-32. Select the counts per time base (0 to +65.767). (Default = 1000) Specify the positive (POS*) or negative (NEG) edge active for the strobe input.767). Parameter Count Mode Count Direction Time Base Strobe Edge High Limit Low Limit Preload Value On Preset Off Preset * Default selection.10 4. Select the output off accumulator value (-32.767).

press the Tab key with the cursor positioned on the Counter Type field on the main detail screen for the Type A counter. Note Because there are two 32-bit counters. 6. press the Enter key. there will be two screens similar to these example screens.10 5. When B is displayed in this field. Repeatedly press the Page Down or Page Up key to scroll through the detail screen for each counter and then return to the main detail screen for the Type B counter. Press the Page Down key to display the detail screen for Type B Counter 1. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-53 . To change from a Type A to Type B counter. This example screen lists the module configuration parameters for a Type B counter.

647).648 to +2. press the Tab key with the cursor positioned on the Counter Type field on the main detail screen for the Type B counter.483.647).648 to +2. This example screen lists the module configuration parameters for a Type C counter.483.147.147. (Default = 1000) Specify the positive or negative edge active for the strobe input.147.483.607) Select the output off accumulator value (-2. For Type B or C counter. select how each counter ’s signals will be used. (Default = +8.607) Select the lowest value for the count accumulator (-2. Description Select continuous (CONTINU*) or single-shot (SINGSHOT) counting. PULS/DIR*. (Default = 0) Select the output on accumulator value (-2.483.647).147. 10-54 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . (Default = 0) Select the accumulator preload value (-2. When C is displayed in this field. Choices are UP/DN.388.483.147.648 to +2. 7.147.483.147.147. Select the counts per time base (0 to +65.648 to +2.483.483. or AQUADB. Choices are POS* or NEG. (Default = +8.648 to +2.10 Parameter Count Mode Count Signal Time Base Strobe Edge High Limit Low Limit Preload Value On Preset Off Preset * Default selection.535).483.483. (Default = 0) Note The Low Limit and High Limit parameters must be validated so that low limit is less than or equal to the high limit.147. press the Enter key.647).147.388.647). To change from a Type B to Type C counter. Select the highest value for the count accumulator (-2.

Use these detail screens to configure the features of the High Speed Counter module. Press the Page Down key to return to the main detail screen for the module.10 8. Press the Page Down key to display the detail screen for a Type C counter. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-55 . The configurable parameters on this screen are as described previously for the Type B counter.

767).10 Configuring the Embedded HSC for a CPU 211 The High Speed Counter module for a CPU 211 can only be a Type A counter. Select continuous (CONTINU*) or single-shot (SINGSHOT) counting.768 to +32. or FORCEOFF .768 to +32. NORMAL*. (Default = 0) 10-56 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L .767) Select the output off accumulator value (-32. (Default = 1000) Select the highest value for the count accumulator (-32.768 to +32. Additional HSC parameters may be configured. Select PRELOAD* or STROBE SELECT. Choices are HOLDLAST . Choices are UP* or DOWN.768 to +32. (Default = +32. Parameter Count Enable Count Direction Count Mode Preload/Strobe Preload Filter Count Filter Failure Mode Time Base High Limit Low Limit Preload Value On Preset Off Preset * Default selection. The HSC module may be configured after paging down from the CPU 211 detail screen.767). Select HIFREQ or LOFREQ*. as described in the following table.768 to +32. (Default = 0) Select the output on accumulator value (-32.767). Select the counts per time base (0 to +65. (Default = 0) Select the accumulator preload value (-32. Select HIFREQ or LOFREQ*. (Default = +32.767).767) Select the lowest value for the count accumulator (-32. Choices are ENABLE or DISABLE*.767). Description Enable or disable the counter.535). Select the count direction for the module.

Select both ports 1 and 2 for BASIC. refer to the Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User’s Manual. For more information on the PCM. Select CCM on both ports 1 and 2. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-57 . Select port 1 for CCM and port 2 for the programmer. The following modes of configuration are available: Mode PCM CFG PROG PRT CCM ONLY PROG/CCM CCM/PROG BASIC BAS/CCM Description All configuration data for the PCM is located in the User Configuration Data File (UCDF). Select port 1 for programmer connection and port 2 for CCM. GFK-0255. It may be configured to behave as one CCM port. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software provides configuration support of the following modules: D PCM with 160 KB memory module. Select Programmer Port mode. Select port 1 for BASIC configuration and port 2 for CCM.10 Section 9: Configuring a PCM Module The Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM) combines the function of a Communications Module and the ASCII/BASIC Module into a single module. two independent CCM ports. D PCM (multiple mode) with 640 KB memory module. D PCM (multiple mode) with 192 KB memory module. created and loaded to the PCM using PCOP . Available modes for each module are listed below: Module Type Mode PCM CFG PROG PRT CCM ONLY PROG/CCM CCM/PROG BASIC BAS/CCM 160K PCM Yes Yes Yes * Yes * Yes * Yes Yes 192K PCM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 640K PCM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes * The interface for port 2 is fixed at RS-485 for the 160K modules. or one BASIC application using one or both serial ports. one CCM port and one BASIC application having one port.

Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location.10 Configuring a PCM To configure a PCM on the I/O Configuration Rack screen: 1. The module detail screen for the module you selected will be displayed. Position the cursor on the catalog number for the module you wish to select. The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured. and press the Enter key. Press Other (F8) and then PCM (F1) from the I/O Configuration Rack screen to display a list of catalog numbers and modules. 2. GFK-0466L 10-58 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 . 3.

press ALT-H. initializing available hardware on the PCM and specifying the user or system tasks to be started. For help selecting parameters. In this screen.) 1. press the Enter key. and press the Enter key.) The configuration data is used for building the configuration of the PCM during the power-up sequence. move the cursor to the Configuration Mode field and repeatedly press the Tab key until the desired mode is displayed on the screen. PCM CFG Mode When PCM CFG mode is selected. This mode uses the User Configuration Data (UCDF) that was loaded into a user module named UCDF in the PCMs battery-backed RAM memory. Then.10 Selecting the Configuration Mode The configuration mode is selected in the Configuration Mode field on the module detail screen. refer to the Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User’s Manual. To select a different configuration mode. the configuration mode is set to PCM CFG for the PCM Configuration Data File mode. 2. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-59 . For more information. GFK-0255. Complete the detail screen for the desired configuration mode. (The UCDF is created using PCOP software. (The module detail screen is displayed by positioning the cursor on the catalog number for the module you wish to select and pressing the Enter key. the following PCM detail screen is displayed.

Parameter ConfigurationMode Interface Description The configuration mode is set to PROG PRT. Choices are 1* or 2. Choices are 300. Choices are HARDWARE*. Data Rate Flow Control Parity Stop Bits Bits per Character * Default selection. The interface parameter is not used or displayed for the 160K module. Type of flow control to be used on the port. 600. 10-60 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . SOFTWARE. Choices are 7 or 8*. Number of stop bits for the port. 2400. 9600. Data rate (bits per second or bps) for the port. Number of bits per character for data transfer on the port. or 19200*. 1200. Type of parity to be used on the port. or NONE. 4800. Choices are NONE*. The interface parameter for port 1 can only be RS-232. EVEN. port 2 of the 192K and 640K modules may have an interface value of either RS-232* or RS-485.10 PROG PRT Mode When PROG PRT (Programmer Port) mode is selected. or ODD. the following PCM detail screen is displayed.

Address of the port on a multi-drop network. 2400. 9600. Specify whether a battery is required. Choices are NONE*. This value is used to calculate the backoff delay upon an inquiry collision in PEER mode. or NONE. Choices are YES* or NO. 10 ms. SHORT . or 500 ms. Choices are LONG*. the following PCM detail screen is displayed. or 19200*. or MASTER. Turnaround delay time to be used for CCM on the port. Choices are HARDWARE or NONE*. 1200. Data Rate Flow Control Parity Retry Count Timeout Turnaround Delay CPU ID * Default selection. Choices are NONE. Choices are YES* or NO. The range of values allowed in this field is 1* to 254. Length of timeouts used for CCM on the port. Type of parity to be used on the port. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-61 . EVEN. Type of flow control to be used on the port. 600. PEER. Choices are SLAVE*. port 2 of the 192K and 640K modules may have an interface value of either RS-232* or RS-485. The interface parameter is not used or displayed for the 160K module. Specify whether the port is to be configured for use as a CCM port. 100 ms. 4800. This parameter displays the availability of ports for CCM access.10 CCM ONLY Mode When CCM ONLY mode is selected. The interface parameter for port 1 can only be RS-232. MEDIUM. Parameter ConfigurationMode Battery Required CCM Enable CCM Mode Interface Description The configuration mode is set to CCM ONLY. or ODD*. Retry counts for CCM mode. Choices are NORMAL* or SHORT . Choices are 300. Data rate (bits per second or bps) for the port.

and for port 2. and for port 2. BASIC Mode BASIC mode selects BASIC configuration for both ports 1 and 2. CCM/PROG Mode CCM/PROG mode selects port 1 for CCM and port 2 as the programmer port. the parameters are the same as for CCM ONLY mode. BAS/CCM Mode BAS/CCM mode selects BASIC configuration for port 1 and CCM for port 2. The parameters for port 1 are the same as for CCM ONLY mode. and for port 2. The parameters for port 1 are the same as for PROG PRT mode. The parameters for port 1 are the same as for PROG PRT mode. 10-62 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . the parameters are the same as for PROG PRT mode.10 PROG/CCM Mode PROG/CCM mode selects port 1 as the programmer port and port 2 for CCM. the parameters are the same as for CCM ONLY mode. The parameters for ports 1 and 2 are the same as for PROG PRT mode.

Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location. Comm (F6). GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-63 . For details about the TCP/IP Ethernet Module. i. Your screen display will change to the one shown on the following page.. Press the Communications softkey. t Configuring a TCP/IP Ethernet Module To configure a TCP/IP Ethernet Module on the I/O Configuration rack screen. do the following: 1. refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 -30 PLC manual (GFK-1084). t Use the information in this section in conjunction with the “Procedure 2: Configuring the Ethernet Interface with Logicmaster 90-30 Configuration Software” section of chapter 2 of the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 -30 PLC manual (GFK-1084). The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured.e. 2.10 Section 10: Configuring a TCP/IP Ethernet Module Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software provides configuration support of the TCP/IP Ethernet Module.

10-64 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . You will then see the screen shown on the following page. Your screen display will change to the one shown below. 4.10 3. Press ethnet (F2). Press Enter to select the Ethernet Controller.

refer to the first two pages of the “Procedure 2: Configuring the Ethernet Interface with Logicmaster 90-30 Configuration Software” section of chapter 2 of the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 -30 PLC manual (GFK-1084).10 For detailed information about this screen. t GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-65 .

Turnaround delay time to be used for CCM on the port. Length of timeouts used for CCM on the port. Choices are LONG*. or 500 ms. Choices are 300. 6.10 5. etc. MEDIUM. or ODD*. 1200. Choices are NONE*. Press Escape again to save the configuration. press Page Down to display the following screen. Type of parity to be used on the port. Description Data rate (bits per second or bps) for the port. After you have assigned the IP address. Choices are 1* or 2. or 19200*. Enter the number of stop bits. 4800. Press the Escape key to return to the rack display. EVEN. 600.. 10-66 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . SHORT . 9600. Choices are NONE. or NONE. 100 ms. Choices are HARDWARE or NONE*. 2400. 10 ms. Type of flow control to be used on the port. Parameter Data Rate Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Turnaround Delay Timeout * Default selection.

The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured. For more information on the CMM. Select port 1 for RTU and port 2 for SNP . Configuring a CMM To configure a CMM on the I/O Configuration Rack screen: 1. Select port 1 for SNP and port 2 for CCM. refer to the Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User’s Manual (GFK-0255) and the Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User’s Manual (GFK-0582). Select RTU on both ports 1 and 2.10 Section 11: Configuring a CMM Module Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software provides configuration support of the CMM Communications Module (multiple mode) with 32 KB. The following modes of configuration are available: Mode CCM ONLY CCM/R TU RTU/CCM RTU ONLY SNP ONLY SNP/CCM CCM/SNP SNP/R TU RTU/SNP Description Select CCM on both ports 1 and 2. Select SNP on both ports 1 and 2. Select port 1 for SNP and port 2 for RTU. Select port 1 for CCM and port 2 for RTU. Select port 1 for CCM and port 2 for SNP . Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location. Select port 1 for RTU and port 2 for CCM. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-67 .

10-68 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . For help selecting parameters. 2.) 1. and press the Enter key. Complete the detail screen for the desired configuration mode. and press the Enter key. Then. Position the cursor on the catalog number for the module you wish to select. (The module detail screen is displayed by positioning the cursor on the catalog number for the module you wish to select and pressing the Enter key. Selecting the Configuration Mode The configuration mode is selected in the Configuration Mode field on the module detail screen. 3. move the cursor to the Configuration Mode field and repeatedly press the Tab key until the desired mode is displayed on the screen. press ALT-H.10 2. To select a different configuration mode. Press Communications (F6) and then Serial (F3) from the I/O Configuration Rack screen to display the catalog number of the CCM/RTU module. press the Enter key. The module detail screen for the module you selected will be displayed.

10
CCM ONLY Mode
When CCM ONLY mode is selected, the following detail screen is displayed.

Parameter
ConfigurationMode Battery Required CCM Enable CCM Mode Interface

Description
The configuration mode is set to CCM ONLY. Specify whether a battery is required. Choices are YES* or NO. Specify whether the port is to be configured for use as a CCM port. Choices are YES* or NO. This parameter displays the availability of ports for CCM access. Choices are SLAVE*, PEER, or MASTER. The interface parameter for port 1 can only be RS-232; port 2 of the 192K and 640K modules may have an interface value of either RS-232* or RS-485. The interface parameter is not used or displayed for the 160K module. Data rate (bits per second or bps) for the port. Choices are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200*. Type of flow control to be used on the port. Choices are HARDWARE or NONE*. Type of parity to be used on the port. Choices are NONE, EVEN, or ODD*. Retry counts for CCM mode. Choices are NORMAL* or SHORT . Length of timeouts used for CCM on the port. Choices are LONG*, MEDIUM, SHORT , or NONE. Turnaround delay time to be used for CCM on the port. Choices are NONE*, 10 ms, 100 ms, or 500 ms. Address of the port on a multi-drop network. This value is used to calculate the backoff delay upon an inquiry collision in PEER mode. The range of values allowed in this field is 1* to 254.

Data Rate Flow Control Parity Retry Count Timeout Turnaround Delay CPU ID

* Default selection.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-69

10
RTU ONLY Mode
When RTU ONLY mode is selected, the following detail screen is displayed.

Parameter
ConfigurationMode RTU Enable Interface

Description
The configuration mode is set to CCM ONLY. Specify whether the port is to be configured for use as an RTU port. Choices are YES* or NO. The interface parameter for port 1 can only be RS-232; port 2 of the 192K and 640K modules may have an interface value of either RS-232* or RS-485. The interface parameter is not used or displayed for the 160K module. Data rate (bits per second or bps) for the port. Choices are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200*. Type of flow control to be used on the port. Choices are HARDWARE or NONE*. Type of parity to be used on the port. Choices are NONE, ODD*, or EVEN. Enter a value from 1* to 247.

Data Rate Flow Control Parity Station Address
* Default selection.

CCM/RTU Mode
CCM/RTU mode selects port 1 for CCM and port for RTU. The parameters for port 1 are the same as for CCM ONLY mode; and for port 2, the parameters are the same as for RTU ONLY mode.

RTU/CCM Mode
RTU/CCM mode selects port 1 for RTU and port 2 for CCM. The parameters for port 1 are the same as for RTU ONLY mode; and for port 2, the parameters are the same as for CCM ONLY mode.
10-70 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L

10
SNP ONLY Mode
When SNP ONLY mode is selected, the following detail screen is displayed.

Parameter
ConfigurationMode SNP Enable SNP Mode Interface Data Rate Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Turnaround Delay Timeout
* Default selection.

Description
The configuration mode is set to SNP ONLY. Specify whether the port is to be configured for use as an SNP port. Choices are YES* or NO. This parameter displays the availability of ports for SNP access. Choices are SLAVE* or MASTER. The interface parameter can be RS-232* or RS-485. Data rate (bits per second or bps) for the port. Choices are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200*. Type of parity to be used on the port. Choices are NONE, ODD*, or EVEN. Most serial communication uses at least one stop bit. Slower devices use two stop bits. Choices are 1* or 2. Type of flow control to be used on the port. Choices are NONE* or HARDWARE. Turnaround delay time to be used for CCM on the port. Choices are NONE*, 10 ms, 100 ms, or 500 ms. Length of timeouts used for SNP on the port. Choices are LONG*, MEDIUM, SHORT , or NONE.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-71

10
SNP/CCM Mode
SNP/CCM mode selects port 1 for SNP and port 2 for CCM. The parameters for port 1 are the same as for SNP ONLY mode; and for port 2, the parameters are the same as for CCM ONLY mode.

CCM/SNP Mode
CCM/SNP mode selects port 1 for CCM and port 2 for SNP . The parameters for port 1 are the same as for CCM ONLY mode; and for port 2, the parameters are the same as for SNP ONLY mode.

SNP/RTU Mode
SNP/RTU mode selects port 1 for SNP and port 2 for RTU. The parameters for port 1 are the same as for SNP ONLY mode; and for port 2, the parameters are the same as for RTU ONLY mode.

RTU/SNP Mode
RTU/SNP mode selects port 1 for RTU and port 2 for SNP . The parameters for port 1 are the same as for RTU ONLY mode; and for port 2, the parameters are the same as for SNP ONLY mode.

10-72

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998

GFK-0466L

10

Section 12: Configuring a Motion Product (Formerly Configuring an APM)

The motion control products are intelligent, fully-programmable, one or two-axis positioning controller integrated into the Series 90-30 PLC system. The Motion Mate APM is an intelligent, fully-programmable, one or two-axis positioning controller. You must have a Release 3.52 or later CPU module in order to configure a slot in the I/O rack for a Motion Mate APM300. The Digital Servo Interface module also requires a 3.52 or later CPU. The Motion Mate DSM302 requires a 6.50 or later CPU. For more information on this family of products, refer to GFK-0707 and GFK-0664. To configure a single axis Motion Mate APM on the I/O Configuration Rack screen: 1. 2. Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location. The slot may be either configured or previously unconfigured. Press Other (F8) and then motion (F5) from the I/O Configuration Rack screen to display the catalog number of the APM.

Note
The instructions on the following pages describe how to configure a slot in the I/O rack for a single axis Motion Mate APM. These instructions also apply to the two-axis Motion Mate APM as well. The only difference is in the catalog number you select (IC693APU302 for the two-axis Motion Mate APM instead of IC693APU301 for the single axis Motion Mate APM).
GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-73

10
Configuring a Single Axis Motion Mate APM
To configure a single axis Motion Mate APM: 1. Position the cursor on the catalog number for the single axis Motion Mate APM (IC693APU301), and press the Enter key. The following detail screen is displayed.

Parameter
Reference Address Reference Address Reference Address

Description
The starting address for the %I user reference. Default= %I0001 or the next highest available address. For both the single axis Motion Mate APM and the two-axis Motion Mate APM, the reference length is fixed at 32 bits. The starting address for the %Q user reference. Default= %Q0001 or the next highest available address. For both the single axis Motion Mate APM and the two-axis Motion Mate APM, the reference length is fixed at 32 bits. The starting address for the %AI user reference. Default = %AI001 or the next highest available address. For the single axis Motion Mate APM, the reference length is fixed at 15 words. For the two-axis Motion Mate APM, the reference length is fixed at 28 words. The starting address for the %AQ user reference. Default = %AQ001 or the next highest available address. For both the single axis Motion Mate APM, and the two-axis Motion Mate APM, the reference length is fixed at 6 words. If DISABLED*, the command position is displayed in the %AI table. If ENABLED, the position error is displayed in the %AI table.

Reference Address %AI Position Error

10-74

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
Parameter
Feedback Type

Description
ENCODER* selects A quad B (x4) incremental encoder input mode. LINEAR selects Temposonics linear transducer (absolute feedback) input mode. RESOLVER selects single or multiple resolver (absolute feedback) input mode. CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 configure the Motion Mate APM inputs for special applications. STANDARD* selects the normal Motion Mate APM motion control loop. The STANDARD loop provides a velocity command output proportional to position error, with optional velocity feed forward and integrator gain terms. CUSTOM loops are individually designed for special applications. For the two-axis Motion Mate APM, FOLLOWER selects a control loop which allows ratio tracking of a master input with zero following error. Transmission rate (in bits per second or bps) of data through the SNP port. Choices are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200*. Parity is indicated by an ODD* or EVEN number of bits, or whether no parity bit (NONE) is added to the word. Number of stop bits. Most serial communications use one stop bit. Slower devices may use two stop bits. Choices are 1* or 2. Number of data bits. Specify whether the CPU recognizes 7 or 8* bit words. The time required for the modem to start data transmission after receiving the transmit request. Values are 0* to 2550, in multiples of 10 milliseconds. Maximum link idle time. The time the module should wait for the next message to be received from the communicating device before it believes that the program device has failed and proceeds to its base state. Values are 1 to 60 seconds. (Default = 10 seconds) The identification number of the SNP port. Messages for the module are sent to this address. (Default = A00001) Defines the Servo Interface Type (Analog or Digital), i.e., the type of command output—refer to GFK-0781 or GFK-0840 for details. GE Fanuc Motor Type—refer to GFK-0781 or GFK-0840 for details.

Control Loop

Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Modem Turnaround Time Idle Time

SNP ID Servo Cmd Motor Type
* Default selection.

2.

Press the Page Down key to display the following detail screen:

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-75

10

Parameter
User Units

Description
Scale factor which allows the APM to be programmed in units appropriate for the application. The ratio of user units to counts must be in the range 32:1 to 1:32. Values are 1* to +65,535. Scale factor which allows the APM to be programmed in units appropriate for the application. The ratio of user units to counts must be in the range 32:1 to 1:32. Values are 1* to +65,535. Specify whether the APM uses the hardware overtravel limit switch inputs (CTL05 and CTL06 for axis 1; CTL07 and CTL08 for axis 2). If ENABLED, then 10 - 30 VDC must be applied to the inputs in order for the APM to operate. Values are ENABLED* or DISABLED. If the APM is commanded to go to a position greater than the positive EOT, an error will result and the APM will not allow axis motion. Values are -8,388,608 to +8,388,607* user units. If the APM is commanded to go to a position less than the negative EOT, an error will result and the APM will not allow axis motion. Values are 0 to -8,388,608* user units. The maximum position error (Commanded Position – Actual Position)allowed when the APM is controlling a servo. This parameter should normally be set to a value 10 to 20 percent higher than the highest position error encountered under normal servo operations. Range = 256* (user units / counts) <= POS ERR LIM <= 60,000* (user units / counts). (Default = 4096) When the servo position error is within this value and no motion is commanded, the IN ZONE status bit is set. This parameter also determines the position error at which PMOVEs are considered to be complete. Range = 0 to 2000. (Default = 10) The desired servo position loop time constant (in milliseconds). The lower the value, the faster the system’s response. Values which are too low will cause system instability and oscillation. For accurate tracking of the commanded velocity profile, the position loop time constant should be 1/4 to 1/2 of the minimum system deceleration time. The time will not be accurate unless the velocity at 10V value is set correctly. Values are 20 to +32,767 ms. (Default = 1000) Actual servo velocity (in user units per second) for an APM velocity command output of 10V. This value must be configured correctly in order for the position loop time constant and the velocity feedforward gain percent factor to be accurate. The APMs FORCE D/A OUTPUT %AQ immediate command and the ACTUAL VELOCITY %AI return data can be used to determine the proper configuration value. Values are 100 to +8,388,607. (Default = 4000) The percentage of commanded velocity that is added to the APM velocity command output. Increasing this parameter causes the servo to operate with faster response and reduced position error. Values are 0* to 100 percent; optimum values are 80 to 90 percent. The velocity at 10V value must be set correctly for proper operation of the velocity feedforward gain factor. Values should be 5 to 10 times the position loop time constant setting. Servo instability will result if the integrator time constant is set too low. When the integrator mode is set to CONTINUOUS, deceleration times must be 5 to 10 times longer than the integrator time constant setting or servo overshoot will occur. Setting the time constant to zero turns off the integrator. (Default = 0) Operating mode for the position error integrator. OFF* means that the integrator is not used. CONTINU means the integrator runs continuously, even during servo motion. IN ZONE means the integrator only runs when the servo is at rest.

Counts

Overtravel Limit Switch

Positive Software End of Travel Limit Negative Software End of Travel Limit Position Error Limit

In Position Zone

Position Loop Time Constant

Velocity at 10V

Velocity Feedforward Gain

Integrator Time Constant (inmilliseconds)

Integrator Mode

10-76

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
Parameter
Reversal Compensation Servo Drive Disable Delay

Description
A compensation factor which allows the servo to reverse direction and still provide accurate positioning in systems containing backlash. Values are 0* to +255. The time delay (in milliseconds) from zero velocity command to the drive enable output switching off. Disable delay is effective when the ENABLE DRIVE %I bit is turned off or certain error conditions occur. This time delay should be longer than the deceleration time of the servo from maximum speed. Values are 0 to +32,767 ms. (Default = 100)

* Default selection.

3.

Press the Page Down key again to display this detail screen:

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-77

10

Parameter
Jog Velocity Jog Acceleration Rate Jog Acceleration Mode

Description
The velocity (in user units per second) at which the servo moves during a jog operation. Values are 0 to +8,388,607. (Default = 1000) The acceleration rate (in user units per second) used during jog, find home, move at velocity, and abort operations. Values are 0 to +8,388,607. (Default = 10000) The acceleration mode for jog, find home, move at velocity, and abort operations. LINEAR* causes commanded velocity to change linearly with time. SCURVE causes commanded velocity to change more slowly than the linear mode at the beginning and end of acceleration intervals. This field is reserved for future use. This field is reserved for future use. When the axis is moving in the positive direction and this value is reached, actual position will roll over to the low count limit. (Default = 8,388,607) When the axis is moving in the negative direction and this value is reached, actual position will roll over to the high count limit. (Default = -8,388,607) The value (in user units) assigned to actual position at the end of a find home cycle. Values are -8,388,608 to +8,388,607. (Default = 0) The offset (in user units) of the servo final stopping point at the completion of a find home cycle. Home offset adjusts the final servo stopping point relative to the encoder marker. Values are -32,768 to +32,767. (Default = 0) The velocity (in user units per second) at which the servo seeks the final home switch transition and encoder marker pulse at the end of a find home cycle. Final home velocity must be slow enough to allow a 5 millisecond delay between the final home switch transition and the encoder marker pulse. Values are 0 to +8,388,607. (Default = 500) The velocity (in user units per second) at which the servo seeks the initial home switch transitions during the find home cycle. If desired, find home velocity can be set to a high value to allow the servo to quickly locate the home switch. Values are 0 to +8,388,607. (Default = 2000) Select HOMESW if a home switch input is used as part of the find home cycle. Select MOVE+ or MOVE- for a unidirectional home cycle which does not use the home switch input.

DataInit1 DataInit2 High Count Limit

Low Count Limit

Home Position Home Position Offset

Final Home Velocity

Find Home Velocity

Home Mode

* Default selection.

10-78

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998

GFK-0466L

Testing continues until the CTL bit is set or a subsequent Block number command is encountered in the motion program. This screen. If you press the Page Down key again. The acceleration rate (in user units per second) for subsequent CMOVE and PMOVEcommands. enable you to specify a small set of instructions to be downloaded to the APM upon initialization. The Wait for Discrete Input command causes the APM to wait for a bit number (1 – 12) to be set before executing the next command. JUMP GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-79 . The velocity (in user units per second) for subsequent CMOVE and PMOVE commands. the following screen is displayed. subsequent tables provide more detailed information about each instruction. and subsequent screens like this. Command NULL CMOVE PMOVE VELOC ACCEL WAIT LOAD-P DWELL BLOCK Description The Null command causes no action. The Dwell command causes a delay equal to the dwell time (in milliseconds) before execution of the next command. or Dwell commands. The Load Parameter command loads the specified parameter data into one of the 20 parameter registers. (Note the change of function softkey assignments on these screens. The Continuous Move (data = user units) command causes servo motion without requiring the servo to stop in order for the next command to execute. The Jump command causes program execution to transfer to the specified block number. CMOVE. If the CTL bit is not set. The Block Number command assigns the specified block number to subsequent commands. The Positioning Move (data = user units) command causes the servo t come to rest and be in zone before executing the next command. the CTL bit is tested when the Jump command is first encountered. The block number is reported in the APM %AI input data. The Jump can be unconditional (always occurs) or conditional (occurs when the specified CTL bit is set).10 4.) The following table defines these instructions. testing of the bit will occur every 2 milliseconds during subsequent PMOVE. For a conditional Jump.

s-curve. Axis 2 = -2 2) ACCEL: ACCEL-P: WAIT: Set acceleration. linear. When the -P suffix is used on the command. incremental. The following commands have a value range from 0 to +65. BLOCK: Define block number. absolute. CMOVE-IS: Regular move.608 to +8. however. use data in APM register. CMOVE-AS: C O E AS: Regular move. Axis 2 = -2) DWELL: DWELL P: DWELL-P Wait X milliseconds. 10-80 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . or N/A (Not Applicable).635. PMOVE-AS-P: use data in APM register. Values are 1.388. (Default = 1) The following commands have a value range of 1 to 134. however. s-curve. s-curve. For configuration. PMOVE-AL-P: Positioning move. linear. linear. s-curve. the maximum data value is 255. linear. s-curve. (Default = 1) (A -1 placed at the end of the command indicates that the command is for axis 1.217. “Incorrect data entry. The following commands have a value range of 1 to 98. where wh X is the h value of the h APM register. incremental. absolute.727. s-curve.10 Field Data Command Description This field contains either a 24-bit signed integer or the number of an APM register if the command has a -P extension. use data in APM register. the maximum data value is 255. linear. Axis 2 = -2 2) VELOC: VELOC-P: Set velocity. use data in APM register. (Default = 5000) Set acceleration to data in APM register.535. incremental s-curve.607. (Default D = 0) LOAD-P01: LOAD P : LOAD P : LOAD-P02: • • • LOAD-P20: Load APM p parameter register number 1. a -2 indicates axis 2. incremental. incremental. however. Values are 1 to +65. however. etc. 16.607 8 388 607. CMOVE-IS-P: Regular move.608 to +8. When the -P suffix is used on the command. A legal APM command. PMOVE-AS: Positioning move.388.” The axis number may be 1.607. absolute. the maximum data value is 255. 4. (Axis 1 = -1 1. incremental. the legal commands are listed below. 2. (NULL): Do nothing. 2. When the -P suffix is used on the command. linear. (Axis 1 = -1. Default = 0) Wait X milliseconds. absolute. P O E AS P: Positioning move. Load APM p parameter register number 2.388. PMOVE-IL: Positioning move. use data in APM register. Logicmaster 90-30/90-20 software will display the error message. absolute. s-curve PMOVE-IS-P: Positioning move. incremental. linear. C O E AS P: Regular move. incremental.388. When the -P suffix is used on the command. (Default = 1) Axis Number If an entry other than one of the legal commands listed above is made.) CMOVE-AL: Regular move. 2 Load APM parameter register number 20.388. use data in APM register. absolute. CMOVE-AS-P: CMOVE-IL: Regular move. P O E AL: PMOVE-AL: Positioning move. the maximum data value is 255. (Default = 1) The following Th w commands have h a value range from -8. (Default = 2000) Set velocity to data in APM register. (Axis 1 = -1 1. PMOVE-IL-P: PMOVE-IS: Positioning move. absolute. (Default = 1) Wait for some bit to go high before moving. (Default = 1) LOC : D D The following commands have a value range from -8. CMOVE-IL-P: Regular move. use data in APM register. P O E IL P: Positioning move.

CMOVE (F2) was pressed. Using the list of commands above. In the example. To select another CMOVE command in this field. use the Tab key to move through the various selections. In addition. an “Inactive Key” error message is displayed and the key is ignored. or use the function softkeys to select a command. in order. enter the command in the Command field. CMOVE-AS-P . GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-81 . CMOVE-IL. If there is more than one type of command for a particular command (e. it is simply ignored. press the Tab key. If the Tab key is pressed. CMOVE-AL is displayed. To use the softkeys. 8.. The display will change from LOAD-P01 to LOAD-P02 . CMOVE). press the Tab key to display CMOVE-AL-P . When F2 is initially pressed. the Tab key will also generate an “Inactive Key” error message if it is pressed in the Data field. CMOVE-AS. This eliminates having to make an entry in the Data field for the LOAD command.10 5. move the cursor to the appropriate command field and press the softkey for the desired command. The other commands do not support the Tab key. CMOVE-IS. CMOVE-AL is the default for the CMOVE (F2) softkey.g. When you press Load (F7) for the LOAD command. LOAD-Pn (where n is the parameter register number).. If a value is entered into the data register for the LOAD command. In the following example. 7... 6. CMOVE-IL-P . To change the APM register number.. and CMOVE-IS-P . LOAD-P01 is initially displayed.

press the Enter key. 3. To configure this module on the I/O Configuration Rack screen: 1. Press Other (F8) and then Operator Interface (F4) from the I/O Configuration Rack screen to display the catalog number for the module.10 Section 13: Configuring an ADC Module The Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC) Module is used with the CIMPLICITY 90-ADS software for developing user screens and graphic displays. The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured. Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location. GFK-0499. 10-82 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . 2. For more information on this module. The CIMPLICITY 90-ADS system is a character-based operator interface generator system for use with the Series 90-30 PLC. refer to the CIMPLICITY 90-ADS User’s Manual. With the cursor positioned on IC693ADC311.

The following screen will appear. 4. To configure the Genius Communications Module: 1. 2. The following screen will appear.10 Section 14: Configuring a GCM or Enhanced GCM The Genius Communications Module provides the means for configuring global data to and from the Series 90-30 programmable controller. Press F2 (gcm) and then press the Enter key to select it. Press Genius (F2) and then GCM (F2) from the I/O Configuration Rack screen to display a list of catalog numbers and modules. Move the cursor to the correct slot. Then press F2 (genius). 10-83 GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration . 3.

From Address Baud Rate Length The table below states the allowable values for each length. must not exceed %G256. Each Length field represents the amount of data transferred to or from the corresponding serial bus address. in units of bits. the other seven serial bus addresses. and press the Enter key again. referring to the address associated with each of the eight serial bus addresses 16 through 23. when added to the fixed starting address. By specifying one bus address as output. Bus Address 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Starting Address %G001 %G033 %G065 %G097 %G129 %G161 %G193 %G225 Valid Lengths 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 – – – – – – – – 256 224 192 160 128 96 64 32 10-84 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . validated at the time of entry. 38. receive incoming global data. Field Description Specifies the serial bus address from where the outgoing global data is sent. 76. The length value. press the Enter key to display the detail screen for the Genius Communications Module. 6.4K. using the definitions provided in the following table. The global references are fixed fields. the maximum allowable global data reference.10 5.8K. Complete the detail screen. and 153K EXT . inclusive. by default. With the cursor positioned on IC693CMM301. The valid range for this field is 16 to 23. Selections for the baud rate include 153K STD.

and press the Enter key. The maximum configuration size of the PLC. Enhanced Genius Communications Module Note Beginning with Release 4. To configure an Enhanced Genius Communications Module. then the configuration cannot be stored to the PLC.5. 1. position the cursor on IC693CMM302 in the catalog list of modules. an Enhanced GCM module cannot be configured. Therefore. the data transmitted from this node maps to %G001 to %G064. the I/O configuration is no longer limited to two Enhanced Genius Communications Modules.10 If one field is increased beyond the default of 32 bits. For example. If the references assigned to the Enhanced GCM Modules causes the I/O configuration size to exceed the maximum allowed. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-85 . The following detail screen will be displayed. If a GCM module is already configured. if 64 bits is specified for serial bus address 16. a length of 0 must be assigned to serial bus address 17. The number of Enhanced GCM modules that can be configured is now limited only by the following: D D The presence of a Genius Communications Module. the next field(s) must be decreased to avoid overlapping addresses. The Length fields will be automatically adjusted so that overlapping %G addresses are not possible.

(Default = 0) Specifies the location in PLC memory used to hold the status specified by the Enhanced GCM module. (Default = 16) Selections for the baud rate include 153K STD. inclusive. 76. The Report Faults option of the Enhanced GCM module must also be enabled. Values are 0 – 16. the Enhanced GCM module will continue to pass on the last valid state sent to it in either of these situations.383. Complete the detail screen. Parameter Serial Bus Address (SBA) of this Module Baud Rate Data Default Description Indicates the Serial Bus Address of this module. If set to HOLD. (Default = the next highest available %I value) If set to YES. it is recommended that you assign a unique Drop ID to each module in order to avoid conflicting identification information if both modules are set up to report faults. If NO is selected.10 2. press the Enter key again. This is the address from which global data will be sent. and 153K EXT. Then.8K. When locating two Enhanced GCM modules in one Series 90-30 PLC. (Default = OFF) Specifies the register location in a Series Six or Series Five CPU that should be reserved for the global data that will be transmitted to it by the Enhanced GCM module. The memory type for this field is restricted to %I. the Enhanced GCM module will not pass on any fault information. (Default = 33) Series Six Reference Status Report Faults Drop ID 10-86 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . 38. (Default = 153K STD) If set to OFF. the Enhanced GCM module will either zero out data being supplied to the host PLC whenever the corresponding Genius device supplying the data ceases to communicate on the bus or zero out data being transmitted onto the bus when its host PLC ceases to scan its own I/O . the Enhanced GCM module will accept fault mail from its host Series 90-30 PLC and transmit it onto the bus as a Genius datagram which can be interpreted by a Series 90-70 Genius Bus Controller. Valid range is 16 through 254.4K. A value of zero indicates that no register location should be reserved. Values are 0 to 31. (Default = NO) This parameter is used by a Series 90-70 PLC to identify the location of a fault that has been reported by a Series 90-30 PLC via an Enhanced GCM module. using the definitions provided in the following table.

A value of zero indicates that the first byte of the incoming message is placed at the starting references defined for each Serial Bus Address. The offset. the sum of the reference length and the message buffer byte offset cannot exceed 128 bytes. and Serial Bus Addresses 24 through 31 may be configured to use Genius Scheme 2. Genius I/O System User’s Manual (GEK-90486-1) – details the data that can be transferred using Read Configuration and Write Configuration COMREQs. or %R. In addition. %Q. however. see: Genius Discrete and Analog Blocks User’s Manual (GEK-90486-2) – includes instructions for configuring most I/O blocks. The total length of the reference data. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-87 . (Default = 0) For each Serial Bus Address. %AQ. from the start of an incoming message at which the Enhanced GCM module will start to extract data from the incoming message. Values are 0 to 128 bytes. starting at the address specified by START REF . measured in bytes. The reference type can be %G. All other Serial Bus Addresses are set to their default value.10 The following parameters apply for each configurable Serial Bus Address (SBAs 0 through 31): Parameter Start Reference Reference Length Description The starting reference address from or to which global data is being transferred. %AI. or %Q. the units for this field will be bits if the configured reference type is %I. or %G. all message buffer byte offsets are set to zero. The Default (F9) can be used to set the reference addresses and reference lengths to a combined Scheme 1 and Scheme 2 Genius global data. %AQ. %R. its reference address may overlap with other configured reference addresses. The offset for the Serial Bus Address of the Enhanced GCM module itself is always zero. For additional information on the configuration of devices and remote drops. it cannot be changed. %I. Message Buffer Byte Offset 3. Since the Serial Bus Address of this module is used to transmit global data. The first byte extracted is placed in PLC memory at the start reference given in the configuration of the Serial Bus Address of the device transmitting the message. and words if the configured reference type is %AI. Serial Bus Addresses 16 through 23 may be configured to use Genius Scheme 1.

2. 1. Once the complete set of configuration data has been entered. The LM90 configurator software program (release 5 or later) can be used to configure the module in the offline mode. The setup screens that are used for this module are shown and described below. place the cursor at the slot representation corresponding to the GBC’s installed location in the PLC rack. This includes configuring parameters for the GBC module itself. 10-88 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . and parameters specific to the devices on the GBC’s bus.10 Section 15: Configuring a Genius Bus Controller The Genius Bus Controller (GBC) must be configured as part of the Series 90-30 PLC system using the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software (release 5 or later) or a Hand-held Programmer (HHP). The GBC is configured by completing setup screens in the Logicmaster 90-30 configuration software. it must then be downloaded to the PLC (in the online mode) to become effective in the Genius Bus Controller. In the I/O configuration screen. Then press F2 (genius). The following screen will appear.

F9. or changed. see: Genius Discrete and Analog Blocks User’s Manual (GEK-90486-2) – includes instructions for configuring most I/O blocks. Until a valid configuration is stored to the PLC CPU.10 3. (Note that the “defalt” softkey. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-89 . Press F1 (gbc) and then press the Enter key to select the GBC. Press the Enter key to select the GBC. Genius I/O System User’s Manual (GEK-90486-1) – details the data that can be transferred using Read Configuration and Write Configuration COMREQs. Series 90-30 Genius Bus Controller User’s Manual (GFK-1034) – includes configuration and additional details on relevant several topics including configuring for global data.) 4. The following screen will appear. is inactive. Complete the GBC configuration entries in the following screen: Note that the configuration screen consists of two parts: module-specific data (BUS CONTROLLER MODULE DATA) and device-specific data (DEVICE DATA). as well as details on assigned configuration parameters. For additional information on the configuration of devices and remote drops. and its Channel OK LED will not light. The default entries can be used as is. the GBC will not operate on the bus.

Press the a out key (F5). Your screen will now look like the one displayed below: 4. 10-90 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L .10 Section 16: Configuring a High Density Analog Output Module To configure a High Density Analog Output module. Move the cursor to the IC69ALG392 selection as shown above. The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured. Then press Enter. 2. follow these steps: 1. Press the lm30 io key (F1). Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location. You will then see a screen similar to the following: 3.

You will not be able to configure additional channels until you change this field (by typing in the correct number (1 through 8) or by pressing the Tab key to increment the number). The default number of Active Channels (Active Chan:) is 1. You can move your cursor from field to field by pressing the Cursor Movement (or Arrow) keys. Enter the remaining configuration parameters on this screen.10 The next screen that appears will look like the one displayed below: 5. you can either type in your choice or press the Tab key to scroll through the available selections (or Shift-Tab to reverse the direction of the scrolling). When you are in the field you want to modify. The screen displayed below shows the default selections after changing the Active Chan: field. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-91 .

20mA. The only allowable entries for the %I Ref Adr are %I addresses. 10-92 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . When this value is set to HOLD (the default).. The %AQ Ref Adr field is the reference address for the %AQ data and points to the start of the locations in the %AQ memory where the output data to the module begins.e. The following tables show the configuration parameters applicable to this module.20mA N/A bits Volts (Volt) mA (Curr) Notes: 1. depending on the range type selected. or next highestavailable 8 0. which refer to the number of %I locations reported to the PLC. For detailed information of the data format. This field denotes the number of bits returned to the user. When you change this value to DEFLOW. +10V. Each channel provides 16 bits of analog output data as an integer value from 0 to 32. +10V. +10V Parameter Units N/A Channels N/A %I Ref Adr %I Size Range of channel output (not identified as such on the screen) Standard range 8 or 16 0. Other Configuration Considerations Channels are scanned in sequential. The only allowable entries for the %AQ Ref Adr are %AQ addresses. 4. the Input Table) where status information from the module is reported. 2. the output will go to zero.768 to 32.767.767 or –32. Parameter Description Hold last state from RUN to STOP Number of channels converted Starting address for the %AQ reference type Starting address for the %I reference type Number of %I status locations Type of output range Parameter Stop Mode ACTIVE Channels %AQ Ref Adr Parameter Values HOLD or DEFLOW 1 through 8 Standard range Parameter Defaults HOLD 1 %AQ0001.10 Note The entry in the Stop Mode field (HOLD or DEFLOW–which stands for default low) determines how the outputs will behave when the module is toggled from RUN to STOP mode. The entry in %I Size will only accept 8 or 16.0. The user can select the number of %I status locations reported to the PLC by editing the value in the %I Size field. contiguous order with channel 1 being the first to be scanned. Values allowable in the %I Size field are 8 or 16. –10. the outputs will retain their last state. see the “CPU Interface to Analog Modules” section in chapter 3 of the Series 90-30 Programmable Controller I/O ModuleSpecifications (GFK-0898). or next highestavailable %I0001. The %I Ref Adr is the reference address for the %I data and points to the start of the locations in the %I memory (i.

’1’ indicates module OK User Supply OK – Indicates when user supply is in specified limits. In each of the current ranges values between 0 and 32000 are sent to the module. %I+2 – %I+7 Second eight locations – (available for %I SIZE values 16) %I Locations %I+8 %I+9 %I+10 %I+11 %I+12 %I+13 %I+14 %I+15 Description Channel #1 BROKEN WIRE – 0 = OK. The –10 to +10V range. 1 = Wire broken (I modes only) Channel #2 BROKEN WIRE – 0 = OK.10 The %I Ref Adr field will only accept %I for %I Size values 8 or greater. Not used in this module. 1 = Wire broken (I modes only) Channel #8 BROKEN WIRE – 0 = OK. Depending on which range is selected. refers to the values that are valid. The default range is 0–10V. reads a ’0’ when User supply below specified limit. The following tables shows values sent from the CPU to the module: Sent values from CPU 0 to 32767 –32768 to 32767 0 to 32767 0 to 32767 Range 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Module Mode Voltage Voltage Current Current *Allowed Values 0 to 32767 – 32768 to 32767 0 to 32000* 0 to 32767 *The phrase. 16) %I Locations %I %I+1 Description Module OK – ’0’ indicates NOT OK. the data brought back is in the format that follows: The first eight %I locations (available for %I SIZE values 8. 1 = Wire broken (I modes only) Channel #6 BROKEN WIRE – 0 = OK. 1 = Wire broken (I modes only) One of four output ranges can be selected. 1 = Wire broken (I modes only) Channel #3 BROKEN WIRE – 0 = OK. The two current ranges are 4 to 20 mA. 1 = Wire broken (I modes only) Channel #7 BROKEN WIRE – 0 = OK. 1 = Wire broken (I modes only) Channel #5 BROKEN WIRE – 0 = OK. when selected. the module will truncate that value to 32000 before sending it to the DAC. will determine if the module is in Current or Voltage mode. 1 = Wire broken (I modes only) Channel #4 BROKEN WIRE – 0 = OK. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-93 . and 0 to 20 mA. If you send a value > 32000. corresponds from –32000 to 32000 from the CPU over an output voltage range of –10 to +10V. Two of which are voltage ranges. where output voltage values ranging from 0 to 10 volts correspond to 0 to 32000 integer values from the 90-30 CPU. Allowed Values. ’1’ when User supply OK Reserved for future modules.

Currently. Press the lm30 io key (F1). follow these steps: 1. press the a mix key (F6).10 Section 17: Configuring an Analog Combo Module To configure an Analog Combo module.) Press Enter to accept this selection and to move to the screen shown on the top of the next page. there is only one selection. 2. use your Cursor Movement (or Arrow) keys to move to Catalog # IC693ALG442. From this screen. Your screen will change to one similar to the one shown below. GFK-0466L 10-94 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 . The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured. 4. Your screen will change to one similar to the one shown below. Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location. (If more than one selection appears. 3.

the outputs will retain their last state. 16 and 24. The entry in %I Size will only accept 8. the output will go to zero. you can either type in your choice or press the Tab key to scroll through the available selections (or Shift-Tab to reverse the direction of the scrolling).10 5. The only allowable entries for the %AQ Ref Adr are %AQ addresses. This field denotes the number of bits returned to the user. Note The entry in the Stop Mode field (HOLD or DEFLOW) determines how the outputs will behave when the module is toggled from RUN to STOP mode. All the remaining configuration need to be done on this screen. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-95 . The only allowable entries for the %I Ref Adr are %I addresses. You can move your cursor from field to field by pressing the Cursor Movement (or Arrow) keys. When you change this value to DEFLOW. When you are in the field you want to modify. Other Configuration Considerations The Alarm Low limit for each channel must be less than its corresponding Alarm High limit. When this value is set to HOLD (the default).

For detailed information of the data format. the data brought back is in the format described in the table on the next page. The %AI Ref Adr field is the reference address for the %AQ data and points to the start of the locations in the %AI memory where the output data to the module begins. –10.767 or –32.+10 V.+10 V.768 to 32. For %I SIZE values 8 or greater. see the “CPU Interface to Analog Modules” section in chapter 3 of the Series 90-30 Programmable Controller I/O Module Specifications (GFK-0898). Values allowable in the %I Size field are 8 or 16. The %AQ Ref Adr field is the reference address for the %AQ data and points to the start of the locations in the %AQ memory where the output data to the module begins. or next highestavailable %I00001. see the “CPU Interface to Analog Modules” section in chapter 3 of the Series 90-30 Programmable Controller I/O Module Specifications (GFK-0898). the Input Table) where status information from the module is reported. The %I Ref Adr is the reference address for the %I data and points to the start of the locations in the %I memory (i. which refer to the number of %I locations reported to the PLC. Starting address for the %I reference type Number of %I status locations Type of input range and range Low limit alarm value High limit alarm value Parameter Values HOLD or DEFLOW standard range standard range standard range 8. depending on the range type selected. or next highestavailable %AQ0001.+10 V Parameter Units N/A N/A N/A N/A bits volts (Volt) mA (Curr) User counts User counts ALARMLO ALARM HIGH 0 +32000 Notes: 1. 20mA –32768 – 32752 –32760 – 32760 Parameter Defaults HOLD %AI0001.767. 2. 4. For detailed information of the data format.768 to 32. Each channel provides 16 bits of analog output data as an integer value from 0 to 32. 24 0. Each channel provides 16 bits of analog output data as an integer value from 0 to 32.767 or –32..20 mA. 16. or next highestavailable 8 0.e.10 Analog Combo Configuration Parameters Parameter STOP MODE %AI ADR %AQ ADR %I ADR %I SIZE RANGE Parameter Description Hold last state from RUN to STOP Starting address for the %AI reference type Starting address for the %AQ reference type. 3. 10-96 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . You can select the number of %I status locations reported to the PLC by editing the value in the %I Size field. 0. depending on the range type selected.767.

Not used in this module One of four input or output ranges can be selected. ’1’ below Input Ch #2 ALARM HI – ’0’ indicates value below limit. 1 = Wire Broken (I modes only) Output Ch #2 BROKEN WIRE 0 = OK. values between 0 and 32000 are reported back from the module to sent to the module for the entire range.10 First eight %I locations – (available for %I SIZE values 8. ’1’ below Input Ch #4 ALARM HI – ’0’ indicates value below limit.. ’1’ below Input Ch #3 ALARM HI – ’0’ indicates value below limit. In each of the current ranges. %I+23 Description Output Ch #1 BROKEN WIRE 0 = OK. ’1’ above Input Ch #3 ALARM LO – ’0’ indicates value above limit. In input mode they report 0 to 32000 integer values to the 90-30 CPU and in output mode values between 0 and 32000 are sent to the module. if 1 = Invalid channel requested %I = 5 = 0 OK . The default range is 0–10V. ’1’ indicates module OK User Supply OK – Indicates when user supply is in specified limits. where input or output voltage values range from 0 to 10 volts. ’1’ above Input Ch #4 ALARM LO – ’0’ indicates value above limit. 24) %I Locations %I %I+1 Description Module OK – ’0’ indicates NOT OK. E2 COMMREQ Status Bits %I + 4 = 0 OK . ’1’ above The third eight locations (available for %I SIZE values 24) %I Locations %I+16 %I+17 %I+18 . Two of which are voltage ranges. ’1’ when User supply OK Reserved for future modules. Not used in this module. ’1’ below Input Ch #1 ALARM HI – ’0’ indicates value below limit. if 1 = Invalid alarm setting Low > High or Low or High < 0 in unipolar mode %I+2 – %I+3 %I + 4 – %I + 7 Second eight locations (available for %I SIZE values 16. The two current ranges are 4 to 20 mA. values between –32000 to 32000 are sent or received from the CPU over an input voltage range of –10 to +10V. 1 = Wire Broken (I modes only) Reserved for future modules. reads a ’0’ when User supply below specified limit. 24) %I Locations %I+8 %I+9 %I+10 %I+11 %I+12 %I+13 %I+14 %I+15 Description Input: Ch #1 ALARM LO – ’0’ indicates value above limit. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-97 . 16. The –10 to +10V range. and 0 to 20 mA. ’1’ above Input Ch #2 ALARM LO – ’0’ indicates value above limit.

32760 0. refers to the values that are valid. the module will truncate that value to 32000 before sending it to the DAC. Each channel has a low limit alarm value (ALARM LO) and a high limit alarm value (ALARM HI).32760 –32768.32760 10-98 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L .. Values can be entered in all high and low limit fields. The following table shows values sent from the Module back to the PLC for the Input channels Range 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Module Mode Voltage Voltage Current Current 0 – 32767 Sent values to CPU –32768 – 32767 0 – 32767 0 – 32767 The ALARM LO and ALARM HI data fields allow the user to enter values that cause ’alarm’ indications to be passed to the PLC.. If a user sends a value > 32000. Value checking should be done to determine if the ALARM LO and ALARM HI values are allowable for the appropriate RANGE. These alarm values cause %I points to be set as indicated in the tables above. Values entered without a sign are assumed to be positive..10 The following tables shows values sent from the CPU to the module for the Output channels: Sent values from CPU 0 to 32767 –32768 to 32767 0 to 32767 0 to 32767 Range 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Module Mode Voltage Voltage Current Current *Allowed Values 0 to 32767 – 32768 to 32767 0 to 32000* 0 to 32767 *The phrase. The allowable values are: RANGE 4–20 mA 0–20 mA 0–10V –10 – +10V Possible limit values 0. Allowed Values..32760 0. even though those channels may not be enabled.

Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location. in addition to a module ID and 16 bytes of hexadecimal data. 2. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-99 .10 Section 18: Configuring a Third-Party Module This section describes configuration of third-party modules. %AI. Press Other (F8) and then Foreign (F3) from the I/O Configuration Rack screen to display the list of third-party modules. and %AQ. %Q. The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured. To configure a third-party module on the I/O Configuration Rack screen: 1. Reference addresses can be configured for %I.

10-100 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . Parameter Module ID Reference Data Description A 1. 2. Soft Switch Data Note Horner Electric modules must be configured as Foreign and the Module ID must remain at the default value of 3. You must power-cycle the PLC for Horner modules to receive updated configuration data from the CPU. Refer to the Horner data sheet for Soft Switch Data which is required to configure the modules. Bytes 1 and 2 are binary values (00000000 to 11111111). The reference address parameters default to the next highest reference address. Note that configuration data can be stored to a Stopped PLC. Bytes 3 through 16 are byte hexadecimal values (00 to FF). The size parameters default to zero and are validated to be within the configuration memory limits and the configured CPU for the respective reference type. %AQ. and %R references. or 3-digit signed integer value representing a vendor module designation. %Q. Sixteen bytes of soft switch data can be configured. %AI. Enter the starting address and length for each of the %I. A range of valid vendor module IDs is used to allow validation. All data sheets are available on the GE Fanuc BBS (804) 978-5458 in the Horner Electric area under PLC files. Press the Enter key to display the detail screen.10 3. but configuration data will not be transferred to Horner modules like with GE Fanuc smart modules.

The reference view table is sorted in ascending order by user reference. GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-101 . %G. Mixed analog inputs and outputs (%AQI) are shown in both the %AQ and %AI tables. it is automatically removed from the table. When a module is configured. Modules configured from the rack screens have a reference address assigned to them. When a module is deleted. Data contained in the reference view table may only be viewed. Mixed discrete inputs and outputs (%QI) are shown in both the %Q and %I tables. such as overlapping. the reference view table is updated automatically. When the reference address of a module is changed. Editing may only be done on the detail screens. %Q. or %R).10 Section 19: Configuration Reference View The configuration reference view feature enables you to view tabular displays of configured modules with the same reference (%I. This feature can be helpful when assigning new reference addresses or resolving address conflicts. %AQ. Note The configuration reference view feature is not available for the CPU 211. %AI. with the lowest address listed first. it cannot be edited. it is automatically entered into the Reference View table for its reference type.

For example. The highest reference number configured is also displayed on the second line. On the second line. press the appropriate function key (F3 through F8) for the view screen you wish to display. after pressing Shift-F3 to select the reference view function.10 Displaying the Reference View Table The Reference View screen for the current module reference type may be displayed by pressing Reference View (Shift-F3) from any rack or detail screen in the I/O configuration rack function. an N (No) is displayed. The type and size of the module. I/OType Module Type Description If overlaps exist in the table. To display a different Reference View screen.rack. The PLC hardware physical address for the module. Each entry in the reference view table contains the following information: Field Reference Start – End PhysicalAddress Description The starting and ending reference addresses for the module. On a discrete reference view screen.slot). press Reference View (Shift-F3) from an input module detail screen. The description field. or Shift-F3 and then %I View (F3) from the detail screen of another reference type. the cursor will be positioned at that same module on the Reference View screen. 10-102 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . If there are no overlaps. TotalUsed on an analog reference view screen shows the total number of references configured. The first line of the display area clearly identifies the reference type of this view. each separated by a period (for example. Total I+Q shows the combined total. The input/output type which controls this module. a Y (Yes) is displayed on the second status line at the bottom of the screen. to display the %I Discrete Input Reference screen shown below. From the detail screen. Each entry in this column will contain the rack and slot information.

or the End key to go to the end of the table.g. To return to the Reference View screen. one single row at a time. When the Zoom (F10) key is pressed. in the previous screen. and the number of reference table entries is displayed in the TotalEntries field. Press the Home key to position the cursor at the beginning of the table. The cursor field will always include an entire module (e.. the 16-point input module with a starting reference address at 00001 is shown in reverse video. For example. the detail screen for this module is displayed. the first entry is the selected entry. press the Page Down key to view additional entries. press Reference View (Shift-F3). This key may be used to go directly to the detailed module screen for the module highlighted on the Reference View screen. and the total number of entries is five. Moving the Cursor Use the Up and Down cursor movement keys to scroll between rows of the Reference View table. If the cursor is at the beginning or end of the table. If all the configured modules in the PLC cannot be displayed on a single screen. a single row). GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-103 . or the Page Up key to view previous entries. Displaying the Detail Screen All of the Reference View screens have a Zoom (F10) function key displayed at the top of the screen.10 The position of the selected entry is displayed in the Entry field. In the following example. pressing these keys will scroll additional information not already displayed.

the High Speed Counter module is shown in reverse video. This key may be used to go directly to the Rack screen from the reference view function. the screen will display the main rack and highlight the slot of the module selected on the Reference View screen (in this example. In the following example. press Reference View (Shift-F3). 10-104 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware User’s Manual –September 1998 GFK-0466L . slot 4). When Rack (Shift-F1) is pressed from the Reference View screen. This module is physically located in slot 4 of the main rack.10 Displaying the Rack Screen All of the Reference View screens have a Rack (Shift-F1) function key displayed at the top of the screen. To return to the Reference View screen.

allowing the address to be adjusted. resulting in CONFIG INVALID. an asterisk (*) is displayed at the beginning of the row for both modules. Caution When adjusting reference addresses. If the overlap is fatal. To resolve the conflicting overlap. The detail module screen will be displayed. double asterisks (**) are displayed. be careful not to cause another overlap.10 Overlapping References Overlapping references may result in an invalid configuration. position the cursor on the reference address which must be changed and press Zoom (F10). GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-105 . When the reference address assigned to a module overlaps with another module’s reference address of the same reference type.

To access the CPU configuration functions. or view and change the PLC timeĆofĆday clock. For instructions. press CPU (F2) from the main menu. Storing the CPU Configuration to the PLC Use the program utility functions (in ONLINE mode) to store configuration data to the PLC.Chapter 11 CPU Configuration 11 section level 1 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1 Use the CPU configuration function to set the operating characteristics of the CPU. Display the CPU memory allocation. Then continue below. refer to chapter 8. Program Utilities. Assign a new value to the Series Ninety Protocol (SNP) ID. Function Key F1 F3 F4 Function PLC Time SNP ID Memory Limits Description View the computer's timeĆofĆday clock." GFKĆ0466L 11Ć1 . Page 11Ć2 11Ć4 11Ć5 These functions are described on the pages that follow.

If the programmer is in OFFLINE mode or is not communicating with the CPU. To also display the PLC date and time. place the computer in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. the following screen is disabled and the software displays a message indicating that the function is not available. If the PLCTIM (Shift-F1) key is pressed.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . Note When this screen is first displayed.11 PLC Date and Time To display the current date and time. Note The PLC timeĆofĆday clock function is only available with the Model 331 and higher CPUs and the 28Ćpoint Micro PLCs. the timeĆofĆday clock is read from the PLC. may change the timeĆofĆday clock. press PLC Time (F1). It is not available with the Model 311 or Model 313 CPU. Elapsed time is tracked by the Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software. such as CIMPLICITY 90ĆADS. Other devices. but the change will not be reflected on this screen until you exit and return to this screen. The current date and time for the programmer are displayed in all operating modes. asterisks are displayed in the Current PLC Values fields. 11Ć2 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual .

To use a different date and/or time: 1. Day from 01 to 31. Partial times must. Seconds from 00 to 59. entering minutes and seconds is optional. press Equal (F1). Minutes from 00 to 59. Note If hours are specified. The change in the currently highlighted field is sent to the PLC and will appear in the Current PLC Values fields on the screen. however. using colons between fields (HH:MM:SS). using dash (minus) characters between fields (MMĆDDĆYY). the computer must be in ONLINE mode and communicating with the PLC. Abbreviation HH MM SS Description Hours from 00 to 23. Year from 00 to 99. HH: or HH:MM: 3. 2. Press the Enter or Escape key. For example. end with a colon.11 Changing the PLC Date and Time To change the date and/or time shown for the PLC. To make the PLC date and time the same as the values shown for the computer. GFKĆ0466L Chapter 11 CPU Configuration 11Ć3 . Abbreviation MM DD YY Description Month from 1 to 12. Enter the new time. Enter the new date.

All previous releases allow up to 6 characters. 3. each CPU connected to the system must have a unique identification name consisting of 1 to 6 characters. $. To display the current SNP ID or assign a new name. +. asterisks are displayed in the Current SNP ID field. %. The current SNP ID name is displayed in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. Changing the SNP ID Name To change the identification of the PLC: 1. With 6. Note LowerĆcase characters may be entered using the HandĆHeld Programmer. GFKĆ0466L Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual .9) or special characters (-.6 and later CPUs. For multidrop configurations. The entry for the New SNP ID field can only be changed in ONLINE mode with communications. using the alphanumeric characters (A . =.11 SNP ID This SNP ID is for the Power Supply port only (see Note below). <. you have the option of using 1 to 7 characters. Press the Enter key to send this new name to the attached SNP device. _. @.September 1998 . 2. Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software supports only upperĆcase characters. &). press SNP ID (F3). enter all blank characters. however. 11Ć4 To clear the SNP ID. If the programmer is in OFFLINE mode or is not communicating with the CPU. The SNP ID is not required for peerĆtoĆpeer communications.Z. Enter a new name in the New SNP ID field. 0 . Note On Release 7 351 and 352 PLCs. #. Port 1 and Port 2 have their IDs stored in the configuration (see page 10Ć18 and following for 351/352 port configuration and each port's SNP ID. The first character must be alphabetic. >.

place the computer in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. The sum of CPU memory. %S. and %G). %M. These values are also set by the system and will change only when the CPU model number is changed. and %R). %AQ. %T. based on the model of the CPU. according to the particular CPU model is displayed in the CPU Memory Total field. all model 351 and higher CPUs have configurable %R. Configurable Memory Beginning with Release 9. The lower portion of this screen shows values for register references (%AI. The current memory allocations stored in the program folder are displayed in all operating modes.02. and %AI memory. The limits are fixed. These values are set by the system and will change only when the CPU model number is changed. %AQ. The upper portion of this screen shows the maximum values for discrete references (%I.11 PLC Memory Limits To display the reference and logic memory limits for the PLC. Refer to page 10Ć24 for information about this feature. To display the PLC values. GFKĆ0466L Chapter 11 CPU Configuration 11Ć5 . %Q. This screen shows the fixed memory limits for a CPU 331. press Memory Limits (F4).

Appendix A Programming Lesson A section level 1 1 figure_ap level 1 table_ap level 1 This appendix contains a tutorial for the programming software package. To access the Help screens. Adding ladder logic to the program. GFKĆ0466L AĆ1 . Starting the Lesson Before you can start. If that has not been done yet. Creating a program. the programming software must be installed and started. or ALTĆK for key help. These Help screens are loaded onto the hard disk of your programmer during the software installation procedure and are readily accessible. Entering a variable declaration. press ALTĆH for help. Exiting the programmer. Printing the program. Exiting the Programmer You can exit the programmer at any time by pressing the CTRLĆBreak keys. ALTĆI for instruction mnemonic help. please turn back to chapter 2. Operation. The lesson includes: D D D D D D Creating a program folder." for instructions. Help Screens Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software includes detailed Help screens.

you can display a similar screen from the Program Folder menu by pressing Folder (F8 or Shift-F8) from the Programming Software main menu and then Select (F1). When Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software is started (if the current default directory is an existing program folder). If the software is already running. AĆ2 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . a screen similar to the one shown below appears. you will create and use a program folder named LESSON.A Creating a Program Folder For this lesson.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L .

type LESSON. Press the Enter key. The following prompt will appear at the top of the screen: Program folder does not exist.A 1. The software will accept the name and display the Programming Software main menu. type in a name of seven characters or less for the folder. create new folder? (Y/N) 3. 2. To create the program folder. For this lesson. enter Y (Yes). The name of your new program folder (LESSON) should be displayed at the bottom of the screen. GFKĆ0466L Appendix A Programming Lesson AĆ3 . If the current default directory is not an existing program folder.

the nicknames listed in the variable declaration table are known throughout all blocks. Variable declarations are used to list nicknames and reference descriptions for the block. in a subroutine block. At the _MAIN block. This lesson shows how to enter a variable declaration.A Creating a Program Create a program in this program folder by pressing Program (F1). AĆ4 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . The following screen will be displayed: The screen shows a [VARIABLE DECLARATIONS] marker where variable declarations can be inserted. the nicknames are local and known only to that particular block. Some programs will contain no declarations.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L .

2. Press Insert (F1) to begin entering information in the Reference field. 3. GFKĆ0466L Appendix A Programming Lesson AĆ5 .A Entering a Variable Declaration To enter a variable declaration: 1. [VARIABLE DECLARATIONS] Press Zoom (F10) to display a table where variables for the program can be entered. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor block to the marker.

the software automatically changes your entry in the Nickname field to uppercase letters. 8. we will not use the Reference Description field. and press the Enter key. Note that when you press the Escape key. The cursor block moves to the Nickname field.September 1998 . Press the Escape key to save your entries and leave INSERT mode.A 4. Enter the nickname count. Press the Enter key. For this lesson. type %I33 or 33I. 7. For this lesson. 5. GFKĆ0466L Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . AĆ6 Press the Escape key again to return to the program ladder logic display. The cursor block moves to the Reference Description field. Enter the machine reference which the nickname will represent. 6.

Table functions Conversion functions. Data move functions. On the program screen. Press Insert (F1). Open space operations. Relational (comparison) functions. Control functions." For additional information. then. Note ALTĆE can be used to toggle the display of the status area at the bottom of the screen. For more information on the status area. Timers and counters. You can now insert ladder logic at the cursor location. 2. Press ALTĆE to remove the status information. refer to chapter 2. press ALTĆE again to display it again. The top line of the display shows these ladder logic functions: D D D D D D D D D D Relay contacts and coils. refer to the Series 90Ć30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual. Logical bit operation functions. Math functions. Screen Format. Program Editing." GFKĆ0466L Appendix A Programming Lesson AĆ7 . section 6.A Adding Ladder Logic to the Program To create logic for the example program: 1. All of these functions are described in chapter 3. GFKĆ0467. use the Down cursor key to move the cursor to the [END OF PROGRAM LOGIC] marker.

A 3. Press the Enter key. The reference appears in the command line at the top of the screen. Press F1 to start the rung with a normally open contact.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . AĆ8 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . Note that typing 1I has the same result. 5. 4. Type in %I as a reference for the contact. The reverseĆvideo block on the top line shows that the currently selected type of function is RELAY. The software automatically changes your entry to the correct format and moves the cursor to the next location in the rung.

AĆ9 GFKĆ0466L Appendix A Programming Lesson . 8. This represents register reference %R0017. the reverse video block moves to MATH. Then. Press Add (F1) to place an addition function in the rung. This represents the first of the two numbers to be added. Add a math function to the rung. At the top of the screen. Specify the first number to be added. 7. Use the Tab key to move the cursor to the first input parameter (I1). enter %R17 or 17R. press the Enter key.A 6. Press Math (Shift-F3) to select the math functions. The second line shows the types of math functions that are currently available. For this lesson.

AĆ10 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . the software knows it is a constant.A 9. 10. Because you did not type a % symbol before the number. Enter the number 4 as the value to be added. This represents the number to be added to the current value of the reference %R0017. Press the Enter key.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . Use the Tab key to move the cursor to the second input parameter (I2).

Q is an output reference which represents the location for the sum (output) of the addition. Enter %Q1 into the command line. This will be the reference for the coil. press ShiftĆF1 to select the relay functions. Use the Tab key to move the cursor block up to the top rung line. 12. and press the Enter key. Enter the reference %R18. To complete the rung by programming a coil. Use the Tab key to move the cursor to the next parameter (Q).A 11. 13. GFKĆ0466L Appendix A Programming Lesson AĆ11 .

September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . AĆ12 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . Select the control functions by pressing Shift-F9. This accepts the completed rung. press the Enter key (or the Plus (+) key on the numeric keypad). To accept the rung. and the cursor moves downward so you can insert another line of logic. 15. Press F5 to enter a coil at the end of the rung. or after selecting the function as shown earlier. Notice that the reference can be entered either before selecting the function as shown here. 16.A 14. Press Comment (F8) to add a comment to the program.

Press the Up Cursor Movement (or Up Arrow) key to move the cursor up to highlight the COMMENT instruction as shown below: GFKĆ0466L Appendix A Programming Lesson AĆ13 . Press the Enter key and then the Escape key to return these key functions to the top of the screen as shown below: 18.A 17.

Beginning at the [EOB] (End of Buffer) symbol. Press Zoom (F10).September 1998 GFKĆ0466L .A 19. 20. The program logic is replaced with a blank screen where you can enter text. enter the text shown below: AĆ14 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual .

continue on page AĆ23. continue below. Press the Escape key to save the comment and return the ladder logic display to the screen. 22. That completes the lesson. If you want to print this program now.A 21. GFKĆ0466L Appendix A Programming Lesson AĆ15 . You could display the comment again by pressing Zoom (F10) with the cursor located at the comment rung. Press the Escape key to return to the main menu. The following information pertains to subroutines. 23. If you want to practice creating a subroutine.

position the cursor on the DECLARATIONS] marker. To create a subroutine declaration.A Creating a Subroutine Block Subroutines are declared through the block declaration editor. AĆ16 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . [BLOCK 2. Then. Note Subroutine blocks are not available for the Series 90Ć20 PLC nor for Micro PLCs. press the Zoom (F10) key. 1.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L .

Then. GFKĆ0466L Appendix A Programming Lesson AĆ17 . For this lesson. press the Insert (F1) key.A 3. Enter the name of the subroutine on the command line. 4. type in the name SHIP_IT.

6. An explanation of up to 32 characters can also be entered at this time.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . AĆ18 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual .A 5. Type the description “THIS IS A BLOCK” on the command line. Press the Enter key.

and then press the Escape key. Note that the name of the block (BLK: _MAIN) in the status area of the previous screen has now been changed to the name of the subroutine block (SUB: SHIP_IT).A 7. The second method is to first press the Insert (F1) key. Then. press the Enter key. The first method is to type the name SHIP_IT and the description “THIS IS A BLOCK” together on the command line. Use the cursor keys to position the cursor on the subroutine block declaration named SHIP_IT. 8. Then. press Zoom (F10). Then. GFKĆ0466L Appendix A Programming Lesson AĆ19 . Both methods combine the previous step and this step into one operation. followed by the Escape key. press the Escape key. Press the Insert (F1) key. type the name and description together on the command line. There are two alternate methods of entering this information.

You can create logic for the subroutine block on this screen. AĆ20 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . and press the Enter key. You can now insert ladder logic at the cursor location. Type in the reference %I1. The software automatically changes your entry to the correct format and moves the cursor to the next location in the rung. Position the cursor on the [END OF SUBROUTINE LOGIC] marker and press Insert (F1). 10.A 9.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . Press F1 to start the rung with a normally open contact.

Because you have not previously entered the nickname PRD_CDE in the variable declaration table. 12. IN contains the first word of the data to be operated on. The software will enter the reference address in the logic and automatically move the cursor to the next parameter (BIT). press the Tab key. At the top of the screen. For this lesson. Use the Tab key to move the cursor to the parameter IN. you will also need to enter a reference address for the nickname now. After typing PRD_CDE on the command line. press Bit Test (F1) to insert a function in the rung that will test a bit within a bit string. The second line shows the types of bit operation functions that are currently available.A 11. Press More (F9) to display additional bit operation functions you can select. enter PRD_CDE on the command line. type %R1 for the reference address. Then. Then. Press Bit Operation (Shift-F5) to select the functions. the reverse video block moves to BITOP . Add a bit operation function to the rung. GFKĆ0466L Appendix A Programming Lesson AĆ21 .

Then. Press Relay (Shift-F1) to display the relay functions. Again. For this lesson.) Then. 14.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . BIT contains the bit number of IN that should be tested. the software will enter the reference address in the logic and automatically move the cursor to the next parameter (Q).A 13. press the Tab key. and press F5 to enter a coil at the end of the rung. you would not need to enter it here on the command line. Output Q is energized if the bit tested is a 1. type the reference %T1 on the command line. AĆ22 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . enter PICKBIT and the reference address %R2 on the command line. (If the nickname PICKBIT had previously been entered in the variable declaration table.

you should check chapterĂ9. The bit is part of string PRD_CDE. if you wanted to change the number of words to 5. In this subroutine. and the Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software has been set up to communicate with it. The LEN parameter represents the number of words in the string to be tested. 16. If you want to print this program now. That completes the example subroutine. If it is 1. However. Printing the Program If you have a printer connected to the computer. Chapter 9 explains printer setup in detail. output Q passes power flow and coil %T0001 is turned on. for example. but are easily changed if needed. 17. Print Functions. If the printer has not already been used to print Logicmaster 90 programs. GFKĆ0466L Appendix A Programming Lesson AĆ23 . as explained in chapter 9. F5. you can print the lesson program now. This is set at 1 and does not need to be changed for this lesson. request printing (F4. and F6)." before continuing. pause printing (F9). you would position the cursor on the function. and save the printer setup (F10). continue below. If that is not correct for your printer. Press the Escape key a total of four times to return to the main menu. 1.A 15. you can enter changes on the Printer Parameters screen. the bit at the location contained in reference PICKBIT is tested. To display the Print Function menu. whenever input %I0001 is set. The software assumes a default printer setup. enter 5 on the command line. and press the Enter key. This menu is used to set printer parameters (F1 and F2). Default printer setup values are supplied with the software. press Print (Shift-F10).

Enter a title for the printout. Enter the correct port designation. press the Enter key. Press Logic (F4) to print program logic. Use the Tab key to toggle the selection from N (No) to Y (Yes). or to a file. If the destination shown is not correct. use the Down cursor key to move the cursor to PORT.A 2. 6. The listing destination (lower part of the screen) allows you to direct the printout to a serial or parallel port. 8. AĆ24 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . Skip the subtitle entry. 3. (Listing CAN be paused or aborted). While the program is being printed. 5. The other entries shown are suitable for this lesson. move the cursor to: RUNG COMMENTS N". Ending the Lesson The program you created was saved when you exited the display/edit program function.. Define the printout content on the screen that appears. such as: PRACTICE PROGRAM. the software displays the message: Listing in progress . The illustration above shows the default selections for the printout options. so they can be skipped.. Both the title and subtitle entries are optional. 4. 7. To include the example rung explanation in the printout.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . When you are ready to print the program.

press CTRLĆBreak. Operation. GFKĆ0466L BĆ1 . as explained below. These Help screens are loaded onto the hard disk of your programmer during the software installation procedure and are readily accessible. Help Screens Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software includes detailed Help screens. the configuration software must be installed and started up. It is not necessary to complete all of the steps. D D To exit and save the lesson. The lesson includes: D D D D Creating a program folder. press ALTĆH for help. ALTĆI for instruction mnemonic help.Appendix B Configuration Lesson for the Series 90Ć30 PLC B section level 1 1 figure_ap level 1 table_ap level 1 This appendix contains a tutorial for the configuration software package. Configuring a 90Ć30 I/O module. press the Escape key. To exit without saving the lesson. or ALTĆK for key help. Configuring a Genius Communications Module. please turn back to chapter 2 ." for instructions. To access the Help screens. Configuring a CPU module. If that has not been done yet. Starting the Lesson Before you can start. You can exit and save the lesson at any time.

These files are stored in a subdirectory called a program folder. If the software is already running.B Creating a Program Folder Each program and its associated configuration are stored as many files. When Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software is started (if the current default directory is an existing program folder). a screen similar to the one shown below appears. you will use a program folder named LESSON. you can display a similar screen from the Program Folder menu by pressing Folder (F8 or Shift-F8) from the Configuration Software main menu and then Select (F1). For this lesson. BĆ2 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual .September 1998 GFKĆ0466L .

For this lesson. create new folder? (Y/N) 3. Press the Enter key. To create the program folder. The following prompt will appear at the top of the screen: Program folder does not exist. GFKĆ0466L Appendix B Configuration Lesson for the Series 90Ć30 PLC BĆ3 . 2.B 1. type LESSON. enter Y (Yes). The software will accept the name and display the Configuration Software main menu. If the current default directory is not an existing program folder. type in a name of seven characters or less for the folder. The name of your new program folder (LESSON) should be displayed at the bottom of the screen.

or the Up or Down cursor key. which is the first rack in the system. BĆ4 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . Use the Page Up or Page Down key. press I/O (F1 or Shift-F1 from the Folder screen) to display the beginning screen.B Displaying the Rack Configuration From the main menu. This screen shows the slots available in rack 0.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . to display the configuration of another rack.

2. for which you will enter an example configuration.B Configuring a CPU Module The left slot contains the power supply. GFKĆ0466L Appendix B Configuration Lesson for the Series 90Ć30 PLC BĆ5 . 1. Slot 1 contains the CPU module. its configuration may be changed. Press Zoom (F10) to display this detail screen. Press the Right cursor movement key once to highlight slot 1. Although it requires no additional configuration.

Then.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . press CPU (F1) to display the list of available CPU modules and their catalog numbers. When each of the parameters on the screen has been entered. 4.B 3. BĆ6 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . If you are configuring another type of CPU module. move the cursor to the desired module and press the Enter key. enter Y (Yes) after the prompt: REPLACE displayed module? (Y/N) 5. Press Rack (Shift-F1) or the Escape key to exit from the detail screen and return to the rack display.

Press Module 30 I/O (F1) to configure a 90Ć30 I/O Module in slot 2. you will configure slot 2 of the main rack for a 90Ć30 I/O module. Use the Right cursor key to highlight slot 2. 1.B Configuring a 90Ć30 I/O Module Next. 2. The software zooms into the detail screen. GFKĆ0466L Appendix B Configuration Lesson for the Series 90Ć30 PLC BĆ7 .

Select a module by moving the cursor to any entry and pressing the Enter key. select a Discrete Input module by pressing F1. A list of modules is displayed.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . 4. The types of modules that might be placed in this slot are shown by the key functions at the top of the screen. move the cursor to IC693MDL230 and press the Enter key. For this example. Its catalog number will appear in reverse video in the proper field.B 3. For this example. The following screen is displayed: BĆ8 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual .

6. 9. Notice that when you press the Down cursor key once. (A byte boundary is a number which is one greater than an integer multiple of 8. move the small cursor to the right in the Reference Address field by pressing the CTRL and Right cursor keys. First. 17. 7. you will purposely enter an incorrect I/O reference. Press the Escape key to return to the rack display. Enter 1 and then 6 as the last two digits. GFKĆ0466L Appendix B Configuration Lesson for the Series 90Ć30 PLC BĆ9 . Assign a beginning I/O reference address to this module. For this lesson. Now the reference address should look like this: Ref Addr : %I00016 This reference address is incorrect because it does not begin on a byte boundary. Move the cursor to: Ref Addr : %I00001 For this example. the rest of the entries on this screen need not be changed.B 5. the software automatically changes the reference address to the next lowest byte boundary: Ref Addr : %I00009 and the message The Reference Address has been adjusted to be byte aligned" will be displayed. Watch the reference address. for example. 1. or 25).

2. Press Genius (F2) from the I/O Rack Configuration screen. Then. BĆ10 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . 1.B Configuring a Genius Communications Module Next. press GCM (F2) to display the catalog number of the GCM.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . Use the Right cursor key to highlight slot 3. you will configure slot 3 of the main rack for a Genius Communications Module.

Press the Enter key to enter the catalog number shown in reverse video. Press the Escape key from the rack display (or CTRLĆU) to save the created configuration. GFKĆ0412. Press Rack (Shift-F1) or the Escape key to return to the rack display. 4. Complete the detail screen. For this example. GFKĆ0466L Appendix B Configuration Lesson for the Series 90Ć30 PLC BĆ11 . 5. 6. To do this. you must be familiar with information in the Genius Communications Module Manual. The following detail screen is displayed.B 3. we will assume the default entries are correct. This is the end of the lesson. Ending the Lesson The configuration created was saved when you pressed Rack (Shift-F1) or the Escape key to return to the rack display.

GFKĆ0466L CĆ1 . A menu of Series 90 PLCs and functions is displayed. type LM90 and press the Enter key.Appendix C Programmer Environment Setup C section level 1 1 figure_ap level 1 table_ap level 1 A default setup file is created during installation. at the MSĆDOS prompt. you must begin the setup steps detailed in this appendix by entering the Logicmaster 90 Setup Package" by pressing F9 from the Logicmaster main menu. Follow the steps below in order to edit the setup file. After completing the installation and restarting the computer as described. Only in special circumstances will this file need to be changed. not from within the programmer. Displaying the Setup Screen 1. Note Unlike the setup features discussed in chapter 6.

The following menu is displayed: CĆ2 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual .September 1998 GFKĆ0466L .C 2. Press Setup (F9) to select the setup function.

you may improve the appearance of your ladder logic printouts by enabling this table has no title this option. If your printer is capable of producing IBM compatible graphics characters. Then. It can be used to ENABLE the OFF-LINE/MONITOR/ONLINE keyswitch on the Workmaster I or original CIMSTAR I industrial computer. Enabling this value will disable the use of the Alt-M key to change Modes and will cause an error message on all current personal computers. or OFFLINE). press the Escape key to return to the Setup File Editor menu. use the Tab and ShiftĆTab keys to toggle each selection. This switch should normally be left at the factory default DISABLED position.. This switch is used to prevent screen flickering on early 1980's CGA (Color Graphic Adapter) video cards. This switch is not used for later EGA or VGA video cards. If you printout displays contacts or lines as capital letters. MONITOR. You must set this switch to NO.Choices for this field are YES or NO*. your printer does not support the IBM graphic characters.C Selecting Terminal and Printer Options To select terminal and printer options. CGA Video Snow Suppression IBM Compatible Graphics Printer * Default Selection When the selections are complete. GFKĆ0466L Appendix C Programmer Environment Setup CĆ3 . Selected fields are shown in reverse video on the display screen. Field Programmer Mode Keyswitch Description Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software may be run on machines with or withĆ out a keyswitch to specify the operational mode (ONLINE. Use the cursor keys to move from one option field to another. press Terminal Options (F1) from the Setup File Editor menu. Choices for this field are ENABLED or DISABLED*. The default ON* is for the original CGA cards while OFF can be used for later cards.

and screen border colors. enclosed in a box.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . The color values will be saved along with the other setup information.C Specifying Palette Colors If your personal computer has a color monitor and the video adapter is an EGA (Enhanced Graphics Adapter) or VGA (Video Graphics Array). The middle portion of the screen. background. When you are satisfied with your selections. press Colors (F2) from the Setup File Editor menu. As the values are changed. you may select the colors that will be used in the Logicmaster 90 displays. these color values will be used each time you start up the Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software. one key increases the value while the other decreases it. press the Escape key to return to the Setup menu. The numeric values stored in the palette registers control the foreground. The function keys are paired. CĆ4 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . provides a sample display using the currently selected colors. as described in the lower portion of the screen. You may wish to experiment with different color combinations. To specify palette colors. The values may be adjusted within the range 0 to 63. the colors in the sample display box are updated accordingly. special. The color values in the palette registers may be changed by pressing the function keys (F1 through F10).

Press the Escape key to return to the Setup File Editor menu. If the current selections are not correct. press Drives (F3) from the Setup File Editor menu. 1. If the drives shown on the left of your screen are correct. 2. GFKĆ0466L Appendix C Programmer Environment Setup CĆ5 .C Completing the Disk Drive Setup To complete the disk drive setup. press Default (F3). change them as instructed.

use the Tab and ShiftĆTab keys to toggle each selection.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . then press PLC Communications Options (F4)āĊāsee pages CĆ1-CĆ2 for more information. you must choose whether to communicate with the PLC through a WSI Board* or serial COM port. For information about the different memory configuration options. press PLC Communications Options (F4) from the Setup File Editor menu. This field shows the current selection for which area of memory the communications driver will load into. (Selected fields are shown in reverse video on the display screen. use the Down Arrow key to move the cursor to the Driver Memory Area" field. unlike the serial port setup discussed in chapter 6.C PLC Communications Options The PLC Communications Options screen enables you to select whether to communicate with the PLC through a WSI Board or serial COM port and to select one of four different interrupt lines on the PC backplane. Field Communication Device Description When both the WSI and standard serial communications versions of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software are installed. only the standard serial communications version of software is installed. read pages 6Ć6 and following in this manual. To display this screen.) Then. Remember. The default and recommended setting is automatic" as shown above. this lets Logicmaster determine which area of memory it is best to place the driver. the automatic" setting is recommended. Standard Serial COM Port Installed In the following example screen. CĆ6 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . As noted above. to access this screen you must enter Setup (F9) from the main menu which takes you to the Setup File Editor screen. Driver Memory Area * Default Selection Standard Serial COM Port and Driver Memory Area To change the serial COM memory area.

and the serial COM port was chosen as the communication driver. Note To change the selection of Communication Device. is only applicable if you have both the WSI and the Standard Serial COM Port installed. GFKĆ0466L Appendix C Programmer Environment Setup CĆ7 .C PLC Communications OptionsĊā Both WSI and Serial COM Port Installed In the following example." use the Tab and ShiftĆTab keys to toggle the selection between Serial COM port" and WSI. both the WSI and Standard Serial Communications versions of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software are installed." This. of course.

possible lockup of the Logicmaster software during startup. In a PC or PCĆAT computer. the WSI version of software is installed and selected. WSIB Interrupt Line * Default Selection Note When the WSI Version of Release 4 or later of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software is used on a Workmaster II industrial computer or other microchannel personal computer with a WS9A2 board. Note that the default value IRQ3 appears in the WSIB Interrupt Line" field. or IRQ7*. IRQ4. IRQ5. the interrupt line is displayed as IRQ3 and is not changeable. If you have the older WSIB1 Board.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . you must choose whether to communicate with the PLC through a WSI Board* or serial COM port. the selection of an interrupt line on the PLC Communications Options screen must be set to IRQ3. and failure to communicate with the PLC. If you have selected a serial COM port for communicaĆ tions. CĆ8 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . This option is available only if you are using the WSIB2 Board for communications. Field Communication Device Description When both the WSI and standard serial communications versions of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software are installed. this option is not displayed. Choices are IRQ3. and a WSIB2 Board was used. Failure to select IRQ3 will result in improper setup of the board. the WSI Board can be configured to use four different interrupt lines on the PC backplane.C PLC CommunicationsāĊ āWSI Version with Configurable Interrupt Request In the next example. This value can be changed by using the Tab and ShiftĆTab keys to toggle each selection.

After the file is saved. the software displays the message: Setup File saved successfully as c:\lm90\lm90. but a nonĆconfigurable WSIB1 Board was used. press the Escape key to return to the menu of Series 90 PLCs and functions. The interrupt line IRQ3 is displayed in the WSIB Interrupt Line" field and cannot be changed. there are no options to select.prd. Press any key to return to the Setup File Editor menu. Saving the Programmer Environment Setup To save the setup information in a file for future use. again the WSI version of software is installed. GFKĆ0466L Appendix C Programmer Environment Setup CĆ9 . Then press Save (F10) from the Setup File Editor menu. the screen is presented only to provide information. first press Esc (the Escape key) to return to the LOGICMASTER 90 Setup File Editor" screen. Again.C PLC CommunicationsāĊ āWSI Version with NonĆConfigurable Interrupt Request In this example. Then.

This appendix lists the mnemonics of the programming instructions for Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro programming software.e.Appendix D Instruction Mnemonics D section level 1 1 figure_ap level 1 table_ap level 1 In program display/edit mode. At any time during programming.. you can display a help screen with these mnemonics by pressing the ALT and I keys (i. you can quickly enter or search for a programming instruction by typing the ampersand (&) character followed by the instruction's mnemonic. hold down the ALT key and then tap the I key). For some instructions. a label. Function Group Contacts Instruction All Any Contact Normally Open Contact Normally Closed Contact Continuation Contact Any Coil Normally Open Coil Negated Coil Positive Transition Coil Negative Transition Coil SET Coil RESET Coil Retentive SET Coil Retentive RESET Coil Retentive Coil Negated Retentive Coil Continuation Coil Horizontal Link Vertical Link On Delay Timer Elapsed Timer Off Delay Timer Up Counter Down Counter &CON &NOCON &NCCON &CONC &COI &NOCOI &NCCOI &PCOI &NCOI &SL &RL &SM &RM &NOM &NCM &COILC &HO &VE &ON &TM &OF &UP &DN INT &CON &NOCON &NCCON &CONC &COI &NOCOI &NCCOI &PCOI &NCOI &SL &RL &SM &RM &NOM &NCM &COILC &HO &VE &ON &TM &OF &UP &DN DINT Mnemonic BIT BYTE WORD Coils Links Timers Counters GFKĆ0466L DĆ1 . or a location reference address. you can also specify a reference address or nickname.

D Function Group Math Instruction Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Modulo Square Root Sine Cosine Tangent Inverse Sine Inverse Cosine Inverse Tangent Base 10 Logarithm Natural Logarithm Power of e Power of x Equal Not Equal Greater Than Greater or Equal Less Than Less Than or Equal AND OR Exclusive OR NOT Bit Shift Left Bit Shift Right Bit Rotate Left Bit Rotate Right Bit Test Bit Set Bit Clear Bit Position Masked Compare Move Block Move Block Clear Shift Register Bit Sequencer Communications Request Array Move Search Equal Search Not Equal Search Greater Than Search Greater Than or Equal Search Less Than Search Less Than or Equal Convert to Integer Convert to Double Integer Convert to BCD-4 Convert to REAL Convert to WORD Truncate to Integer Truncate to Double Integer Mnemonic All &AD &SUB &MUL &DIV &MOD &SQ &SIN &COS &TAN &ASIN &ACOS &ATAN &LOG &LN &EXP &EXPT &EQ &NE &GT &GE &LT &LE &AN &OR &XO &NOT &SHL &SHR &ROL &ROR &BT &BS &BCL &BP &MCM &MOV &BLKM &BLKC &SHF &BI &COMMR &AR &SRCHE &SRCHN &SRCHGT &SRCHGE &SRCHLT &SRCHLE &TO_INT &TO_DINT &BCD4 &TO_REAL &TO_W &TRINT &TRDINT &TO_INT_BCD4 BCDĆ4 INT &AD_I &SUB_I &MUL_I &DIV_I &MOD_I &SQ_I DINT &AD_DI &SUB_DI &MUL_DI &DIV_DI &MOD_DI &SQ_DI BIT BYTE WORD REAL &AD_R &SUB_R &MUL_R &DIV_R &MOD_R &SQ_R Relational &EQ_I &NE_I &GT_I &GE_I &LT_I &LE_I &EQ_DI &NE_DI &GT_DI &GE_DI &LT_DI &LE_DI &AN_W &OR_W &XO_W &NOT_W &SHL_W &SHR_W &ROL_W &ROR_W &BT_W &BS_W &BCL_W &BP_W &MCM_W &EQ_R &NE_R &GT_R &GE_R &LT_R &LE_R Bit Operation Data Move &MOV_I &BLKM_I &MOV_BI &SHF_BI &MOV_W &BLKM_W &AR_W &MOV_R &BLKM_R Table &AR_I &SRCHE_I &SRCHN_I &SRCHGT_I &SRCHGE_I &SRCHLT_I &SRCHLE_I &AR_DI &SRCHE_DI &SRCHN_DI &SRCHGT_DI &SRCHGE_DI &SRCHLT_DI &SRCHLE_DI &AR_BI &AR_BY &SRCHE_BY &SRCHN_BY &SRCHGT_BY &SRCHGE_BY &SRCHLT_BY &SRCHLE_BY &AR_W &SRCHE_W &SRCHN_W &SRCHGT_W &SRCHGE_W &SRCHLT_W &SRCHLE_W_ ConverĆ sion &TO_BCD4_I &TO_REAL_I &BCD4_R &TO_REAL_DI &TO_REAL_W DĆ2 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual .September 1998 GFKĆ0466L .

D Function Group Control Instruction Call a Subroutine Do I/O SERāĆāSequential Event Recorder PID .SFC Reset End Rung Explanation System Services Request Master Control Relay End Master Control Relay Nested Master Control Relay Nested End Master Cntl Relay Jump Nested Jump Label Nested Label Mnemonic All &CA &DO &SER &PIDIS &PIDIN &SFCRES &COMME &SV &MCR &ENDMCR &MCRN &ENDMC RN &JUMP &JUMPN &LABEL &LABELN INT DINT BIT BYTE WORD REAL &JUMP &JUMPN &LABEL &LABELN GFK-0466L Appendix D Instruction Mnemonics D-3 .IND Algorithm SFCRES .ISA Algorithm PID .

(or Keypad -) Playback file n (n = 0 thru 9). Esc Zoom out. Change PLC RUN/STOP state. This information may also be displayed on the programmer screen by pressing ALT-K to access key help. F12 Toggle discrete reference. Display zoom level. Toggle status area. CTRL-← Cursor left within the field.Appendix E Key Functions E section level 1 1 figure_ap level 1 table_ap level 1 The following table lists the keyboard functions that are active in the Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software environment. CTRLĆEnd Next command line contents. Stop TEACH mode. Delete rung element. Toggle nickname/reference address. Clear field. Change programmer mode. Variable table window. Toggle the command line. Help. Vertical shunt. Key Sequence Description Keys Available throughout the Software Package CTRLĆBreak Exit package. Print screen. GFKĆ0466L EĆ1 . CTRLĆD Decrement reference address. Update disk. Enter Accept field contents. Go to the next operand field. Instruction mnemonic help. List directory files. (or Keypad *) Keys Available in the Program Editor Only Toggle text editor bell. Key help. CTRLĆHome Previous command line contents. Key Sequence ALTĆA ALTĆC ALTĆM ALTĆR ALTĆE ALTĆJ ALTĆL ALTĆP ALTĆH ALTĆK ALTĆI ALTĆT ALTĆQ ALTĆn Description Abort. Start TEACH mode. ALTĆB ALTĆD ALTĆS ALTĆX ALTĆN ALTĆU ALTĆV ALTĆO Special Keys Password override. Available only on the Password screen in the configuration software. Tab Change/increment field contents. CTRLĆE Display last system error. Horizontal shunt. CTRLĆU Increment reference address. ShiftĆTab Change/decrement field contents. CTRL-→ Cursor right within the field. F11 Override discrete reference. Accept rung. Next rung. Previous rung. Store block to PLC and disk. Keypad + Enter CTRLĆPgUp CTRLĆPgDn X | Tab Accept rung.

E The Help card on the next page contains a listing of the key help and also the instruction mnemonics help text for Logicmaster 90 software. EĆ2 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . This card is printed in triplicate and is perforated for easier removal from the manual.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L .

GFKĆ0466L Appendix E Key Functions EĆ3 .E Print side 1 of GFJĆ055C on this page.

E Print side 2 of GFJĆ055C on this page. EĆ4 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual .September 1998 GFKĆ0466L .

Appendix F User Command Menu F section level 1 1 figure_ap level 1 table_ap level 1 You can maintain a file of MSĆDOS executable commands outside of the Logicmaster software packages. A sample Comenu is shown below. 1. The MSĆDOS commands in this file can be used to run other software packages and perform routine MSĆDOS functions. Accessing the User Command Menu The MSĆDOS executable commands maintained in the COMENU. The file is stored in the Logicmaster home directory (normally \LM90 ) and can be edited using an MSĆDOS compatible text editor such as EDLIN.DAT file are accessed from the User Command menu called Comenu. such as disk maintenance. press Comenu (F8) from the menu of Series 90 PLCs and functions. each with a unique display label and associated MSĆDOS command. GFKĆ0466L FĆ1 . To display this menu.DAT contains a list of task entries. This command definition file named COMENU.

3. the User Command menu is displayed again. 4. ShiftĆTab. When the command is completed. 3. Lead and trailing space and tab characters around the label and command are ignored. However. or Backspace key to toggle the value of the field from No to Yes. After the pause. When a key is pressed. you may wish to pause after the execution of the command in order to study the display generated by the command. A carriage return and line feed may follow the equal sign if you want the command text to start on a separate line. 7. The label for the currently selected entry is shown in reverse video. Move the cursor to the desired command label and press the Enter key. the Page Up and Down keys. 4. use the cursor keys to scroll through the entries. If a pause is desired.DAT file A default command definition file is provided with the Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software. enter Y (Yes) in the Pause after command execution field. 5. The equal sign (=) must appear on the same line as the label. Press Exit (F10) or the Escape key to return to the menu of Series 90 PLCs and functions. 6. The MSĆDOS command string for the current entry is shown beneath the labels window for verification of the command text associated with the entry. 2. If more command definitions are available than can be displayed on the screen. Definitions may be entered in the COMENU. When F8 is pressed. GFKĆ0466L FĆ2 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . The menu program will clear the screen and submit the selected command to MSĆDOS for execution. The label may be any text up to 50 characters long. MSĆDOS will prompt you to press any key in order to continue. control will normally return immediately to the Comenu display. the Logicmaster startup program reads the Comenu definition file and creates a display similar to the one shown above. Blank lines and lines beginning with a semicolon are ignored. or the Home and End keys to select a command.F 2. The number of the currently selected command and the total number of commands are displayed beneath the labels window. Space. Subsequent screens are controlled by MSĆDOS and the selected command. Use the cursor keys. Labels which exceed this length are truncated.DAT file in either of two forms: <display label> = <DOS command string> or <display label> = <DOS command string> according to these guidelines: 1. or use the Tab. The default file provides example definitions and includes entries for performing disk formatting. Creating a COMENU.September 1998 .

Disk utilities: Format diskette A: Format diskette B: Check for lost files Delete lost file data Duplicate floppy A: = = = = = format a: /v format b: /v chkdsk /f del \file0*. Each command string is terminated by a carriage return and line feed. The command string itself should not contain any carriage returns. A maximum of 100 definitions can be processed.bat Application 2 = \appl\app2. This is the Comenu definition file. so that additional revisions may be made without leaving the LM90 shell. 6.F 5.chk diskcopy a: a: . Example Comenu Definition File The following is an example Comenu definition file used to create the Comenu shown above. The following entry may be used to start the editor on this file. This will allow you to modify the file even while remaining within the Logicmaster environment. Commands which exceed this length are ignored.bat GFKĆ0466L Appendix F User Command Menu FĆ3 . or by the endĆofĆfile. any additional definitions beyond the limit are ignored. . even if the string is longer than can be displayed on a single line. Blank lines and lines starting with a semicolon are ignored. Third-party packages: Cadepa grafcet package = \SWN\CADEPA . 7. Edit Comenu definitions = edit \LM90\COMENU. and the associated label is not displayed. . 8. . The command string is limited by MSĆDOS to a maximum length of 127 characters. You may include in the definition file a command for editing the definition file itself. User applications: Application 1 = \appl\app1. .DAT .

30.DEC at the DOS prompt. For example. You cannot rename a folder with a DOS copy because the folder name is contained in some of the files.Appendix G Files Created with Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Software G section level 1 1 figure_ap level 1 table_ap level 1 This appendix lists the files created with Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software. There is also a folder marker file.DEC file with DOS DEBUG or a file browser program. go to the folder directory with DOS and enter DEBUG _MAIN. Doing so may produce unexpected results. enter the letter D (for Display) followed by the Enter key. you can determine it by examining the _MAIN. which must be present in the folder directory. GFKĆ0466L GĆ1 . Examine the ASCII data shown at the right side of the screen. but do not know the folder name. Type Q (for Quit) and press Enter to leave DEBUG. The content of each file is briefly discussed. Create a directory with the same name as the folder and copy all the files to it and Logicmaster should now be able to access this new folder. None of these files is created during the INSTALL process. along with an explanation of when the file is created. The files are identified here by their extensions. MSĆDOS may only be safely used to copy an entire program folder to another program folder of the same name. If you have a copy of all files in a folder. Caution Do not use MSĆDOS to copy individual files from one folder to another or to delete files. At the dash (-) prompt. LMFOLDER. The folder name starts at the third character on the fourth line of the ASCII data.

.DAT files from earlier releases into one file. This file contains the text for comment rungs. . reference description. as well as other data including information about the coil usage and retentive sense of the %Q and %M references.PRG and . This file contains the nicknames.LH1 file is created during the first edit session.PDT file. and identifiers associated with a particular subroutine. reference descriptions. The .STE file is created during the first edit session. The . . This file contains the header from each .EXP .SYM and . .DEC file is created during the first edit session in the program.50 of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20 software.PRG file is created during the first edit session in the program. There is one . When Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Software Creates the File The _MAIN. The _MAIN.STE are new file extensions available with Release 3. There is one . They are created as a result of editing the program. When a subroutine is declared.PDT file is created.DEC file for the entire program.SDE files may be written to any MSĆDOS directory.G Files in the Program Folder The following files are associated with program logic. Note .LH1 .SDE GĆ2 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . its .SDE file is created when you press Write (F5). . Unlike the other files listed above. The _MAIN.NXP files from earlier releases into one file. The .PDT and . This file contains material that was selected and written to a program segment. The default destination is the current folder.STE combines . The .PDT combines .PDT File Description This file contains the program logic. or identifier is first defined within that subroutine.STE .September 1998 GFKĆ0466L .DEC This file contains program block declarations. Extension .STE file for a subroutine is created when a nickname.LH1 file per folder.EXP file is created when the first comment rung for the program is programmed.

Extension .RDF files contain information specifying the formats for reference data. A folder may contain up to two of these files. Extension .CFG and CPUCFG.RDF files are created when a reference format is specified for any of the fixed or mixed tables. The folder may contain these two files for each reference type. Extension . The configurator packages creates files to contain the configuration data. The _MAIN. (The %I reference is used here only as an example.CFG file contains information about the CPU configuration for the program. Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software creates files to contain this information. Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software creates files to contain this information. Teach files are used to store a sequence of keystrokes that may be repeated. Only reference types which permit overrides may have override files.IO file per folder. The _MAIN.CFG file contains inforĆ mation about the I/O configuration for the program. respectively.CFG files are created when any configuration data is first edited. When Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Software Creates the File The FIXED. The CPUCFG. Extension .RDF File Description The . There is only one .DEF file is created when Teach mode is entered and a file name is specified.DEF File Description This file contains keys that were pressed while in Teach mode. When specifying formats using the reference table function.I file contains initial values for %I references.CFG File Description The IOCFG. When Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Software Creates the File The .IO file is created when data is first entered for any %I reference.IO File Description The _MAIN.) When Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Software Creates the File The _MAIN.I . GFKĆ0466L Appendix G Files Created with Logicmaster 90Ć30/20 Software GĆ3 .IO file contains initial override data for %I references.I file per folder. There is only one .G When specifying values using the Reference table function. When Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Software Creates the File The IOCFG.I file is created when data is first entered for any %I reference.RDF and MIXED.

PSU.DAT file.PSU files are created when Save (F7) is pressed.) When Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Software Creates the File A .XOV GĆ4 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . respectively.FLD The LAST30.XOV file contains data for managing the .XRF File Description The . or inĆladder cross references.SET . and %WSI030. or inĆladder cross references.SET file is created when information on the Setup Printer Parameters screen is saved.XOV file is created when the all blocks option is selected while printing a listing containing cross reference tables. %PLC030.FLD file contains the name of the selected folder.G Files in the Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Home Directory For your convenience. The .XRF files. It is used as the default the next time the software executes.PSU or %COM2.PSU . GFKĆ0466L Extension . The SCRPRINT. When Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Software Creates the File The . specify that the files be deleted at the end of a cross reference listing by setting the Delete Files After Use field on the Cross Reference screen to Y (Yes). A PRINT.DAT File Description The modem auto dial feature writes information in the MODEM. The .FLD file is created when the first folder is created when booting the software. This file contains information that is specified using the Print functions.SET file is associated with information on the Select Screen Print Destination screen. Cross Reference Data Files Print function cross reference data files are not automatically deleted when you exit the print function. These files contain information that can be used as defaults on the Printer Serial Port Setup.PSU. A PRINT. Select SNP Connections. however. reference use tables.XRF file is created for each logic block when printing a listing containing cross reference tables. reference use tables. Print Program. Extension . section 3. Default file names are %COM1. This file is only used with Logicmaster 90Ć30 software.September 1998 . (Refer to chapter 9. . .XRF file contains cross reference data for a single logic block. Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software creates files that store information to be used as defaults the next time the software is booted. You can. A file name may be specified for these setup files. These files contain setup information that is specified using the ProgramĆ mer Setup functions.DAT file is created using Logicmaster 90Ć30 software when modem information is saved.PSU." for more information. and Programmer WSI Serial Port Setup screens. The PRINT.

the board may be bad. Re-install the WSI Board in the computer slot or try another slot. Use the Types (F10) function softkey to change the function type.SYS file.e.Appendix H Common User Errors H section level 1 figure_ap level 1 table_ap level 1 Error Message: “File System Error ” If the message. such as a Series 90–70 PLC rather than a Series 90–30. Error Message: “Read/Write PLC Initialization Aborted” If the message. To reboot your computer. the FILES allocated in the CONFIG. Error Message: “Constant Out of Range” If the message. the WSI Board may not be seated properly.SYS file: FILES=20 You must then reboot your computer in order to activate the new value for FILES in the modified CONFIG. FILES=30) and rebooting your computer. Exit to the top level Logicmaster menu and press Shift-F3 or Shift-F5 to select the proper type of PLC GFK-0466L H-1 . occurs while attempting to run Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. try changing the number to 30 (i. “File System Error”. If this line already exists. press CTRL-ALT-Delete. If this does not correct the problem. “Read/W rite PLC Initialization Failure”. Change or add this line to the CONFIG. you may be trying to enter hex constants into integer type functions.SYS file is probably too low. occurs.. Error Message: ”Invalid CPU” You have connected to a different type of PLC. “Constant Out of Range” occurs while trying to enter hexadecimal constants.

0 or higher) is not available for Logicmaster 90Ć30/20 software. Short pins 7 and 8 on a 9 pin cable(or 4 to 5 on a 25 pin cable) and the RTS/CTS should Pass. Press any key to exit the LB program. If you have a serial printer. For more information. FILES=20. If the message. CD \LM90) and type LB. try installing the software again. If the message. make sure that the attached printer supports the IBM graphics character set.4 Megabytes of hard disk space and an additional 600K bytes of temporary hard disk space if Lotus/Intel/Microsoft expanded memory (LIM 3." for a list of what you will need in order to run the Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software.SYS file. Go to the LM90 directory under DOS (i. Introduction.. Refer to chapter 1. If the INSTALL procedure still fails. LB. 1 or 2. make sure the appropriate serial port has been configured with the MSĆDOS mode command to match the printer settings. The unarchive program failed (PK1)". If both fail. then select the COM port you are using. Also. It should have the line FILES=20. in the LM90 directory is very helpful in checking serial ports. Printer Output is Garbled If the Specify Graphics Printer option was enabled in the Logicmaster 90 setup package. occurs. it may be a modem port. reboot the computer. Programmer Setup. A small loopback test program. try changing that to FILES=30. Serial Port Setup. left arrow to the CPU module and <F10> to zoom into the port settings. be sure the CONFIG. then F1 for I/O Config. Comm Driver Not Loaded" occurs." HĆ2 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . The unarchive program failed (PK11)".e. Check that the cable and converter are connected to the proper computer port and that the computer and PLC are using the same data rate and parity. If RTS/CTS 'passes' with no jumper wire. check the CONFIG. the INSTALL diskette is probably bad. Check the computer settings under F7 Programmer Mode and Setup.H Error Message: "No Communications" This message is displayed when you press Alt-M to go into Monitor or On-Line Mode and Logicmaster fails to communicate to the PLC. Unplug the far end of the RSĆ232 cable and short pins 2 and 3 with a paper clip or wire and the TD/RD (Transmit/Receive) should Pass. Check the PLC settings by selecting the Configuration package with F2.. try the other COM port. i. If it does. Error Message: Comm Driver Not Loaded" If the message. and try the INSTALL procedure again. Cannot Install the Software You must have at least 1. The MSĆDOS mode command should be used to configure the serial printer port before starting up the Logicmaster 90 software package. you may be trying to run the standard serial communications version of Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software without the correct version of MSĆDOS and/or without a memory manager.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L .e. see chapter 6. occurs. Both TD/RD and RTS/CTS signals must pass for Logicmaster to communicate. then F4 PLC Comm.SYS file has files set to at least 20.

SYS files to remove any device drivers or Terminate and Stay Resident (TSR) programs in order to free more RAM. delete some files from your virtual disk. Save the modified version. In addition.SAV to preserve the original version of the CONFIG. remove bus 16" from the statement.SYS file. System Software Error ID: 0000 EX: 0000 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software does not have enough available RAM to perform the operation. A warm boot (i.SYS file can be used for it and for Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software. A good method for managing this technique is to use a separate batch file to copy each version when it is needed from its permanent. Loading . the Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software displays the error message. The computer backplane clock rate for the WSI Board slot should not be greater than 8 mHz.SYS when DOS is booted can prevent the expansion bus from performing 8Ćbit data transfers with the Work Station Interface (WSI) Board. “Error detected in WSI Board.e. press any key." To correct the problem. To clear the busy message.. Power the computer off and on. GFKĆ0466L Appendix H Common User Errors HĆ3 .g. different versions of the CONFIG.LM) to CONFIG. . certain device drivers installed by CONFIG. . Error Message: Error Detected in WSI Board" Some users of IBMĆclone computers have experienced difficulty using Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro software. CONFIG. If some other application program requires the unmodified form of the device driver. Examine the CONFIG.sys bus 16 device=c:xxx/sys bus 16 device=c:xxx." during initialization. 3. When this situation occurs.H Error Message: Port/File Access Denied" Attempting to print logic to a virtual drive which is full results in the error Port/File access denied. Copy CONFIG.BAT and CONFIG. 2. 4. To correct the problem for a COMPAQ computer: 1." will continue to be displayed after a load operation fails because of incompatible files. distinctive file name (e. Using a text editor such as EDLIN. 5. Check the AUTOEXEC.SYS file (type CONFIG.SYS) for a DEVICE statement similar to one of these statements: device=xxxxxx. pressing CTRLĆALTĆDelete) will not reset the hardware for correct 8Ćbit operation.SYS to CONFIG.sys <other parameters> bus 16 where <other parameters> represents any number of words or numbers separated by spaces. Busy Message Displayed After Load The message..SYS.

. If the WSI Board is installed in a computer where COM2 is used by an application which requires the use of interrupts (e. The WSI Board uses the I/O port addresses 310 hex to 313 hex. The WSIB2 Board has a softwareĆconfigurable interrupt request line. The WSI Board uses the MSĆDOS memory addresses ranging from CE00:0 to CE00:1FFF. Other applications must avoid this address range. serial mouse). Refer to the information on PLC communications options in appendix C. It may be possible to configure the application to use a different address range than that of the WSI Board. then neither the WSI Board nor the COM2 application will operate properly. Programmer Environment Setup. Other applications must avoid these port addresses in order to prevent conflicts.g. Consult the documentation for the conflicting application for more information. for information on moving the interrupt request line to one that does not conflict.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . IRQ3 is assigned to the COM2 serial port and is also used by other communication adapters.H Trouble Communicating with the Series 90Ć30 or Series 90Ć20 PLC Error Message: Error Detected in WSI Board Port" Error Message: Error Loading Code into WSI Board" Certain boards installed in the computer can conflict with the interrupt used by the Work Station Interface Board. The WSI Board uses the expansion bus IRQ3 interrupt request line. HĆ4 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual .

Comment lines may appear anywhere within the SNF. IĆ1 D D D GFKĆ0466L . Exporting an SNF from the Variable Declarations Table gives you the ability to use the exported file with CIMPLICITYtand third party operator interfaces. If you are planning on importing a file into the Variable Declarations Table as discussed on page 3Ć41. General SNF Format Rules D Shared Name Files shall have a default extension of . Comment lines begin with the Comment Line Sequence ## (i. you must ensure that your file is in SNF format. The recommended naming convention is that the filename be the same as the source file (folder) from which the SNF is generated. The Shared Name File (or SNF) format is an extension of the industryĆstandard Comma Separated Variable (CSV) format.e. Importing an SNF into the Variable Declarations Table gives you the ability to define nicknames ahead of time in a spreadsheet program.. Note The ability to import and export CSV files is a Release 6 or later feature.0 and later uses an extension of the industryĆstandard Comma Separated Variable (CSV) format called Shared Name File (SNF) format. but may not occur inside a record. Records. Logicmaster 6.Appendix I I Variable Declaration Table Import/Export Using Comma Separated Variable (CSV) Format section level 1 1 figure_ap level 1 table_ap level 1 Comma Separated Variable (CSV) Format and SNF Format To import to and export from the Variable Declaration Table. Comment lines begin with the double pound sign (##") character sequence as the first nonĆblank character. except for Header Section records (see below). When exporting Variable Declarations as discussed on page 3Ć43. Logicmaster places the files into SNF format (see page 3Ć41 for more information on SNF format).SNF". Records continued over several lines may not have intervening comment lines. Comments and Records. do not begin with the Comment Line sequence. SNF files contain two types of information. two consecutive pound characters as the first nonĆblank characters in the line).

Field Names Section Rules D D D D D The Field Names Section contains one and only one record. D All sections are made up of comma separated variable (CSV) records. but they need only interpret and use the ones they recognize. The Header section contains structured comments which provide some context for the file. IĆ2 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . lines of text followed by continuation lines must end in a nonĆquoted comma). Individual fields may be enclosed within double quotation marks. surround the field with quotation marks. Each CSV record is composed of a list of fields separated by commas. Records may span one or more lines of text in an SNF file. A line of text in an SNF file ends with the new line character ( or character sequence) appropriate for the operating system.. All header section entries must be accepted by any package using the SNF format. The maximum line size is 2000 characters. PT_ID must be the first field in the Field Names section. and the fields must be in the same order in each record. Any line beginning with a double colon sequence (::) is considered a continuation of the record started on the previous line. The last line of text in the file must include a new line character. Field Names are case insensitive. Blank lines are not allowed. but empty fields must be delimited with commas like all other fields. The Field Names Section begins with the first nonĆcomment line in the file.e. The maximum number of fields in a record is 100. Fields must be contained within a single line. The maximum record size is 2000 characters not counting continuation characters and new line characters. Fields in records may be left empty. and their trailing comma delimiter must follow the field on the same line as the field (i. All records in a section must include the same fields.I D The SNF will consist of three sections which must occur in order: (1) an optional Header section (2) a required Field Names section (3) a required Data section. To include leading or trailing spaces in a field. Spaces surrounding the comma delimiters in a record are ignored. D D D D D D D D Header Section Rules D D D Header section records may not span multiple lines.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . and fields that contain commas must be enclosed within quotes. No empty field are permitted in the Field Names section.

this field contains the date the program was last updated. _MAIN or #&&DelVarDecl. The Header section has four keywords currently defined." (I/O" is the only value currently implemented. 31ĆMAYĆ1994. the ADDR field must be present and not empty. The Header Section This section of the SNF contains fields which define the context of the SNF.I Data Section Rules D D D D D D D The Data Section follows the Field Names Section. The Data Section begins on the first nonĆcomment line after the Field Name section and continues to the end of the file. Block1. PT_IDs in the Data Section are case insensitive. The posĆ sible values for this field are as follows: I/O" and I/O_WITH_FAULTS. If the PT_ID field is empty. SLIDE or #&&DelVarDecl. EXAMPLES #&&DelVarDecl. This identifies what type of data is contained within this SNF. The possible values are ALLBLOCKS" to delete the Variable Declaration of all blocks. Empty fields are permitted in the Data section. _MAIN" to delete the program's global Variable Declaration. ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ##&&Creator ##&&CreateDate ##&&ProgDate ##&&FileType ##&&DelVarDecl This identifies the program which specified the content of this SNF file. I/O WITH FAULTS" is reserved for future reference. If Logicmaster is creating the SNF file. Predefined Keywords in the Data section are case insensitive. but they must be delimited by commas. or 11ĆSepĆ1994 The date of the creation of the program with which this SNF file is associated. Other values for this field will not cause an error. The date format shall be in the format (d)dĆmmmĆyyyy".0 uses as a default when creating a CSV files. This specifies the date when this SNF file was created. 4ĆNOVĆ1986. or the name of the desired blocks can be listed (as in the second example shown below).) This identifies the blocks for which the Variable Declaration Table should be deleted before the import occurs. Three possible values generated by GE Fanuc programs are as follows: CIMPLICITY" or LOGICMASTER". The format of numbers shall be whatever Excel 5. It is expected that additional keywords will be defined by GE Fanuc and in addition customers will wish to add their own keywords. for example. _MAIN. ALLBLOCKS GFKĆ0466L Appendix I Shared Name File (SNF) Format IĆ3 .

block_name” (the quotation marks are required). If the block name exceeds the seven (7) character maximum. For those field names refer to the Cimplicity documentation. DESC Input1. An ASCII string describing what data this point represents. In addition. %Q2. IĆ4 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual . Second input" Output1.) *There are additional field names used by Cimplicity. if the specified block name does not exist. The field name order as shown in the above table is the preferred order. use the following syntax. “reference_address. the import will abort. Input1 and Output1 will be defined in the variable declarations for _MAIN while Input2 and Output2 will be defined in the variable declarations for BLOCK1. ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Field Name PT_ID ADDR DESC Note: Cimplicityr recognizes these field names plus field names specified in the Cimplicityr Systems Import/Export Utility Operation Manual (GFKĆ0923)."Second output" If the import of this file is initiated in _Main.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L . %I2. the import will be aborted. The following example demonstrates the syntax needed: PT_ID. %I1. ADDR. What type of data is being described by this point Nickname Reference Reference Description No Logicmaster equivaĆ lent (I/O is the only valid entry at this time. Additional fields which are not supported by the importing program will be ignored without error. BLOCK1". Meaning of This Field Logicmaster Equivalent PT_TYPE Tag Name of this point * A mnemonic reference to a PLC memory location. %Q1.I The Field Names Section This section of the SNF is used to specify the names of the fields in the Data section. First input" Input2. Specifying a Block Other Than _MAIN To specify a block in which to place the variable declaration during import. The field names recognized by Logicmaster are shown below. The order of the fields in the field names section is the order to be used in all records of the Data section. First output" Output2. BLOCK1". and the order of these named fields.

REBLIV.%AI0001.Allowable over.analog input.%AQ0001.%Q00001. BLIVET.I Example of Variable Declaration Table VARIABLE DECLARATION TABLE REFERENCE ––––––––– –––––––– %I00001 %I00002 %Q00001 %R00001 %AI0001 %AQ0001 NICKNAME REFERENCE DESCRIPTION –––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SNERT I2 BLIVET TIC101 REBLIV DIVOT Starting point Begin Allowable over Temperature Setpoint 101 Analog input Output Example of an SNF File with All of Variable Declaration Table Selected for Export ##&&Creator.2-June-95 ##&&FileType. TIC101.%I00001. GFKĆ0466L Appendix I Shared Name File (SNF) Format IĆ5 .Output.Temperature Setpoint 101.ADDR.PT_TYPE SNERT.Begin.Starting point. LOGICMASTER ##&&CeateDate.I/O PT_ID.%R00001.DESC. the fields will be the same as the first example shown above. Example of an Excel Spreadsheet Which Can Be Saved as a CSV for Import into Logicmaster ##Example of Excel spreadsheet which can be saved as a CSV file to be imported ##&&Creator ##&&CreateDate ##&&FileType PT_ID SNERT Excel 2ĆJuneĆ95 I/O ADDR %I00001 %I00001 %R00001 DESC Starting point PT_TYPE I2 TIC101 Begin Temperature Setpoint 101 Analog input Output REBLIV DIVOT %AI0001 %AQ0001 ##PT_ID is the equivalent of Nickname ## ADDR is the equivalent of Reference After saving this spreadsheet as a CSV file and then importing it into the Variable Declaration Table. DIVOT.%I00002. I2.

INT AGIT_SC.%AI0001.Reactor Temp.%AI0003.INT PH_CB1B.BulkAddPhase Control Reg #2.%AQ0002.%R00026.BCS initialization.I Longer Example CSV (SNF) File The following is an example of the CSV format (i.Steam Flow Rate. AGIT_SP.INT PHSTS_1.%I00008.BOOL W_HATCH.%Q01002.Wet Hatch Status.BOOL A_RESET.Agitate Time (seconds).Alarm Acknowledge from BCS..INT PHCTL1A.INT PHCTL1B.Agitate Speed Command.Next Batch.PT_TYPE D_HATCH.BOOL AGIT_ON.Agitate Speed Setpnt.%AI0002.%R00021.21–FEB–1995 ##&&FileType.%R00011.%R00014.%R00025.INT ST_V_PO.%R00013.Reactor Temp Setpnt.BOOL BCS_INT.ADDR.INT PH_CB1A.%Q01000.BOOL NEXT_BT.INT BK_WGT.Steam Valve Status.ReactorLiquid Level.%I00002.BulkAddPhase Control Reg #1. SNF format) created by Logicmaster.%R00027.%AQ0001.INT R_TEMP.%M01002. If you had created this in a spreadsheet program.INT AGIT_S.%R00023.BulkAddPhase Ctl But Reg #1.Steam Valve Position.Agitator Status.%Q01001.%M01001.September 1998 GFKĆ0466L .I/O PT_ID.INT AGIT_T.INT BULK_AD. This example was exported from Logicmaster as noted in the first four lines.%R00022. STEAM_O.BulkAddPhase Ctl But Reg #2.Bulk Add Measure (lbs).INT LIQ_LEV. ##&&Creator.%R00012.INT IĆ6 Logicmaster 90Ć30/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual .17–MAR–1995 ##&&ProgDate.%R00024.%I00001.BOOL ALM_ACK.Bulk Ingred Valve Status.DESC.INT INTL_R1.BulkAddPhase Intlock Reg. The double pound sign and double ampersand denotes commented lines.e.BulkAddPhase Status Reg.Bulk Added Weight.Alarm Reset.INT ST_F_RT.%AI0004.INT TEMP_SP.Dry Hatch Status. BULK_ON.Agitate Speed.LOGICMASTER ##&&CreateDate. it would look the same without the commented lines.%M01003.

3Ć10 Block declarations. 2Ć2 CCM ONLY mode. 10Ć80 configuring a single axis APM. 10Ć73 B Backing up program folders. 4Ć14 ASCII display format. selecting a folder created for another CPU. 4Ć13 ASCII string entry. 3Ć64 PERMEDITLOCK. 3Ć30 Annotation files. Configuring. 10Ć62 BCDĆ4. 1Ć3. 10Ć6 Alphanumeric display coprocessor modĆ ule. 10Ć26 power supply. 3Ć63 VIEWLOCK. 5Ć17 block's symbol table size. 3Ć90 AUTOEXEC. 3Ć30. 2Ć13 AutoĆnext highest reference. 5Ć17 block checksum. 10Ć94 Analog Output. 10Ć62 Base rack. selecting the. and 363 and CPU modules. 10Ć17 351 CPUs. 3Ć50 Bumpless run mode store function. 3Ć104 bumpless run mode store function. 2Ć24. 10Ć29 Base selection for the CPU 211. 10Ć72 IndexĆ1 . 3Ć60. 10Ć74 configuring a twoĆaxis APM. 10Ć61. 10Ć74 configuring a twoĆaxis APM. 8Ć3 APM APM commands. 2Ć29.Index Numbers 350 and higher CPU modules. 10Ć33 BASIC mode. 10Ć80 configuring a single axis APM. 5Ć17 block's explanation text size. 3Ć18 Block edit. 10Ć94 Annotation. 352. 10Ć82 Address overlap. 5Ć4 ADC module. 3Ć30 reference description. 3Ć15 Binary display format. 10Ć82 ALT keys. 8Ć7 351. 5Ć17 block's logic memory size. 10Ć69 CCM/PROG mode. 3Ć60 displaying the lock status of the subrouĆ tine. 3Ć60 permanently locking a subroutine. 4Ć13 Bit. 3Ć60 Block memory usage. 3Ć104 Block locking feature.BAT file. conĆ figuring the SNP ports. 10Ć73 ASCII characters. 3Ć30 nickname. 5Ć17 block name. EĆ1 Analog Combo. configuring an Analog Combo. 3Ć104 Byte. 10Ć70 CCM/SNP mode. 1Ć7. 3Ć60. 10Ć62 CCM/RTU mode. 3Ć15 A Access level. 7Ć2 comment. 10Ć18 351/2 CPUs. 7Ć8 BAS/CCM mode. 3Ć96 Axis positioning module APM commands. 3Ć64 EDITLOCK. 3Ć15 Bit operation functions. 5Ć17 Borders. 3Ć62 PERMVIEWLOCK. 10Ć90 Analog. High Density. 10Ć73 configuring an APM. configuring the Run/Stop switch. 10Ć73 GFKĆ0466L C Cabling. 7Ć4 configuring an APM. 4Ć5 Auto dial feature. storing a program created for a 341 or lower CPU to a 351 CPU. 3Ć62 unlocking a subroutine. 2Ć4 Automatically inserting references.

3Ć46 Comment. 6Ć10. 7Ć12 CMM configuring a CMM. 6Ć10. 10Ć70 RTU/CCM mode. 10Ć67 selecting the configuration mode. 3Ć48ć3Ć50 Comments. creating footers in listĆ ings. 10Ć24 Configuration CPU. 10Ć67 CCM ONLY mode. 3Ć43 guidelines for format and field names. 1Ć4 exiting the software. 10Ć103 displaying the rack screen. 1Ć4. 10Ć72 SNP/RTU mode. IĆ1 exporting variable declarations. 10Ć67 selecting the configuration mode.SYS file. 2Ć4 Configurable memory limits. 10Ć104 overlapping references. GĆ3 CGA video snow suppression. 6Ć5 COM2. 10Ć71 SNP/CCM mode. CĆ4 COM1. 10Ć70 RTU/SNP mode. 10Ć70 RTU/SNP mode. 3Ć92 MULTIPLE. IĆ1 importing variable declarations. 9Ć16 Colon. FĆ1 Comm driver not loaded error. 10Ć1 Configuration lesson. 6Ć8 expanded memory. 3Ć93 Coil Reference Printing. double. 10Ć67 CCM ONLY mode. 10Ć70 RTU/CCM mode. 11Ć1 I/O. 6Ć13 CONFIG. 3Ć93 SINGLE. 10Ć70 CCM/SNP mode. 3Ć46 printing a title and subtitle. 1Ć9. 10Ć68 Coil checking. BĆ1 Configuration of 350 and higher CPUs. 2Ć7 Clearing PLC memory. 10Ć72 SNP ONLY mode. 10Ć101 detail screen. 6Ć23 port requirements. 10Ć72 configuring a TCP/IP Ethernet module. 6Ć4.Index CFG file. 3Ć31 Colors. 6Ć7 Communications driver load order. 10Ć72 RTU ONLY mode. 6Ć4. rung. 3Ć51 Communications driver. HĆ2 Comma Separated Variable (CSV) format. 6Ć6 communications driver load order. 8Ć11 Clearing program folders. BĆ1 CPU configuration. 10Ć68 Compliant memory managers. 3Ć46 adding text. 10Ć18 Configuration of 351 and higher CPUs. 6Ć8 Communications module configuring a CMM. 10Ć72 modes of configuration. rung. 3Ć93 WARN MULTIPLE. 10Ć105 reference view table. 10Ć102 Configuration software. 2Ć18 GFKĆ0466L . 10Ć7 CHKDSK (MSĆDOS) command. 10Ć69 CCM/RTU mode. 6Ć23 port requirements. 10Ć70 CCM/SNP mode. 3Ć41 Command line. palette. 10Ć69 CCM/RTU mode. 10Ć63 modes of configuration. 1Ć9. 10Ć72 SNP ONLY mode. 6Ć7 extended memory. 3Ć51 starting a new page of comments. 3Ć30 COMMENT instruction. 2Ć28 Comment. 10Ć21 Configuration reference view. 2Ć21 accessing the print configuration screen. 3Ć47 creating borders. 3Ć41. userĆconfigurable memory. 10Ć72 RTU ONLY mode. Memory protection. CĆ3 Changing the configuration of a slot. 9Ć19 configuration lesson. 10Ć24 Configuration of 364 CPUs. TCP/IP EtherĆ net configuration. 6Ć5 Comenu. 3Ć51 inserting a rung comment. 10Ć72 SNP/RTU mode. 6Ć7 MSĆDOS memory areas defined. 10Ć71 SNP/CCM mode. 6Ć7 MSĆDOS system memory. 3Ć50 IndexĆ2 creating longer comments.

configuring the. selecting a different CPU module. 6Ć16 Conversion functions. 9Ć12 printing separate tables or one single table. 1Ć4 DEC file. 2Ć21 Configurations. 11Ć4 storing the CPU configuration to the PLC. GĆ3 Default configuration. 6Ć18 Configuring memory for the communicaĆ tions driver. EĆ1 Current program. 10Ć31 CPU configuration. 3Ć15 BCDĆ4. tested. 9Ć14 printing separate reference use tables or one single table. 1Ć4 PLC memory limits. 7Ć4 Cross references. 3Ć12 Copying configuration. 1Ć5 main menu. 10Ć2 Default reference table format. 9Ć12 specifying a directory to store cross refĆ erence data files. 9Ć18 printing configuration. 11Ć1 system response to faults. 1Ć4 SNP ID. 2Ć24. 6Ć6 Conflicts. 4Ć18 Delete column function. status of. 10Ć6 Copying program folders. 3Ć13 Conventional memory. 10Ć9 Creating a program. 3Ć15 Data zoom feature. 3Ć15 bit. 3Ć16 Date. 3Ć88 DEF file. 9Ć12 instruction symbols. 7Ć14 Copying program folders to diskettes. 3Ć73 Control functions. GĆ2 Decrement reference address. 11Ć4 fault display and clearing. 2Ć28 Cutting selected rungs. 9Ć11 print coil references. 10Ć13 CPU. 11Ć1 changing the PLC date and time. 1Ć3. 3Ć5 CPU 211. 7Ć15 Copying program folders to the hard drive. 3Ć15 real. 3Ć78 D DAT file. IĆ1 CSV format. 1Ć4 PLC date and time. HĆ1 Continuation coil. 1Ć10 starting the software. 11Ć3 changing the SNP ID name. 1Ć4. 3Ć11 Data types. 2Ć21 I/O configuration. 3Ć41. 3Ć85 IndexĆ3 . 9Ć10 parameters. 9Ć13 GFKĆ0466L including as part of the ladder logic. 2Ć17 version number. 11Ć5 PLC time and date. 9Ć10 deleting files after printing. 2Ć21 menu tree. 9Ć11 including explicit and/or implicit cross references in the table. configuring the. port usage. 3Ć73 Continuation contact. 3Ć43 guidelines for formatting and field names. 3Ć15 int. 1Ć6 Creating program folders. 9Ć13 CSV and SNF formats. IĆ1 importing variable declarations. 6Ć12 Constant out of range error. 1Ć4 CPU module. 9Ć16 print reference tables. 3Ć15 byte. 11Ć2 changing the PLC date. 11Ć2 PLC memory allocation. configuring the. 11Ć3 Date.Index functions. PLC. 2Ć22 print configuration. 7Ć14 Counters. 3Ć15 word. 3Ć41 CTRL keys. IĆ1 exporting variable declarations. GĆ4 Data move functions. 9Ć11 selecting reference types for printing cross references.

6Ć3 Direction of the search. 1Ć6. 3Ć99 Discrete reference tables. 3Ć105 variable declaration table. 4Ć10 using overrides. 3Ć103 implicit search. 3Ć52 Display formats. 3Ć86 Deleting program folders. CĆ5 Display all mode. 3Ć18 quick search for a coil. 3Ć78 delete column. 3Ć85 delete instruction. 4Ć13 binary. 3Ć106 substitutions. 3Ć114 changing the display mode. 3Ć52 coil checking. 3Ć104 open space functions. 3Ć92 forcing and overriding discrete referĆ ences. 3Ć76 writing selected rungs to a file. 3Ć1 autoĆnext highest reference. 1Ć7 EDITLOCK. 7Ć1 IndexĆ4 E Editing a program. 3Ć73 cutting selected rungs. 3Ć83 online editing/monitoring. 6Ć12 Displaying port settings. 3Ć15 Direct connection. 3Ć15 Drawer. 3Ć57 substitution groups. 3Ć76 editing a rung. 3Ć96 block edit. 4Ć13 timer/counter format. 4Ć13 Displaying file settings. 3Ć46 search and replace function. 3Ć104 ladder logic program elements. 3Ć74. 3Ć111 modifying instructions. 3Ć80 Editing functions. 4Ć9. 4Ć13 signed integer. 4Ć13 mixed reference table. 4Ć8 forcing a discrete reference. 3Ć31 Double precision integer. 4Ć13. 4Ć18 signed double integer. 3Ć90 automatically inserting references. 3Ć103 including rungs from a file. 4Ć13 moving the cursor in a mixed reference table. 3Ć84 move logic right. 3Ć79 program annotation. 3Ć69 editor options. 3Ć60 Editor options. 3Ć81 increment/decrement reference adĆ dress. 3Ć103 rung comments. 4Ć24 real integer. 4Ć23 editing the title of a mixed reference table. 4Ć13 changing the display format. 3Ć110 move logic down. 3Ć113 generic search by reference type. 3Ć92 continuation coil. 3Ć77 subroutine blocks. 3Ć87 Delete row function. 3Ć82 pasting previously cut rungs. 4Ć13 ASCII. 4Ć4 changing the values of a word of disĆ crete references. 3Ć86 deleting a rung. 4Ć21 hexadecimal. 7Ć7 Deleting the configuration of a module. 4Ć13 returning to default values. 3Ć67. 3Ć30 program entry. 3Ć23 program format. 4Ć10 Disk drive setup. 6Ć11 Double colon. 4Ć8 removing overrides. 3Ć87 delete row. 3Ć96 GFKĆ0466L . 3Ć33 viewing variable declarations. 4Ć11 Discrete references.Index Delete instruction function. 4Ć20 mixed userĆdefined table. 3Ć73 continuation contact. 3Ć104 changing register values. 4Ć17 timer/counter format in a mixed referĆ ence table. 10Ć7 DINT. 4Ć22 deleting a line of a mixed reference table. 4Ć15 changing the format of a table. 4Ć24 tmrctr format. 3Ć101 search function. 3Ć98 selecting rungs. 4Ć11. 4Ć15 defining a mixed table. 3Ć2 modifying a reference address or constant. 3Ć88 inserting or editing rungs. 3Ć92 automatically inserting references.

5Ć8 File system error.SDE file. 7Ć13 renaming program folders. HĆ3 error detected in WSI board port. GĆ4 . HĆ3 trouble communicating with the Series 90Ć30 or 90Ć20 PLC. common user.DEF file. 7Ć14 copying program folders to diskettes. 7Ć2. HĆ2 comm driver not loaded. GĆ4 cross reference data files. GĆ4 . HĆ3 Exiting the software. HĆ3 printer output is garbled. GĆ2 . HĆ3 Error detected in WSI board port. 7Ć6 backing up program folders.LH1 file. 7Ć5 automatic folder selection. 1Ć4. 8Ć13 Embedded high speed counter. GĆ3 . 7Ć8 clearing program folders. 7Ć15 deleting program folders. 5Ć12 PLC. GĆ2 FLD file. 10Ć85 Entry teach file.PSU file. GĆ2 . GĆ2 . GĆ3 . 1Ć9. 10Ć83. 10Ć83. HĆ1 system software error ID: 0000 EX: 0000. 7Ć4 Folder functions. HĆ4 file system error. 1Ć7 GFKĆ0466L . GĆ3 .DEC file. 7Ć1 locking/unlocking program folders. 7Ć11 restoring program folders. GĆ4 in the program folder. GĆ4 in the home directory. 10Ć56 configuring the embedded HSC modĆ ule.RDF file.CFG file. HĆ1 Files. GĆ4 . program. HĆ2 port/file access denied. GĆ2 Expanded memory. 7Ć7 drawer. HĆ2 constant out of range. 7Ć13 IndexĆ5 F Fault display and clearing. 10Ć50 Enhanced GCM.XRF file.PDT file. GĆ3 . HĆ4 Errors. 7Ć8 clearing program folders. HĆ3 cannot install the software. 7Ć15 deleting program folders. 3Ć99 Extended memory.I file. 1Ć9 Folders. 10Ć29 Explicit cross references. 2Ć26 Equality of logic. HĆ4 error loading code into WSI board. HĆ4 Error loading code into WSI board. 7Ć6 backing up program folders. HĆ1 invalid CPU. 3Ć92 EEPROM. 7Ć12 copying program folders.XOV file. HĆ2 read/write PLC initialization aborted.Index coil checking.SET file. 6Ć16 Expansion rack. GĆ3 .DAT file. GĆ4 . 7Ć5 automatic folder selection. GĆ4 . 7Ć1 annotation files. 7Ć14 copying program folders to diskettes. HĆ4 Error messages. GĆ2 .STE file. 7Ć7 locking/unlocking program folders. 6Ć7. 2Ć29 Error detected in WSI board. GĆ2 . 7Ć3 autoĆselect function. HĆ1 error detected in WSI board. selecting an. 6Ć7 Fault table I/O. HĆ1 no communications. 7Ć9 selecting/creating program folders. 9Ć12 Explicit search.EXP file. 2Ć16 EXP file. 2Ć18. program. GĆ1 .IO file. GĆ2 .FLD file. GĆ4 Folder functions. 10Ć85 Enhanced Genius communications modĆ ule. 7Ć2 autoĆselect function. 7Ć12 copying program folders. Series 90Ć20 configuring the embedded HSC for a CPU 211.

2Ć27 High memory area. 10Ć9 CPU311. 2Ć3 WSI board. 2Ć2 WSI version setup. 4Ć8 Forcing and overriding discrete referĆ ences. 10Ć50 HSC module. 10Ć29 selecting the base rack. 10Ć90 IndexĆ6 . 10Ć88 configuring a GCM. 7Ć9 selecting/creating program folders. 10Ć5 default configuration. 10Ć82 configuring an APM. 1Ć3 help (ALTĆH). 10Ć8 rack screen. 2Ć2 Help (ALTĆH). 10Ć50 configuring thirdĆparty modules. configuring the HSC module. 10Ć26 GFKĆ0466L G Gateway address. 1Ć5. 10Ć7 displaying the rack screen. 1Ć5 saving the configuration to disk. 3Ć103 Genius Bus Controller. 2Ć2 H Hardware. 10Ćslot rack. 10Ć13 selecting an expansion rack. 10Ć7 configuration reference view. 2Ć24 standard serial communications version setup. 1Ć3 Help screens. 3Ć113 Foreign (thirdĆparty) modules. 10Ć99 Function key assignments. 1Ć3 key help (ALTĆK). 10Ć5 CPU311.Index names. 10Ć21 GBC. 2Ć2 keyboards. 10Ć73 configuring an ADC module. 10Ć6 CPU 331. 1Ć3 Hexadecimal display format. 10Ć31 configuring the HSC module. 6Ć14 High speed counter module. 10Ć4 CPU module. 5Ćslot rack. GĆ3 I/O configuration. 10Ć83 configuring a PCM. 10Ć4 enhanced GCM. 10Ć88 configuring. 10Ć58 configuring a single axis APM. 10Ć80 changing the configuration of a slot. 10Ć83 Grounding. configurĆ ing. 10Ć47 Generic search. 10Ć99 copying configuration from slot to slot. 1Ć3 mnemonic help (ALTĆI). 1Ć2 cabling. 7Ć11 restoring program folders. 10Ć73 configuring an embedded HSC for a CPU 211. Series 90Ć30. considerations when using a 351 or 352 CPU. 10Ć48 configuring an I/O link master module. 7Ć2 renaming program folders. 10Ć45 configuring a CMM. 10Ć50 I I file. 10Ć85 I/O base selection for the CPU 211. 10Ć1 APM commands. 10Ć57. 3Ć48ć3Ć50 Forcing a discrete reference. 7Ć4 TEMP program folder. programs. 10Ć88 Genius communications module. 10Ć83 configuring an I/O link interface modĆ ule. 10Ć83 Generic I/O modules. 10Ć67 configuring a GBC. 10Ć2 deleting the configuration of a module. 7Ć4 Footers in listings. 10Ć33 moving the configuration of a module to another slot. 4Ć13 High Density Analog Output. 2Ć2 grounding. 10Ć49 configuring the CPU 211. 10Ć101 configuration validation. 10Ć56 configuring an enhanced GCM. 7Ć2 Folders. 10Ć6 configuring 90Ć30 I/O modules. 10Ć74 configuring a twoĆaxis APM. 10Ć88 GCM. 7Ć2 program folder functions. 10Ć8 selecting a different CPU module.

3Ć31 exiting rung entry. 3Ć19 data zoom feature. 10Ć49 I/O modules. 3Ć40 Implicit cross references. 3Ć24 language rules. 10Ć17 Keyboard functions. 3Ć18 rungs. 10Ć59 I/O fault table. 3Ć11 timers and counters. 3Ć9 relay functions. 3Ć5 Left to right reference display mode (ALTĆN). 1Ć6. 3Ć2 bit operation functions. 5Ć14 I/O link interface module. configuring 90Ć30. 5Ć12 entries overflowed. 3Ć16 entering nicknames and reference deĆ scriptions. 7Ć13 K Key functions. 3Ć3 table functions.Index selecting the configuration mode of a CMM. 10Ć21 Keyboard status. 3Ć20 markers. 3Ć18 Math functions. 10Ć47 IBMĆcompatible graphics printer. 3Ć35. 3Ć88 Instruction mnemonics. 5Ć12 fault table entries. 10Ć68 selecting the configuration mode of a PCM. 3Ć10 control functions. 3Ć6 Memory allocation. 3Ć29 inserting functions. 4Ć7 LH1 file. configuring an. 3Ć99. 10Ć48 I/O link master module. 3Ć18 Ladder logic program elements. 3Ć13 conversion functions. 1Ć3 Key Switch configuration for 350 and higher CPUs. 2Ć28 Keyboards. 3Ć18 accepting a rung. 3Ć12 data move functions. 3Ć19 using mnemonics. 5Ć15 date and time faults were last cleared. 2Ć24 Keyswitch. 1Ć8. 3Ć103 Including rungs from a file. 3Ć23 variable declarations. 5Ć12 top fault displayed. 2Ć24 Key help (ALTĆK). 3Ć11 data types. 3Ć6 relational functions. 2Ć24 Keyboard macros. GĆ2 Loading from PLC to programmer. 3Ć81 Increment reference address. 2Ć30. configuring an. 3Ć18 power source. 3Ć16 math functions. 3Ć23 program format. 5Ć13 PLC time/date. 5Ć12 clearing the fault table. 10Ć45 generic I/O modules. DĆ1 Instructions. 3Ć18 structure of a rung. CĆ3 Identifier table. DĆ1 INT. 8Ć3 Locking program folders. 5Ć13 number of faults in the fault table. 5Ć12 total faults. 3Ć15 IO file. 1Ć6. CĆ3 L Ladder logic. GĆ3 IP address. 9Ć12 Implicit search. 3Ć18 creating/editing program logic. 2Ć24 GFKĆ0466L M Markers. 1Ć3. 3Ć15 data zoom feature. 3Ć27 inserting logic elements. programming mnemonics. 3Ć18 program entry. 1Ć4 IndexĆ7 . 5Ć12 fault description. 3Ć26 block declarations. 3Ć18 program logic. 10Ć21 Isolated network. 6Ć1. 10Ć21 Configuration. 5Ć12 zooming into the fault table.

6Ć7 extended memory. 6Ć17 Memory protection configuration for 350 and higher CPUs. 2Ć13 IndexĆ8 Modifying a reference address or constant. 3Ć86 GFKĆ0466L . 10Ć45 Modem. 6Ć18 using conventional memory on an 80386 or higher computer. 6Ć13 restrictions. 6Ć7 MSĆDOS memory areas expanded memory. 3Ć74. 6Ć16 using expanded memory on an 80386 or higher computer. 6Ć13 tested configurations. 3Ć114 forcing and overriding discrete referĆ ences. 4Ć21 moving the cursor. DĆ1 Model 90Ć30 I/O modules. 10Ć8 MSĆDOS. 5Ć16 amount of memory available. 3Ć104 modifying a reference address or constant. 1Ć8. 4Ć20 defining a mixed table.Index Memory limits. 3Ć23 Mnemonics. 4Ć24 Mixed table display format. 2Ć30. 3Ć83 Moving the configuration of a module to another slot. 2Ć30. 6Ć2 Move logic down function. 7Ć2 Nickname. 1Ć8 Message line. 3Ć84 Move logic right function. 10Ć36 Micro PLC. 4Ć13 Mnemonic help (ALTĆI). instruction. 5Ć17 Memory. 6Ć13 specifications. 11Ć4 MULTIPLE coil check. 1Ć8. 10Ć21 Names. 6Ć14 using the upper memory block on an 80386 or higher computer. 3Ć104 changing register values. configurable. 10Ć18 Memory usage. 5Ć16 Memory. 6Ć15 using video RAM. 5Ć16 model number. 3Ć104 block edit. 6Ć7 MSĆDOS system memory. 5Ć7 O OEM protection. 3Ć106 substitutions. 4Ć22 deleting a line. 10Ć24 Memory limits. 1Ć3 CHKDSK command. 3Ć87 delete row. 5Ć16 amount of program memory remaining. 3Ć105 Online mode. 3Ć110 substitution groups. 3Ć111 Modifying instructions. 10Ć36 Mixed reference table. 3Ć30 NULL (blank) string. 5Ć16 amount of program memory occupied. 4Ć24 timer/counter format. 6Ć3. 6Ć2 Open space functions. 3Ć111 modifying instructions. PLC. PLC. 2Ć7 memory areas defined. 6Ć2 Online editing/monitoring. 6Ć16 using the high memory area on an 80386 or higher computer. generic I/O modules. 1Ć3 Mnemonics. 3Ć113 inserting or editing rungs. 3Ć82 delete column. 11Ć5 Memory manager compliant memory managers. 2Ć30. 3Ć110 Monitor mode. 5Ć16 software revision. 6Ć7 Multidrop configuration. program. configuring. 4Ć23 editing the title. 3Ć93 N Name Server IP address. 10Ć47 Model 90Ć30 I/O modules. 5Ć7 OffĆline mode. 5Ć16 PLC ID. 3Ć85 delete instruction. 1Ć8. 6Ć7 system memory. Configuring. 2Ć28 Micro PLC.

1Ć4 SNP ID. 3Ć16 PLC changing the PLC date and time. 10Ć73 Output. 11Ć2 fault display and clearing. 10Ć90 Overlapping references. 2Ć13 using a teach file to enter the software. changing. 3Ć84 move logic right. 10Ć105 Overrides. 2Ć16 teach mode (keyboard macros). 10Ć62 PCM CFG mode. 1Ć8 Pasting previously cut rungs. 2Ć16 exiting the programming or configuraĆ tion software. 10Ć59 PCM CFG mode. 3Ć79 Pause mode. 5Ć5 current level. 5Ć4 GFKĆ0466L . 5Ć4 changing the privilege level. 3Ć62 PID function. 3Ć83 Operation. 10Ć82 configuring an APM module. 2Ć13 COMENU. 10Ć60 PROG/CCM mode. 10Ć59 PCM configuration software. FĆ1 exit. 11Ć3 changing the SNP ID name. 2Ć27 setup package. 2Ć2 Option modules configuring a CCM module. 3Ć113 creating. 10Ć67 configuring a GCM module. 10Ć61 CCM/PROG mode. 2Ć17 PDT file. 6Ć12 setting up a port. 8Ć8 PCM. 10Ć62 BASIC mode.Index move logic down. CĆ6 PLC communications serial port setup. 1Ć8 PLC memory allocation. 5Ć4 privilege levels.DAT file. 10Ć57 configuration modes. 10Ć62 selecting the configuration mode. 6Ć11 standard serial COM port. FĆ1 using a modem. High Density Analog. 2Ć24 keyboards supported. 2Ć24 screen format. 5Ć6 OEM protection. 2Ć18 keyboard functions. 2Ć26 WSI version hardware setup. 3Ć62 PERMVIEWLOCK. GĆ2 Periodic subroutines. 10Ć57 configuring a TCP/IP Ethernet module. 11Ć4 clearing memory. 5Ć3 access description. 3Ć65 PERMEDITLOCK. 4Ć9. 3Ć60. 11Ć4 starting/stopping PLC execution. 2Ć4 standard serial communications version hardware setup. 1Ć4 PLC and program memory information. 10Ć50 configuring a PCM module. 1Ć4 time and date. 2Ć16 software installation. 1Ć4 PLC communications options. 1Ć7 system response to faults. 10Ć59 PROG PRT mode. 10Ć57 configuring a PCM. 6Ć11 port usage conflicts. CĆ4 Password protection. 10Ć63 configuring an ADC module. 10Ć83 configuring a Genius Bus Controller module. removing passĆ words. 6Ć4 displaying file settings. 5Ć7 password active. 2Ć1 auto dial feature. 10Ć62 CCM ONLY mode. 1Ć8. 6Ć4 IndexĆ9 P Pagination guidelines. 5Ć4 enabling/disabling passwords. 6Ć12 displaying port settings. 6Ć12 saving the port setup. 8Ć11 date and time. 5Ć4 access level. 10Ć58 BAS/CCM mode. 1Ć7 sweep time display and change. 4Ć10 Overriding discrete references. 3Ć60. 2Ć3 starting the programming or configuraĆ tion software. 2Ć17 startup. 9Ć20 Palette colors. 10Ć88 configuring a High Speed Counter module. 2Ć24 user command menu. 10Ć6.

5Ć16 software revision. 10Ć29 Print configuration accessing the print configuration screen. 9Ć16 print configuration. 5Ć11 PLC memory. 11Ć5 PLC state. 5Ć8 top fault displayed. 3Ć18 Power supply. 9Ć9 header page. 9Ć21 menu. 5Ć10 PLC time/date. 5Ć8 zooming into the fault table. 2Ć29 access level. configuring the. 9Ć8 cross reference parameters. 9Ć8 IL logic. 2Ć29 IndexĆ10 Port configuration for 351. 5Ć3 PLC CPU sweep control. 9Ć9 from/to rung. 2Ć29 SNP ID. 9Ć5 sending screen prints to a printer. 9Ć7 print reference tables. 6Ć12 Power source. 9Ć1 examples. 5Ć8 entries overflowed. 9Ć20 Print functions. and 363 CPUs. 5Ć16 model number. 5Ć8 PLC memory used. 9Ć8 printing separate reference use tables or one single table. 1Ć10. 5Ć18 creating. 352. 5Ć19 changing the sweep mode. 5Ć8 fault descriptions. 9Ć10 deleting files after printing cross referĆ ences. 5Ć19 PLC fault table. 6Ć19 PLC control and status.Index WSI serial port setup. changing. 5Ć4 configured reference sizes. 5Ć5 enabling/disabling passwords. 9Ć8 including cross references as part of the ladder logic. 2Ć28 keyboard status. 5Ć16 run/stop PLC. 9Ć20 pagination guidelines. 6Ć5 Port usage conflicts. 10Ć18 Port requirements. 9Ć20 starting page number. 5Ć20ć5Ć22 PLC fault table. 9Ć20 reference view tables. 9Ć11 including explicit and/or implicit cross references in the cross reference table. 5Ć16 PLC memory limits. 5Ć4 PLC CPU sweep control. 9Ć9 print program parameters. 9Ć12 logic. 9Ć8 port. 9Ć20 specifying a file name. 5Ć9 fault location. 9Ć2 print coil references. 9Ć20 parameters. 9Ć13 file name. 2Ć29 current program. 9Ć20 subtitle. 9Ć11 cross references. 9Ć20 number of last rack to print. 5Ć6 I/O fault table. 9Ć20 number of first rack to print. 2Ć29 PLC state. 9Ć6 Print program. 5Ć1 block memory usage. 2Ć29 PLC/programmer status. 5Ć2 security access level. 2Ć28 logic equality. 5Ć8 clearing the fault table. 5Ć11 date and time faults were last cleared. 5Ć16 amount of memory available. 9Ć19 CPU configuration data. 5Ć9 number of faults in the fault table. 2Ć29 scan time. 5Ć16 PLC ID. 9Ć5 sending screens to a file. 5Ć17 changing the privilege level. 9Ć3. 9Ć4 selecting a screen print device. 9Ć20 title. 9Ć20 detailed configuration screens. 5Ć16 amount of program memory remaining. 9Ć20 I/O rack. 9Ć20 destination of the listing. 9Ć7 all blocks. 9Ć12 GFKĆ0466L . 9Ć18 print program. 5Ć8 total faults. removing passĆ words. 5Ć9 fault table entries. 5Ć12 OEM protection. 5Ć16 amount of program memory occupied. 5Ć7 password protection. 9Ć14 printer parameters. 2Ć29 programmer operating mode.

7Ć7 drawer. 3Ć18 power source.Index printing separate tables of cross referĆ ences or one single table. storing a changed block. 9Ć4 Printer serial port setup. 7Ć2 renaming program folders. 3Ć26 automatically inserting references. 8Ć1 clearing PLC memory. 9Ć8 title. 9Ć4 changing setup printer parameters. 9Ć13 starting page number. 3Ć11 data types. 9Ć15 subtitle. CĆ3 Printer parameters. 9Ć11 selecting reference types for printing cross references. 9Ć15 printing value tables. 3Ć18 structure of a ladder logic rung. 3Ć15 data zoom feature. 1Ć6 program logic. 3Ć16 math functions. 7Ć13 names. 3Ć1 Program entry. 7Ć6 backing up program folders. 7Ć4 TEMP program folder. 2Ć18. 7Ć2 program folder functions. 9Ć15 specifying the destination of the listing. 3Ć19 ladder logic language rules. 9Ć8 variable declaration table. 7Ć12 copying program folders. 7Ć8 clearing program folders. 7Ć5 automatic folder selection. 3Ć9 relay functions. 9Ć15 specifying a file name. 8Ć8 STOPĆtoĆRUN transition. 1Ć8 Program utility functions. 1Ć6. 1Ć6. 3Ć5 Program logic. 8Ć13 run mode store function. 7Ć2 Program folders. 9Ć15 title. 9Ć4 number of lines per page. 3Ć20 markers. 3Ć18 creating/editing program logic. 3Ć18 Program block declarations. 1Ć10. 3Ć27 inserting logic elements. 7Ć2 Program format. 1Ć6 Program edit run mode store. 9Ć4 paper width. 6Ć23 Privilege levels. 3Ć104 Program editing. 3Ć3 table functions. 3Ć18 rungs. 3Ć13 conversion functions. 8Ć3 pause mode. 3Ć11 timers and counters. 8Ć8 read/write/verify EEPROM. 9Ć3 control characters. 1Ć8. 3Ć23 accepting a rung. 7Ć2. 9Ć3. 9Ć9 specifying a directory to store cross refĆ erence data files. 3Ć23 GFKĆ0466L Program folder functions. 3Ć10 control functions. 1Ć6. 3Ć19 variable declarations. 9Ć15 overrides. 9Ć12 shortcuts for printing program logic. 9Ć15 header page. 10Ć60 PROG/CCM mode. 9Ć8 Print reference tables address range. 8Ć11 loading from PLC to programmer. 9Ć15 Printer options. 7Ć15 deleting program folders. 9Ć4 printer setup sequences. 9Ć15 starting page. 1Ć9. 3Ć12 data move functions. 7Ć9 selecting/creating program folders. 3Ć18 block declarations. 10Ć62 Program block declarations. 7Ć1 locking/unlocking program folders. 7Ć2 autoĆselect function. 3Ć40 entering nicknames and reference deĆ scriptions. 3Ć18. 3Ć24 selecting a reference table. 3Ć18 Program instructions bit operation functions. 3Ć29 inserting functions. 9Ć4 line feed with carriage return. 3Ć31 entering variable declarations. 3Ć19 Program memory. 7Ć3 Program folder names. 7Ć1 annotation files. 3Ć29 using mnemonics. 7Ć11 restoring program folders. 7Ć14 copying program folders to diskettes. 8Ć8 IndexĆ11 . 3Ć6 relational functions. 5Ć4 PROG PRT mode. 1Ć9. 3Ć36 exiting rung entry. 9Ć9 subtitle.

10Ć59 PROG PRT mode. 4Ć1 ASCII characters. 1Ć10 program folder functions. 3Ć18 version number. GĆ3 Read EEPROM. 10Ć62 CCM ONLY mode. 1Ć7 editing functions. 6Ć1 PLC communications serial port setup. 6Ć1 menu. 1Ć7 status information. 1Ć7 functions. 10Ć62 BASIC mode. 10Ć57. 10Ć57 selecting the configuration mode. 1Ć8. 6Ć23 programmer operating mode. 10Ć58 BAS/CCM mode. 4Ć14 ASCII format. 10Ć62 PCM CFG mode. 1Ć7. configured. GĆ4 Q Quick search. 3Ć30 Reference display mode (ALTĆN). CĆ4 PLC communications options. 10Ć61 CCM/PROG mode. 6Ć19 Programming instruction mnemonics. 2Ć19 annotation. 5Ć2. 1Ć9 program logic. 4Ć5 GFKĆ0466L . 10Ć62 modes of configuration. 2Ć7 video RAM. 1Ć8. 6Ć4 printer serial port setup. 2Ć19 menu tree. HĆ1 Real. CĆ1 disk drive setup. 1Ć8 transferring programs. 10Ć59 Programmer environment setup. 1Ć6. 1Ć6 displaying tables of reference values. 6Ć4 view modes setup. 2Ć29. 1Ć8. 1Ć6. 4Ć7 Reference overlap. 8Ć5 verifying a program with the PLC. 4Ć13 Reference description. 3Ć18 program utility functions.Index storing to PLC from programmer. 1Ć10 programmer operating mode. 1Ć7 automatically inserting references. 1Ć10 variable declarations. 4Ć4 Reference tables. 6Ć2 programming lesson. 1Ć9 starting the software. 3Ć15 Real format. DĆ1 Programming lesson. 6Ć3 standard serial COM port. 8Ć13 Read/write PLC initialization aborted erĆ ror. 6Ć1. 2Ć19 PSU file. 2Ć12. 6Ć2 Programmer setup. changing. 2Ć30. 2Ć19 main menu. CĆ3 Programmer operating mode. 10Ć6 Reference sizes. 2Ć20 PLC and program memory information. 2Ć30 setting up PLC communications using a WSI board. 2Ć30. 10Ć4 RAM. 1Ć9 program folders. 3Ć103 R Rack screen. 5Ć18 Reference table values. 6Ć2 mode selection. 1Ć6. 8Ć9 Programmable coprocessor module configuring a PCM. AĆ1 selecting the programmer operating mode. 1Ć7 printing programs. 6Ć21 WSI serial port setup. 4Ć13 ASCII string entry. 6Ć2 selecting SNP connections. 3Ć18 coil checking. CĆ5 palette colors. 2Ć17 starting/stopping PLC execution. 1Ć8 IndexĆ12 PLC sweep time display and change. 2Ć20 system security. 1Ć9 setup for PLC communications using standard COM serial ports. 1Ć7 exiting the software. 10Ć60 PROG/CCM mode. CĆ9 terminal and printer options. 3Ć96 block declarations. CĆ6 saving the setup. 2Ć18 fault display and clearing. AĆ1 Programming software. 6Ć17 RDF file. CĆ3 Programmer keyswitch. 3Ć92 creating/editing a program.

3Ć67. 10Ć17 Rung. 4Ć8 hexadecimal format. 4Ć13 register reference tables. 3Ć99 Restoring program folders. 4Ć13 mixed reference table. 4Ć19 timer/counter format. 4Ć3 Register reference tables. 4Ć13. 3Ć77 substitution groups. 4Ć11 display formats. 3Ć113 including rungs from a file. 3Ć50 creating longer comments. 4Ć13 system reference table. 4Ć10 using the cursor to select a reference table. 4Ć11 changing reference table values. changing. 3Ć106 substitutions. 4Ć12 removing overrides. 4Ć4 changing a register reference. 3Ć74. 3Ć114 continuation coil. 4Ć3 real format. 4Ć8 defining a mixed table. 3Ć80 S Saving the configuration to disk. 3Ć47 creating borders. 4Ć13 using overrides. 4Ć18 signed double integer format. 7Ć9 GFKĆ0466L RTU ONLY mode. 4Ć4 changing display formats. 5Ć2 Run/Stop switch configuration for 350 and higher CPUs. 4Ć4 discrete reference tables. 3Ć82 pasting previously cut rungs. 3Ć83 open space functions. 4Ć17 timer/counter format in a mixed referĆ ence table. 10Ć70 RTU/CCM mode. 3Ć9 Relay functions. 3Ć110 move logic down. 3Ć73 cutting selected rungs. 4Ć20 mixed userĆdefined table. 3Ć90 changing register values. 10Ć72 Run mode store function. 3Ć76 forcing and overriding discrete referĆ ences. 7Ć11 Replacement target. 3Ć105 viewing variable declarations. 10Ć8 Saving the port setup. 8Ć8 Run PLC. 4Ć24 moving the cursor in a reference table. 4Ć15 changing the format of a table. 3Ć111 modifying instructions. 4Ć10 returning to default values. 3Ć99 IndexĆ13 . 3Ć81 increment/decrement reference adĆ dress. 4Ć24 tmrctr format. 4Ć4 changing the display format. 3Ć51 Rung edit. 4Ć7 changing the values of a word of disĆ crete references. 4Ć2. 4Ć4 Register values. 3Ć114 Relational functions. 3Ć84 move logic right. 3Ć46 printing a title and subtitle. 3Ć76 writing selected rungs to a file. 4Ć23 discrete and register references. 4Ć9. 3Ć18 Rung comments. 3Ć73 continuation contact. 3Ć51 starting a new page of comments. 4Ć3 editing the title of a mixed reference table. 3Ć86 deleting a rung. 6Ć12 Scan time. 4Ć21 forcing a discrete reference. 4Ć12 Register references. 4Ć15 changing the reference display mode (ALTĆN).Index binary format. 3Ć69 autoĆnext highest reference. 4Ć13 moving the cursor in a mixed reference table. 3Ć88 modifying a reference address or constant. 3Ć79 selecting rungs. 10Ć70 RTU/SNP mode. 3Ć78 delete column. 3Ć3 Renaming program folders. 3Ć51 inserting a rung comment. 4Ć13 signed integer format. 3Ć46 adding text. 4Ć13 displaying a reference table. 2Ć29 Scope of the search. 3Ć87 delete row. 4Ć22 deleting a line of a mixed reference table. 3Ć85 delete instruction. 4Ć13 changing a register reference.

9Ć5 sending screen prints to a printer. 3Ć99 scope of the search. 6Ć4 communications driver load order. 6Ć3 SNP ID numbers. 3Ć93 SNF format exporting variable declarations to SNF. 4Ć13 Simple isolated network configuration. 6Ć3 SNP ID. 2Ć9 Serial ports. 2Ć28 function key assignments. 2Ć9 subdirectories created. 6Ć20 PLC communications serial port setup. 2Ć27 message line. 6Ć4 WSI serial port setup. GĆ4 Setting up a port. 6Ć3 SNP ID. 6Ć12. 3Ć101 Search function. 6Ć20 setting up a port for PLC communicaĆ tions. GĆ2 Search and replace function. 6Ć23 displaying file settings. 1Ć9 standard serial COM port. 3Ć99 Security. 4Ć13 Signed integer. 3Ć100 quick search for a coil. 3Ć29 Selecting program folders. 6Ć19 SET file. 2Ć27 command line. 6Ć12 displaying port settings. 1Ć8. 352. 5Ć3 privilege levels. 2Ć29 status information. 10Ć21 SINGLE coil check. 10Ć72 SNP/RTU mode. 2Ć4 AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG. 6Ć11 setting up PLC communications using a WSI board. 3Ć103 legitimate replacement items. 7Ć4 Selecting rungs. 2Ć29.Index Screen format. 10Ć18 SNP/CCM mode. 3Ć15 Signed integer display format. 2Ć12 RAM required. 3Ć41 Shortcuts for printing program logic. 6Ć12 saving the port setup. 3Ć41 Snow suppression. 6Ć11. 6Ć11 GFKĆ0466L . 10Ć72 Software error ID: 0000 EX: 0000. 9Ć9 Signed double integer display format. 2Ć28 PLC/programmer status. 6Ć20 setting up a port. 3Ć99 starting point of the search. 3Ć99 explicit vs.SYS files. 6Ć6 displaying file settings. 3Ć98 action to perform on the search target. 3Ć99 direction of the search. 6Ć13 configuring memory for the commuĆ nications driver. 9Ć6 SDE file. 11Ć4 changing the SNP ID name. 3Ć103 replacement for target. HĆ3 Software installation. 2Ć16 Shared Name File format exporting variable declarations to SNF. 10Ć71 SNP port configuration for 351. 6Ć3 port connection. 6Ć3 file name. 6Ć8 compliant memory managers. 2Ć7 serial number. CĆ3 SNP connections. 3Ć43 importing variable declarations. 1Ć9 Standard serial COM port. 6Ć11 IndexĆ14 Setup package. 2Ć8 programmer setup. 2Ć28 Screen print device. 9Ć5 sending screens to a file. 2Ć4 installation instructions. 2Ć4 Standard COM serial ports. 11Ć4 SNP ONLY mode. 3Ć99 generic search by reference type. 6Ć12. 6Ć20 displaying port settings. 3Ć77 Serial number. 3Ć43 importing variable declarations. 3Ć103 implicit search. 6Ć4 port usage conflicts. and 363 CPUs. 1Ć8 Selecting a different CPU module. implicit search. 1Ć9 setup for PLC communications using standard COM serial ports. 10Ć13 Selecting a reference table. 3Ć99 target to search for.

10Ć21 Status functions. 5Ć19 PLC fault table. 10Ć10. 5Ć12 OEM protection. 8Ć8 Storing the CPU configuration to the PLC. 2Ć29 STE file. 4Ć19 T Table functions. 10Ć63 Teach mode. 2Ć28 logic equality. 2Ć29 SNP ID. 5Ć8 PLC memory used. 2Ć26 Status address location. 1Ć7 Symbols. 3Ć59 unlocking a subroutine. 2Ć25 IndexĆ15 . 5Ć17 configured reference sizes. 3Ć60 periodic subroutines. 3Ć11 Target. 3Ć99 TCP/IP Ethernet Configuration on 364 CPUs. cross reference instruction. configured. 5Ć2 GFKĆ0466L STOPĆtoĆRUN transition. search.Index DOS memory areas defined. 6Ć12 requirements. 6Ć12 setting up a port for PLC communicaĆ tions. 6Ć7 expanded memory. 1Ć8. 3Ć64 editing subroutine block declarations. 5Ć7 password protection. 9Ć10 System configuration (CONFIG. 2Ć28 access level. 10Ć32 Sweep time. 3Ć105 Sweep control active. 5Ć18 I/O fault table. 2Ć4 System reference table. 3Ć58 locking/unlocking subroutines. 6Ć18 using conventional memory on an 80386 or higher computer.SYS) file. 2Ć25 pausing the playback of a teach seĆ quence. 6Ć15 using video RAM. 6Ć5 port usage conflicts. 8Ć7 Subnet mask. 2Ć24 creating teach sequences. 6Ć16 using expanded memory on an 80386 or higher computer. 3Ć64 searching for subroutine block declaraĆ tions. 5Ć4 Status information. 2Ć28 Keyboard status. 6Ć13 memory manager specifications. 3Ć65 permanently locking a subroutine. 3Ć63 using goto to move the cursor. configuration. 5Ć19 online adjustments. 6Ć17 Starting up the software. GĆ2 Stop PLC. 5Ć2 security access level. 6Ć7 extended memory. 10Ć21 Subroutine blocks. 2Ć29 PLC and programmer information. 11Ć1 Storing to PLC from programmer. 8Ć5 considerations when storing to a 351 CPU. 6Ć9 saving the port setup. 3Ć106 Substitutions. 6Ć10 tested configurations. 2Ć29 scan time. 2Ć28 PLC state. 6Ć16 using the high memory area on an 80386 or higher computer. 5Ć16 run/stop PLC. 6Ć13 MSĆDOS system memory. 2Ć29 programmer operating mode. 3Ć59 Substitution groups. 3Ć58 deleting subroutine block declarations. 3Ć57 adding subroutine block declarations. 6Ć7 port requirements. 5Ć3 PLC CPU sweep control. 6Ć5 running Logicmaster 90 software. 2Ć29 current program. 2Ć16 using a teach file to enter the software. 10Ć21 TCP/IP Ethernet Module. 5Ć19 Sweep mode. 6Ć7 memory manager restrictions. 3Ć59 zooming into subroutine block logic. 3Ć59 displaying the lock status of the subrouĆ tine. 6Ć14 using the upper memory block on an 80386 or higher computer. 6Ć11 setting up the computer's serial port. 5Ć1 block memory usage. 2Ć20.

2Ć19. 3Ć65 Timer/counter format. 6Ć22 VIEWLOCK. 8Ć8 storing to PLC from programmer. 3Ć40 window. 3Ć43 identifier table. HĆ3 V Valid configuration. 3Ć15 Work station interface (WSI) board. 7Ć13 Upper memory block. 6Ć21 View modes setup. 8Ć1 clearing PLC memory. 3Ć5 Substitution groups. 11Ć2 changing the PLC time. 6Ć20 file name. FĆ1 comenu. 3Ć93 Word. 4Ć13 Transferring programs. 6Ć20 GFKĆ0466L . 3Ć106 TMRCTR format. 1Ć4 Timer interrups (periodic subroutines). 5Ć18 UserĆconfigurable memory limits. 8Ć13 Verifying a program with the PLC. 1Ć10 Troubleshooting. 10Ć6 Variable declaration table. PLC. 8Ć1 Utility functions. 10Ć99 Time. 3Ć41 cut/pasting variable declarations. 8Ć5 verifying a program with the PLC. 2Ć26 TEMP program folder. menu. FĆ3 User errors. 2Ć2 WSI serial port setup. 3Ć40 CSV format files. 3Ć18 Verify EEPROM. 8Ć8 STOPĆtoĆRUN transition. 2Ć21 Video RAM.Index playing back a teach sequence. 3Ć60 U Unlocking program folders. 3Ć39 viewing the identifier table. 3Ć41 searching for variable declarations. 6Ć20 displaying port settings. 3Ć36 exporting CSV files. 6Ć15 Use tables. 8Ć11 clearing reference override tables. 1Ć10 IndexĆ16 W WARN MULTIPLE coil check. 3Ć35 importing CSV format files. 7Ć2. 3Ć80 WSI board. 8Ć9 Version of software. 3Ć43 exporting SNF files. 2Ć2 Write EEPROM. FĆ1 creating a COMENU. 6Ć21 changing the view mode. 6Ć20 modem turnaround time.DAT file. configuring. 2Ć25 using a teach file to enter the software. CĆ3 ThirdĆparty modules. 1Ć9. 10Ć24 Utilities. 8Ć13 run mode store function. 3Ć39 using goto. 8Ć3 pause mode. HĆ3 User reference sizes. 8Ć13 Writing selected rungs to a file. 1Ć6. 6Ć20 displaying file settings. 11Ć3 Time. 3Ć5 Instruction mnemonics and description. 4Ć17 Timers. 8Ć8 read/write/verify EEPROM. 3Ć39 displaying the table. 3Ć35 Variable declarations. 6Ć20 saving the port setup. CĆ3 View mode (ALTĆN). 8Ć9 Utility functions. 6Ć17 Video snow suppression. 7Ć5 Terminal options. program. FĆ1 accessing the user command menu. 3Ć41 importing SNF files. 3Ć39 deleting variable declarations. 8Ć12 loading from PLC to programmer. FĆ2 example COMENU definition file. 3Ć33 automatically inserting references. 6Ć19 baud rate. 3Ć39 entering variable declarations. 9Ć12 User command menu. 6Ć20 parity. 3Ć34 editing variable declarations. common.

Index setting up a port. 6Ć20 stop bits. 6Ć20 X XOV file. GĆ4 GFKĆ0466L IndexĆ17 . GĆ4 XRF file.